IP-7900 - IP-7700 Seiko Colorpainter Manual

OKI Data Infotech Corporation CONFIDENTIAL
IP-7900/IP-7700
Solvent Ink Color Inkjet Printer
(ColorPainter H-104s/H-74s/H2-104s/H2-74s/H3-104s)
Maintenance Manual
U00117682709
U00117682700 January 2010

U00117682701 May 2010
U00117682702 December 2010
U00117682703 April 2011
U00117682704 September 2011
U00117682705 June 2012
U00117682706 February 2013
U00117682707 November 2014
U00117682708 July 2015
U00117682709 December 2015
Document scope
Application
This document applies to the models below.
- IP-7900-00/-01/-02/-03/-20-/-21/-22/-23
- IP-7700-00/-01/-02/-03/-20/-21
Printer models
When the information is common among the Printer models, it is described regardless of the
printer models. In such a case, the illustration mainly shows IP-7900.
When the information is common regardless of the Printers shipping destination, the trailing
numbers, -00/-01/-02/-03/-20/-21/-22/-23 are omitted.
PCB compatibility
This document was described based on that:
- PCB-ASSY-IPB3 and PCB-ASSY-IPB3-300
- PCB-ASSY-HCB1 and PCB-ASSY-HCB1S
So they are mentioned comprehensively in this document as PCB-ASSY-IPB3 and
PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
- PCB-ASSY-IPB3 collectively means PCB-ASSY-IPB3 and PCB-ASSY-IPB3-300.
- PCB-ASSY-HCB1 collectively means PCB-ASSY-HCB1 and PCB-ASSY-HCB1S.
Copyright 2015 OKI Data Infotech Corporation.

All right reserved.
The contents of this document may be subject to change without previous notice.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Overview of Maintenance Work Procedure

1.1 Overview of Maintenance Work Procedure ........................................ 1-2
1.2 Required Tools.................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 External View of Device and Name of Each Part................................ 1-5
1.3.1 Device and Name of Each Part (IP-7900-00/01) .............................................. 1-5
1.3.2 Device and Name of Each Part (IP-7900-02/03/20/21/22/23) .......................... 1-7
1.3.3 Device and Name of Each Part (IP-7700-00/01) .............................................. 1-9
1.3.4 Device and Name of Each Part (IP-7700-02/03/20/21) ...................................1-11
1.4 Maintenance Space .......................................................................... 1-13
Chapter 2 Periodic Maintenance

2.1 Daily Maintenance .............................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Cleaning ............................................................................................. 2-1
2.3 After Todays Operation ...................................................................... 2-1
2.4 Engine Firmware Variation ................................................................. 2-2
2.4.1 Proper Firmware Installation Depending on Printers Model ............................ 2-2
2.4.2 Proper firmware installation on PCB version and revision ............................... 2-3
2.5 Upgrading the Firmware ..................................................................... 2-4
2.5.1 Create upgrading CF card ................................................................................ 2-4
2.5.2 Upgrading with CF ............................................................................................ 2-5
2.5.3 Upgrading in Online ........................................................................................ 2-10
2.6 Uploading and Downloading ............................................................. 2-12
2.6.1 Log Acquisition ............................................................................................... 2-13
Chapter 3 Operations and Functions of Maintenance Mode Menu

3.1 Preface ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Operation in Maintenance Mode ........................................................ 3-2
3.2.1 Basic Menu Operations .................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.2 Entering the Password ..................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 Menu Tree .......................................................................................... 3-4
3.4 Menu Operations .............................................................................. 3-31
3.4.1 MEDIA REG .................................................................................................... 3-31
Contents - 1
3.4.2 M.ADV Menu (System firmware previous to the version 3.00) ...................... 3-33
3.4.3 PH.MAIN ......................................................................................................... 3-36
3.4.4 ADJUST Menu ................................................................................................ 3-42
3.4.5 SETUP ............................................................................................................ 3-47
3.4.6 HEATER ......................................................................................................... 3-50
3.4.7 TEST PRN ...................................................................................................... 3-51
3.4.8 MONITOR ....................................................................................................... 3-57
3.4.9 ACTUATOR .................................................................................................... 3-69
3.4.10 COUNTER ...................................................................................................... 3-81
3.4.11 Diagnostic Function (ELECT) ......................................................................... 3-86
3.4.12 PH COLOR ..................................................................................................... 3-92
3.5 Specific Operations........................................................................... 3-96
3.5.1 Language Setting Mode ................................................................................. 3-96
3.5.2 POC Skip Mode (Unavailable for Users) ........................................................ 3-97
3.5.3 Fatal Error Disable Mode (Unavailable for Users) .......................................... 3-97
3.6 Operation Guidances........................................................................ 3-98
3.6.1 Language Setting ........................................................................................... 3-98
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting (General)

4.1 Check Items for Errors........................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Actions for Operation Errors ............................................................... 4-2
4.3 Actions for Image Quality Errors ......................................................... 4-2
4.4 Check Items for Heater Errors ............................................................ 4-3
4.5 Checking Air Presence in the Circuit after Ink Charge ........................ 4-4
4.5.1 After Initial Charge is completed ....................................................................... 4-4
4.6 Removing Ink that Adhered Inside the Pump Tube ............................ 4-8
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Engine and USB Controller Sections)

5.1 Image Quality Failure ......................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Types of Error Messages .................................................................... 5-6
5.3 Operator Call Error Messages ............................................................ 5-7
5.3.1 Ink-Related Messages ...................................................................................... 5-7
5.3.2 Waste Ink Bottle Related Messages ............................................................... 5-12
5.3.3 Media Jam Related Messages ....................................................................... 5-14
5.3.4 Media-Related Messages ............................................................................... 5-19
5.3.5 Automatic Print Adjustment Related Messages (for IP-7900-22/23) .............. 5-22
5.3.6 Others ............................................................................................................. 5-23
Contents - 2
Table of Contents
5.4 Warning Messages ........................................................................... 5-26

5.4.1 Daily Maintenance Warning Message ............................................................ 5-26
5.4.2 Ink Supply Pump Life Warning Message........................................................ 5-27
5.4.3 Ink Supply Warning......................................................................................... 5-27
5.4.4 Cleaning Recommendation (for IP-7900-22/23)............................................. 5-27
5.4.5 Cleaning Warning ........................................................................................... 5-28
5.4.6 Sheet Mount Cleaning Execution Warning (for IP-7900-22/23) ..................... 5-28
5.4.7 Wiper Blades Life Warning (for IP-7900-22/23) ............................................. 5-29
5.4.8 Wiper Cleaning Liquid Warning (for IP-7900-22/23) ...................................... 5-29
5.4.9 Warning for Media Advance Value Adjustment Execution
(for IP-7900-22/23) ......................................................................................... 5-29
5.4.10 Bidirectional Print Position Adjustment Execution Warning
(for IP-7900-22/23) ......................................................................................... 5-30
5.4.11 Ink Level Warning ........................................................................................... 5-30
5.4.12 Take-up Timeout Warning ............................................................................... 5-30
5.5 System Error Messages ................................................................... 5-32
5.5.1 System Error 100X: CPU Exception ............................................................... 5-34
5.5.2 System Error 11XX: Hardware Mismatch Error .............................................. 5-35
5.5.3 System Error 1200: FPGA(ATG RSM) Load Error ......................................... 5-35
5.5.4 System Error 130X: CRG-FFC Connection Error........................................... 5-36
5.5.5 System Error 1310: FPGA(PTG) Load Error .................................................. 5-38
5.5.6 System Error 1320: Data Transfer Error from FPGA-RSM to FPGA-PTG ..... 5-40
5.5.7 System Error 1400: PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Connection Error ............................... 5-41
5.5.8 System Error 1410: FPGA(ABC) Load Error .................................................. 5-42
5.5.9 System Error 1500: PCB-ASSY-TRC2 Connection Error............................... 5-43
5.5.10 System Error 1600: RSM Register Read/Write Error ..................................... 5-43
5.5.11 System Error 1610: Flash Check Sum Error .................................................. 5-44
5.5.12 System Error 1620: PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Initialization Error ................................ 5-44
5.5.13 System Error 1630: Band Memory Read/write Error ...................................... 5-45
5.5.14 System Error 1640: USB Chip Register Read/write Error .............................. 5-45
5.5.15 System Error 1650: EEPROM Initialization Check Error ................................ 5-46
5.5.16 System Error 1660: RSM Mask Memory Read/write Error ............................ 5-46
5.5.17 System Error 1670: ATG Register Read/write Error ....................................... 5-47
5.5.18 System Error 1700: ABC Register Read/write Error....................................... 5-47
5.5.19 System Error 1800: PTG Register R/W Error ................................................. 5-48
5.5.20 System Error 190x: Power Supply Unit Error ................................................. 5-50
5.5.21 System Error 1a00 to 1a19: Carriage Power Error ........................................ 5-54
5.5.22 System Error 1a20: Wrinkle Sensor Installation Error .................................... 5-57
5.5.23 System Error 1b00: Heater Power Connection Error ..................................... 5-58
5.5.24 System Error 1c0X: Thermistor Connection Error .......................................... 5-59
5.5.25 System Error 1d00: Printer Size Error ............................................................ 5-61
5.5.26 System Error 1e00: Cap Correction Value Error ............................................ 5-62
5.5.27 System Error 1e10: Platen Height Unmeasurement Error ............................. 5-63
5.5.28 System Error 1e20: Wiping Height Unmeasurement Error ............................ 5-64
5.5.29 System Error 2010: Long-term Storage Error ................................................. 5-65
Contents - 3
5.5.30 System Error 203X: Life-limited Part Replacement ........................................ 5-67

5.5.31 System Error 2100: EEPROM I/O Error ......................................................... 5-68
5.5.32 System Error 2200: Data Path Time-out ........................................................ 5-68
5.5.33 System Error 2210: USB DMA Time-out ........................................................ 5-69
5.5.34 System Error 230X: Suction Fan Error ........................................................... 5-70
5.5.35 System Error 2310: Home Position Sensor Error........................................... 5-71
5.5.36 System Error 2320: Wiper Position Sensor Error ........................................... 5-72
5.5.37 System Error 2340: Capping Unit Sensor Error ............................................. 5-73
5.5.38 System Error 2400: Environmental Temperature Thermistor Error ................ 5-74
5.5.39 System Error 250X: Media Heater Thermistor Error ...................................... 5-75
5.5.40 System Error 251X: Media Heater Error (High temperature) ......................... 5-77
5.5.41 System Error 252X: Media Heater Error (Target temperature not reached) .. 5-78
5.5.42 System Error 253X: Media Heater Error (No interrupt) .................................. 5-80
5.5.43 System Error 260X: Subcartridge Sensor Error ............................................. 5-81
5.5.44 System Error 261x: Subcartridge Full Sensor Error ....................................... 5-83
5.5.45 System Error 262x: Subcartridge Empty Sensor Error................................... 5-85
5.5.46 System Error 263X: Subcartridge Information Error....................................... 5-87
5.5.47 System Error 270X: Ink Supply Pump Sensor Error ...................................... 5-88
5.5.48 System Error 280X: Ink Usage Upper-limit Error ........................................... 5-89
5.5.49 System Error 2900: Take-up Motor Overcurrent ............................................ 5-90
5.5.50 System Error 2920: Unrolling Motor Overcurrent ........................................... 5-91
5.5.51 System Error 293X: Suction Pump Motor Overcurrent .................................. 5-92
5.5.52 System Error 2a0X: Servo Error ..................................................................... 5-93
5.5.53 System Error 2b00: FIRE END Detection Error ............................................. 5-96
5.5.54 System Error 2d0X: Automatic Print Adjustment Calibration Error ................. 5-98
5.5.55 System error 2e0X: Wrinkle Sensor Error ...................................................... 5-99
5.5.56 System Error 301X: CRG-FFC Connection Error......................................... 5-101
5.5.57 System Error 3020: RSM-PTG FIFO Connection Error ............................... 5-103
5.5.58 System Error 3100: Edge sensor Error ........................................................ 5-105
5.5.59 System Error 3110: Carriage Upper Limit Sensor Error ............................... 5-107
5.5.60 System Error 3120: Carriage Up/Down Motor Interruption Error ................. 5-109
5.5.61 System Error 3130: Gap Sensor Error .......................................................... 5-111
5.5.62 System Error 3140: Head Cooling Fan Error ................................................5-113
5.5.63 System Error 320X: Head Drive Voltage Error ..............................................5-115
5.5.64 System Error 330X: No Head ........................................................................5-118
5.5.65 System Error 340X: Head Information Error ................................................ 5-120
5.5.66 System Error 350X: Head Thermistor Error ................................................. 5-122
5.5.67 System Error 360X: Head Heater Error (High Temperature) ....................... 5-125
5.5.68 System Error 361X: Head Heater Error (Target Temperature Not Reached) .. 5-127
5.5.69 System Error 4XXX: Program Error (Mechanical Control-related) ............... 5-129
5.5.70 System Error 5XXX: Program Error (Interface Related) .............................. 5-131
5.6 If No Error Message Appears ......................................................... 5-132
5.6.1 No Message Appears ................................................................................... 5-132
5.7 Others............................................................................................. 5-133
5.7.1 Abnormality date or time ............................................................................... 5-133
Contents - 4
Table of Contents
Chapter 6 Parts Replacement (Disassembly/Reassembly)

6.1 How to Read Disassembly/Reassembly Procedures ......................... 6-1
6.2 Part Names ........................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1 Part Names and Layout .................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.2 Operation Panel ................................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.3 Exterior Parts .................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.4 Dolly .................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.2.5 Drive ................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.2.6 Platen Area ....................................................................................................... 6-7
6.2.7 Paper Guide...................................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.8 Media Drying Fan ............................................................................................. 6-9
6.2.9 Roll Feed Take-up Unit ................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.10 Media Cooling ................................................................................................. 6-15
6.2.11 Y Drive ............................................................................................................ 6-16
6.2.12 Board Area ...................................................................................................... 6-17
6.2.13 Carriage .......................................................................................................... 6-18
6.2.14 Ink Box ............................................................................................................ 6-19
6.2.15 Subcartridge Box ............................................................................................ 6-20
6.2.16 Ink Flow System ............................................................................................. 6-21
6.2.17 Capping Unit ................................................................................................... 6-22
6.2.18 Spittoon Unit ................................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.19 Wiping Unit ..................................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.20 Waste Liquid ................................................................................................... 6-24
6.2.21 Jigs ................................................................................................................. 6-24
6.2.22 Scroller ............................................................................................................ 6-25
6.2.23 Mesh Printing Kit (Option) .............................................................................. 6-25
6.2.24 Maintenance Parts .......................................................................................... 6-25
6.3 Disassembly and Reassembly of Exterior Parts ............................... 6-26
6.3.1 COVER(HV)FML and COVER(HV)FTL .......................................................... 6-26
6.3.2 COVER(HV)FMR and COVER(HV)FTR ........................................................ 6-27
6.3.3 COVER(HV)FBR-R ........................................................................................ 6-27
6.3.4 COVER(HV)RST ............................................................................................ 6-28
6.3.5 COVER(HV)RSB ............................................................................................ 6-29
6.3.6 COVER(HV104)YRR ...................................................................................... 6-30
6.3.7 COVER(HV104)YRR-B .................................................................................. 6-31
6.3.8 COVER(HV104)RBR ...................................................................................... 6-31
6.3.9 IP-7900: COVER (HV104) YRC / IP-7700:COVER(HV74)YRC .................... 6-32
6.3.10 IP-7900: Pinch-Arm-Guard (104) / IP-7700:Pinch-Arm-Guard (74) ............... 6-33
6.3.11 IP-7900: COVER (HV104) YRC-B / IP-7700:COVER(HV74)YRC-B ............. 6-34
6.3.12 COVER(HV)FBL ............................................................................................. 6-35
6.3.13 COVER(HV)LST ............................................................................................. 6-35
6.3.14 COVER(HV)LSB ............................................................................................. 6-36
6.3.15 COVER(HV)SBF ............................................................................................ 6-37
Contents - 5
6.3.16 COVER(HV104)YRL ...................................................................................... 6-38

6.3.17 COVER(HV104)YRL-B ................................................................................... 6-38
6.3.18 IP-7900: AC (HV104) ASSY / IP-7700:AC(HV74)ASSY, One-way Hinge ...... 6-39
6.3.19 Operation Panel (OPEPANE-UNIT) ............................................................... 6-41
6.3.20 MICRO SWITCH HV (interlock)...................................................................... 6-42
6.3.21 INKBOX COVER(HV) and INKBOX REARCOVER(HV) ................................ 6-44
6.3.22 TRAY(WI)-TUBE(WI) and SWITCH(WI) ......................................................... 6-45
6.3.23 BLOWER FAN ................................................................................................ 6-46
6.4 Disassembly and Reassembly of Y Drive Parts ................................ 6-47
6.4.1 Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY ................................................................................ 6-47
6.4.2 TIMING-BELT-Y, Y-DRIVE-PULLY-ASSY, and Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY....... 6-49
6.4.3 IP-7900: SUS-BELT-104 / IP-7700: SUS-BELT-74 ........................................ 6-66
6.4.4 IP-7900: T-FENCE-104 / IP-7700: T-FENCE-74 ............................................ 6-68
6.4.5 IP-7900: CARRIAGE CABLE HV104 and CABLE CARRIER,
IP-7700: CARRIAGE CABLE HV74 and CABLE CARRIER74 ...................... 6-81
6.4.6 PHOTO INTERRUPTER (home position sensor) .......................................... 6-92
6.4.7 SCREW-CAP .................................................................................................. 6-93
6.4.8 FASTENING BRACKET, FFC......................................................................... 6-94
6.4.9 IP-7900: ROBOT CABLE HV104 / IP-7700: ROBOT CABLE HV74 .............. 6-96
6.5 Disassembly and Reassembly of X Drive Parts.............................. 6-102
6.5.1 PAPER-FEED-MOTOR-ASSY, DECELERATION-BELT,
and X-PULLY-ASSY ..................................................................................... 6-102
6.5.2 Media detect and Line sensor SIIT (media discharge sensor) ..................... 6-104
6.5.3 Media detect and Line sensor SIIT (media feed sensor) ............................. 6-105
6.5.4 FAN 4 (suction fan) ....................................................................................... 6-106
6.5.5 PINCH-ROLLER-ASSY ................................................................................ 6-107
6.5.6 PINCH-ROLLER and PINCH-SPRING .........................................................6-110
6.5.7 IP-7900:GRIT-ROLLER-104 / IP-7700:GRIT-ROLLER-74 ............................ 6-111
6.5.8 PHOTO INTERRUPTER (grip sensor ) .........................................................6-113
6.5.9 PINCH KNOB SET ........................................................................................6-114
6.5.10 PINCH ARM SET ...........................................................................................6-118
6.5.11 PINCH-SPRING ............................................................................................6-119
6.6 Disassembly and Reassembly of Electrical Parts ........................... 6-120
6.6.1 PCB-ASSY-ACT1 (actuator board), PCB-ASSY-IPB3 (main board),
PCB-ASSY-TRC2, POWER SUPPLY (24V), and POWER SUPPLY (38V) . 6-120
6.6.2 FAN2 (electrical unit cooling fan) .................................................................. 6-122
6.6.3 IC(EEPROM) ................................................................................................ 6-123
6.6.4 Setting Procedures when Replacing the Main Board (IPB3) ....................... 6-124
6.7 Disassembly and Reassembly of Carriage Assembly
and Head Parts............................................................................... 6-127
6.7.1 Cover (CarriageUnder) ASSY and HC ASSY ............................................... 6-127
6.7.2 HEAD CABLE HV ......................................................................................... 6-129
6.7.3 Ink Tube ........................................................................................................ 6-131
Contents - 6
Table of Contents
6.7.4 SENSOR(THICKNESS)MAINTENANCE ASSY and

SENSOR(EDGE)MAINTENANCE ............................................................... 6-132
6.7.5 PCB-ASSY-HCB1 (Carriage board) ............................................................. 6-137
6.7.6 Head Assembly ............................................................................................. 6-142
6.7.7 Encoder Sensor(SIIT) ................................................................................... 6-145
6.7.8 PHOTO SENSOR5 (carriage up sensor) ..................................................... 6-151
6.7.9 Motor(HeadBase)ASSY and Timing Belt ...................................................... 6-152
6.7.10 CARRIAGE-PLATE-ASS, SPRING-ARM-STOPPER,
and SPRING-CARRIAGE ............................................................................. 6-153
6.7.11 PIEZO-SENSOR-L-ASSY (only for IP-7900-22/23) ..................................... 6-155
6.7.12 PIEZO-SENSOR-R-ASSY (only for IP-7900-22/23)..................................... 6-159
6.7.13 PCB-ASSY-PZF1 .......................................................................................... 6-162
6.8 Disassembly and Reassembly of Wiping Unit Part ......................... 6-163
6.8.1 WIPING-UNIT ............................................................................................... 6-163
6.8.2 SWITCH(WIPE) (wiper home position sensor) ............................................ 6-164
6.8.3 WIPE LOWER ASSY .................................................................................... 6-165
6.8.4 MOTOR(WIPE) (wiping motor) ..................................................................... 6-169
6.9 Disassembly and Reassembly of Cap Unit Part ............................. 6-170
6.9.1 CAPPING-STATION-HV ............................................................................... 6-170
6.9.2 MOTOR(CAP)ASSY-HV ............................................................................... 6-172
6.9.3 SOLENOID-ASSY(HV) (air release solenoid), RUBBER(VALVE-HV) ......... 6-173
6.9.4 Torque Limiter ............................................................................................... 6-176
6.9.5 PUMP-F-ASSY(HV) ...................................................................................... 6-177
6.9.6 Joint (CAP Sa), CAP-HV .............................................................................. 6-179
6.9.7 CAP-ASSY(MW) (only for IP-7900-22/23) ................................................... 6-184
6.9.8 PIN(FLOAT) .................................................................................................. 6-189
6.9.9 LEVER(CAP)-HV-ASSY ............................................................................... 6-190
6.9.10 BEARING(10B) ............................................................................................. 6-191
6.10 Disassembly and Reassembly of Ink Box Part ............................... 6-193
6.10.1 INKBOX-UNIT(HV) ....................................................................................... 6-193
6.10.2 SUPPLY PUMP (ink supply pump) ............................................................... 6-194
6.10.3 PUMP TUBE ASSY(HV) ............................................................................... 6-196
6.10.4 PCB-ASSY-INK4 ........................................................................................... 6-197
6.10.5 PHOTO SENSOR5 (ink cover sensor) ......................................................... 6-198
6.11 Disassembly and Reassembly of Subcartridge Unit Parts .............. 6-199
6.11.1 SUBTANK BOX ASSY .................................................................................. 6-199
6.11.2 INKBOX POSITIONING PIN and PCB-ASSY-INK4 ..................................... 6-201
6.11.3 PHOTO SENSOR4 (subcartridge empty sensor, subcartridge full sensor) . 6-202
6.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR5 (subcartridge cover sensor) .......................................... 6-203
6.12 Disassembly and Reassembly of Paper Guide
and Platen Area Parts..................................................................... 6-204
6.12.1 IP-7900: FRONT-PG-ASSY(104) and GUIDE-CUTTER(104) /
IP-7700: FRONT-PG-ASSY(74) and GUIDE-CUTTER(74) ......................... 6-204
Contents - 7
6.12.2 IP-7900: REAR PG(104)-ASSY / IP-7700: REAR PG(74)-ASSY ................ 6-205

6.12.3 PLATEN ASSY.............................................................................................. 6-206
6.12.4 EDGE-GUARD-MK and STOPPER(EG) ...................................................... 6-208
6.12.5 CASE(SPIT-AREA)ASSY (spittoon case) and
SWITCH (SPIT) (spittoon detection sensor) ................................................ 6-209
6.12.6 IP-7900: NET-PGR-104 / IP-7700: NET-PGR-74 ..........................................6-211
6.12.7 IP-7900: NET-PGF-104 / IP-7700: NET-PGF-74.......................................... 6-212
6.13 Disassembly and Reassembly of Feed and Take-up Parts ............ 6-214
6.13.1 Disassembly and Reassembly of Feed and Take-up Parts
(IP-7900-00/01) ............................................................................................ 6-215
(IP-7900-02/03/20/21/22/23) ........................................................................ 6-235
(IP-7700-00/01) ............................................................................................ 6-251
(IP-7700-02/03/20/21) .................................................................................. 6-266
6.14 Disassembly and Reassembly of Media Drying Fan Parts ............. 6-277
6.14.1 IP-7900: AFTER-FAN-ASSY(104) / IP-7700: AFTER-FAN-ASSY(74) ......... 6-277
6.14.2 FANSLIT-FS, BLOWER3-FS, CAP-LOUVERb-FS,
and FAN3 (media cooling fan) ...................................................................... 6-278
6.15 Disassembly and Reassembly of PCB-ASSY-ADJ1 ....................... 6-279
6.15.1 Disassembly and Reassembly ..................................................................... 6-279
6.15.2 Cleaning the Lens Surface of the PCB-ASSY-ADJ1 Sensor........................ 6-282
Chapter 7 Adjustment
7.1 Adjusting the SUS-BELT-104 Tension or Adjusting the
SUS-BELT-74 Tension ........................................................................ 7-2
7.2 Adjusting the Tension of the TIMING-BELT-Y ..................................... 7-4
7.3 Adjusting the Tension of the DECELERATION-BELT ......................... 7-8
7.4 Adjusting the Height of the Wiping Unit .............................................. 7-9
7.5 Positioning the Wiping Unit ............................................................... 7-13
7.6 Correcting the Cap Position .............................................................. 7-14
7.7 Positioning the Capping Unit ............................................................ 7-16
7.8 Adjusting the Tilt of the Head Base .................................................. 7-20
7.9 Adjusting the Platen Flatness ........................................................... 7-22
7.10 Initial Ink Charge and Ink Purge ....................................................... 7-30
7.10.1 Initial Ink Charge ............................................................................................. 7-30
7.10.2 Purging Ink...................................................................................................... 7-32
7.11 Checking Nozzles ............................................................................. 7-34
7.11.1 Printing the CHECK NOZZLE ......................................................................... 7-34
Contents - 8
Table of Contents
7.11.2 Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 7-35

7.11.3 Fillcap ............................................................................................................. 7-36
7.11.4 Installing and Relocating the Printer ............................................................... 7-37
7.12 Print Head Alignment ........................................................................ 7-38
7.12.1 Print Head Alignment to Referenced Position ................................................ 7-40
7.12.2 Print Head X and Tilt Alignments at Front Side .............................................. 7-45
7.12.3 Print Head X and Tilt Alignments at Rear Side ............................................... 7-46
7.13 Adjusting the Height of the Gap Sensor ........................................... 7-47
7.14 Correcting the Head Position (Main Scanning Direction).................. 7-52
7.15 Correcting the Right and Left Print Head Positions .......................... 7-55
7.16 Correcting the Bidirectional Print Positions (Row L) ......................... 7-58
7.17 Correcting the Bidirectional Print Positions (Row R)......................... 7-61
7.18 Correcting the Media Advance Value................................................ 7-62
7.19 Correcting the Edge Sensor Position................................................ 7-64
7.20 Adjusting the Roll Feed and Take-up Reel Units .............................. 7-66
7.20.1 Adjusting the Roll Feed and Take-up Reel Units (IP-7900) ............................ 7-67
7.20.2 Adjusting the Roll Feed and Take-up Reel Units (IP-7700) ............................ 7-70
7.20.3 Adjusting the Height of the Peel Roller ........................................................... 7-74
7.21 Adjusting the Feed and Take-up Sensors ......................................... 7-77
7.21.1 Adjusting the Media End Sensor .................................................................... 7-78
7.21.2 Adjusting the Media Slack Sensor .................................................................. 7-80
7.21.3 Adjusting the Take-up Sensor (Upper and Lower Limits) ............................... 7-82
7.22 Adjusting the height of Shield(Air-L) and Shield(Air-R) ..................... 7-84
7.23 Increasing Pinch-Roller-Assys Pressure .......................................... 7-87
7.24 Greasing up Carriage Elevating System ........................................... 7-91
7.25 Correcting the wiping Position
(for all printers except the IP-7900-22/23) ........................................ 7-93
7.26 Correcting the Wiping Position (for the IP-7900-22/23) .................... 7-96
7.27 Adjusting the SWITCH(WIPE),H3 Position ....................................... 7-99
Chapter 8 Performance Description

8.1 Printer Performance Overview ........................................................... 8-2
8.2 Media Feed System............................................................................ 8-3
8.3 Carriage Operation System ................................................................ 8-6
8.4 Ink Delivery System ............................................................................ 8-8
8.5 Print-Related Functions .................................................................... 8-12
Contents - 9
8.6 Head driving principle ....................................................................... 8-15

8.7 Print Mode ........................................................................................ 8-17
8.8 Electrical Configuration..................................................................... 8-23
8.8.1 Overall Configuration ...................................................................................... 8-23
8.8.2 Description of Electrical Section ..................................................................... 8-24
8.9 Engine Control Firmware .................................................................. 8-35
8.9.1 Function Block ................................................................................................ 8-35
8.9.2 Performance Description ................................................................................ 8-36
8.10 Power Supply Unit ............................................................................ 8-37
8.10.1 Electric Specifications ..................................................................................... 8-37
8.10.2 Connector Specifications ................................................................................ 8-38
8.10.3 DC Power Supply Configuration ..................................................................... 8-40
8.10.4 Upon Disconnection of Interlock ..................................................................... 8-42
8.10.5 Power Output Voltage Variability .................................................................... 8-43
8.10.6 Power Supply Fan .......................................................................................... 8-43
8.10.7 Protection Circuit ............................................................................................ 8-44
8.11 Media Heater Section ....................................................................... 8-45
8.11.1 Configuration .................................................................................................. 8-45
8.11.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 8-46
Appendix 1 IP-7900 Wiring Diagram ............................................................. A-2

Appendix 1.1 IP-7900-00/01 Wiring Diagram .................................................... A-2
Appendix 1.1.1 Power & InterLock Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-00/01) ............................... A-2
Appendix 1.1.2 Carriage & IPB3 I / F Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-00/01) ........................... A-3
Appendix 1.1.3 Blower & Fan Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-00/01) ...................................... A-4
Appendix 1.1.4 Actuator Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-00/01)............................................... A-5
Appendix 1.1.5 TakeUp UNIT & Feed UNIT Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-00/01) ................. A-6
Appendix 1.1.6 INK Cartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-00/01) ...................................... A-7
Appendix 1.1.7 Subcartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-00/01)........................................ A-8
Appendix 1.2 IP-7900-02/03/20/21 Wiring Diagram .......................................... A-9
Appendix 1.2.1 Power & InterLock Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21) ..................... A-9
Appendix 1.2.2 Carriage & IPB3 I / F Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21) ............... A-10
Appendix 1.2.3 Blower & Fan Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21)........................... A-11
Appendix 1.2.4 Actuator Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21) ................................... A-12
Appendix 1.2.5 TakeUp UNIT & Feed UNIT Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21) ..... A-13
Appendix 1.2.6 INK Cartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21) .......................... A-14
Appendix 1.2.7 Subcartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21) ............................ A-15
Appendix 1.3 IP-7900-22/23 Wiring Diagram .................................................. A-16
Appendix 1.3.1 Input power & Heater Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-22/23) ........................ A-16
Appendix 1.3.2 Power & InterLock & Carriage Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-22/23) ........... A-17
Appendix 1.3.3 Carriage & IPB3 I/F Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-22/23) ........................... A-18
Appendix 1.3.4 Blower & Fan Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-22/23) .................................... A-19
Appendix 1.3.5 Actuator Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-22/23)............................................. A-20
Contents - 10
Table of Contents
Appendix 1.3.6 TakeUp UNIT & Feed UNIT Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-22/23) ............... A-21
Appendix 1.3.7 INK Cartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-22/23) .................................... A-22
Appendix 1.3.8 SubTank Cartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-22/23) ............................ A-23
Appendix 2 IP-7700 Wiring Diagram ........................................................... A-24

Appendix 2.1.1 Power & InterLock Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-00/01) ............................. A-24
Appendix 2.1.2 Carriage & IPB3 I / F Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-00/01) ......................... A-25
Appendix 2.1.3 Blower & Fan Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-00/01) .................................... A-26
Appendix 2.1.4 Actuator Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-00/01)............................................. A-27
Appendix 2.1.5 TakeUp UNIT & Feed UNIT Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-00/01) ............... A-28
Appendix 2.1.6 INK Cartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-00/01) .................................... A-29
Appendix 2.1.7 Subcartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-00/01)...................................... A-30
Appendix 2.2.1 Power & InterLock Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-02/03/20/21) ................... A-31
Appendix 2.2.2 Carriage & IPB3 I / F Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-02/03/20/21) ............... A-32
Appendix 2.2.3 Blower & Fan Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-02/03/20/21)........................... A-33
Appendix 2.2.4 Actuator Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-02/03/20/21) ................................... A-34
Appendix 2.2.5 TakeUp UNIT & Feed UNIT Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-02/03/20/21) ..... A-35
Appendix 2.2.6 INK Cartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-02/03/20/21) .......................... A-36
Appendix 2.2.7 Subcartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-02/03/20/21) ............................ A-37
Appendix 3 Power Supply Schematic Diagram ........................................... A-38

Appendix 3.1 Power Supply Schematic Diagram
(IP-7900-00/01, IP-7700-00/01) ................................................. A-38
Appendix 3.2 Power Supply Schematic Diagram
(IP-7900-02/03/20/21, IP-7700-02/03/20/21) ............................. A-40
Appendix 3.3 Power Supply Schematic Diagram (IP-7900-22/23) .................. A-42
Appendix 4 Instruction to Replace Print Heads ........................................... A-44
Contents - 11
Figure
Figure 1.1 Printer Front View (IP-7900-00/01) ................................................1-5
Figure 1.2 Printer Rear View (IP-7900-00/01) .................................................1-6
Figure 1.3 Printer Front View (IP-7900-02/03/20/21/22/23) .............................1-7
Figure 1.4 Printer Rear View (IP-7900-02/0320/21/22/23) ..............................1-8
Figure 1.5 Printer Front View (IP-7700-00/01) ................................................1-9
Figure 1.6 Printer Rear View (IP-7700-00/01) ...............................................1-10
Figure 1.7 Printer Front View (IP-7700-02/03-02/03/20/21)........................... 1-11
Figure 1.8 Printer Rear View (IP-7700-02/03-02/03/20/21) ...........................1-12
Figure 1.9 Maintenance Space .....................................................................1-13
Figure 6.1 Part names and Layout (IP-7900) ..................................................6-2
Figure 6.2 Part names and Layout (IP-7700) ..................................................6-3
Figure 8.1 Outline Diagram of Printer Operation .............................................8-2
Figure 8.2 Mechanism Diagram of Media Feed System (X-axis).....................8-3
Figure 8.3 Mechanism Diagram of Media Feed System (Y-axis) .....................8-3
Figure 8.4 Ink System Outline Block Diagram .................................................8-8
Figure 8.5 Conceptual Diagram of Ink System ................................................8-8
Figure 8.6 Overall Electrical Configuration ....................................................8-23
Figure 8.7 Image Data Path ..........................................................................8-26
Figure 8.8 Block Diagram of USB/Engine Firmware Functions .....................8-35
Table
Table 1-1 Required Tool List (1/2) ...................................................................1-3
Table 1-2 Required Tool List (2/2) ...................................................................1-4
Contents - 12
Chapter 1 Overview of Maintenance Work

Procedure
This chapter explains information you must know when conducting the primary
maintenance work for this device, including operation procedures, required tools and the
name of each part.
1-1
1.1 Overview of Maintenance Work Procedure

Maintenance work refers to either the periodic inspection maintenance based on a
maintenance contract, or maintenance work conducted only at time an error occurs.
Figure shows the operation flow branched into the two cases.
Start
Periodic inspection/
Periodic inspection When an error occurs Maintenance to cope
maintenance with an error
Check the status related to this device Check details of the problem and the
(including problems and complaints) circumstances that existed when the problem
occurred
Check and clean parts. Conduct troubleshooting

=> Chapter 2 - If a USB controller error is suspected
Replace parts if necessary => Chapter 5
=> Chapter 6 - If the error is a general failure or an image
Or make adjustments quality failure
=> Chapter 7 => Chapter 4
Printing to check whether the device works Replace abnormal parts => Chapter 6
correctly. Make adjustments if necessary => Chapter 7
End
Make sure that the problem has been
eliminated
End
1-2
1.2 Required Tools

Table 1-1 shows tools and finders required for the maintenance work.
Table 1-1 Required Tool List (1/2)
Name Q'ty Remarks

Phillips-head screwdriver (2 bits) 250 mm 1 Commercial item
Phillips-head screwdriver (1 bit) 250 mm 1 Commercial item
For installing the head unit (5 kg). Commercial
Phillips-head torque screwdriver (2 bits) 1
item.
Stabilizing driver (2 bits) 1 Commercial item
Flathead screwdriver 250 mm 1 For removing E ring. Commercial item.
Flathead precision screwdriver 1 For removing E ring. Commercial item.
Hexagonal wrenches (3) 1 Commercial item
Hexagonal wrenches (2.5) 1 Commercial item
A pair of pliers or long-nose pliers 1 For installing E ring. Commercial item.
Nipper 1 Commercial item
For adjusting the roll feed unit and take-up reel
Metal bench rule (with resolution complies
1 unit. With 300 mm or more length.
with 1st class JIS)
Commercial item
Tube cutter 1 Commercial item
Utility knife 1 Commercial item
Peak staff microscope
Magnifier with measuring scale
1 100x No. 2008-100
(Model: M830-S) or equivalent
(Scale: Standard)
For checking installation environments of the
Thermohygrometer 1
device. Commercial item.
Dow Corning Asia Ltd. model EM-60L
Grease for the synchronous belt and
1 or equivalent (silicon grease can be used for
decelerating belt
substitution)
CF-Card for rewriting the engine firmware
1
ROM
For protecting hands from ink splotch
Glove or fingertip 1 set
Commercial item
Lint-free paper to wipe out ink smearing.
Cleaning paper As required
Kimwipe or equivalent
For cleaning the bottom surface of the carriages
Cleaning stick As required
front part
1-3
Table 1-2 Required Tool List (2/2)
Name Q'ty Remarks
Ethanol As required
500 g (4.9 N) Spring tension gauge 1 - For adjusting the tension of the SUS belt (push)
- For adjusting the tension of the X motor belt (pull)
10 kg (98 N) Spring tension gauge 1
- For adjusting the tension of the Y motor belt (pull)
Gap gauge 1 0.2 to 0.5 mm
- For adjusting the platens squareness
Jig to adjust the platens height and
1 - For adjusting the platens height (levelness)
squareness
- For adjusting the wiping units height
Jig to adjust the carriage (head base)
2 To adjust the carriages height
height
Jig to adjust the print head 1 set For the print head x and tilt alignments
Long pin for the print head alignment at the
PIN(HeadHolder)L 1
reference position
Short pin for the print head alignment at the
PIN(HeadHolder)S 1
reference position
PIN(AdjustHEAD) 2 Pin and spring for the print head x and tilt alignment
BOX(lever) 1
Lever(Adjust) 1
Flathead screwdriver (short) 1
Phillips-head screwdriver (long) 1
Offset ratchet set
1 set For removing the screws securing the Y rail cover
DR6 (Engineer)
Cap cleaning liquid 1 set Daily maintenance kit
Wiper cleaning liquid 1 set Daily maintenance kit
Spittoon absorber liquid 1 set Daily maintenance kit
Cleaning roller 1 set Daily maintenance kit
Cleaning stick 1 set Daily maintenance kit
Dropper 1 set Daily maintenance kit
Storage liquid pack 8
Dummy subcartridge 8
Cleaning liquid pack 8
Circuit tester 1 For measuring AC/DC voltage and resistance
Scroller height adjustment tool SIIT(D) 1 For horizontalizing feed and take-up units
T18R-100, HellermannTyton Co., Ltd.
Insulock tie As required
or equivalent product
1-4
1.3 External View of Device and Name of Each Part

Figures show the external view of this device and the names of parts.
1.3.1 Device and Name of Each Part (IP-7900-00/01)
(6) (5)
(4) (3)
(2)
(1)
(7) (12)
(9) (8) (10)

(11)
(8) (9)
(9)
(16)
(15)
(14)
(13)
(1) Operation panel (9) Caster

(2) Capping cover (10) Scroller
(3) Media drying fan (11) Waste ink bottle
(4) Protection bar (12) Pressure control knob
(5) Front cover (13) Take-up reel switch
(6) Wiping cover (14) Feed switch
(7) Ink box cover (15) Take-up direction switch
(8) Tension bar guide (16) Footswitch connector
Figure 1.1 Printer Front View (IP-7900-00/01)
1-5
(22)
(25)
(27)
(23)
(24)
(26)
(17) (18) (19) (20) (21)
(17) USB connector (23) Take-up reel switch

(18) Printer power switch (24) Media feed switch
(19) Heater power switch (25) Pressure control knob
(20) Heater power inlet (26) Scroller
(21) Printer power inlet (27) Peel roller
(22) Subcartridge cover
Figure 1.2 Printer Rear View (IP-7900-00/01)
1-6
1.3.2 Device and Name of Each Part (IP-7900-02/03/20/21/22/23)
(6) (5)
(4) (3)
(2)
(1)
(7)
(12)
(16) (8)
(9) (10)
(11)
(8) (9)
(9)
(15)
(14)
(13)
(1) Operation panel (9) Caster

(2) Capping cover (10) Scroller
(3) Media drying fan (11) Waste ink bottle
(4) Protection bar (12) Pressure control knob
(5) Front cover (13) Media advance/rewind switch
(6) Wiping cover (14) Take-up direction switch
(7) Ink box cover (15) Footswitch connector
(8) Tension bar guide (16) Waste liquid bottle (for wiper cleaning liquid)
* Only with the IP-7900-22/23
Figure 1.3 Printer Front View (IP-7900-02/03/20/21/22/23)
1-7
(22)
(24)
(26)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(23)
(17) (18) (19) (20) (21)
(17) USB connector (22) Subcartridge cover

(18) Printer power switch (23) Media advance/rewind switch
(19) Heater power switch (24) Pressure control knob
(20) Heater power inlet (25) Scroller
(21) Printer power inlet (26) Peel roller
Figure 1.4 Printer Rear View (IP-7900-02/0320/21/22/23)
1-8
1.3.3 Device and Name of Each Part (IP-7700-00/01)
(14)
(6)
(9) (1)
(8)
(2)
(5)
(4) (13)
(3)
(7)
(3)
(4)
(4)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(1) Operation panel (8) Capping cover

(2) Ink box cover (9) Wiping cover
(3) Tension bar guide (10) Take-up direction switch
(4) Caster (11) Media feed switch (White)
(5) Pressure control knob (12) Take-up reel switch (Black)
(6) Front cover (13) Media drying fan
(7) Waste ink bottle (14) Protection bar
Figure 1.5 Printer Front View (IP-7700-00/01)
1-9
(17)
(15)
(16)
(18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24)
(15) Pressure control knob (20) USB connector

(16) Peel roller (21) Printer power switch
(17) Subcartridge cover (22) Heater power switch
(18) Take-up switch (White) (23) Heater power inlet
(19) Feed switch (Black) (24) Printer power inlet
Figure 1.6 Printer Rear View (IP-7700-00/01)
1-10
1.3.4 Device and Name of Each Part (IP-7700-02/03/20/21)
(14)
(6)
(1)
(9)
(13)
(8)
(5)
(7)
(2) (3)
(4) (4)
(3)
(10)
(12)
(11)
(4)
(15)
(1) Operation panel (9) Wiping cover

(2) Ink box cover (10) Take-up direction switch
(3) Tension bar guide (11) Media advance/rewind switch
(4) Caster (12) Scroller flange
(5) Pressure control knob (13) Media drying fan
(6) Front cover (14) Protection bar
(7) Waste ink bottle (15) Scroller shaft
(8) Capping cover
Figure 1.7 Printer Front View (IP-7700-02/03-02/03/20/21)
1-11
(21)
(23)
(25)
(20) (17) (18) (16)
(22) (24)
(19)
(27)
(16) Printer power inlet (22) Media advance/rewind switch

(17) Printer power switch (23) Pressure control knob
(18) Heater power inlet (24) Scroller flange
(19) Heater power switch (25) Peel roller
(20) USB connector (26) Scroller shaft
(21) Subcartridge cover
Figure 1.8 Printer Rear View (IP-7700-02/03-02/03/20/21)
1-12
1.4 Maintenance Space

Figure shows the working space required to carry out maintenance work on this device.
1,000
1500 1500
Front side
1,000
Vertical: 2200 (unit: mm)
Figure 1.9 Maintenance Space
1-13
Chapter 2 Periodic Maintenance
2.1 Daily Maintenance

For the Printers daily maintenance, see the Basic Operation Guide, Maintenance: Daily
maintenance.
2.2 Cleaning
For the Printers cleaning, see the Basic Operation Guide, Maintenance: Cleaning.
2.3 After Todays Operation

For the maintenance after the Printer operation, see the Basic Operation Guide,
Maintenance: After todays operation.
2-1
2.4 Engine Firmware Variation

2.4.1 Proper Firmware Installation Depending on Printers Model
The engine firmware must match the Printers model.

Be sure to install the proper firmware, referring to the table below.
Printers model Proper firmware version Description

IP-7900-00 IP-7900 Ver.X.XX_00 H-104S
IP-7900-01 IP-7900 Ver.X.XX_01 H-104S for Asia
IP-7900-02 IP-7900 Ver.X.XX_00 H-104S
IP-7900-20 IP-7900 Ver.X.XX_20 H2-104S
IP-7900-21 IP-7900 Ver.X.XX_21 H2-104S for Asia
IP-7900-22 IP-7900 Ver.X.XX_22 H3-104S
IP-7700-00 IP-7900 Ver.X.XX_00 H-74S
IP-7700-02 IP-7900 Ver.X.XX_00 H-74S
IP-7700-20 IP-7900 Ver.X.XX_20 H2-74S
Note: X.XX indicates the firmware version number.

The same firmware is used in common with the 104S and 74S printer models from version
3.50.
2-2
Chapter 2 Periodic maintenance
2.4.2 Proper firmware installation on PCB version and revision
The firmware version must match the PCBs version and revision. If the correct firmware is
not selected, a system error may occur, which may cause the Printers malfunction or
deactivate the Printer operation.
Be sure to install the correct firmware, referring to the table below.
Actuator Operation
Main board Carriage board
board panel board
Firmware
IPB3 IPB3-300 ACT1 HCB1 HCB1S MCP3
version
01A -
01D - 00A - 00A - 03A - 00A - 01A - 02A - 03A - 00A - 01A -
01C
Version 1.07 Yes No No Yes No Yes No No No Yes No
Version 1.22 Yes No Yes No Yes No No No Yes No
Version 1.32 Yes No Yes No Yes No No No No No
*1
Version 1.44 Yes Yes No Yes Yes No
Version 1.56
*2
to before Yes Yes Yes Yes
Version 5.00
Version 5.00
Yes Yes No Yes Yes
or later
Yes: Applicable
No: Not appilcable
*1: Do not match the firmware and the actuator with these versions, though the Printer does not detect a
board combination error.
*2: At upgrading the firmware to Version 1.56, be sure to also upgrade the boot program to Version
4.02.
<Notes>
1. For IPB3, the PCB assy name was changed from IPB3 to IPB3-300.
2. For ACT1, the PCB version was changed from 01 to 03.
3. For HCB1, the PCB name was changed from HCB1 to HCB1S.
4. For MCP3, the PCB version was changed from 00 to 01.
2-3
2.5 Upgrading the Firmware

2.5.1 Create upgrading CF card
Create the upgrading CF card by writing the system file on the CF card.
<Procedure>
(1) Create a folder with a name, CPL on the CF cards route.
(2) Create a subfolder with a name, sys in the CPL folder.
(3) Copy the system image file, system.img in the sys folder.
<File tree on the created CF card>
2-4
2.5.2 Upgrading with CF
This function is provided in the boot program.

The procedure is as follows.
(1) Turn the printer off.
(2) Insert the CF card for upgrading the version into the CF socket of the IPB3 board.
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
LED(s) [BTC-LED] LED [CF-STATUS] CF socket DIP switch
(3) Set the DIP switches 1 and 2 at the CF sockets right side to ON.
DIP switch 1 ON: Upgrades the system program mode.
DIP switch 2 ON: Upgrades the boot program mode.
Note
When the both DIP switches 1 and 2 are set to ON simultaneously, first the
system program is upgraded, and then the boot program is upgraded.
(4) Turn the printer on.
Note
The operation panels indication during the upgrade operation, see description
on the next page.
(5) Turn the printer off after upgrading the firmware.
(6) At the CF sockets right side, set the both DIP switches 1 and 2 to OFF.
(7) Remove the CF card.
(8) Turn the printer on.
The upgrade proceeding is checked with the operation panel and
PCB-ASSY-IPB3s LED.
Note
1. During the upgrade operation, do not cut off the Printer power.
2. Time required to upgrade the system program is approx. 2 minutes.
3. Time required to upgrade the boot program is approx. 1 minutes.
2-5
<System program upgrade messages>
Operation panel LED status
READING SYSTEM CF-STATUS: BLINK

BTC-LED: ALL OFF (lights-out)
XXX/128
XXX: Counter for data processing
READING SYSTEM CF-STATUS: ON (lighting)

DONE
UPGRADING SYSTEM CF-STATUS: ON (lighting)

ERASING XXX/127 BTC-LED: Counter for data processing
XX: Counter for data processing

BTC-LED: Counter for data processing
VERIFYING XXX/127
UPGRADING SYSTEM
CF-STATUS: ON (lighting)
WRITING XXX/127 BTC-LED: Counter for data processing

VERIFYING XXX/127 BTC-LED: Counter for data processing
SYSTEM IS VALID CF-STATUS: ON (lighting)

BTC-LED: [0]-[6] =ON (lighting)
POWER OFF/ON
[7] = OFF (lights-out)
For Boot Version 5.00 and later, POWER OFF/ON

display is replaced by RESTART.
2-6
<Boot program upgrade messages>
Operation panel LED status
READING SYSTEM CF-STATUS: BLINK

XXX/128 BTC-LED: ALL OFF (lights-out)
READING SYSTEM CF-STATUS: ON (lighting)

DONE
UPGRADING BOOT CF-STATUS: ON (lighting)

ERASING XX/08 BTC-LED: Counter for data processing
UPGRADING BOOT [CF-STATUS] : ON (lighting)

[BTC-LED] : Counter for data processing
VERIFYING XX/08
UPGRADING BOOT
CF-STATUS: ON (lighting)
WRITING XX/08 BTC-LED: Counter for data processing
UPGRADING BOOT CF-STATUS: ON (lighting)

VERIFYING XX/08 BTC-LED: Counter for data processing
SYSTEM IS VALID CF-STATUS: ON (lighting)

POWER OFF/ON BTC-LED: [0]-[2] =OFF (lights-out)
[3] = ON (lighting)
For Boot Version 5.00 and later, POWER OFF/ON [4]-[7] =OFF (lights-out)
display is replaced by RESTART.
2-7
<Error messages>
If the following errors occur, processing cannot be continued.
CF card detection error

UPGRADING
CF DETECT ERROR
Memory reservation error

UPGRADING
MEMORY ALLOC ERROR
File read error

UPGRADING
FILE READ ERROR
File format error

UPGRADING
ILLEGAL FILE ERROR
Sum error
UPGRADING
SUM ERROR
Erase error
UPGRADING
ERASE ERROR
Write error
UPGRADING
WRITE ERROR
Erase verification error

UPGRADING
ERASE VERIFY ERROR
2-8
Write verification error

UPGRADING
WRITE VERIFY ERROR
2-9
2.5.3 Upgrading in Online
Select PRINTER FW UPGRADE in the SYSTEM menu.
#PRINTER FW UPGRADE

OK button
#PRINTER FW UPGRADE
*OK?
Press the OK button to start processing. Press the CANCEL button to cancel processing.
UPGRADE PREPARING
PLEASE WAIT
Data receiving wait state

UPGRADE READY
PLEASE SEND DATA
Receiving data
RECEIVING DATA
PLEASE WAIT
End of data reception

COMPLETE RECEIVE
Erasing
UPGRADE EXECUTING
ERASING XX/XX
Writing
UPGRADE EXECUTING
WRITING XX/XX
2-10
Verifying
UPGRADE EXECUTING
VERIFYING XX/XX
Normal end
UPGRADE FINISHED
POWER OFF/ON
Cancel
CANCEL UPGRADE
POWER OFF/ON
Abnormal end
UPGRADE FAILED XXXX
POWER OFF/ON
XXXX: Error code
Error code Explanation
0002 Data size error (too large)
0003 Data size error (too small)
0004 Invalid data
0005 CRC error
0006 Writing error
0007 Verification error
0008 USB cable disconnection error
0009 Protocol error
Note
For system firmware Ver 3.00 and later, POWER OFF/ON display is replaced by
RESTART.
2-11
2.6 Uploading and Downloading

Use the computer software CP_Manager to upload and download information items to and
from the Printer.
The above information items consist of Printer information, media information, and
collected data such as error log, maintenance log, print head replacement log, used media
length, ink usage history, and cartridge current status.
For information about CP_Manager system requirements, see the CP_Manager
Instruction manual.
2-12
2.6.1 Log Acquisition
With firmware versions 3.00 and higher, logs can be acquired using CP_Manager. For
more information about log acquisition, see the CP_Manager Instruction manual.
With firmware versions lower than 3.00, use SP_926 for log acquisition.
2-13
Chapter 3 Operations and Functions of

Maintenance Mode Menu
3.1 Preface
This device provides the operation panel functions in the following two modes.
User Mode: Operation panel functions for general users

Maintenance Mode: Operation panel functions used for adjustment in the factory or
maintenance in each field
This chapter describes only the operations in the maintenance mode used for adjustment
in the factory and maintenance in each field.
For operations in the user mode for general users, see the Basic Operation Guide or
Advanced Operation Guide.
3-1
3.2 Operation in Maintenance Mode

3.2.1 Basic Menu Operations
Pressing the ONLINE button in the idle state of the online mode changes to the offline
mode, and the top menu appears on the LCD to enable Menu operations.
<Top menu (MAINTENANCE MODE)>
INK MEDIA REG

MEDIA M.ADV
REW IND FORM FEED #PH RECOVERY
PH.REC PH.MAIN >NORMAL
OK
button From any top mode, cleaning
PRINTER SETUP menu is started by pressing
ADJUST HEATER the OK button. After the
cleaning is completed, the
LCD displays the top menu of
the menu group including the
TEST PRN SENSORS cleaning menu.
MOTORS
They are displayed by entering

COUNTER PH.INF the password following the
ELECT procedure described in the next
subsection.
<Hierarchical menu structure>

Menus are structured hierarchically as follows.
<Top menu (MAINTENANCE MODE)>

- Menu displayed in layer 1
- In some situations, this has multiple menus in lower-level layers.
<Menu in layer 2>
- Menu under top menu
<Menu in layer 2>
- Menu under layer-2 menu
- The parameter menu is displayed if the layer-3 menu is not provided.
<Parameter menu>
- This menu enables the user to specify items in the selected menu or enter numeric
values.
- This menu has four entry methods: (1) entering one of options, (2) entering a numeric
value, (3) entering characters, and (4) executing a function.
3-2
3.2.2 Entering the Password
In the offline state of the user mode, use the following buttons to place the system into the
password entry state, and enter the password.
Press the CANCEL, MENU, CANCEL, and CANCEL buttons in sequence.
(When the CANCEL button was pressed, the buzzer sounds to notify the user that the
pressed key is invalid; however, after this, the user can shift to the password entry state.)
MAINTENANCE MODE
PASSWORD?
The password varies depending on the intended operators.

Intended operator Password
Service engineer Press the MENU, Up, Down, and Right buttons in sequence.
The service engineer can carry out menu operations required for maintenance in each
field.
(Nozzle check, monitoring, head information, and others)
3-3
3.3 Menu Tree

The menu tree in the maintenance mode is the same as that in the user mode except that
maintenance items are added (including the addition of the top menus).
This section indicates the tree structure in a table to show differences between the
maintenance and user modes.
The hatched items are added for the maintenance mode.
Refer to the list below for system firmware previous to the version 3.00.
Top menu 1 Layer-2 menu Layer-3 menu Parameter

Same as the user mode.
: INK
: MEDIA
#SELECT MEDIA
#RENAME MEDIA
: MEDIA REG #MEDIA ADV VALUE
#PRINT MODE Select one of the following options.
DRAFT 1
FINE DRAFT
NORMAL1
NORMAL2
QUALITY
DENSITY2
#PRINT MODE(MULTI) Optional entry
DRAFT 2
DENSITY1
#PRINT DIRECTION Optional entry
BIDIR
UNIDIR
#USE EDGE GUARD Optional entry
YES
NO
#MEDIA ADV MODE Optional entry
FWD ONLY
BACK & FWD1
BACK & FWD2
#MEDIA BACK MODE Optional entry
BACK & FWD
FWD ONLY
#SUCTION FAN LEVEL Optional entry
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
OFF
#AFTERHEATER T Enter a numeric value.
#PRINT HEATER T Enter a numeric value.
#PREHEATER T Enter a numeric value.
#COLOR STRIPE Select one of the following options.
ON
OFF
#PH HEIGHT VAL Enter a numeric value.
#IMAGE IMPROVE. Select one of the following options.
3-4
LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH, FINE GRAIN
HIGH, LESS SPRAY
OFF
#PH CLEANING Select one of the following options.
START & END
DURING PRINT
DURING PRINT2
#BACK ADJUST VAL Enter a numeric value.
#PRINT MODE PREF Select one of the following options.
SOFTWARE
FRONT PANEL
#PH REST PERIOD Enter a numeric value.
#PH REST TIME Enter a numeric value.
#BIDIR VAL1 L xx Enter a numeric value.
#BIDIR VAL1 R xx Enter a numeric value.
#REMAINING MEDIA Enter a numeric value.
#DELETE MEDIA Enter a numeric value.
#COPY MEDIA Enter a numeric value.
#PASTE MEDIA Enter a numeric value.
#MEDIA ADV PRINT Select one of the following options.
ROUGH(DRAFT1)
ROUGH(FINE DRAFT)
ROUGH(NORMAL1)
: M.ADV ROUGH(NORMAL2)
ROUGH(QUALITY)
DETAIL(DRAFT1)
DETAIL(FINE DRAFT)
DETAIL(NORMAL1)
DETAIL(NORMAL2)
DETAIL(QUALITY)
#MEDIA ADV VALUE Enter a numeric value.
#BACK ADJ PRINT Select one of the following options.
DRAFT1
FINE DRAFT
NORMAL1
NORMAL2
QUALITY
In the maintenance mode, the registered
media name is displayed, and it can be
selected.
xx: Y1, M2, C3, K4, K5, C6, M7, Y8 (4-color mode)
xx: Y1, Lm2, C3, Gy4, K5, Lc6, M7, Lg8 (8-color mode)
3-5

: REWIND
: PH.REC
: FORM FEED
#CAP CLEANING Execute this function.
#INK SYSTEM OPT Select one of the following options.
STORE INK SYS
CLEAN INK SYS
: PH.MAIN INITIAL CHARGE
CHARGE(INKPACK)
CHARGE CAP CL
PH CLEANING
PURGE INK SYS
#SELECT SERVICE TUBE Select one of the following options.
#COLOR CHANGE (x->x) Execute this function.
#RESEAT PRINTHEAD Execute this function.
#REPLACE PRINTHEAD Execute this function.
#WASH PRINTHEADS Execute this function.
#INK CHARGE DONE Select one of the following options.
NO, YES, SUBCAST CHARGE DONE
#UNCAP CARRIAGE Execute this function.
#CAP CARRIAGE Execute this function.
#COLOR CHANGE (8->4): 4->8 or 8->4 is displayed.
3-6

: PRINTER
#TEST PRINTS Select one of the following options.
NOZZLE PRINT
TEST PRINTS ALL
ADJUST PH POS
: ADJUST ADJUST PH R/L
BIDIRECTION1
BIDIRECTION2
BIDIRECTION3
BIDIRECTION4
CHECK EDGE SENSOR
CHECK PH POS
CHECK BIDIR1
CHECK BIDIR2
CHECK BIDIR3
CHECK BIDIR4
CHECK NOZZLE
CHECK MECHANICALS
#PH TO PH VAL Enter a numeric value.
#PH R/L ADJ VAL Enter a numeric value.
#BIDIR ADV1 L, R XXXXXX*1 Enter a numeric value.
#EDGE SENSOR ADJ VAL Enter a numeric value.
#SET BIDIR MEDIA PAPER Select one of the following options.
Glossy The registered media names are
Matte registered.
Banner
BLT_B
#PH OFFSET VOLTAGE 8 colors 4 colors Enter a numeric value.
Y1 x*2 Y1 x*2
Lm2 x*2 M2 x*2
C3 x*2 C3 x*2
Gy4 x*2 K4 x*2
K5 x*2 K5 x*2
Lc6 x*2 C6 x*2
M7 x*2 M7 x*2
Lg8 x*2 Y8 x*2
#CAP POSITION Enter a numeric value.
-5.0 to +5.0 mm
#WIPE POSITION Enter a numeric value.
-5.0 to +5.0 mm
#PLATEN HEIGHT Enter a numeric value.
#GAP THRESHOLD Enter a numeric value.
#MEASURE PLATEN H Execute this function.
#WIPING HEIGHT Enter a numeric value.
#MEASURE WIPE H Execute this function.
#CARRIAGE MOVING Select one of the following options.
HOME
WIPE
MAINTENANCE
PLATEN
*1: XXXXX indicates the media name.
*2: x indicates the print head nozzle row, A or B.
3-7
#LANGUAGE Select one of the following options.

JAPANESE
: SETUP ENGLISH
FRENCH
ITALIAN
GERMAN
SPANISH
PORTUGUESE
#TIME ZONE (GMT+) Enter a numeric value.
#LENGTH UNITS Select one of the following options.
- MILLIMETER, INCH
#TEMPERATURE UNITS Select one of the following options.
CENTIGRADE
FAHRENHEIT
#BEEP(UNCAP CARRI) Select one of the following options.
ON
OFF
#BEEP(TUR TIMEOUT) Select one of the following options.
ON
OFF
#BEEP(INK ERROR) Select one of the following options.
ON
OFF
#BOOT VERSION Execute this function. (Display)
#PRINTER FW VER Execute this function. (Display)
#MAIN PCA VER Execute this function. (Display)
#ACT PCA VER Execute this function. (Display)
#CARRIAGE PCA VER Execute this function. (Display)
#BTC VER Execute this function. (Display)
#ATG VER Execute this function. (Display)
#RSM VER Execute this function. (Display)
#PTG VER Execute this function. (Display)
#ABC VER Execute this function. (Display)
#USB ADDRESS Execute this function. (Display)
#USB SPEED Execute this function. (Display)
#FACTORY DEFAULT Execute this function.
#PRINTER FW UPGRADE Execute this function.
#DOWNLOAD Execute this function.
#JAM SENSITIVITY Select one of the following options.
LOW
HIGH
#DATE(YY/MM/DD) Enter a numeric value.
#SYSTEM TIME Enter a numeric value.
#SERIAL No. Enter characters.
Alphanumeric characters 0 to 9, A to Z
#INIT EEPROM Execute this function.
#SAVE CALIBS Execute this function.
#RESTORE CALIBS Execute this function.
#SAVE EEPROM Execute this function.
#RESTORE EEPROM Execute this function.
#NO. OF INK COLORS Select one of the following options.
8
4
#HEATER STANDBY TIME Select one of the following options.
#HEATER STANDBY TEMP Enter a numeric value.
The unit is determined depending on
the units of the system temperature.
: HEATER CENTIGRADE: 15 to 45,
FAHRENHEIT: 59 to 113
#STANDBY TEMP AFT Enter a numeric value.
the units of the system temperature.
CENTIGRADE: 15 to 60,
FAHRENHEIT: 59 to 140
3-8

#MNFG PATTERN 0 EXECUTE Execute this function.
DIRECTION Select one of the following options.
: TEST PRN BI
UNI
K Select one of the following options.
C ON
M OFF
Y
Lc
Lm
Gy
Lg
MODE Select one of the following options.
08070421
08050621
08070811
08071611
08071612
08071011
04070421
04050621
04070811
04071611
04071612
04071011
LENGTH Enter a numeric value.
1 to 99999
COUNT Enter a numeric value.
1 to 99
#MNFG PATTERN 1 Same as [MNFG PATTERN 0].
#MNFG PATTERN 2
#MNFG PATTERN 3
#MNFG PATTERN 4
#MNFG PATTERN 5
#MNFG PATTERN 6
#MNFG PATTERN 7
#MNFG PATTERN 8
#MNFG PATTERN 9
#MNFG PATTERN 10
#MNFG PATTERN 11
#MNFG PATTERN 12
#MNFG PATTERN 13
#PRINTER SENSORS EDGE SENSOR Execute this function. (Display)
HOME HEIGHT Execute this function. (Display)
: SENSORS FRONT MEDIA Execute this function. (Display)
REAR MEDIA Execute this function. (Display)
HOME POSITION Execute this function. (Display)
CAP Execute this function. (Display)
SPITTOON CASE Execute this function. (Display)
WIPER POSITION Execute this function. (Display)
GRIP Execute this function. (Display)
COVER Execute this function. (Display)
INK SUPPLY1 Execute this function. (Display)
INK SUPPLY2
INK SUPPLY3
INK SUPPLY4
INK SUPPLY5
INK SUPPLY6
3-9
INK SUPPLY7
INK SUPPLY8
#INK SENSOR INK COVER Execute this function. (Display)
INK TRAY1 Execute this function. (Display)
INK TRAY2
INK TRAY3
INK TRAY4
INK TRAY5
INK TRAY6
INK TRAY7
INK TRAY8
#SUBCARTRIDGE SENSOR SUBCART COVER Execute this function. (Display)
SUBCARTRIDGE1 Execute this function. (Display)
SUBCART FULL1 Execute this function. (Display)
SUBCART EMP1 Execute this function. (Display)
#BOTTLE #PRESENT Execute this function. (Display)
#FEEDING-UNIT P FEED UP LIMIT Execute this function. (Display)
P FEED LIMIT END Execute this function. (Display)
REWINDING SWITCH Execute this function. (Display)
FEEDING SWITCH Execute this function. (Display)
TUR SENSORS TUR SWITCH Execute this function. (Display)
SLACK SWITCH Execute this function. (Display)
REWIND UP LIMIT Execute this function. (Display)
REWIND LO LIMIT Execute this function. (Display)
FUNCTION SWITCH1 Execute this function. (Display)
CARRIAGE GAP SENSOR Execute this function. (Display)
TEMP SENSORS AMBIENT Execute this function. (Display)
PREHEATER Execute this function. (Display)
PRINTHEATER L Execute this function. (Display)
PRINTHEATER C Execute this function. (Display)
PRINTHEATER R Execute this function. (Display)
3-10
AFTERHEATER L Execute this function. (Display)

AFTERHEATER C Execute this function. (Display)
AFTERHEATER R Execute this function. (Display)
Y PH Execute this function. (Display)
Lm PH Execute this function. (Display)
C PH Execute this function. (Display)
Gy PH Execute this function. (Display)
K PH Execute this function. (Display)
Lc PH Execute this function. (Display)
M PH Execute this function. (Display)
Lg PH Execute this function. (Display)
CARRIAGE1 Execute this function. (Display)
CARRIAGE2
CARRIAGE3
CARRIAGE4
CARRIAGE5
CARRIAGE6
CARRIAGE7
CARRIAGE8
CARRIAGE1
CARRIAGE2
CARRIAGE3
CARRIAGE4
CARRIAGE5
CARRIAGE6
CARRIAGE7
CARRIAGE8
#MEDIA HEATER Select one of the following options.
OFF
70-55-55
65-45-50
: MOTORS #PH HEATER Select one of the following options.
OFF
30C
#INK SUCKING1 Select one of the following options.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
#AIR RELEASE SOL1 Select one of the following options.
#AIR RELEASE SOL2 CLOSED
#AIR RELEASE SOL3 OPEN
#AIR RELEASE SOL4
#CAP STAT MOTOR Select one of the following options.
STOP
OPEN
CLOSE
#WIPE MOTOR Select one of the following options.
STOP
FAST
SLOW
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR1 Select one of the following options.
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR2 STOP(CLOSE)
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR3 STOP(OPEN)
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR4 TO SUBTANK
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR5 TO INKPACK
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR6
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR7
3-11
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR8

#GAP SENSOR SOLENOID Select one of the following options.
UP
DOWN
#EXHAUST FAN Select one of the following options.
OFF
ON
#SUCTION FAN1 Select one of the following options.
#SUCTION FAN2 OFF
#SUCTION FAN3 ON
#SUCTION FAN4
#SUCTION FAN5
#MEDIA DRYING FAN1 Select one of the following options.
#MEDIA DRYING FAN2 OFF
#MEDIA DRYING FAN3 ON
#MEDIA DRYING FAN4
#MEDIA DRYING FAN5
#PH COOLING FAN Select one of the following options.
OFF
ON
#MEDIA USED Enter a numeric value.
: COUNTER the LENGTH UNITS setting.
#RESET MEDIA USED Execute this function.
#INK USED 8C(ml) 1 Enter a numeric value.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
#RESET TOTAL INK Execute this function.
#SUPPLY PUMP Enter a numeric value.
#RESET SUPPLY PUMP Execute this function.
#3RDPARTY INK USED Execute this function. (Display)
#3RDPARTY INK DATE Execute this function. (Display)
#IPB Execute this function.
#ACT Execute this function.
: ELECT #HCB Execute this function.
#INK EEPROM 01 Execute this function.
02
04
08
10
20
40
80
#SUBCART EEPROM 01 Execute this function.
3-12
02
04
08
10
20
40
80
#POWER ON Execute this function.
OFF
#SELECT PH COLOR 1 Execute this function.(Display)
2
: SELECT PH 3
COLOR 4
5
6
7
8
#MANUFACTURE DATE n Execute this function.(Display)
#SERIAL NUMBER n
n=1 to 8
#RANK A n
#RANK B n
#USED DATE n
#DOT COUNTER n
#USED COLOR n
#3RDPARTY INK USED n
3-13
Refer to the list below for system firmware version 3.00 and later.

: INK
: MEDIA
#SELECT MEDIA
#RENAME MEDIA
#SMART PASS Select one of the following options.
(IP-7x00-20/21) OFF
LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH
#DENSITY Select one of the following options.
(IP-7x00-20/21) NORMAL
HIGH DENSITY
#PRINT DIRECTION Select one of the following options.
(Maintenance mode item with BIDIR
IP-7x00-00/01) UNIDIR
YES
NO
#SKEW CHECK Select one of the following options.
ON
OFF
FWD ONLY
BACK & FWD1
BACK & FWD2
BACK & FWD
FWD ONLY
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
OFF
# #PRINTHEATER T Enter a numeric value.
ON
OFF
#PRINT QUALITY MODE Select one of the following options.
IP-7x00-00/01 OFF
HIGH SPEED
NORMAL
HIGH QUALITY
MAX QUALITY
#ROLL END DETECTION Select one of the following options.
DETECT ONLY
ACTION SELECT.
START & END
DURING PRINT
3-14
DURING PRINT2
OFF
#ADVANCE PREF Select one of the following options.
SOFTWARE
FRONT PANEL
#PRINT MODE PREF Select one of the following options.
SOFTWARE
FRONT PANEL
#HEATER PREF Select one of the following options.
SOFTWARE
FRONT PANEL
#BIDIR ADJ1 L PAPER Enter a numeric value.
#BIDIR ADJ1 R PAPER Enter a numeric value.
#SING. ADV #EXECUTE Execute this function.
(IP-7x00-20/21) #PRINT MODE Select one of the following options.
MAX SPEED
HIGH SPEED
: M.ADV NORMA
HIGH QUALITY
MAX QUALITY
LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH
#ADJ Enter a numeric value.
#SIMPLE ADV #EXECUTE Execute this function.
MAX SPEED
HIGH SPEED
NORMA
HIGH QUALITY
MAX QUALITY
#PRINT QUALITY Select one of the following options.
MODE OFF
HIGH SPEED
NORMAL
HIGH QUALITY
MAX QUALITY
#AUTO BIDIR ADJUST #EXECUTE Execute this function.
(IP-7x00-20/21) #ADJ L xx Enter a numeric value.
#ADJ R xx Enter a numeric value.
#MULTI ADV #EXECUTE Execute this function.
MAX SPEED
HIGH SPEED
NORMA
HIGH QUALITY
MAX QUALITY
3-15

LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH
#ROUGH ADV #EXECUTE Execute this function.
MAX SPEED
HIGH SPEED
NORMA
HIGH QUALITY
MAX QUALITY
MODE OFF
HIGH SPEED
NORMAL
HIGH QUALITY
MAX QUALITY
#DETAIL ADV #EXECUTE Execute this function.
MAX SPEED
HIGH SPEED
NORMA
HIGH QUALITY
MAX QUALITY
MODE OFF
HIGH SPEED
NORMAL
HIGH QUALITY
MAX QUALITY
#MANUAL BIDIR ADJUST #EXECUTE Execute this function.
#PATTERN ADJUST 1
ADJUST 2
ADJUST 3
ADJUST 4
#ADJ1 L Enter a numeric value.
#ADJ1 R Enter a numeric value.
#ADJ3L Enter a numeric value.
#BACK #EXECUTE Execute this function.
MAX SPEED
HIGH SPEED
NORMA
HIGH QUALITY
MAX QUALITY
LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH
#BIDIRECTION CHECK #EXECUTE Execute this function.
#PATTERN ADJUST 1
ADJUST 2
ADJUST 3
ADJUST 4
3-16

: REWIND
: PH.REC
: FORM FEED
Same as system firmware previous to
the version 3.00.
: PH.MAIN
3-17

: PRINTER
#NOZZLE PRINT Same as the user mode.
(IP-7x00-20/21)
#NOZZLE PRINT Execute this function.
(IP-7x00-00/01)
: ADJUST #PRINT HEAD ADJUST Same as the user mode.
#EDGE SENSOR ADJUST Same as the user mode.
the version 3.00.
: SETUP
the version 3.00.
: HEATER
3-18

: TEST PRN BI
UNI
C ON
M OFF
Y
Lc
Lm
Gy
Lg
(IP-7x00-20/21) 030241
030x21
050321
070411
090511
(IP-7x00-00/01) 030241
08070421
08050621
08070811
08071611
08071612
08071011
04070421
04050621
04070811
04071611
04071612
04071011
DENSITY Select one of the following options.
(IP-7x00-20/21) NORMAL
HIGH DENSITY
SMART PASS Select one of the following options.
(IP-7x00-20/21) OFF
LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH
#PRINT QUALITY MODE Select one of the following options.
(IP-7x00-00/01) OFF
HIGH SPEED
NORMAL
HIGH QUALITY
MAX QUALITY
1 to 99999
1 to 99
#MNFG PATTERN 1 Same as system firmware previous to the version 3.00.
#MNFG PATTERN 2
#MNFG PATTERN 3
#MNFG PATTERN 4
#MNFG PATTERN 5
#MNFG PATTERN 6
#MNFG PATTERN 7
#MNFG PATTERN 8
#MNFG PATTERN 9
#MNFG PATTERN 10
3-19
#MNFG PATTERN 11
#MNFG PATTERN 12
#MNFG PATTERN 13
Same as system firmware
previous to the version 3.00.
: SENSORS
: MOTORS
: COUNTER
: ELECT
: SELECT PH
COLOR
3-20
Refer to the list below for system firmware version 5.00 and later.

: INK
: MEDIA
#SELECT MEDIA
#RENAME MEDIA
YES
NO
#SKEW CHECK Select one of the following options.
ON
OFF
FWD ONLY
BACK & FWD1
BACK & FWD2
BACK & FWD
FWD ONLY
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
OFF
#PRINTHEATER T Enter a numeric value.
ON
OFF
START & END
DURING PRINT1
DURING PRINT2
OFF
INK SAVE
#ROLL END DETECTION Select one of the following options.
DETECT ONLY
ACTION SELECT.
#ADVANCE PREF Select one of the following options.
SOFTWARE
FRONT PANEL
#HEATER PREF Select one of the following options.
SOFTWARE
FRONT PANEL
#CARRIAGE SPEED Select one of the following options.
NORMAL
SLOW
3-21
#SAFE SCANNING Select one of the following options.

STOP PRINTING
SUSPEND PRINTING
SUSPEND&WARNING
WARNING ONLY
#MEDIA ADVANCE AUTO #EXECUTE Execute this function.
#MODE Select one of the following options.
MAX SPEED L
MAX SPEED M
: M.ADV H SPEED
NORMAL
HIGH QLTY
MAX QLTY
#AUTO BIDIR ADJUST #EXECUTE Execute this function.
ALL MODES
1:MAX/H SPD
2:NORMAL
3:HIGH QLTY
4:MAX QLTY
#SING. ADV #EXECUTE Execute this function.
MAX SPEED L
MAX SPEED M
H SPEED
NORMAL
HIGH QLTY
MAX QLTY
#MULTI ADV #EXECUTE Execute this function.
MAX SPEED L
MAX SPEED M
H SPEED
NORMAL
HIGH QLTY
MAX QLTY
#MANUAL BIDIR ADJUST #EXECUTE Execute this function.
1:MAX/H SPD
2:NORMAL
3:HIGH QLTY
4:MAX QLTY
#ADJ3L Enter a numeric value.
3-22

#BACK #EXECUTE Execute this function.
MAX SPEED L
MAX SPEED M
H SPEED
NORMAL
HIGH QLTY
MAX QLTY
#BIDIRECTION CHECK #EXECUTE Execute this function.
#PATTERN Select one of the following options.
ALL MODES
1:MAX/H SPD
2:NORMAL
3:HIGH QLTY
4:MAX QLTY
3-23

: REWIND
: PH.REC
: FORM FEED
#START MAINTENANCE Execute this function.
#MAINTENANCE Select one of the following options.
SPITTOON CASE/UNIT
DUST FILTER
: PH.MAIN EXHAUST FAN FILTER
CARRIAGE
EXTERIOR
WIPER BLADE
WIPER LIQUID
SPITTOON LIQUID
MEDIA EDGE GUARD
PRINT HEAD GUARD
#CAP CLEANING Execute this function.
#SHEETMOUNT CLEANING Execute this function.
#REPLACE WIPER BLADE Execute this function.
#REPLACE WIPER LIQD Execute this function.
#INK SYSTEM OPT Select one of the following options.
STORE INK SYS
CLEAN INK SYS
INITIAL CHARGE
CHARGE(INKPACK)
#SELECT SERVICE TUBE Select one of the following options.
#RESEAT PRINTHEAD Execute this function.
#CHECK PH QUALITY Execute this function.
#REPLACE PRINTHEAD Execute this function.
#FILL CAP WITH INK Execute this function.
#INK CHARGE DONE Select one of the following options.
NO
SUBCART CHARGE DONE
YES
#CHCK WRINKLE SENSOR Execute this function.
#OPEN CAP Execute this function.
#CLOSE CAP Execute this function.
3-24

: PRINTER
#NOZZLE PRINT
#PRINT HEAD ADJUST
#EDGE SENSOR ADJUST
#TEST PRINTS TEST PRINT ALL
: ADJUST CHECK NOZZLE
CHECK MECHANICAL
#PH OFFSET VOLTAGE Same as system
#CAP POSITION firmware previous to
#WIPE POSITION the version 3.00.
#WIPING POS ADJUST Execute this function.
#PLATEN HEIGHT Same as system
#GAP THRESHOLD firmware previous to
#MEASURE PLATEN H the version 3.00.
#WIPING HEIGHT
#MEASURE WIPE H
#CARRIAGE MOVING
#LANGUAGE Same as system firmware previous
#TIME ZONE (GMT+) to the version 3.00.
: SETUP #LENGTH UNITS
#TEMPERATURE UNITS
#BEEP(UNCAP CARRI)
#BEEP(TUR TIMEOUT)
#BEEP(INK ERROR)
#BEEP(SAFE SCANNING)
#BOOT VERSION
#PRINTER FW VER
#MAIN PCA VER
#ACT PCA VER
#CARRIAGE PCA VER
#BTC VER
#ATG VER Same as system firmware previous
#RSM VER to the version 3.00.
#PTG VER
#ABC VER
#USB ADDRESS Same as system firmware previous
#USB SPEED to the version 3.00.
#FACTORY DEFAULT
#PRINTER FW UPGRADE
#DOWNLOAD
#JAM SENSITIVITY
#DATE(YY/MM/DD) Same as system firmware previous
#SYSTEM TIME to the version 3.00.
#SERIAL No.
#INIT EEPROM
#SAVE CALIBS
#RESTORE CALIBS
#SAVE EEPROM
#RESTORE EEPROM
the version 3.00.
: HEATER
3-25

: TEST PRN BI
UNI
C ON
M OFF
Y
Lc
Lm
Gy
Lg
MAX SPEED L
MAX SPEED M
H SPEED
NORMAL
HIGH QLTY
MAX QLTY
1 to 99999
1 to 99
#MNFG PATTERN 1 Same as MNFG PATTERN 0.
#MNFG PATTERN 2
#MNFG PATTERN 3
#MNFG PATTERN 4
#MNFG PATTERN 5
#MNFG PATTERN 6
#MNFG PATTERN 7
#MNFG PATTERN 8
#MNFG PATTERN 9
#MNFG PATTERN 10
#MNFG PATTERN 11
#MNFG PATTERN 12
#MNFG PATTERN 13
#PRINTER SENSORS EDGE SENSOR Execute this function. (Display)
HOME HEIGHT Execute this function. (Display)
: SENSORS FRONT MEDIA Execute this function. (Display)
REAR MEDIA Execute this function. (Display)
HOME POSITION Execute this function. (Display)
CAP Execute this function. (Display)
SPITTOON CASE Execute this function. (Display)
WIPER POSITION Execute this function. (Display)
GRIP Execute this function. (Display)
COVER Execute this function. (Display)
INK SUPPLY1 Execute this function. (Display)
INK SUPPLY2
INK SUPPLY3
INK SUPPLY4
INK SUPPLY5
INK SUPPLY6
INK SUPPLY7
INK SUPPLY8
AUTO ADJUST R
AUTO ADJUST G
3-26
AUTO ADJUST B
#INK SENSOR INK COVER Execute this function. (Display)
INK TRAY1 Execute this function. (Display)
INK TRAY2
INK TRAY3
INK TRAY4
INK TRAY5
INK TRAY6
INK TRAY7
INK TRAY8
#SUBCARTRIDGE SENSOR SUBCART COVER Execute this function. (Display)
#BOTTLE PRESENT Execute this function. (Display)
#FEEDING-UNIT P FEED UP LIMIT Execute this function. (Display)
P FEED LIMIT END Execute this function. (Display)
REWINDING SWITCH Execute this function. (Display)
FEEDING SWITCH Execute this function. (Display)
TUR SENSORS TUR SWITCH Execute this function. (Display)
SLACK SWITCH Execute this function. (Display)
REWIND UP LIMIT Execute this function. (Display)
REWIND LO LIMIT Execute this function. (Display)
CARRIAGE GAP SENSOR Execute this function. (Display)
TEMP SENSORS AMBIENT Execute this function. (Display)
PREHEATER Execute this function. (Display)
PRINTHEATER L Execute this function. (Display)
PRINTHEATER C Execute this function. (Display)
PRINTHEATER R Execute this function. (Display)
AFTERHEATER L Execute this function. (Display)
3-27
AFTERHEATER C Execute this function. (Display)

AFTERHEATER R Execute this function. (Display)
Y PH Execute this function. (Display)
Lm PH Execute this function. (Display)
C PH Execute this function. (Display)
Gy PH Execute this function. (Display)
K PH Execute this function. (Display)
Lc PH Execute this function. (Display)
M PH Execute this function. (Display)
Lg PH Execute this function. (Display)
CARRIAGE1 Execute this function. (Display)
CARRIAGE2
CARRIAGE3
CARRIAGE4
CARRIAGE5
CARRIAGE6
CARRIAGE7
CARRIAGE8
CARRIAGE1
CARRIAGE2
CARRIAGE3
CARRIAGE4
CARRIAGE5
CARRIAGE6
CARRIAGE7
CARRIAGE8
#MEDIA HEATER Select one of the following options.
OFF
70-55-55
65-45-50
: MOTORS #PH HEATER Select one of the following options.
OFF
30C
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
#AIR RELEASE SOL1 Select one of the following options.
#AIR RELEASE SOL2 CLOSED
#AIR RELEASE SOL3 OPEN
#AIR RELEASE SOL4
#CAP STAT MOTOR Select one of the following options.
STOP
OPEN
CLOSE
#WIPE MOTOR Select one of the following options.
STOP
FAST
SLOW
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR1 Select one of the following options.
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR2 STOP(CLOSE)
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR3 STOP(OPEN)
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR4 TO SUBTANK
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR5 TO INKPACK
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR6
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR7
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR8
3-28
#GAP SENSOR SOLENOID Select one of the following options.

UP
DOWN
#EXHAUST FAN Select one of the following options.
OFF
ON
#SUCTION FAN1 Select one of the following options.
#SUCTION FAN2 OFF
#SUCTION FAN3 ON
#SUCTION FAN4
#SUCTION FAN5
#MEDIA DRYING FAN1 Select one of the following options.
#MEDIA DRYING FAN2 OFF
#MEDIA DRYING FAN3 ON
#MEDIA DRYING FAN4
#MEDIA DRYING FAN5
#PH COOLING FAN Select one of the following options.
OFF
ON
#LED FOR RED Select one of the following options.
#LED FOR GREEN OFF
#LED FOR BLUE ON
#MEDIA USED Enter a numeric value.
: COUNTER the LENGTH UNITS setting.
#RESET MEDIA USED Execute this function.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
#RESET TOTAL INK Execute this function.
#SUPPLY PUMP Enter a numeric value.
#RESET SUPPLY PUMP Execute this function.
#3RDPARTY INK USED Execute this function. (Display)
#3RDPARTY INK DATE Execute this function. (Display)
#IPB Execute this function.
#ACT Execute this function.
: ELECT #HCB Execute this function.
#INK EEPROM 01 Execute this function.
02
04
08
10
20
40
80
#SUBCART EEPROM 01 Execute this function.
02
04
08
10
20
40
3-29
80
#POWER ON Execute this function.
OFF
#SELECT PH COLOR 1 Execute this function.(Display)
2
: SELECT PH 3
COLOR 4
5
6
7
8
#MANUFACTURE DATE n n=1 to 8 Execute this function.(Display)
#SERIAL NUMBER n
#RANK A n
#RANK B n
#USED DATE n
#DOT COUNTER n
#USED COLOR (SX) n
#USED COLOR (GX) n
#HEAD TYPE n
#3RDPARTY INK USED n
3-30
3.4 Menu Operations

This section explains the maintenance mode-related items at each menu.
Caution
The unit of temperature indicated in this section is obtained with the following conversion
equation:
Fahrenheit = (9/5) * Centigrade + 32
3.4.1 MEDIA REG
(1) PRINT MODE (System firmware previous to the version 3.00)

Used to specify the print mode for the selected media.
#PRINT MODE
>XX : YYYYY Z
XX: Media number
Z: Registration mark (* is indicated)
YY: Print mode
- DRAFT1: 4 passes, 2 drop, Binary

- FINE DRAFT: 6 passes, 2 drop, Binary
- NORMAL1: 8 passes, 1 drop, Binary
- NORMAL2: 10 passes, 1 drop, Binary
- QUALITY: 16 passes, 1 drop, Binary
- DENSITY2: 16 passes, 1-drop 2-stroke, Binary
(2) PRINT MODE (VAR) (System firmware previous to the version 3.00)
Used to specify the print mode (variable bits) for the selected media.
#PRINT MODE(MULTI)
>XX : YYYYY Z
XX: Media number
YY: Print mode (Variable bits)
- DRAFT2: 4 passes, 3 drops, variable bits

- DENSITY1: 8 passes, 3 drops, variable bits
3-31
(3) PRINT DIRECTION (System firmware previous to the version 3.00)

Used to set the print direction of the selected media.
#PRINT DIRECTION
>XX : YYYY Z
XX : Media number
Z : Registration mark (* is indicated)
YYYY: Print direction
- BIDIR: Bidirectional print is selected.

- UNIDIR: Unidirectional print is selected.
(4) PRINT MODE PREF (System firmware previous to the version 3.00)
Used to specify the print mode priority.
#PRINT MODE PREF

>XX : YYYY Z
XX: Media number
YYYY: Print mode priority
- SOFTWARE: Prints data based on information from the host PC.

The set value from the host PC is available only for the relevant
printing.
- FRONT PANEL: Uses the value (print mode or print direction) displayed on the panel
regardless of whether or not data is output from the host PC.
However, the setup value below is applied depending on the data
received from the host PC.
- The data is 2-dot data
Setup value at PRINT MODE
- The data is variable-dot data
Setup value at PRINT MODE (MULTI)
3-32
3.4.2 M.ADV Menu (System firmware previous to the version 3.00)
(System firmware version 3.00 or later for all printers except the IP-7900-22/23)
(1) CHECK BIDIR (displayed only in maintenance mode)

Select check bidirectional pattern (top layer menu) with the Up and Down buttons, and
confirm with the Right button.
Then select and confirm items in lower layer menus.
#CHECK BIDIR
#EXECUTION>
Select a pattern with the Up and Down buttons, and press the OK button to confirm the
pattern to print.
#CHECK BIDIR
#PATTERN *ADJ1
ADJ1/ADJ2/ADJ3/ADJ4
- ADJ1: Prints the check pattern for max and high speed print modes.
- ADJ2: Prints the check pattern for normal print mode.
- ADJ3: Prints the check pattern for high quality print mode.
- ADJ4: Prints the check pattern for max quality mode.
Confirm the print pattern with the OK button.

#CHECK BIDIR
#PATTERN *ADJ2
Select execution with the Up and Down buttons.

#CHECK BIDIR
#EXECUTION>
Press the OK button to display the print confirmation. Press the OK button again to start the
printing.
#CHECK BIDIR
#EXECUTION> *OK?
3-33
Display during printing

#CHECK BIDIR
>EXECUTING
(With the IP-7900-22/23)
Select check bidirectional pattern (top layer menu) with the Up and Down buttons, and
confirm with the Right button.
Then select and confirm items in lower layer menus.
#CHECK BIDIR
#EXECUTION>
Select a pattern with the Up and Down buttons, and press the OK button to confirm the
pattern to print.
#CHECK BIDIR
#MODE *ALL MODES
ALL MODES/1:MAX/H SPD/2:NORMAL/3:HIGH QLTY/4:MAX QLTY

- ALL MODES: Prints the check patterns for all print modes.
- 1:MAX/H SPD: Prints the check pattern for max and high speed print modes.
- 2:NORMAL: Prints the check pattern for normal print mode.
- 3:HIGH QLTY: Prints the check pattern for high quality print mode.
- 4:MAX QLTY: Prints the check pattern for max quality mode.
Confirm the print pattern with the OK button.

#CHECK BIDIR
#MODE *1:MAX/H SPD
Select execution with the Up and Down buttons.

#CHECK BIDIR
#EXECUTION>
3-34
Press the OK button to display the print confirmation. Press the OK button again to start the
printing.
#CHECK BIDIR
#EXECUTION *OK?
Display during printing

#CHECK BIDIR
>EXECUTING
3-35
3.4.3 PH.MAIN
(1) INK SYSTEM OPT

Used to execute service (cleaning) operations.
#INK SYSTEM OPT
*STORE INK SYS
- PURGE INK SYS: Purges ink.
(2) SELECT SERVICE TUBE

Used to execute the service (cleaning) for a specific tube.
#SELECT SERVICE TUBE 8 4

colors colors
>87654321 1 Y Y
2 Lm M
Press the OK button. 3 C C
4 Gy K
#SELECT SERVICE TUBE 5 K K
6 Lc C
*87654321 7 M M
8 Lg Y
Press the Right or Left button, move the cursor, and use the Up or Down button to toggle
the number.
To erase the values 8 to 1, press the Down button, and to display them again, press the
Up button.
F/B toggles the front row (8642) and rear row (7531) at the same time.
#SELECT SERVICE TUBE The head with the displayed number
*8 5 is subject to cleaning.
Press the OK button.
Note
Operate this command with the setting
below:
- Suction pump
Front row: 8, 6, 4, 2
Rear row: 7, 5, 2, 1 or
- Open air solenoid
(1,2) (3,4) (5,6) (7,8)
3-36
#SELECT SERVICE TUBE

>8 5
Executing the service with a tube selected enables the user to operate only the selected
tube when executing the subsequence services.
The target services are only

CHARGE(NORMAL) and PURGE INK
SYS.
Exiting the service menu initializes the
selection state, in which all tubes are
selected.
(3) REPLACE PRINTHEAD

Used to replace a print head.
#REPLACE PRINTHEAD
>
#REPLACE PH
*OK?
CARRIAGE MOVING
PLEASE WAIT
(The carriage moves completely.)
TURN OFF POW ER AND

REPLACE PRINTHEAD
Press the Power switch, and turn off the Printer.

SHUTTING DOWN
PLEASE WAIT
After checking that the Printer was shut down, replace the print head.
After the print head replacement, press the Power switch, and turn on the Printer.
3-37
INITIALIZING...
PLEASE WAIT
#REPLACE PH
*BOTTLE OK?
After checking that the waste ink bottle is installed on the Printer, press the OK button.
#SELECT REP-PH TUBE
*8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Press the Right or Left button, move the cursor, and use the Up or Down button to toggle
the number.
To erase the values 8 to 1, press the Down button, and to display them again, press the
Up button.
#SELECT REP-PH TUBE

*8 5
Note
Check that the replaced tubes number is
selected correctly. If an incorrect tube
number is selected,
- Unnecessarily pump operation is
activated, which wastes ink; and
- The print head connected to the
incorrect tube may be damaged.

#REPLACE PH XXXXXXXX
*BOTTLE OK?
After checking that the waste ink bottle is installed on the Printer, press the OK button.
#REPLACE PH XXXXXXXX
*EXECUTING ***
The pump operation at print head replacement is performed automatically.

CLEANING XXXXXXXX
*BOTTLE OK?
3-38
CLEANING XXXXXXXX
PLEASE WAIT XXX
The normal cleaning is performed.
INITIALIZING...
PLEASE WAIT
(End of initialization processing)

PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
(4) INK CHARGE DONE

Used to indicate whether or not ink charge was completed.
Also used to change the status.
#INK CHARGE DONE

>NO
- NO: Ink charge is not performed.

- SUBCART CHARGE DONE: After the ink was charged, the operation to supply ink from
ink cartridges is not implemented yet.
- YES: Ink charge was completed.
3-39
(5) CHCK WRINKLE SENSOR

Used to check the wrinkle sensors.
The two following operations are performed during this check.
- Check of the wrinkle sensor
- Check of the position of the wrinkle sensor check plate
#CHCK W RINKLE SENSOR

>

*OK?

*EXECUTING
(End of the wrinkle sensor check)

>
The system error 2e0X occurs after the end of the check operation if an error is detected.
3-40
(6) UNCAP CARRIAGE

Used to perform uncapping operation.
#UNCAP CARRIAGE
>
#UNCAP CARRIAGE
*OK?
#UNCAP CARRIAGE
*EXECUTING
(End of uncapping)
#UNCAP CARRIAGE
>
(7) CAP CARRIAGE

Used to perform capping operation.
#CAP CARRIAGE
>
#CAP CARRIAGE
*OK?
#CAP CARRIAGE
*EXECUTING
(End of capping)
#CAP CARRIAGE
>
3-41
3.4.4 ADJUST Menu
(1) TEST PRINTS

Used to print an adjustment pattern for mechanical or electric adjustment.
For the types of adjustment patterns in the maintenance mode, see the following.
- CHECK NOZZLE: Prints the CHECK NOZZLE pattern.

- CHECK MECHANICAL: Prints the head tilt check pattern and the nozzle position
check pattern.
- CHECK MECHANICAL(S) : Prints the head tilt check pattern and the nozzle position
check pattern.
(The printed patterns are shorter than with CHECK
MECHANICAL.)
(2) CHECK PATTERN (System firmware version 3.00 and later)

Prints adjustment patterns to verify the results of mechanical and electrical
adjustments.Press the CANCEL button during printing to stop printing.
#CHECK PATTERN
>CHECK ADJ
- CHECK PH POS: Prints the nozzle position, head position and PH R/L check
pattern. (Displayed in the maintenance mode only.)
- CHECK NOZZLE: Prints the CHECK NOZZLE pattern.
- CHECK MECHANICAL: Prints the head tilt check pattern and the nozzle position
check pattern.
Select a pattern and press the OK button. A confirmation message appears.

#CHECK PATTERN
*OK?
The following message indicates that printing is in progress.

#CHECK PATTERN
*EXECUTING
If printing is canceled, the following message is displayed until the cancel operation
finishes.
CANCELING
PLEASE WAIT
3-42
The following message is displayed until PH WARMING UP finishes.

#CHECK PATTERN
*PH WARMING UP
(3) SET BIDIR MEDIA (System firmware previous to the version 3.00)
Used to select the media type displayed in SET BIDIR MEDIA.
#SET BIDIR MEDIA

>XXXXXX
XXXXXX: Registered media name
(4) PH OFFSET VOLTAGE

Enter the correction value of the head drive voltage.
The ink color display order conforms to NO. OF INK COLORS.
#PH OFFSET VOLTAGE

#CCCA >Y.YV
CCC: Ink color, portion
A: Head nozzle row (A or B)
Y.Y: Correction value
Units: V
Range: -3.0 to +3.0
Caution
The set value is saved in the head.
3-43
(5) CAP POSITION

Used to enter the correction value of the capping unit position.
#CAP POSITION
>Y.Ymm
Units: mm
Range: -5.0 to +5.0
Caution
If the initial value is used as the correction
value, system error message 1e00 will be
displayed when the printer has been
turned on.
(6) WIPE POSITION

Used to enter the correction value of the wiping unit position.
#W IPE POSITION
>Y.Ymm
Units: mm
Range: -5.0 to +5.0
(7) WIPING POS ADJUST (With the IP-7900-22/23)

Used to adjust the wiping position.
#W IPING POS ADJUST

>
For more information, see 7.26 Correcting the Wiping Position (for the IP-7900-22/23).
3-44
(8) PLATEN HEIGHT

Used to check the the platen height's setting value.
#PLATEN HEIGHT
>YY.Ymm
YY.Y: Platen height
Units: mm
Range: 00.0 to 15.0
Caution
turned on.
(9) GAP THRESHOLD

Used to check the threshold of the gap sensor.
#GAP THRESHOLD
>YYYY
YYYY: Gap threshold
Units: -
Range: 0 to 4096
Caution
value, system error message will be
turned on.
(10) MEASURE PLATEN H

Used to measure the platen height.
#MEASURE PLATEN H
>
For more information, see 7.13 Adjusting the Height of the Gap Sensor.
3-45
(11) WIPING HEIGHT

Used to check the set value for the wiping height.
#W IPING HEIGHT
>YY.Ymm
YY.Y: Height of platen
Units: mm
Range: 00.0 to 15.0
Caution
turned on.
(12) MEASURE WIPE H

Used to measure the height of the wiping height.
#MEASURE W IPE H
>
For more information, see 7.4 Adjusting the Height of the Wiping Unit.
(13) MOVE CARRIAGE

Used to move the carriage.
#MOVE CARRIAGE
>HOME
- HOME: Moves the carriage to the home position.

- WIPE: Moves the carriage to the wiping position.
- MAINTENANCE: Moves the carriage to the maintenance area.
- PLATEN: Moves the carriage to the platen area.
3-46
3.4.5 SETUP
(1) ATG VER

Used to display the ATG (FPGA) version.
#ATG VER
*XXX
(2) RSM VER

Used to display the RSM (FPGA) version.
#RSM VER
*XXX
(3) PTG VER

Used to display the PTG (FPGA) version.
#PTG VER
*XXX
(4) ABC VER

Used to display the ABC (FPGA) version.
#ABC VER
*XXX
(5) DATE(YY/MM/DD)
Used to specify the system date.
#DATE(YY/MM/DD)
*05/08/08
Units: Date
Range: 00/01/01 to 35/12/31
3-47
(6) SYSTEM TIME

Used to specify the system time.
#SYSTEM TIME
*12 : 51
Units: Hour
Range: 00:00 to 23:59
Note
Set the time and date in Universal Time
Coordinated (UTC).
(7) SERIAL No.

Used to specify the serial number of the board.
#SERIAL No.
>XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX: 8 characters (Alphanumeric characters 0 to 9 and A to Z)
(8) INIT EEPROM

Used to initialize parameters.
#INIT EEPROM
>
(9) SAVE CALIBS

Used to save parameters in the factory default area.
#SAVE CALIBS
>
Note
After the mechanical adjustment, save
the factory default parameters by
operating this command.
3-48
(10) RESTORE CALIBS

Used to restore parameters from the factory default area.
#RESTORE CALIBS
>
Caution
After executing RESTORE CALIBS, be
sure to reboot the system.
(11) SAVE EEPROM

Used to save parameters in the backup area.
#SAVE EEPROM
>
(12) RESTORE EEPROM

Used to restore parameters from the backup area.
#RESTORE EEPROM
>
(13) NO. OF INK COLORS (For all printers except the IP-7900-22/23)
Used to select ink color quantity.
#NO. OF INK COLORS

>8
8: 8 colors
4: 4 colors
3-49
3.4.6 HEATER
(1) HEATER STANDBY TEMP

Used to specify the standby temperature of the preheater or printheater.
Centigrade Fahrenheit
#HEATER STANDBY TEMP #HEATER STANDBY TEMP
>YY C >YYY F
YY: Standby temperature
Units: C (Centigrade), F (Fahrenheit)

The unit of temperature is switched with the system menus TEMPERATURE UNITS.
Range: 15 to 45, 59 to 113
(2) STANDBY TEMP AFT

Used to specify the standby temperature of the afterheater.
#STANDBY TEMP AFT #STANDBY TEMP AFT
>YY C >YYY F
YY: Standby temperature
Units: C (Centigrade), F (Fahrenheit)

The unit of temperature is switched with the system menus TEMPERATURE UNITS.
Range: 15 to 60, 59 to 140
3-50
3.4.7 TEST PRN
(1) MNFG PATTERNx

Used to print out test pattern n.
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#EXECUTE
- MNFG PATTERN 0 : Vertical stripes

- MNFG PATTERN 1 : Horizontal stripes
- MNFG PATTERN 2 : Checker
- MNFG PATTERN 3 : 1-dot grid
- MNFG PATTERN 4 : 2-dot grid
- MNFG PATTERN 5 : Solid painting
- MNFG PATTERN 6 : 1-dot checkerboard
- MNFG PATTERN 9 : Gradation
- MNFG PATTERN 10: Hatched lines
- MNFG PATTERN 11: Feed accuracy measurement
- MNFG PATTERN 12: 4-dot grid
- MNFG PATTERN 13: Coarse solid painting
- #EXECUTE: Prints out a test pattern.

- #DIRECTION: Select the bidirectional or unidirectional printing.
- #K: Select whether or not to draw a pattern with K.
- #C: Select whether or not to draw a pattern with C.
- #M: Select whether or not to draw a pattern with M.
- #Y: Select whether or not to draw a pattern with Y.
- #Lc: Select whether or not to draw a pattern with Lc.
- #Lm: Select whether or not to draw a pattern with Lm.
- #Gy: Select whether or not to draw a pattern with Gy.
- #Lg: Select whether or not to draw a pattern with Lgy.
- #MODE: Select the print mode.
- #LENGTH: Specify the print length.
- #COUNT: Specify the number of copies.
3-51
- #EXECUTE
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#EXECUTE>
- #DIRECTION
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#DIRECTION>BI
- BI
- UNI
- #K
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#K >ON
- ON (Default)
- OFF
- #C
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#C >OFF
- ON
- OFF (Default)
- #M
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#M >OFF
- ON
- OFF (Default)
- #Y
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#Y >ON
- ON
- OFF (Default)
3-52
- #Lc
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#Lc >OFF
- ON
- OFF (Default)
- #Lm
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#Lm >OFF
- ON
- OFF (Default)
- #Gy
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#Gy >OFF
- ON
- OFF (Default)
- #Lg
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#Lg >OFF
- ON
- OFF (Default)
3-53
- #MODE
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#MODE >08070811
- 08070421: Draft 1 8 colors, 720 x 360, 4 passes, binary (2 drop)

- 08090621: Fine draft 1 8 colors, 540 x 540, 6 passes, binary (2 drop)
- 08070811: Normal 1 8 colors, 720 x 720, 8 passes, binary (1 drop)
- 08071611: High quality 8 colors, 720 x 720, 16 passes, binary (1 drop)
- 08071612: High density 2 8 colors, 720 x 720, 16 passes, binary (1 drop, 2 strokes)
- 04070421: Draft 1 4 colors, 720 x 360, 4 passes, binary (2 drop)
- 04090621: Fine draft 1 4 colors, 540 x 540, 6 passes, binary (2 drop)
- 04071611: High quality 4 colors, 720 x 720, 16 passes, binary (1 drop)
- 04071612: High density 2 4 colors, 720 x 720, 16 passes, binary (1 drop, 2 strokes)
(System FW Ver 3.00 and later)

- 030241: Max speed 8 colors/4 colors, 360 x 360
- 030621: High speed 8 colors /4 colors, 360 x 540
- 050321: Normal 8 colors /4 colors, 540 x 540
- 070411: High quality 8 colors /4 colors, 720 x 720
- 090511: Max quality 8 colors /4 colors, 900 x 900
(With the IP-7900-22/23)

- MAX SPEED L: Max speed + Smart Pass (Low) 8 colors, 360 x 360
- MAX SPEED M: Max speed + Smart Pass (Medium) 8 colors, 360 x 360
- H SPEED: High speed + Smart Pass (Medium) 8 colors, 360 x 540
- NORMAL: Normal + Smart Pass (Medium) 8 colors, 540 x 540
- HIGH QLTY: High quality + Smart Pass (Medium) 8 colors, 720 x 720
- MAX QLTY: Max quality + Smart Pass (Medium) 8 colors, 900 x 900
- #LENGTH
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#LENGTH >00400mm
Units: mm
Range: 1 to 99999
3-54
- #COUNT
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#COUNT >01
Units: Sheet
Range: 1 to 99
<Procedure>
#MNFG PATTERN 0
#EXECUTE
Use the Up or Down button to select a pattern.
#MNFG PATTERN 3
#EXECUTE
Use the Right button to go to a lower-level menu.
#MNFG PATTERN 3
#EXECUTE>
Use the Up or Down button to select a parameter.
#MNFG PATTERN 3
#DIRECTION>UNI
#MNFG PATTERN 3
#DIRECTION*UNI
Use the Up or Down button to select a parameter.
#MNFG PATTERN 3
#DIRECTION*BI
Use the OK button to determine the parameter.
#MNFG PATTERN 3
#DIRECTION>BI
Use the Up or Down button to return to EXECUTE.
#MNFG PATTERN 3
#EXECUTE>
3-55
#MNFG PATTERN 3
#EXECUTE*OK?
Press the OK button again to start printing.
#MNFG PATTERN 3
*EXECUTING
(End of printing)
#MNFG PATTERN 3
#EXECUTE>
The parameters in the layer-3 menu (DIRECTION or MODE) are held until the layer-2
pattern is changed or the display returns to the top menu.
3-56
3.4.8 MONITOR
Caution
The monitor menu does not run when an
error occurs.
(1) PRINTER SENSORS

Used to display the status of each sensor in real time.
Also used to sound the buzzer when the status has changed.
#PRINTER SENSORS
#EDGE SENSOR
- EDGE SENSOR
- HOME HEIGHT
- FRONT MEDIA
- REAR MEDIA
- HOME POSITION
- CAP
- SPITTOON CASE
- WIPER POSITION
- GRIP
- COVER
- INK SUPPLY 1
- INK SUPPLY 2
- INK SUPPLY 3
- INK SUPPLY 4
- INK SUPPLY 5
- INK SUPPLY 6
- INK SUPPLY 7
- INK SUPPLY 8
- AUTO ADJUST R (With the IP-7900-22/23)
- AUTO ADJUST G (With the IP-7900-22/23)
- AUTO ADJUST B (With the IP-7900-22/23)
3-57
<Procedure>
#PRINTER SENSORS
#EDGE SENSOR
Use the Right button to go to a lower-level menu.
#PRINTER SENSORS
#EDGE SENSOR >
Use the Up or Down button to change the type of the sensor.
#PRINTER SENSORS
#FRONT MEDIA>
Use the OK button to determine the sensor.
#PRINTER SENSORS
#FRONT MEDIA*0
Use the CANCEL button to return to PRINTER SENSORS.
#PRINTER SENSORS
#MEDIA END>
#PRINTER SENSORS
#FRONT MEDIA*0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#REAR MEDIA*0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#HOME POSITION*0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#CAP *0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#SPITTOON CASE *0
3-58
#PRINTER SENSORS
#W IPER POSITION *0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#GRIP *0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#COVER *0
#PRINTER SENSORS
#INK SUPPLY1 *0
3-59
(2) #INK SENSOR

Used to display the status of the ink-related sensor in real time.
#INK SENSOR
#INK COVER
- INK COVER
- INKPACK 1
- INKPACK 2
- INKPACK 3
- INKPACK 4
- INKPACK 5
- INKPACK 6
- INKPACK 7
- INKPACK 8
<Procedure>
#INK SENSOR
#INK COVER
Use the Right button to select the ink sensor.
#INK SENSOR
#INK COVER >
Use the Up or Down button to scroll the type of the sensor.
#INK SENSOR
#INKTRAY 1>
#INK SENSOR
#INKTRAY 1 *0
3-60
(3) SUBCARTRIDGE SENSOR

Used to display the status of the subcartridge-related sensor in real time.
#SUBCARTRIDGE SENSOR
#SUBCART COVER
- SUBCART COVER
- SUBCARTRIDGE 1
- SUBCARTRIDGE 2
- SUBCARTRIDGE 3
- SUBCARTRIDGE 4
- SUBCARTRIDGE 5
- SUBCARTRIDGE 6
- SUBCARTRIDGE 7
- SUBCARTRIDGE 8
- SUBCART FULL1
- SUBCART FULL2
- SUBCART FULL3
- SUBCART FULL4
- SUBCART FULL5
- SUBCART FULL6
- SUBCART FULL7
- SUBCART FULL8
- SUBCART EMP1
- SUBCART EMP2
- SUBCART EMP3
- SUBCART EMP4
- SUBCART EMP5
- SUBCART EMP6
- SUBCART EMP7
- SUBCART EMP8
#SUBCARTRIDGE SENSOR
#SUBCART COVER
3-61
<Procedure>
Use the Right button to select the subcartridge sensor.
#INK SENSOR
#SUBCART COVER>
#INK SENSOR
#SUBCARTRIDGE 1 >
#INK SENSOR
#Y CARTRIDGE *0
3-62
(4) BOTTLE
Used to display the status of the waste ink bottle sensor in real time.
#BOTTLE
#PRESENT
<Procedure>
#BOTTLE
#PRESENT
Use the Right button to select the waste ink bottle sensor.
#BOTTLE
#PRESENT >
#BOTTLE
#PRESENT *0
3-63
(5) FEEDING-UNIT
Used to display the status of each sensor of the roll feed unit in real time.
#FEEDING-UNIT
#FEED UP LIMIT
- FEED UP LIMIT
- FEED UP LIMIT END
- REWINDING SWITCH
- FEEDING SWITCH
<Procedure>
Use the Left button to select the roll feed unit.
#FEEDING-UNIT
#FEED UP LIMIT>
Use the Up and Down buttons to scroll the type of the sensor.
#FEEDING-UNIT
#FEED UP LIMIT END>
#FEEDING-UNIT
#FEED UP LIMIT END*0
3-64
(6) TUR SENSORS

Used to display the status of each sensor of the take-up reel unit in real time.
#TUR SENSORS
#TUR SW ITCH
- TUR SWITCH
- SLACK SWITCH
- REWIND UP LIMIT
- REWIND LO LIMIT
- FUNCTION SWITCH1
- FUNCTION SWITCH2
<Procedure>
Use the Right button to select the take-up reel unit.
#TUR SENSORS
#TUR SW ITCH >
#TUR SENSORS
#SLACK SWITCH >
#TUR SENSORS
#FUNCTION SW ITCH1*0
3-65
(7) Carriage
Used to display the status of the gap sensor.
CARRIAGE
GAP SENSOR
<Procedure>
Use the Right button to select the carriage, and use the OK button to determine it.
CARRIAGE
GAP SENSOR *XXXX
XXXX: 0 to 4096
3-66
(8) TEMP SENSORS

Used to display the status of each thermistor in real time.
#TEMP SENSORS
#AMBIENT
- AMBIENT: Environmental temperature

- PREHEATER: Temperature of PREHEATER
- PRINTHEATER L: Temperature of PRINTHEATER L
- PRINTHEATER C: Temperature of PRINTHEATER C
- PRINTHEATER R: Temperature of PRINTHEATER R
- AFTERHEATER L: Temperature of AFTERHEATER L
- AFTERHEATER C: Temperature of AFTERHEATER C
- AFTERHEATER R: Temperature of AFTERHEATER R
- Head 1: Temperature of head 1
- Head IC A1: Temperature of head IC A1
- Head IC B1: Temperature of head IC B1
3-67
<Procedure>
Press the Right button to enable the user to select the type of the thermistor.
#TEMP SENSORS
#AMBIENT >
Use the Up or Down button to scroll the type of the thermistor.
#TEMP SENSORS
#Y PH >
Use the OK button to select the thermistor.
#TEMP SENSORS #TEMP SENSORS
#Y PH *xx. xC #Y PH *xxx. xF
Displayed in the unit of the system temperature.

(Left-justified, minus sign only displayed)
3-68
3.4.9 ACTUATOR
(1) MEDIA HEATER

Used to operate the media heater.
#MEDIA HEATER
>OFF
- OFF: Turns the media heater off.

- 70-55-55: Increases the temperature of each heater up to the upper limit below.
Afterheater: 70 C;
Printheater; and
Preheater: 55 C
- 65-45-50: Increases the temperature of each heater up to the upper limit below.
Afterheater: 65 C;
Printheater: 45 C; and
Preheater: 50 C
(2) PH HEATER
Used to operate the head heater.
#PH HEATER
>OFF
- OFF: Stop
- 30C: Increases all the head heaters up to 30 C.
3-69
(3) INK SUCKING1 to 2

Used to operate pump motors 1 and 2.
#INK SUCKING1
>OFF
- OFF: Used to stop pump motors 1 and 2.

- ON: Used to operate pump motors 1 and 2.
<Procedure>
#INK SUCKING1
>OFF
With the OK button, start the pump motor operation
With the OK button, enter the parameter selection menu, and with the Up or Down button
select ON.
#INK SUCKING1
*ON
select OFF.
#INK SUCKING1
*OFF
With the OK button, stop the pump motor operation.
Note
After the ink is sucked from subcartridge,
an ink end status may be detected even
though ink is still remaining in the ink
cartridges.
3-70
(4) AIR RELEASE SOL1 to 4

Used to operate air release solenoids 1 to 4.
#AIR RELEASE SOL1

>CLOSED
- CLOSED: Used to stop (close) air release solenoids 1 to 4.

- OPEN: Used to activate (open) air release solenoids 1 to 4.
<Procedure>
#AIR RELEASE SOL1

>CLOSED
select OPEN.
#AIR RELEASE SOL1

*OPEN
With the OK button, start the air release solenoid operation, that is, open the air release
solenoid.
select CLOSE.
#AIR RELEASE SOL1

*CLOSED
With the OK button, stop the air release solenoid operation, that is, close the air release
solenoid.
3-71
(5) CAP STAT MOTOR

Used to operate the cap.
#CAP STAT MOTOR

>STOP
- STOP: Stops the capping motor.

- OPEN: Rotates the capping motor in the OPEN direction.
(The capping motor operates until STOP is selected.)
- CLOSE: Rotates the capping motor in the CLOSE direction.
(The capping motor operates until STOP is selelcted.)
<Procedure>
#CAP STAT MOTOR

>STOP
select the capping motors rotation direction.
#CAP STAT MOTOR

*OPEN
With the OK button, start the capping motors operation.
select CLOSE.
#CAP STAT MOTOR

*CLOSE
With the OK button, stop the capping motors operation.
3-72
(6) WIPE MOTOR

Used to operate the wiping unit.
#W IPE MOTOR
>STOP
- STOP: Stops the wiping motor.

- FAST: Rotates the wiping motor at high speed.
Rotation is continued until STOP is pressed.
(If rotation is continued for a long time, it will be stopped automatically.)
- SLOW: Rotates the wiping motor at low speed.
Rotation is continued until STOP is pressed.
(If rotation is continued for a long time, it will be stopped automatically.)
<Procedure>
#W IPE MOTOR
>STOP
select the wiping motors rotation speed.
#W IPE MOTOR
*FAST
With the OK button, start the wiping motors operation.
select STOP.
#W IPE MOTOR
*STOP
With the OK button, stop the wiping motors operation.
3-73
(7) INK SUPPLY MOTOR1 to 8

Used to operate supply pump motors 1 to 8.
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR1

>STOP(CLOSE)
- STOP(CLOSE): Closes and stops supply pump motors 1 to 8.

- STOP(OPEN): Opens and stops supply pump motors 1 to 8.
- TO SUBCARTRIDGE: Used to rotate supply pump motors 1 to 8 clockwise
(to subcartridge).
- TO INKPACK: Used to rotate supply pump motors 1 to 8 counterclockwise
(to ink cartridge).
<Procedure>
select the ink supply motors operation.
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR1

*STOP(CLOSE)
With the OK button, start the ink supply motors operation.
select STOP for the ink supply motors operation.
#INK SUPPLY MOTOR1

>STOP(CLOSE)
With the OK button, stop the ink supply motors operation.
Note
After the ink operations below with this command,
- Ink is supplied to the subcartridge, or
- Subcartridges ink is returned to the ink cartridge.
note that the following errors may occur:
- Ink end status is detected with ink remaining in the ink cartridge
- No ink end status is detected with the used ink amount exceeding the ink amount to be
contained in an ink cartridge (ink usage upper limit error).
- Subcartridge sensors FULL status is detected with the subcartridges remaining ink less
than the specified amount.
3-74
(8) GAP SENSOR SOLENOID

Used to operate the gap sensor solenoid.
#GAP SENSOR SOLENOID

>UP
- UP: Used to stop the gap sensor solenoid (UP).

- DOWN: Used to operate the gap sensor solenoid (DOWN).
<Procedure>
select DOWN.

*DOWN
With the OK button, start the gap sensor solenoids operation.
select UP.

*UP
With the OK button, stop the gap sensor solenoids operation.
3-75
(9) EXHAUST FAN

Used to operate the exhaust fan.
#EXAUST FAN
>OFF
- OFF: Stops the exhaust fan.

- ON: Starts the exhaust fan.
<Procedure>
select ON.
#EXAUST FAN
*ON
With the OK button, start the exhaust fans operation.
select OFF.
#EXAUST FAN
>ON
With the OK button, stop the exhaust fans operation.
3-76
(10) SUCTION FAN1 to 5

Used to operate suction fans 1 to 5.
#SUCTION FAN1
>OFF
- OFF: Stops the suction fan.

- ON: Starts the suction fan.
<Procedure>
select ON.
#SUCTION FAN1
*ON
With the OK button, start the suction fans operation.
select OFF.
#SUCTION FAN1
*OFF
With the OK button, stop the suction fans operation.
3-77
(11) MEDIA DRYING FAN1 to 5

Used to operate media drying fans 1 to 5.
#MEDIA DRYING FAN1

>OFF
- OFF: Stops the specified media drying fan.

- ON: Starts the specified media drying fan.
<Procedure>
select ON.
#MEDIA DRYING FAN1

*ON
With the OK button, start the media drying fans operation.
select OFF.
#MEDIA DRYING FAN1

*OFF
With the OK button, stop the media drying fans operation.
3-78
(12) PH COOLING FAN

Used to operate the print head cooling fan.
#PH COOLING FAN

>OFF
- OFF: Stops the print head cooling fan.

- ON: Starts the print head cooling fan.
<Procedure>
select ON.
#PH COOLING FAN

*ON
With the OK button, start the print head cooling fans operation.
select OFF.
#PH COOLING FAN

*OFF
With the OK button, stop the print head cooling fans operation.
3-79
(13) LED (RED, GREEN, BLUE) (With the IP-7900-22/23)

Used to operate the LEDs (red, green, blue).
#LED FOR RED

>OFF
- OFF: Turns off the LED.

- ON: Turns on the LED.
<Procedure>
select ON.
#LED FOR RED

*ON
Press the OK button to turn on the LED.
select OFF.
#PH COOLING FAN

*OFF
Press the OK button to turn off the LED.
3-80
3.4.10 COUNTER
(1) MEDIA USED

Used to specify the value to be displayed for the accumulated used media length.
Metric system
#MEDIA USED
>0000000m
Imperial system
#MEDIA USED
>00000000ft
Press the OK button again to start execution.
Metric system
#MEDIA USED
>0000000m
- Units: m
- Range: 0 to 2147483
Imperial system
#MEDIA USED
>00000000ft
- Units: ft
3-81
(2) RESET MEDIA USED

Used to reset the accumulated used media length.
#RESET MEDIA USED

>
#RESET MEDIA USED

*OK?
Use the CANCEL button to cancel execution.
(3) INK USED 8C

Used to indicate or set the accumulated ink usage in 8-color mode.
With the Right button, enter the lower-stage menu, and with the Up or Down button select
the ink color.
#INK USED 8C(ml)

#X >000000000
X: Slot number
Press the OK button to start setting.
#INK USED 8C(ml)

#X *000000000
- Units: ml
- Range: 0 to 999999999
3-82
(4) INK USED 4C (For all printers except the IP-7900-22/23)

Used to indicate or set the accumulated ink usage in 4-color mode.
the ink color.
#INK USED 4C (ml )

#X >000000000
X: Slot number
#INK USED 4C(ml)

#X *000000000
- Units: ml
- Range: 0 to 999999999
(5) RESET TOTAL INK

Used to reset the accumulated ink usage.
This operation resets the accumulated ink usage in the both 8-color and 4-color modes.
the ink color.
#RESET TOTAL INK

#X
X: Slot number
#RESET TOTAL INK

#X *OK?
3-83
(6) SUPPLY PUMP

Used to set the pump's accumulated usage time.
the ink color.
#SUPPLY PUMP
#X >000000000
X: Slot number
#SUPPLY PUMP
#X *000000000
- Units: turn
- Range: 0 to 999999999
(7) RESET SUPPLY PUMP

Used to reset the supply pump's accumulated usage time.
the ink color.
#RESET SUPPLY PUMP

#X >
X: Slot number
#RESET SUPPLY PUMP

#X *OK?
3-84
(8) 3RDPARTY INK USED

Used to display the record of the third party ink usage.
the ink color.
#3RDPARTY INK USED

#X >
X: Slot number
- NO: Only the genuine inks have been used.

- YES The third party inks have been used.
(9) 3RDPARTY INK DATE

Used to display the date of the third party ink usage.
When no third party ink has been used, **/**/** is displayed.
the ink color.
#3RDPARTY INK DATE
X *YY/MM/DD
X: Slot number
3-85
3.4.11 Diagnostic Function (ELECT)
(1) IPB board diagnostic function

Used to diagnose IPB3 board.
#IPB
>
#IPB
*OK?
#IPB
*EXECUTING
At normal end
#IPB
*PASS
At abnormal end
#IPB
*FAIL XX
XX: Error type
- 01: ATG error

- 02: RSM error
- 04: Band memory error
- 08: Mask memory error
- 10: Flush ROM error
- 20: IPB initialization error
3-86
(2) ACT board diagnostic function

Used to diagnose ACT1board.
#ACT

#ACT
*OK?
#ACT
*EXECUTING
At normal end
#ACT
*PASS
At abnormal end
#ACT
*FAIL XX
XX: Error type
- 01: ABC error
3-87
(3) HCB board diagnostic function

Used to diagnose HCB1 board.
#HCB

#HCB
*OK?
#HCB
*EXECUTING
At normal end
#HCB
*PASS
At abnormal end
#HCB
*FAIL XX
XX: Error type
- 01: PTG error
3-88
(4) INK EEPROM diagnostic function

Used to diagnose INK EEPROM.
#INK EEPROM
>XX
Press the OK button, and use the Up or Down button to select ink color.
#INK EEPROM
*XX
#INK EEPROM
*XX OK?
At normal end
#INK EEPROM
*PASS
At abnormal end
#INK EEPROM
*FAIL XX
XX: Error type
- 01: Ink 1 error

- 02: Ink 2 error
- 04: Ink 3 error
- 08: Ink 4 error
- 10: Ink 5 error
- 20: Ink 6 error
- 40: Ink 7 error
- 80: Ink 8 error
3-89
(5) SUBCART EEPROM diagnostic function

Used to diagnose subcartridge's EEPROM.
#SUBCART EEPROM
>XX
Press the OK button, and use the Up or Down button to select ink color.
#SUBCART EEPROM
*XX
#SUBCART EEPROM
*XX OK?
At normal end
#SUBCART EEPROM
*PASS
At abnormal end
#SUBCART EEPROM
*FAIL XX
XX: Error type
- 01: Subcartridge 1 error

3-90
(6) POWER diagnostic function

Used to diagnose each power supply system.
#POW ER
>OFF
- OFF: All the power supply system is turned off.

- ON: All the power supply system is turned on.
Press the OK button, and use the Up or Down button to select ink voltage.
#POW ER
*ON
#POW ER
*ON OK?
The panel indicates as follows.

#POW ER
>ON
3-91
3.4.12 PH COLOR
(1) SELECT PH COLOR

Used to indicate or set the print head information.
select a print head. Then with the OK button, determine the selection.
#SELECT PH COLOR
>X
X: Print head position
Used to Up or Down button to select item.

- MANUFACTURE DATE
- SERIAL NUMBER
- RANK A
- RANK B
- USED DATE
- DOT COUNTER
- USED COLOR
For the panel indication after selecting the information item, see the following.
(2) MANUFACTURE DATE

Used to indicate the manufacturing date.
#MANUFACTURE DATE X
*YY/MM
X: Print head position
YY: Manufacturing year (The dominical years last two digits are indicated.)
MM: Manufacturing month
Note
??/?? is indicated in the cases below.
The print head is not installed.
The print head information is defective.
3-92
(3) SERIAL NUMBER

#SERIAL NUMBER X
*XXXXYYYYYY
X: Print head
XXXX: 4 ASCII characters
YYYYYY: Serial number without zero-surplus
Note
?????????? is indicated in the cases
below.
(4) RANK A
#RANK A X
*XX.XV
X: Print head
XX.X: Print head rank, left aligned
- Units: V
- Range: 00.0 to 99.9
Note
??.? V is indicated in the cases below.
(5) RANK B
#RANK B X
*XX.XV
X: Print head
XX.X: Print head rank, left aligned
- Units: V
- Range: 00.0 to 99.9
Note
??.? V is indicated in the cases below.
3-93
(6) USED DATE

#USED DATE X
*YY/MM/DD
Note
??/??/?? is indicated in the cases below.
(7) DOT COUNTER

#DOT COUNTER X
*XXXXXXXXM
XXXXXXXXX: Ink dots are counted and indicated by the million with zero-surplus and left aligned.
Note
????????? is indicated in the cases
below.
(8) USED COLOR

(With the IP-7900-22/23)
The two following types of color ink usage history are displayed.
#USED COLOR (SX) X

*K C M Y Lc Lm Gy Lg
The used ink color is indicated.
<Example>
When Y and Lc inks are used, the panel indicates > Y Lc.
Note
?? is indicated in the cases below.
3-94
#USED COLOR (GX) X

<Example>
Note
(For all printers except the IP-7900-22/23)
#USED COLOR X
<Example>
Note
(9) 3RDPARTY INK DATE

Used to indicate the date when a non-genuine ink was applied to the Printer.
#3RDPARTY INK DATE

*X *YY/MM/DD
**/**/** is indicated when no non-genuine ink has ever been applied to the Printer.
3-95
3.5 Specific Operations

At turning on the Printer, the Printer enters the specific mode by pressing the Power
switch and the other button at the same time. The specific modes are shown below.
Note that the two modes below are not disclosed to the users: POC skip mode and fatal
error disable mode.
Combination of buttons Specific mode
Power switch + MENU button Language setting mode
Power switch + CANCEL button POC skip mode

(Boots the system without executing
POC.)
Power switch + CANCEL button + MENU button Fatal error disable mode
(Enables panel operations even if a
fatal error has occurred.)
3.5.1 Language Setting Mode
When the user cannot understand the meaning of a menu item because the printer is set
to a language other than the native language, change this menu item to ENGLISH.
Setting the ENGLISH mode automatically changes the language displayed on the LCD to
ENGLISH and displays the menu required to specify the language, timezone, length unit,
and temperature unit.
Caution
For more information, see 3.6.1
Language Setting.
3-96
3.5.2 POC Skip Mode (Unavailable for Users)
This mode is used to skip POC (self-diagnosis). Other operations are the same as the
normal setup operations.
This mode is available for forcibly operating the printer when a POC error has occurred.
(However, this mode is not intended to assure printer operations against an error.)
Actually POC processing is not skipped, and a POC error notification is only returned as
the normal value.
Caution
A POC error means system errors 1100
to 1E20.
3.5.3 Fatal Error Disable Mode (Unavailable for Users)
This mode enables panel operations when an unrecoverable error has occurred.
Setting this mode places the system into the password entry state to enter the
maintenance mode.
This mode is held until the system shuts down.
MAINTENANCE MODE
PASSWORD?
Entering the correct password boots the system in the relevant mode.
This mode is used to:
- release a long-time storage error
- initialize parameters
- check the monitor
- update in the online mode
- check the version with the carriage fixed.
This mode enables the following operations.
- Processing is continued until the system shuts down.
- The system is not placed into the online mode.
- Error detection is not performed. (No error is displayed.)
- The carriage functions are not available. (Printing and cleaning)
- The carriage-managed time is not updated.
3-97
3.6 Operation Guidances

3.6.1 Language Setting
When the power is turned on initially after shipment or when the system is booted using
the Power switch and MENU button (special mode), the following menus are displayed.
INITIALIZING...
PLEASE WAIT
#LANGUAGE
#LANGUAGE
*JAPANESE
ENGLISH
Use the Up or Down button to select the
FRANCAIS
language.
ITALIANO
DEUTSCH
When specifying the language, the menu
ESPAOL
item (row 1) is displayed in English. The
parameter (row 2) is displayed in the PORTUGUS
relevant language.
JAPANESE
#LANGUAGE
*JAPANESE OK?
Press the OK button. Press the CANCEL button.
#TIME ZONE (YY/MM/DD) Returns to the first step for selecting the
language.
*yy/mm/dd hh:mi +00
Use the Up or Down button to select the timezone.
#TIME ZONE (YY/MM/DD)

*yy/mm/dd hh:mi +12
#TIME ZONE (YY/MM/DD)

*yy/mm/dd hh:mi OK?
3-98
#LENGTH UNITS Returns to the first step for selecting the

timezone.
*MILLIMETER
Use the Up or Down button to select the unit of the length.
#LENGTH UNITS
*INCH
#LENGTH UNITS
*INCH OK?
#TEMPERATURE UNITS Returns to the first step for selecting the

unit of the length.
*CENTIGRADE
Use the Up or Down button to select the unit of the temperature.
#LENGTH UNITS
*FAHRENHEIT
#TEMPERATURE UNITS
*FAHRENHEIT OK?
The guidance message below is displayed on the LCD only at the Printers first powering
on after the factory shipment.
#NO. OF INK COLORS (For all printers except the IP-7900-22/23)
*8 COLORS
#NO. OF INK COLORS (For all printers except the IP-7900-22/23)
*8COLORS OK?
INITIALIZING... Returns to the first step for selecting the

unit of the temperature.
PLEASE WAIT
3-99
PRINTER READY
ROLL: 1626/PAPER
The user cannot return to the item for

which setting has been completed. To
cancel a guidance that has been
advanced erroneously, shut down the
system once, and enter this mode again
to retry the guidance from the beginning.
(The message displayed only at the Printers first powering on after the factory shipment)
OPEN SUBCART COVER
CCC LOAD SUBCART
3-100
This chapter explains the general troubleshooting procedures for the printer.
Before assuming that the printer is defective check the following items.
4.1 Check Items for Errors

Phenomenon Check item Action
No power is The power cord is not connected Correctly connect the power cable to the outlet.
being supplied. correctly.
Power is not being supplied to Supply power to the outlet.
the outlet.
The Printer power switch has not Turn the Printer power switch on.
been correctly turned on or off.
The Heager power switch has Turn the Heater power switch on.
not been correctly turned on or
off.
The device is not The error indicator LED lights up Follow the instruction of the displayed error message.
turned on and an error message is
correctly, or does displayed on the LCD.
not run.
Printing failed. The USB cable is not connected Correctly connect the USB cable.
correctly.
The error indicator LED lights up Follow the instruction of the displayed error message.
and an error message is
displayed on the LCD.
The error indicator LED is turned Print a CHECK NOZZLE pattern.
off.
Sent data is not The data lamp is blinking. Confirm the PC communication conditions.
printed smoothly.
Image quality is The correct media is not being Use the media specified by us.
low. used.
The correct ink is not being used. Use the ink specified by us.
The print head is dirty. Clean the print head.
Media jams The correct media is not being Check that the specified media type matches the set
occur frequently. used. media.
Use the OKI Data Infotech-specified media.
Media is not positioned correctly. Load the media correctly.
Obstructions are found in the Remove the obstructions.
carriage route or in the media
transfer route.
4-1
4.2 Actions for Operation Errors

The messasge CHECK The ink cartridge has Make sure that the ink cartridge is installed
INK PACK is displayed not been installed correctly.
while the ink cartridge correctly.
was installed on the
Printer.
The Printer issues an A motor-related failure Test the actuator in the maintenance mode,
unusual sound. occurs. and check operations.
4.3 Actions for Image Quality Errors

A blank sheet is output or Blank data was sent. Confirm the printing data.
a printout is not clear. The operating Adjust the room temperature so that it is
environment does not between 20 C and 25 C.
match the
specifications of this
device.
Media settings are Check the media settings.
incorrect.
Missing dots are found or A obstruction is found Select CLEANING in the CLEANING menu.
the printout is blurred. on the print head.
The ink bleeds. The media (front or Make sure media is positioned correctly.
(Washed out) back) has been
positioned incorrectly.
Media settings are Check the media settings.
incorrect.
The temperature of Raise temperature heater.
the heater is too low.
Printout is smeared. The media edge is Check if the edge has turned. If so, cut the end
folded. of the media.
The media is If the media is creased, feed it up to the
wrinkled. uncreased section and cut it at that position.
Media setting is Install the media properly.
inappropriate, or
media is wrinkled.
The platen is dirty. Clean the platen.
Missing dots are found at The environmental Operate the printer in the recommended
starting the print. temperature is too environment. Turn the head warm-up mode on.
low.
Though the cleaning is The nozzle is Fill the cap with ink, which is called as Fillcap
repeated, missing dots clogged. operation.
are not recovered.
An image quality error is The capping or wiping Check that the capping and wiping units are
not recovered after unit is smeared. not smeared. If they are, wipe off with the
cleaning. cleaning liquid.
4-2
4.4 Check Items for Heater Errors

The heater was set to the heat state in The IPB3 board is defective. Replace the IPB3 board.
the actuator menu, but it did not heat up.
(+ is not displayed in the heater display
mode. The specified and current
temperatures are displayed.)
The heater was set to the heat state in The ACT1 board is securely connected to Reconnect the TRC2-CTL cable
the actuator menu, but it did not heat up. the TRC2 board using a cable. connectors in both the ACT1 and
(+ is displayed in the heater display TRC2 board sides.
mode, and the heater-on indicator LED The TRC2 board is defective. Replace the TRC2 board.
on the TRC2 board does not light up.)
The heater was set to the heat state in The TRC2 board is securely connected to
the actuator menu, but it did not heat up. the media heater using a cable. Reconnect the
(+ is displayed in the heater display CABLE(Heater)-ASSY(HV104)
mode, and the heater-on indicator LED cable connectors in both the
on the TRC2 board lights.) TRC2 board and heater sides.
Reconnect the
CABLE(Heater)-ASSY(HV74)
cable connectors in both the
TRC2 board and heater sides.
The ACT1 board is defective. Replace the ACT1 board.
The IPB3 board is defective. Replace the IPB3 board.
The TRC2 board is defective. Replace the TRC2 board.
The heater is defective. Replace the heater that does not
heat up.
The heater has heated when the heat The registration menu settings are Correct the registration menu
state was set in the actuator menu, but it correct. settings.
did not heat up when printing. The PC settings are correct. Correct the PC settings.
The temperature displayed on the panel Correctly connect the connector.
exceeds the specified value (too high). The CABLE (Thermistor)- ASSY(HV104)
The temperature specified on the panel connector for connecting the thermistor is
and the actual temperature are normal, cross-connected.
but the surface temperature of the
heater is extremely high. The CABLE (Thermistor)- ASSY(HV74)
connector for connecting the thermistor is
cross-connected.
Correctly connect the connector.
The CABLE (Heater)-ASSY(HV104)
connector for supplying AC to the heater
is cross-connected.
The CABLE (Heater)-ASSY(HV74)

connector for supplying AC to the heater
is cross-connected.
The TRC2 board is defective. Replace the TRC2 board.
The ACT1 board is defective. Replace the ACT1 board.
The heater is defective. Replace the heater that is
running abnormally.
4-3
4.5 Checking Air Presence in the Circuit after Ink

Charge
4.5.1 After Initial Charge is completed
1. Check whether any air exists in the ink

tubes between the subcartridge and the
print head.
If there is no air, go on to Step 2.

If there is air, follow the steps below.
(1) Confirm the tip of the capping unit

touches the head base.
If not, adjust the position of the

capping unit (Refer to 7.7
Positioning the Capping Unit in
the Installation Manual).
4-4
(2) Confirm the joint of the ink tube is

securely tightened.
If it is loose, remove the joint and

check the o-ring inside and;
i) Push the o-ring all the way

seated.
ii) Place the o-ring in correct
position.
Note
This check is not required on the
IP-7900-22/23.
(3) Confirm the cap is positioned in the

center of the head.
4-5
(4) Confirm the carriage plate and the

capping plate are properly
positioned.
i) Remove the plate (Base Holder) ,

place the capping adjust tool to
the capping unit (see the photo)
and adjust the position (refer to
7.7 Positioning the Capping
Unit).
ii) Select PH MAIN and perform

#UNCAP CARRIAGE. Then
adjust the
PLATE(CARRIAGE-HV-R)
position with the procedure
below:
- Place a 0.3 mm-thick shim in
the clearance between the
two metal plates shown in the
picture, so that the clearance 0.3mm
width is 0.3 mm.
(5) Perform CAP CLEANING.

(6) Perform REPLACE PRINTHEAD.
4-6
2. Check whether any air exists in the ink

tubes between the subcartridge and the
ink cartridge.
If there is no air, this procedure is

completed.
If there is air, follow the steps below.
(1) Confirm the joint of ink supply tube

is securely tightened (for all tubes
found air inside).
(2) Confirm the supply pump tube is

straightened.
Disassemble the parts indicated in

the photo and straighten the tube if
twisted (for all tubes found air
inside).
4-7
4.6 Removing Ink that Adhered Inside the Pump

Tube
The pump tube inside the capping unit may break if the ink that adhered impedes the ink
output.
Depending on the Printer usage, ink may become to adhere inside the tube after one year.
We recommend using the following procedure to periodically remove the adhered ink.
1. Remove the COVER(HV)FBR-R.
Tray
2. Clean any dirt inside the tray with wiper

cleaning liquid.
Remove any lumps that can impede the
ink output.
Wet with wiper cleaning liquid and leave
for a while to dissolve the dried ink.
3. Pull the pump tube out.
4-8
4. Insert a pair of tweezers or other small

tool into the pump tube opening for ink
output to remove the ink that adhered.
Opening for ink output
5. Install the pump tube.
4-9
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Engine and USB

Controller Sections)
This chapter explains troubleshooting procedures when the engine and USB controller
sections are assumed to be in abnormal condition.
If an error occurs with the printer, ordinarily, the error indicator LED lights up and an error
message appears on the LCD. For an error indicated by the LED or error message,
identify its cause and location based on the error message and take the appropriate action.
However, for an image quality error, an error message is not displayed in most cases. In
these cases, with a CHECK NOZZLE pattern identify the cause and location of the error
based on the phenomenon and take the appropriate action.
5-1
5.1 Image Quality Failure

In most cases, at an image quality failure the related error message is not displayed on the
LCD.
However, the image quality failure caused by the print head failure is detected mainly with
the CHECK NOZZLE pattern at user mode.
The following describes the criteria at installing and operating the Printer to check the
image quality failure caused by the print head failure.
(1) The image quality failure is detected only when it appears on the CHECK NOZZLE
pattern.
(2) Print a CHECK NOZZLE pattern, and identify the cause of image quality failure as:
- The failure related to the electrical system;

- The failure related to the ink system; or
- The failure related to the print heads.
<1> If the problem below is found, the cause is assumed to be related to the electrical
system.
- With all print head the CHECK NOZZLE pattern is not printed; or
- Regardless of the data, print heads eject ink.
<2> If the problem below is found, the cause is assumed to be related to the ink
system, print head, or electrical system.
- With only one print head the CHECK NOZZLE pattern is not printed; or
- Regardless of the data, print heads eject ink.
In such a case, replace the print head or the cable connected to the defective print
head, print a CHECK NOZZLE pattern again, and then identify the problem cause
as follows.
a) The cause is assumed to be related to the ink system or electrical system if the
problem persists with the same print head connected to the replaced cable.
b) The cause is assumed to be related to the electrical system if the problem
persists with the replaced print head connected to the same cable.
5-2
(3) Identify the cause related to the ink system as follows.
<1> The ink system cannot be primed.

If the ink system is not charged, its cause may be:
- The cap is smeared.
Clean the cap with the cap cleaning liquid.
- The capping position is misaligned.
Align the cap position. See 7.6 Correcting the Cap Position.
- The capping units suction is defective.
Replace the capping unit or its defective part, PUMP-F-ASSY(HV),
RUBBER(VALVE-HV), or CAP(HV).
- Air incorporated into the print heads tube.
Tighten the joint part.
- The cams phase is misaligned.
Adjust the cams home position.
- Ink supply tube is folded.
Extend the folded tube, or replace the folded tube.
- Print heads nozzle surface is smeared.
Charge the wiper cleaning liquid.
<2> The air is left in the ink tube.
Though, in most cases, a slight amount of air in the ink tube does not affect the
print quality, a considerable amount will affect the ink ejection.
- The caps suction is defective.
Replace the capping unit or its defective part, PUMP-F-ASSY(HV),
RUBBER(VALVE-HV), or CAP(HV).
- Air incorporated into the print heads tube.
Tighten the joint part.
5-3
(4) Actions for errors caused by a head
When an ink firing error is detected due to a defective head, take the following actions. If
this error persists after taking the actions, replace the head.
<1> Cleaning
- Select CLEANING in the user mode to remove air and dust in the head, and
form a normal meniscus.
This error is ordinarily recovered with NORMAL CLEANING.
- For the procedure, see the following.
See the Basic Operation Guide, Maintenance, Performing normal
cleaning.
<2> Fillcap
- Select FILLCAP in the user mode. The fillcap function fills the cap with ink,
soaks the head (nozzle side) with ink, and leaves it for the specified time to
resolve nozzle clogging. This function is available when a printing error persists
even after cleaning has been repeated.
With the fillcap function, hold the Printer for 1 to 2 hours. If the error persists after
it is left for 24 hours, prompt the user to contact the service center.
<3> Charging cap cleaning liquid (CHARGE CAP CL)
With cleaning liquid clean the nozzle more powerfully, and recover the nozzle
clogging.
<4> Cleaning with print head cleaning kit
With the print head cleaning kit, remove the ink clots or particles on the print
heads nozzle surface. For the procedure, refer to the IP7-125 Head Cleaning Kit
Users Guide included into the Head Cleaning Kit.
<5> Ink purge
If the error persists after performing <1> to <4>, it is assumed that the air has
incorporated into the print head and it is not removed.
To recover this status, hold the Printer for 1 to 2 hours, or purge the ink and again
charge the ink system. (Before purging ink, empty the waste ink bottle.) For the
procedure, see 7.10 Initial Ink Charge and Ink Purge.
After charging the ink system, hold the Printer for 1 hour.
5-4
<6> Cleaning with cleaning liquid set

In certain cases, an ink purge may not be enough to recover the error caused by
the transportation or long-term conditions.
In this case, use the cleaning liquid kit provided as cleaning ink to clean the ink
tube, the air damper filter, the print heads filter, and the nozzle. (Before cleaning,
empty the waste ink bottle.)
For the procedure, see the following.
- For IP-7900/IP-7700-00/01
See the Users Guide, Basic operation, Head wash.
- For IP-7700-02/03
See the Advanced Operation Guide, Turn the Printer off, Head wash.
<7> Wiping nozzle surface
With nozzle cleaning stick set, wipe the print heads nozzle surface. Before wiping,
apply the wiper cleaning liquid on the sponge.
(5) Actions for errors caused by headstrike or media jam
- If a media jam or headstrike frequently occurs during operation of the printer, the nozzle
plate of the head may be damaged. This may result in an ink droplet misdirection, not a
nozzle clogging, causing an image quality error.
- To prevent this error, review operations, for example, using the optimal media, correctly
placing media, and providing the correct operating environment.
- If headstrike occurs during printing, adjust the heater temperature.
- If the error persists, replace the print head.
(6) Ink smearing
- If ink smeared the carriage cable or head cable, wipe it off immediately.
(7) Actions for errors caused by the electrical systems problem
- Perform the action described in 5.5.64 System Error 330X: No Head.

- If the error persists, replace the PCB-ASSY-IPB3.
5-5
5.2 Types of Error Messages

Error messages are classified as shown below depending on errors.
(1) Operator Call Error Messages

Intended for the operator.
(2) Warning Messages

Intended for the operator.
(3) System Error Messages

Intended for the service center.
5-6
5.3 Operator Call Error Messages

This section shows the error messages at the errors to be recovered by the operator.
5.3.1 Ink-Related Messages
REPLACE CCC: Color, position

8-color mode: Y1, Lm2, C3, Gy4, K5, Lc6, M7, Lg8
CCC LOAD INK PACK 4-color mode: Y1, M2, C3, K4, K5, C6, M7, Y8
<Description>
Causes to be assumed are as follows:
- An ink cartridge is not installed on the Printer.
- At the board to check the ink cartridge presence, the contact is defective.
- The harness, connector, or board connected to the board above is defective.
<Action>
Check the Items to be Checked on the table below, and perform the actions starting from
the top until the problem is solved.
No Items to be Checked Action
Contact of the ink cartridges Re-install the ink cartridge.
board and PCB-ASSY-INK4 If the error persists, rub the ink cartridges board and
1
the PCB-ASSY-INK4s connector with a soft cloth or
lint-free paper dampened with ethanol.
PCB-ASSY-INK4s connector Check that the harness connector is connected to
2
connection the PCB-ASSY-INK4s connector securely.
PCB-ASSY-ACT1s connector Check that the harness connector is connected to
3
connection the PCB-ASSY-ACT1s connector securely.
CABLE(Ink)-ASSY(HV104)s Check that the condition is proper as follows.
condition - The connectors are connected securely.
4 - The cable is not disconnected.
- The harness is not pinched by the other parts.
- The cable coating is not defected.
INKBOX-UNIT(HV)s condition Check that the following is not found with each part:
- Misalignment
5
- Backlash
- Damage
6 PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Replace the PCB-ASSY-ACT1.
5-7
CHECK nn nn: 4 Read/write error

5 Authentication error
CCC INK PACK 6 Ink information error
CCC: Color, position
<Description> 4-color mode: Y1, M2, C3, K4, K5, C6, M7, Y8
Causes to be assumed are as follows:
- A problem occurred with the ink cartridge
- The contact of the board to read and write the ink cartridges information is
defective.
<Action>
Perform the actions described in the message below.
REPLACE
CCC REPLACE INK CART 8-color mode: Y1, Lm2, C3, Gy4, K5, Lc6, M7, Lg8
4-color mode: Y1, M2, C3, K4, K5, C6, M7, Y8
<Description>
The causes to be assumed are as follows.
- All the ink was used up.
- An error occurred in the ink supply system.
<Action>
Follow the displayed message.
It this message is displayed while the ink cartridge contains sufficient ink, check the Items
to be Checked on the table below, and perform the actions starting from the top until the
problem is solved.
Ink supply pump Check that:
- No ink leakage is found.
1
- The pump rotates.
If a problem is found, replace the relevant part
Subcartridge full sensor Check that the harness is connected to the sensors
2
connector securely. If not, replace the sensor.
Subcartridge empty sensor Check that the harness is connected to the sensors
3
connector securely. If not, replace the sensor.
Subcartridge Check that the problem is solved by moving the
subcartridge to the right or left and fixing it.
4
If the problem is solved, the problem was caused by
the bent subcartridge. So replace the subcartridge.
5-8
INK CHARGE NOT CARRIED OUT

CHARGE INK SYS
<Description>
The ink system is not charged.
<Action>
Follow the displayed message.
If this message is displayed while the ink system was charged, set the service menus INK
CHARGE DONE to YES.
OPEN SUBCART COVER CCC: Color, position

CCC LOAD SUBCART 4-color mode: Y1, M2, C3, K4, K5, C6, M7, Y8
<Description>
Causes to be assumed are as follows.
- The subcartridge is not installed on the Printer.
- The contact of the board to check the subcartridge presence.
<Action>
Contact of the subcartridges board Re-connect the subcartridge.
and PCB-ASSY-INK4 connector If the error persists, rub the connector of the
1 subcartridges board and PCB-ASSY-INK4
connector with a soft cloth or lint-free paper
dampened with ethanol.
PCB-ASSY-INK4s connector Check that the harness connector is connected
2
connection to the PCB-ASSY-INK4s connector securely.
PCB-ASSY-ACT1s connector Check that the harness connector is connected
3
connection to the PCB-ASSY-ACT1s connector securely.
CABLE(SubTank)-ASSY(HV104)s Check that the condition is proper as follows.
condition - The cable is not disconnected.
4 - The harness is not pinched by the other
parts.
5-9
SUBTANK BOX ASSYs condition Check that the following is not found with each
part:
- Misalignment
5 - Backlash
- Damage
If a problem is found, reassemble or replace
the unit.
5-10
nn: 4 Read/write error

OPEN SUBCART COVER nn 5 Authentication error
6 Ink information error
CCC CHECK SUBCART
4-color mode: Y1, M2, C3, K4, K5, C6, M7, Y8
<Description>
- The subcartridge is not installed on the Printer.
- The contact of the board to check the subcartridge presence.
<Action>
Contact of the subcartridges board Re-connect the subcartridge.
and PCB-ASSY-INK4 connector If the error persists, rub the connector of the
1 subcartridges board and PCB-ASSY-INK4
connector with a soft cloth or lint-free paper
PCB-ASSY-INK4s connector Check that the harness connector is connected
2
connection to the PCB-ASSY-INK4s connector securely.
3
connection to the PCB-ASSY-ACT1s connector securely.
CABLE(SubTank)-ASSY(HV104)s Check that the condition is proper as follows.
condition - The cable is not disconnected.
parts.
SUBTANK BOX ASSYs condition Check that the following is not found with each
part:
- Misalignment
5 - Backlash
- Damage
If a problem is found, reassemble or replace
the unit.
5-11
5.3.2 Waste Ink Bottle Related Messages
BOTTLE OUT
INSTALL BOTTLE
<Description>
- A waste ink bottle is not installed on the Printer.
- At the board to check the ink cartridge presence, the contact is defective.
- The harness, connector, or board connected to the board above is defective
<Action>
1 Waste ink bottle installed If a waste ink bottle is not installed, install it.
Waste ink bottle sensor (see Check that the waste ink bottle is fixed securely.
6.3.22 TRAY(WI)-TUBE(WI) and Then on the operation panels MONITOR menu,
2
SWITCH(WI)) select BOTTLE and execute PRESENT.
Check that the switch operation is correct.
Waste ink bottle sensors Remove the connector, and then re-connect it.
connector Then on the operation panels MONITOR menu,
3
select BOTTLE and execute PRESENT.
At PCB-ASSY-ACT1, connect Remove the connector, and then re-connect it.
CN14s connection Then on the operation panels MONITOR menu,
4
PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Replace the PCB-ASSY-ACT1. Then on the
operation panels MONITOR menu, select
5
BOTTLE and execute PRESENT.
PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Replace the PCB-ASSY-IPB3. Then on the
6
5-12
BOTTLE FULL
REPLACE BOTTLE
<Description>
- A waste ink bottle is full.
- The sensor to check the waste ink bottle presence is defective.
- The harness, connector, or board connected to the sensor above is defective.
<Action>
Waste ink bottle replacement Replace the waste ink bottle following the
1
displayed message.
Waste ink bottle sensor (see Check that the waste ink bottle is fixed securely.
6.3.22 TRAY(WI)-TUBE(WI) and Then on the operation panels MONITOR menu,
2
SWITCH(WI)) select BOTTLE and execute PRESENT.
Waste ink bottle sensors Remove the connector, and then re-connect it.
connector Then on the operation panels MONITOR menu,
3
At PCB-ASSY-ACT1, connect Remove the connector, and then re-connect it.
CN14s connection Then on the operation panels MONITOR menu,
4
PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Replace the PCB-ASSY-ACT1. Then on the
5
PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Replace the PCB-ASSY-IPB3. Then on the
6
5-13
5.3.3 Media Jam Related Messages
WARNING! (0)
CLEAR MEDIA JAM
<Description>
At the X motors servo control program, the following was detected.
- Overcurrent
- Servo interruption error
- Outsync error
- In-position timeout error
<Action>
Remove the obstruction from the media advance path.
If this error occurs while no obstruction is found on the media advance path, check the
Items to be Checked on the table below, and perform the actions starting from the top
until the problem is solved.
X motors connector connection Check that the six connectors below are
connected securely.
- To connect the motor unit and the board
unit:
- Connector at the motor unit side
- Connector at the relay part
1
- Connector at the board unit side
- To connect the encoder unit and the board
unit:
- Connector at the encoder unit side
2
connection securely to the PCB-ASSY-ACT1s connector.
CABLE(XENC-IF)-ASSY(HV104)s Check that the harness condition is proper as
condition follows.
- The cable is not disconnected.
parts.
If a problem is found, replace it.
CABLE(X-Y) relay ASSY(HV104)s Check that the harness condition is proper as
condition follows.
parts.
5 X motor Replace the motor.
5-14
WARNING! (1)
CLEAR MEDIA JAM
<Description>
At the Y motors servo control program, the following was detected.
- Overcurrent
- Servo interruption error
- Outsync error
- In-position timeout error
<Action>
Following the displayed message, solve the problem.
If this error occurs while:
- No media jam is found; or
- No obstruction is found on the carriage path and media advance path,
check the Items to be Checked on the table below, and perform the actions starting from
Linear scale smeared or Softly rub the linear scale with a soft cloth or lint-free
scratched paper dampened with ethanol. Be careful so that:
1
- The linear scale is not scratched, or
- The stuck parts are not removed.
Linear encoders connector Check that the harness connector is connected
2
connection securely to the boards connector.
The two sheet metals below Check that the two sheet metals are fixed on the
fixed on the FFCs FFCs PCB-ASSY-HCB1. If they are not fixed on the
PCB-ASSY-HCB1: PCB-ASSY-HCB1, fix them.
- Plate-Fix (FFC) Note
- HOLDER-FFC To fix the FFC, these two sheet metals were newly
3 established as recommended parts.
Note that the Plate-Fix (FFC) and HOLDER-FFC are
included into the recommended part below:
- FASTENING BRACKET, FFC
For the installation procedure, refer to the Subsection,
6.4.8 FASTENING BRACKET, FFC.
FFC connector connection Reconnect the FFC both in the PCB-ASSY-HCB1 side
and in the PCB-ASSY-IPB3 side.
4 If the cable terminal is smeared, before connection
softly rub it with a soft cloth or lint-free paper
V-formed folded parts width at Check that, with the FFC, the V-formed folded parts
the PCB-ASSY-HCB1-side width is proper. If not, adjust it. For the adjusting
5
FFC procedure, see the Subsection, 6.7.5
PCB-ASSY-HCB1 (Carriage board).
5-15

Y motors connector Check that the three connectors below are connected
connection securely
- To connect the motor unit and the board unit:
6
- Connector at the motor unit side
SUS belt tension Check that the SUS belt tension is within the
7
adequate range. If it is not within the range, adjust it.
8 Timing belt tension Adjust it again.
Carriage operation From the operation panels service menu, perform
RESEAT PRINTHEAD, and move the carriage. Then
turn off the Printer power while the front cover is
opened.
9 With the Y motors connector disconnected, manually
move the carriage, and check that the carriage moves
smoothly.
If a problem is found, identify the cause of the
problem, and replace the part.
10 Y motor Replace the Y motor.
CABLE(X-Y) relay Check that the harness condition is proper as follows.
ASSY(HV104) condition - The cable is not disconnected.
11 - The harness is not pinched by the other parts.
FFCs external view Check the following to ensure that the FFC is not
damaged.
- FFCs terminal part is unstuck from its base.
12
- FFCs edge parts are not abraded away with
friction.
If the FFC is damaged, replace the FFC.
13 Robot cable Replace the robot cable.
14 PCB-ASSY-HCB1 Replace PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
15 PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Replace PCB-ASSY-ACT1.
16 PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Replace PCB-ASSY-IPB3.
17 FFC Replace the all four FFCs.
5-16
WARNING! (2)
CLEAR MEDIA JAM
<Description>
The problem below occurred.
- The media edge is not detected, or
- The cut-sheet media was applied, and its media length was not the specified one.
<Action>
Solve the problem, following the displayed message.
If the error persists, check the Items to be Checked on the table below, and perform the
actions starting from the top until the problem is solved.
Media surface condition The media edge may not be detected when the
condition is as follows.
1 - Black-surface media; or
- Matte media.
Try the other media.
Nonreflecting tape condition on the Check that the tape is not smeared. If it is, softly
platen rub it with a soft cloth or lint-free paper
2
dampened with wiper cleaning liquid or cap
cleaning liquid.
SENSOR(EDGE)MAINTENANCE Check that the harness connector is securely
connected to the boards connector.
Check that the sensor is fixed securely.
3 Remove the sensor, softly rub it with a soft cloth
or lint-free paper dampened with ethanol, and
re-connect it.
If the error persists, replace the sensor.
5-17
WARNING! (3)
CLEAR MEDIA JAM
<Description>
The wrinkle sensors have detected media wrinkles.
* When Safe Scanning is set to STOP PRINTING.
Or if the printing has been canceled during the pause after the wrinkle detection by the
wrinkle sensors.
* When Safe Scanning is set to SUSPEND PRINTING or SUSPEND&WARNING.
<Action>
5-18
5.3.4 Media-Related Messages
MEDIA MISALIGNED
LOAD MEDIA
<Description>
For the roll media:
The media feed sensor became OFF.
For the cut-sheet media:
Both the media feed sensor and the media output sensor became OFF.
<Action>
Rear-side media condition The media edge may not be detected when the
- Matte media.
Paper guide Check that the media feed sensor and the media
2 output sensor are not covered with the net on the
paper guide.
Unrolling roller If the media is not unrolled while the roller is rotated,
softly rub the roller surface with a soft cloth or lint-free
3
paper dampened with ethanol.
If the roll is not rotated, replace the unrolling motor.
Take-up slack upper and lower Check that no obstruction is found between the
limit sensors light-emitting unit and light-receiving unit. If it is found,
4 remove it.
If the problem persists, adjust the units.
If the problem persists, replace the sensor.
Media feed sensor and media Replace the sensors.
5
output sensor
5-19
MEDIA MISALIGNED
CHECK MEDIA
<Description>
At install the media, the Printer detected the invalid media width below.
For IP-7900: Less than 11 in.; or
104 in. or more
For IP-7700: Less than 11 in.; or
74 in. or more
<Action>
Install the effective-width media.
If the error persists after an effective-width media is installed, check the Items to be
Checked on the table below, and perform the actions starting from the top until the
problem is solved.
- Matte media.
2
cleaning liquid.
Remove the sensor, softly rub it with a soft cloth
3
re-connect it.
5-20
MEDIA MISALIGNED
RELOAD MEDIA
<Description>
At the skew check on the media installation, after feeding the media for 100mm, the media
edge was misaligned by 2mm or more.
<Action>
Re-install the media.
If the error persists after re-installing the media, check the Items to be Checked on the
table below, and perform the actions starting from the top until the problem is solved.
- Matte media.
2
cleaning liquid.
Remove the sensor, softly rub it with a soft cloth
3
re-connect it.
5-21
5.3.5 Automatic Print Adjustment Related Messages (for IP-7900-22/23)
MANUALLY ADJUST n
ADV VAL/PRINT POS
<Description>
Automatic print adjustment has not been performed correctly.
Error code Error content Explanation

1 Calibration low limit error Automatic calculation failed with the
2 Calibration high limit error read pattern.
The sensor calibration value is Mesh media not supported error
3 outside the automatic print
adjustment range.
Adjustment value calculation error The mesh print adapter was
4 installed during automatic print
adjustment.
<Action>
Perform manual adjustment.
Press any button to exit the error display.
5-22
5.3.6 Others
CLOSE COVER
<Description>
The front cover is open.
<Action>
Close the front cover securely.
Interlock switchs harness Check that the harness connector is securely
1
connector connection connected to the boards connector.
Interlock switchs harness Check that, with the thermistor causing the error, the
condition harness condition is proper as follows.
3 Interlock switch Replace the switch.
5-23
ENV. TEMP. ERROR

CHANGE ENV TEMP
<Description>
Environmental temperature is not within the Printers operating temperature range.
<Action>
Environmental temperature Check that the environmental temperature is 5C to
1
40C.
Environmental temperature Check that the harness connector is securely
2 thermistors harness connector connected to the boards connector.
connection
Environmental temperature Check that, with the thermistor causing the error, the
thermistors harness condition harness condition is proper as follows.
Environmental temperature Replace the part.
thermistor Note
4
The environmental temperature thermistor is fixed on
the SUBTANK BOX ASSY.
6 PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Replace the PCB-ASSY-IPB3.
5-24
OPEN COVER, REMOVE

SHEET CLEANING PART
<Description>
The sheet cleaning part has been left in the Printer.
<Action>
Remove the sheet cleaning part as indicated.
If the problem is not solved, check the Items to be Checked on the table below, and
perform the actions starting from the top until the problem is solved.
Wiping unit height measurement Check for foreign particles at the wiping unit
1 position measurement position.
Check that the wiping unit is correctly installed.
Gap sensor harness condition Check that the harness is not disconnected or
caught in other parts, and that its coating is not
2
damaged.
Replace the harness if any anomalies are found.
5-25
5.4 Warning Messages

This section shows warning messages.
Warning events displayed on the LCD are resolved by pressing any button on the
operation panel.
Warning events indicated by blinking LEDs are resolved by remedying their relevant
causes.
5.4.1 Daily Maintenance Warning Message
PERFORM DAILY
MAINTENANCE NOW
<Description>
The daily maintenance to clean the capping unit has not been performed for 24 hours or
more.
<Action>
Perform the daily maintenance.
If the warning is not cancelled after the daily maintenance, check the Items to be
problem is solved.
Printer's system time Check that the system time is correct. If not, set the
1
system time correctly.
2 EEPROM Replace the EEPROM.
5-26
5.4.2 Ink Supply Pump Life Warning Message
SERVICE NEEDED
CALL SERVICE
<Description>
The life of ink supply pump is expiring.
If this warning message is ignored, ultimately the system error will occur, disabling the
printer operation until the ink supply pump is replaced.
<Action>
Contact your service representative.
5.4.3 Ink Supply Warning
LORD INK PACK

CHARGE INK
<Description>
After the ink system was charged, the ink cartridge does not supply the ink.
<Action>
Perform INK SUPPLY.
5.4.4 Cleaning Recommendation (for IP-7900-22/23)
PH RECOVERY
RECOMMENDED
<Description>
The PH Recovery operation is recommended to prevent the missing dot problem.
<Action>
Perform PH Recovery.
5-27
5.4.5 Cleaning Warning
(For IP-7900-22/23)
PERFORM
PH RECOVERY NOW
<Description>
Automatic cleaning (PH Recovery) will be performed automatically when the next printing
will start.
<Action>
Perform PH Recovery in advance to skip this operation at the start of the next printing.
(For models other than IP-7900-22/23)

PERFORM
PH RECOVERY NOW
<Description>
As the automatic cleaning is set to OFF, the Printer has not implemented the cleaning for a
prescribed period.
<Action>
5.4.6 Sheet Mount Cleaning Execution Warning (for IP-7900-22/23)
PERFORM
SHEETMOUNT CLEANING
<Description>
Sheet mount cleaning has not been performed.
<Action>
Perform sheet mount cleaning.
5-28
5.4.7 Wiper Blades Life Warning (for IP-7900-22/23)
REPLACE W IPER BLADE
<Description>
The wiper blades need to be replaced.
<Action>
Replace the wiper blades.
5.4.8 Wiper Cleaning Liquid Warning (for IP-7900-22/23)
REPLACE W IPER
CLEANING LIQUID
<Description>
The wiper cleaning liquid needs to be replaced.
<Action>
Replace the wiper cleaning liquid.
5.4.9 Warning for Media Advance Value Adjustment Execution (for

IP-7900-22/23)
ADJUST MEDIA
ADVANCE VALUE
<Description>
Media advance value has not been adjusted.
<Action>
Adjust the media advance value.
5-29
5.4.10 Bidirectional Print Position Adjustment Execution Warning (for

IP-7900-22/23)
ADJUST BIDIRECTIONAL
PRINT POSITION
<Description>
Bidirectional print position adjustment has not been performed.
<Action>
Perform bidirectional print position adjustment.
5.4.11 Ink Level Warning
This subsection explains the cause and solution at the ink LED flash.
<Description>
Remaining ink is not sufficient.
<Action>
Following the message, replace the ink cartridge.
5.4.12 Take-up Timeout Warning
This subsection explains the cause and solution at the media LED flash.
<Description>
A timeout error has occurred in the take-up reel unit.
This error occurs when the take-up slack upper limit sensor detects the media after the
prescribed time.
<Action>
At both take-up slack upper and lower limit sensors, remove the media between the
light-emitting unit and the light-receiving unit.
5-30
If the problem persists, check the Items to be Checked on the table below, and perform
the actions starting from the top until the problem is solved.
Take-up paper tube Check that the scroller is circulated correctly. If it is
1 circulated without supplying paper, fix the paper tube
again.
Take-up slack upper and lower Check that no obstruction is found between the
limit sensors light-emitting unit and light-receiving unit. If it is found,
2 remove it.
If the problem persists, adjust the units.
If the problem persists, replace the sensor.
Takeup-side scroller motor Replace the takeup-side scroller motor.
3 Take-up Motor
Take-up Motor HV74
5-31
5.5 System Error Messages

Each system error message indicates that an error has occurred while the printer was
being operated.
When an error message appears, prompt the user to reboot the system. If the error
persists, prompt the user to contact the service center.
Then discuss with the user about the conditions the error occurred in: occurrence time,
occurrence frequency, operations just before the error occurred, and environmental
temperature.
If a system error has occurred, take the following action.
<1> When a failure is identified with an error message, replace the relevant module.
<2> When it is assumed that multiple failures occur with an error message(s),
analyze the faulty parts. Use the special procedure to turn the power on and
enter the maintenance mode, and use the monitor function (that displays the
contents read by the sensor) to judge whether the circuit system is normal.
Even when a system error has occurred, the user can carry out operations if the
system is operating normally.
Error code Error name See

100X CPU Exception 5.5.1
11XX Hardware Mismatch Error 5.5.2
1200 FPGA(ATG RSM) Load Error 5.5.3
130X CRG-FFC Connection Error 5.5.4
1310 FPGA(PTG) Load Error 5.5.5
1320 CRG-FFC Connection Error 5.5.6
1400 PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Connection Error 5.5.7
1410 FPGA(ABC) Load Error 5.5.8
1500 PCB-ASSY-TRC2 Connection Error 5.5.9
1600 RSM Register Read/Write Error 5.5.10
1610 Flash Check Sum Error 5.5.11
1620 PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Initialization Error 5.5.12
1630 Band memory Read/write Error 5.5.13
1640 USB Chip Register Read/write Error 5.5.14
1650 EEPROM Initialization Check Error 5.5.15
1660 RSM Mask Memory Read/write Error 5.5.16
1670 ATG Register Read/write Error 5.5.17
1700 ABC Register Read/write Error 5.5.18
1800 PTG Register Read/write Error 5.5.19
1900 Power Supply Unit Error 5.5.20
1a00 to 1a19 Carriage Power Error 5.5.21
1a20 Wrinkle Sensor Installation Error 5.5.22
1b00 Heater Power Connection Error 5.5.23
1c0X Thermistor Connection Error 5.5.24
1d00 Printer Size Error 5.5.25
1e00 Cap Correction Value Error 5.5.26
5-32
1e10 Platen Height Unmeasurement Error 5.5.27

1e20 Wiping Height Unmeasurement Error 5.5.28
2010 Long-term Storage Error 5.5.29
203X Life-limited Part Replacement (Type) 5.5.30
2100 EEPROM I/O Error 5.5.31
2200 Data Path Time-out 5.5.32
2210 USB DMA Time-out 5.5.33
230X Suction Fan Error 5.5.34
2310 Home Position Sensor Error 5.5.35
2320 Wiper Home Position Sensor Error 5.5.36
2340 Capping Unit Sensor Error 5.5.37
2400 Environmental Temperature Thermistor Error 5.5.38
250X Media Heater Thermistor Error 5.5.39
251X Media Heater Error (High temperature) 5.5.40
252X Media heater Error (Target temperature not reached) 5.5.41
253X Media Heater Error (No interrupt) 5.5.42
260X Subcartridge Sensor Error 5.5.43
261x Subcartridge Full Sensor Error 5.5.44
262x Subcartridge Empty Sensor Error 5.5.45
263X Subcartridge Information Error 5.5.46
270X Ink Supply Pump Sensor Error 5.5.47
280X Ink Usage Upper-limit Error 5.5.48
2900 Take-up Motor Overcurrent 5.5.49
2920 Unrolling Motor Overcurrent 5.5.50
293X Suction Pump Motor Overcurrent 5.5.51
2a0X Servo Error 5.5.52
2b00 FIRE END Detection Error 5.5.53
2d0X Automatic Print Adjustment Calibration Error 5.5.54
2e0X Wrinkle Sensor Error 5.5.55
301X CRG-FFC Connection Error 5.5.56
3020 RSM-PTG FIFO Connection Error 5.5.57
3100 Edge sensor Error 5.5.58
3110 Carriage Upper Limit Sensor Error 5.5.59
3120 Carriage Up/down Motor Interruption Error 5.5.60
3130 Gap Sensor Error 5.5.61
3140 Head Cooling Fan Error 5.5.62
320X Head Drive Voltage Error 5.5.63
330X No Head 5.5.64
340X Head Information Error 5.5.65
350X Head Thermistor Error 5.5.66
360X Head Heater Error (High Temperature) 5.5.67
361X Head heater Error (Target Temperature Not Reached) 5.5.68
4XXX Firmware Internal Error (Mechanical Control-related) 5.5.69
5XXX Firmware Internal Error (Interface Related) 5.5.70
5-33
5.5.1 System Error 100X: CPU Exception
<Description>
A general CPU exception has occurred.
The number indicated by the letter X is displayed as shown below depending on the
description of an error.
X Description of error
0 TLB error exception or TLB disable exception (Read)
1 TLB error exception or TLB disable exception (Write)
2 Initial page writing exception
3 TLB protection exception (Read)
4 TLB protection exception (Write)
5 CPU address error (Read)
6 CPU address error (Write)
7 Unconditional trap (TRAPA instruction)
8 Reserve instruction code exception
9 Slot error instruction exception
a User breakpoint trap
b Non-maskable interrupt
<Faulty module>
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
Replace the PCB-ASSY-IPB3.
5-34
5.5.2 System Error 11XX: Hardware Mismatch Error
<Description>
1100: The configuration of the firmware and main board is incorrect.
1101: The configuration of the firmware and actuator board is incorrect.
1102: The configuration of the firmware and carriage board is incorrect.
<Faulty module>
1100: PCB-ASSY-IPB3
1101: PCB-ASSY-ACT1
1102: PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<Action>
Upgrade the firmware to be the latest.
If the error persists, replace the board corresponding to the error code.
5.5.3 System Error 1200: FPGA(ATG RSM) Load Error
<Description>
Failed to write config from the flash ROM on the PCB-ASSY-IPB3 to the ASIC on the
PCB-ASSY-IPB3.
<Faulty module>
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
Restart the Printer.
1 Firmware Upgrade the firmware to be the latest.
5-35
5.5.4 System Error 130X: CRG-FFC Connection Error
<Description>
The carriage cable (FFC) has been disconnected from the PCB-ASSY-IPB3.
If any of the four FFC connectors in the IPB or HCB side is disconnected, the
disconnection detection line assigned to both ends is opened, resulting in this error
occuring. The system error 130X is detected at the Printers start, and the system error
301X is detected during the print operation.
The following shows the correspondence between number X and head numbers.
X FFC connector between IPB and HCB
0 CN9
1 CN10
2 CN11
3 CN12
<Faulty module>
<1> FASTENING BRACKET, FFC
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<3> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<4> Carriage cable (FFC)
CARRIAGE CABLE HV104

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<Action>
Note
At this error, be sure to perform the items 1 to 3 below.
FFCs connector connection Reconnect the FFC both in the PCB-ASSY-HCB1 side
2 If the cable terminal is smeared, before connecting
5-36

3
damaged.
- FFCs terminal part is not unstuck from its base.
4
friction.
5 PCB-ASSY-HCB1 Replace the PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
5-37
5.5.5 System Error 1310: FPGA(PTG) Load Error
<Description>
PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
<Faulty module>
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<3> PCB-ASSY-IPB3

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<5> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
<Action>
Note
At this error, be sure to perform the items 1.to 7.
3
If the cable terminal is smeared, softly rub it with the
soft cloth or lint-free paper dampened with ethanol.
4
5-38

damaged.
5
friction.
Robot cable fixed to the cable With a cable tie, fix the robot cable to the
carriers arm part PCB-ASSY-HCB1-side cable carriers arm part.
For the connection procedure, refer to the Subsection
6
6.4.5 IP-7900: CARRIAGE CABLE HV104 and
CABLE CARRIER, IP-7700: CARRIAGE CABLE
HV74 and CABLE CARRIER74, step 9.
Robot cables connector Reconnect the robot cable in both PCB-ASSY-HCB1
connection side and PCB-ASSY-ACT1 side.
7 Before connecting, check that the connector terminals
and cable connection part are not disconnected. If a
connection failure is found, replace the robot cable.
5-39
5.5.6 System Error 1320: Data Transfer Error from FPGA-RSM to FPGA-PTG
<Description>
The connection failure occurred with the carriage cable (FFC) connected to the
PCB-ASSY-IPB3. An error occurs when the write test from the PCB-ASSY-IPB3 (RSM) to
the PCB-ASSY-HCB1 (PTG) is failed. This error is detected at powering on the Printer.
<Faulty module>
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<3> PCB-ASSY-IPB3

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<Action>
softly rub it with the soft cloth or lint-free paper
3
damaged.
4
friction.
5-40
5.5.7 System Error 1400: PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Connection Error
<Description>
Cannot confirm the connection with the PCB-ASSY-ACT1.
<Faulty module>
<1> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
Connector connection of: Loosen the screws fixing the PCB-ASSY-IPB3 and
- PCB-ASSY-IPB3; and PCB-ASSY-ACT1. Align the PCB-ASSY-IPB3s
1 - PCB-ASSY-ACT1 connector and the PCB-ASSY-ACT1s connector so
that no clearance is found between the two
connectors. Then tighten the screws again.
5-41
5.5.8 System Error 1410: FPGA(ABC) Load Error
<Description>
PCB-ASSY-ACT1.
<Faulty module>
<1> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
5-42
5.5.9 System Error 1500: PCB-ASSY-TRC2 Connection Error
<Description>
The PCB-ASSY-TRC2 is not connected.
<Faulty module>
<1> TRC2-CTL cable
<2> PCB-ASSY-TRC2
<3> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<4> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
TRC2-CTL cables condition Check that the harness condition is proper as follows.
- The connectors are connected securely.
2 PCB-ASSY-TRC2 Replace the PCB-ASSY-TRC2.
PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Replace the PCB-ASSY-IPB3.
5.5.10 System Error 1600: RSM Register Read/Write Error
<Description>
On the PCB-ASSY-IPB3, to read or write on the RSMs resistor is not performed normally.
This error is detected by writing specific data in the register with 8- or 32-bit access and
reading the register to judge whether the read data is correct when the printer is turned on.
<Faulty module>
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
If the error persists, replace the PCB-ASSY-IPB3.
5-43
5.5.11 System Error 1610: Flash Check Sum Error
<Description>
Cannot normally read the programs stored in the flash ROM.
This error is detected by performing checksum in the program area when turning the
printer on.
<Faulty module>
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
5.5.12 System Error 1620: PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Initialization Error
<Description>
The PCB-ASSY-IPB3 is not initialized.
This error is detected on the situation below:
- At starting the Printer, the PCB-ASSY-IPB3s SHA-1 code was not read correctly.
<Faulty module>
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
5-44
5.5.13 System Error 1630: Band Memory Read/write Error
<Description>
Cannot normally read or write the SDRAM (band memory) on the PCB-ASSY-IPB3 from
the CPU.
At starting the Printer, this error is detected on the situation below:
- When the Printer writes and reads the specific data on the band memory, the read
data is not the same as the written data.
<Faulty module>
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
5.5.14 System Error 1640: USB Chip Register Read/write Error
<Description>
The CPU cannot correctly read or write the PCB-ASSY-IPB3s USB controller.
This error is detected when the USB chip register is written and read.
This error is detected by reading and writing the USB-chip register when turning the printer
on.
<Faulty module>
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
5-45
5.5.15 System Error 1650: EEPROM Initialization Check Error
<Description>
Cannot normally read the parameters stored in the EPROM on the CB-ASSY-IPB3.
This error is detected by performing keyword check and checksum in the parameter area
when turning the printer on.
<Faulty module>
<1> IC(EEPROM)
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
EEPROM Re-insert the EEPROM.
1
If the problem persists, replace the EEPROM.
5.5.16 System Error 1660: RSM Mask Memory Read/write Error
<Description>
The PCB-ASSY-IPB3s RSM mask memory is not read or written normally.
This error is detected by the procedure below:
- After the printers starting-up, the specified data is written on the mask memory.
- The written data is read and checked if it is correct or not.
<Faulty module>
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
5-46
5.5.17 System Error 1670: ATG Register Read/write Error
<Description>
The PCB-ASSY-IPB3s ATG register is not read or written normally.
This error is detected by the procedure below:
- After the printers starting-up, the specified data is written on the ATG register.
- The written data is read and checked if it is correct or not.
<Faulty module>
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
5.5.18 System Error 1700: ABC Register Read/write Error
<Description>
The Printer cannot read or write the data correctly on the PCB-ASSY-ACT1s ABC register.
This error is detected by writing specific data in the register with 8-bit access and reading
the register to judge whether the read data is correct when the printer is turned on.
<Faulty module>
<1> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
If the error persists, check the harness condition is proper as follows, until the problem
solved.
5-47
5.5.19 System Error 1800: PTG Register R/W Error
<Description>
Cannot normally read or write the PTG register.
This error is detected by writing specific data in the register with 16-bit access and reading
the register to judge whether the read data is correct when the printer is turned on.
<Faulty module>

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<3> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<4> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<5> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
<Action>
Note
If this error occurs, be sure to perform the following items 1 to 6.
3
5-48

damaged.
4
friction.
damaged.
5
friction.
6
5-49
5.5.20 System Error 190x: Power Supply Unit Error
<Description>
Voltage errors are detected when the following power voltages are checked.
X Board Power name Power supply system Reference

0 PCB-ASSY-ACT1 P12V PSU38VACT1
PCB-ASSY-ACT1 P24VAR PSU24VACT1 The power is cut by
2
the interlock.
3 PCB-ASSY-ACT1 P24VSF PSU38VACT1
4 PCB-ASSY-ACT1 P24VMF PSU38VACT1
PCB-ASSY-ACT1 P38VAR PSU38VACT1 The power is cut by
6
the interlock.
7 PCB-ASSY-ACT1 P38VAF PSU38VACT1
8 PCB-ASSY-IPB3 P38VAF PSU38VACT1IPB3
PCB-ASSY-IPB3 P38VCRG PSU38VACT1IPB3 The power is cut by
9
the interlock.
Note
For the details of the power supplies relationship, see the Appendix 3 Power Supply
Schematic Diagram.
<Faulty module>
<1> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<3> Power supply unit (24V) (PSU 24V)
POWER SUPPLY (24V) U00111965500

POWER SUPPLY (24V)
U00111965501
<4> MICRO SWITCH HV (interlock switch)
<5> Power supply unit (38V) (PSU 38V)
POWER SUPPLY (38V) U00111966600

POWER SUPPLY (38V)
U00111966601
Note
If the PSU 38V is cut, on the PCB-ASSY-IPB3 the CPU and the peripheral circuits power
are cut, and this error cannot be caused. Therefore the error 190X is hardly caused by the
PSU 38Vs problem.
5-50
<Action>
<1> Case 1
The problem below occurred:
X=0: System error 1900 (PCB-ASSY-ACT1 P12V)
X=3: System error 1903 (PCB-ASSY-ACT1 P24VSF)
X=4: System error 1904 (PCB-ASSY-ACT1 P24VMF)
X=5: System error 1905 (PCB-ASSY-ACT1 P38V)
X=7: System error 1907 (PCB-ASSY-ACT1 P38VAF)
Note
The power supply system related to this error number is generated from the PSU 38V, and
the power does not pass through the interlock relay. So check the Items to be Checked on
the table below, and perform the actions starting from the top until the problem is solved..
3 Power supply unit (38V) Replace the power supply unit (38V).
<2> Case 2
X=8: System error 1908 (PCB-ASSY-IPB3 P38VAF)
Note
the power is supplied to the PCB-ASSY-IPB3 without passing through the interlock relay.
So check the Items to be Checked on the table below, and perform the actions starting
from the top until the problem is solved.
5-51
<3> Case 3
X=6: System error 1906 (PCB-ASSY-ACT1 P38VAR)
Note
Interlock switch ON/OFF Open and close the front cover, and check that the
detected by the Printer Printer detects the interlock switch ON/OFF.
If the Printer does not react to the interlock switch
ON/OFF, check that the PCB-ASSY-ACT1s connector
1
CN2 is connected.
If the error persists, check the interlock switchs
connector is connected.
If the error persists, replace the interlock switch.
<4> Case 4
X=9: System error 1909 (PCB-ASSY-IPB3 P38VCRG)
Note
1
CN2 is connected.
5-52
<5> Case 5
X1: System error 1901 (PCB-ASSY-ACT1 P24V)
Note
the power does not pass through the interlock relay. So check the Items to be Checked
on the table below, and perform the actions starting from the top until the problem is
solved.
<6> Case 6
The problem below occurred.
X2: System error 1902 (PCB-ASSY-ACT1 P24VAR)
Note
the power is supplied after passing through the interlock relay. So check the Items to be
problem is solved.
1
CN2 is connected.
5-53
5.5.21 System Error 1a00 to 1a19: Carriage Power Error
<Description>
The power voltage of the carriage board was obtained by AD conversion, but an error
between the unconverted and converted values exceeded the specified range (+/-10%).
XX Carriage Power XX Carriage Power

00 CRG P38VAF 0d CRG VDD2B2
01 CRG PREF 0e CRG VDD2A3
02 CRG P1.2V 0f CRG VDD2B3
03 CRG P3.3V 10 CRG VDD2A4
04 CRG P5V 11 CRG VDD2B4
05 CRG P24V_FAN1 12 CRG VDD2A5
06 CRG P24V_FAN2 13 CRG VDD2B5
07 CRG P12V_FAN3 14 CRG VDD2A6
08 CRG P38VCRG 15 CRG VDD2B6
09 CRG P24V 16 CRG VDD2A7
0a CRG VDD2A1 17 CRG VDD2B7
0b CRG VDD2B1 18 CRG VDD2A8
0c CRG VDD2A2 19 CRG VDD2B8
<Faulty module>
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<3> PCB-ASSY-IPB3

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<5> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
5-54
<Action>
Note
If this error occurs, be sure to perform the actions at the steps 1 to 5.
The two sheet metals below fixed on the FFCs Check that the two sheet metals are fixed
PCB-ASSY-HCB1: on the FFCs PCB-ASSY-HCB1. If they
- Plate-Fix (FFC) are not fixed on the PCB-ASSY-HCB1, fix
- HOLDER-FFC them.
Note
To fix the FFC, these two sheet metals
were newly established as recommended
1 parts.
Note that the Plate-Fix (FFC) and
HOLDER-FFC are included into the
recommended part below:
For the installation procedure, refer to the
Subsection, 6.4.8 FASTENING
BRACKET, FFC.
Robot cable fixed to the cable carriers arm With a cable tie, fix the robot cable to the
part PCB-ASSY-HCB1-side cable carriers
arm part.
For the connection procedure, refer to the
2
Subsection 6.4.5 IP-7900: CARRIAGE
CABLE HV104 and CABLE CARRIER,
IP-7700: CARRIAGE CABLE HV74 and
CABLE CARRIER74, step 9.
FFCs connector connection Reconnect the FFC both in the
PCB-ASSY-HCB1 side and in the
PCB-ASSY-IPB3 side.
3
If the cable terminal is smeared, before
connecting softly rub it with a soft cloth or
lint-free paper dampened with ethanol
Robot cables connector connection Reconnect the robot cable in both
PCB-ASSY-HCB1 side and
PCB-ASSY-ACT1 side.
Before connecting, check that the
4
connector terminals and cable
connection part are not disconnected. If a
connection failure is found, replace the
robot cable.
V-formed folded parts width at the Check that, with the FFC, the V-formed
PCB-ASSY-HCB1-side FFC folded parts width is proper. If not, adjust
5 it. For the adjusting procedure, see the
Subsection, 6.7.5 PCB-ASSY-HCB1
(Carriage board).
5-55

Units below connected to the Reconnect the print head cable, and
PCB-ASSY-HCB1 supply the power again.
At 1A00 to 1A09: If the problem persists, replace the print
Skip this step and go to the step 7. head cable A with the other print head
At 1A0A to 1A0B cable B. If the error is solved at the print
Print head cable to connect print head 1 head cable As original position, and
At 1A0C to 1A0D found at the cable As current position,
Print head cable to connect print head 2 the print head cable is assumed to be
At 1A0E to 1A0F defected. So replace the print head cable
Print head cable to connect the print head 3 with a new one.
At 1A10 to 1A11 Remove the print head cable A from the
Print head cable to connect print head 4 print head, and connect the print head to
6
At 1A12 to 1A13 the other print head cable B. If the
Print head cable to connect print head 5 problem is found at the print head cable
At 1A14 to 1A15 B, the print head is assumed to be
Print head cable to connect print head 6 defective. So replace the print head.
At 1A16 to 1A17
Print head cable to connect print head 7
At 1A18 to 1A19
1 and print head 1 connection
System error
FFCs external view Check the following to ensure that the
FFC is not damaged.
- FFCs terminal part is not unstuck from
7 its base.
- FFCs edge parts are not abraded
away with friction.
5-56
5.5.22 System Error 1a20: Wrinkle Sensor Installation Error
<Description>
The wrinkle sensors are always detecting wrinkles.
<Faulty module>
<1> PCB-ASSY-PZF1
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1S
<Action>
PZF1 board installation - Check that the PZF1 board is correctly installed.
- Remove and reinstall the PZF1 board.
1
If the board connectors are dirty, wipe them softly using a
soft cloth or a piece of paper moistened with ethanol.
2 PCB-ASSY-PZF1 Replace the PCB-ASSY-PZF1
3 PCB-ASSY-HCB1S Replace the PCB-ASSY-HCB1S
5-57
5.5.23 System Error 1b00: Heater Power Connection Error
<Description>
Zero cross signal from heater power supply unit is not detected correctly.
<Faulty module>
<1> TRC2-CTL cable
<2> PCB-ASSY-TRC2
<3> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<4> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
Heater-side AC power supply Check that:
- The heater power switch is ON.
1 - The heaters power cord is connected securely.
- At the socket with the heaters power cord inserted,
the voltage is correct.
Heater-side AC power cord Check that AC cables are connected securely at the
wiring in the Printer positions below.
- From the heater power inlet to the heater power
2
switch
- From the heater power switch to the
PCB-ASSY-TRC2
TRC2-CTL cables external Check that the harness condition is proper as follows.
view - The connectors are connected securely.
5-58
5.5.24 System Error 1c0X: Thermistor Connection Error
<Description>
The values of thermistors are abnormal.
The following shows the correspondence between the number X, thermistors, and actions.
X Thermistor Action
Also see the Subsection 5.5.38 System
0 Environmental temperature Error 2400: Environmental
Temperature Thermistor Error.
1 Preheater Also see the Subsection 5.5.39 System
2 Afterheater (Center) Error 250X: Media Heater Thermistor
3 Afterheater (Left) Error.
4 Afterheater (Right)
5 Printheater (Center)
6 Printheater (Left)
7 Printheater (Right)
<Faulty module>
<1> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<3> For 1c00: Environmental temperature thermistor
<4> For 1c01: Supply side paper guide
REAR-PAPER-GUIDE-104
REAR-PAPER-GUIDE-74
<5> For 1c02 to 1c04: Takeup-side paper guide
FRONT-PAPER-GUIDE-104
<6> <6> For 1c05 to 1c07: Platen
PLATEN-104
PLATEN-74
<Action>
External view of the Check that, with the thermistor, the condition of the
thermistors harness harness causing the error is proper as follows.
1
Thermistor Replace the whole unit including the thermistor
2
causing the error.
5-59

5-60
5.5.25 System Error 1d00: Printer Size Error
<Description>
The installed firmware does not match the printer's size (104 in. or 74 in.).
The error is detected after the printers starting-up by checking the harness wiring suction
fans is for IP-7700 (for 74 in.) or IP-7900 (for 104 in.).
<Faulty module>
<1> Firmware
<2> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<3> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<4> CABLE(FAN-SENSOR)-ASSY(HV104)
<Action>
Harness connection Check that the connector of the harness below is securely
2
- CABLE(FAN-SENSOR)-ASSY(HV104)
- CABLE(FAN-SENSOR)-ASSY(HV74)
5-61
5.5.26 System Error 1e00: Cap Correction Value Error
<Description>
The correction value of the cap position is 0 (not corrected).
(The correction value of the cap position must be a value other than 0.)
<Faulty module>
<1> IC (EEPROM)
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
Cap position correction value Start the Printer in the Fatal Error Disable mode (see
1 the Subsection 3.5.3). Calibrate the 8-6 cap position,
and apply a value except 0 to the correction value.
5-62
5.5.27 System Error 1e10: Platen Height Unmeasurement Error
<Description>
The platen height is not measured yet.
(The platen height measurement value must be set to the value except 0.)
<Faulty module>
<1> IC(EEPROM)
<2> GAP SENSOR
<3> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<4> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
Platen height measurement Start the Printer in the Fatal Error Disable mode (see
value the Subsection 3.5.3). Adjust the gap sensor height
1
(see the Section 7.13), and measure the platen height
again.
GAP SENSOR Check that the sensors harness condition is proper
as follows.
3
If no problem is found and the error persists, replace
the sensor.
5-63
5.5.28 System Error 1e20: Wiping Height Unmeasurement Error
<Description>
The wiping unit height measurement value is 0, which means that no measurement value
was obtained. (Normally the measurement value must not be 0.
<Faulty module>
<1> IC(EEPROM)
<2> GAP SENSOR
<3> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<4> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
Wiping unit height Start the Printer in the Fatal Error Disable mode (see
measurement value the Subsection 3.5.3). Adjust the wiping unit height
1
(see the Section 7.4), and measure the wiping unit
height again.
GAP SENSOR Check that the sensors harness condition is proper
as follows.
3
If no problem is found and the error persists, replace
the sensor.
5-64
5.5.29 System Error 2010: Long-term Storage Error
<Description>
If the Printer is powered off for one month (31 days) or more, the Printer considers that the
user cannot recover the Printer, and displays this error message.
Normally this error is issued to prompt the service engineers maintenance. However,
some parts are assumed to be defective on the situation below.
- This error was issued while the Printer has been powered off for 30 days or less.
This error is not recovered by restarting the Printer.
<1> PUMP-TUBE-ASSY
<2> PUMP-F-ASSY
<Faulty module>
<1> IC(EEPROM)
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
As a usual mantenance, be sure to perform the actions at the steps 1-4 of the list below.
the step 5 until the problem is solved on the cases below:
- The error persists after performing the steps 1-4.
- The error was issued while the Printer has been powered off for 30 days or less.
Error flags reset Start the Printer in the Fatal Error Disable mode and
enter the password (see the Subsection 3.5.3).
1
Then by pressing the POWER switch on the operation
panel, turn off the Printer.
PUMP-TUBE-ASSY With the all PUMP-TUBE-ASSYs, check that the tube
is not clogged with ink by:
- Visually inspecting the external view; or
- Manually pinching the tube.
2 If the tube is clogged, replace the
PUMP-TUBE-ASSY.
After the replacement, reset the accumulated pump
operation time corresponding to the replaced
PUMP-TUBE-ASSY (see the Subsection 3.4.9).
PUMP-F-ASSY With the all PUMP-TUBE-ASSYs, check that the tube
is not clogged with ink by:
- Visually inspecting the external view; or
- Manually pinching the tube.
3 If the tube is clogged, replace the
PUMP-TUBE-ASSY.
After the replacement, reset the accumulated pump
operation time corresponding to the replaced
PUMP-TUBE-ASSY (see the Subsection 3.4.9).
5-65

Printer at powering on Supply the power to the Printer, and check that the
4
error was cleared.
Printers system time Check that the Printers system time is correct. If not,
5
set the correct system time.
5-66
5.5.30 System Error 203X: Life-limited Part Replacement
<Description>
The ink supply pump, a preventive maintenance part was operated for 259,700 rpm or
more.
203X:
X Supply pump No.
0 No.1
1 No.2
2 No.3
3 No.4
4 No.5
5 No.6
6 No.7
7 No.8
<Faulty module>
<1> SUPPLY PUMP-UNIT
<2> IC(EEPROM)
<3> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
Replace the SUPPLY PUMP-UNIT
Perform the steps 1 to 3.
If the error is not recovered, check the Items to be Checked on the table below, and
perform the actions starting from the step 4 until the problem is solved.
SUPPLY PUMP-UNIT Replace the SUPPLY PUMP-UNIT corresponding to
1
the error code
#RESET SUPPLY PUMP Reset the accumulated operation time of the SUPPLY
2
PUMP-UNIT corresponding to the error code.
Printer at powering on Supply the power to the Printer, and check that the
3
error was cleared.
5-67
5.5.31 System Error 2100: EEPROM I/O Error
<Description>
Cannot normally read or write the EEPROM on the PCB-ASSY-IPB3.
<Faulty module>
<1> IC(EEPROM)
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
EEPROMs mounting condition Remove the EEPROM from the socket, check that its
pins are not bent nor damaged, then set the EEPROM
1
to the original position so that its direction is the same
as the original.
5.5.32 System Error 2200: Data Path Time-out
<Description>
Block clear processing in the band memory has not finished.
<Faulty module>
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
5-68
5.5.33 System Error 2210: USB DMA Time-out
<Description>
From the USB controller to the band memory, USB data transmission's DMA is not
completed.
<Faulty module>
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
5-69
5.5.34 System Error 230X: Suction Fan Error
<Description>
The suction fan is not rotating.
X Suction fan.
0 Suction fan 1
1 Suction fan 2
2 Suction fan3
3 Suction fan 4
4
Suction fan 5
<Faulty module>
<1> FAN4 (suction fan)
<2> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<Action>
Suction fans operation Unload the media from the Printer, again supply the
power to the Printer, and enter the maintenance
mode.
1
From the actuator menu, operate the suction fan
motor causing the error, and check the fans operating
sound.
Suction fans harness condition Check that, at the suction fan causing the error, the
harness condition is proper as follows.
2
3 Suction fan Replace the suction fan motor causing the error
5-70
5.5.35 System Error 2310: Home Position Sensor Error
<Description>
Cannot detect the home position of the carriage.
<Faulty module>
<1> PHOTO INTERRUPTER (Home position sensor)
<2> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
CABLE(HPOS)-ASSY(HV104)
<4> CABLE(HPOS)-ASSY(H3)
CABLE(HPOS)-ASSY(HV104)
<Action>
Home position sensor condition Check that the sensor is fixed securely, and
visually inspect that it is not damaged.
1
Then softly rub the sensors surface with a soft
cloth or lint-free paper dampened with ethanol.
Harness condition Check that, at the suction fan causing the
error, the harness condition is proper as
follows.
2
- The harness is not pinched by the other
parts.
3 Home position sensor Replace the sensor.
(All printers except the IP-7900-22/23) (All printers except the IP-7900-22/23)
PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Replace the PCB-ASSY-ACT1.
4
(IP-7900-22/23) (IP-7900-22/23)
PCB-ASSY-HCB1 Replace the PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
5-71
5.5.36 System Error 2320: Wiper Position Sensor Error
<Description>
The wipers home position is not detected.
<Faulty module>
<1> SWITCH(WIPE) (wiper position sensor)
<2> MOTOR(WIPE) (wiping motor)
<3> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<4> CABLE(XENC-IF)-ASSY(HV104)
<Action>
Wipers operation Enter the maintenance mode, and from the actuator
menu operate the wiping motor.
1
If the wiper does not operate while issuing the motors
operating sound, reassemble the wiping unit.
Wiper position sensors Check that the sensor is fixed securely.
2
condition
Harness condition Check that, with the sensor and monitor, the harness
condition is proper as follows.
3
Wiper position sensor If the error persists while the wiper operates, replace
4
the sensor.
5 Wiping motor Replace the motor.
5-72
5.5.37 System Error 2340: Capping Unit Sensor Error
<Description>
The capping unit sensor status does not change.
<Faulty module>
<1> MICRO SWITCH 4 (capping unit sensor)
<2> MOTOR(CAP)-UD (capping unit up/down motor)
<3> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<4> CABLE(CAP-IF)-ASSY(HV104)
<5> CABLE(CAP-IF)-ASSY(HV74)
<Action>
Harness condition Check that the harness condition is proper as follows.
Capping unit sensor Enter the maintenance mode, and from the actuator
2 menu operate the motor.
If the cap operates up and down, replace the sensor.
3 Capping unit up/down motor Replace the motor.
5-73
5.5.38 System Error 2400: Environmental Temperature Thermistor Error
<Description>
The environmental temperature sensors value is:
- 10 C or less; or
- 85 C or more
<Faulty module>
<1> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<3> Environmental temperature thermistor
<4> CABLE(SubTank)-ASSY(HV104)
<5> CABLE(SubTank-IF)-ASSY(HV104)
<Action>
Environmental temperature Start the Printer in the Fatal Error Disable mode (see
the Subsection 3.5.3).
1 On the MONITOR menu, select TEMP
SENSORS-AMBIENT, and check the displayed
environmental temperature.
Thermistors harness condition Check that the thermistor harness condition is proper
as follows.
2
3 thermistor Replace the thermistor.
5-74
5.5.39 System Error 250X: Media Heater Thermistor Error
<Description>
The heater thermistors read value is:
- 20 C or less; or
- 200 C or more
X
1 Preheater
3 Afterheater (Center)
5 Afterheater (Left)
<Faulty module>
<1> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<3> For 2501: Supply-side paper guide
REAR-PAPER-GUIDE-74
<4> For 2503, 2505, and 2507: Takeup-side paper guide
<5> For 2502, 2504, and 2506: Platen
PLATEN-104
PLATEN-74
<6> For 2501: CABLE(XENC-IF)-ASSY(HV104)
<7> For 2502 to 2507: CABLE(Thermistor)-ASSY(HV104)
<Action>
Media heater Start the Printer in the Fatal Error Disable mode (see
1 On the MONITOR menu, select the thermistor
causing the error, and check the displayed
temperature.
5-75

Thermistors harness condition Check that, with the thermistor causing the error, the
2
Thermistor Replace the whole unit including the thermistor
3
causing the error.
5-76
5.5.40 System Error 251X: Media Heater Error (High temperature)
<Description>
The heater thermistor value is 85 C or more.
As the media heater control is defective, the temperature was increased excessively.
X
1 Preheater
<Faulty module and action>

<1> PCB-ASSY-TRC2
<2> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<3> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
Media heaters operation Start the Printer in the Fatal Error Disable mode (see
If the heater temperature increases without +
1 displayed in the heater display mode, perform the
action described in the step 2.
If this error occurs without the media heater operation,
perform the action at the system error 250X.
5-77
5.5.41 System Error 252X: Media Heater Error (Target temperature not reached)
<Description>
After 30 minutes, the heater temperature is still less than the setup temperature.
X
1 Preheater
<Faulty module and action>

<1> TRC2-CTL cable
<2> PCB-ASSY-TRC2
<3> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<4> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<5> For 2511: Supply-side paper guide
REAR-PAPER-GUIDE-74
<6> For 2513, 2515, and 2517: Take-up side paper guide
<7> For 2512, 2514, and 2516: Platen
PLATEN-104
PLATEN-74
<Faulty module>
Environmental temperature Check that the environmental temperature is within
1
the operating temperature specification.
Power supply voltage Check that the power voltage supplied from the socket
2
is within the input voltage specification.
Heaters harness condition Check that, with the heater causing the error, the
3
5-78

TRC2-CTL cables condition Check that the harness condition is proper as follows.
5-79
5.5.42 System Error 253X: Media Heater Error (No interrupt)
<Description>
No heater sequence interrupt is generated.
X
1 Preheater
<Faulty module>
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
5-80
5.5.43 System Error 260X: Subcartridge Sensor Error
<Description>
Subcartridge sensors FULL status and EMPTY status are detected at the same time.
X Subcartridge No.
0 No.1
1 No.2
2 No.3
3 No.4
4 No.5
5 No.6
6 No.7
7 No.8
<Faulty module>
<1> Subcartridge
<2> PHOTO SENSOR4 (subcartridge empty sensor and subcartridge full sensor)
<3> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<Action>
On the subcartridge causing the error, check the Items to be Checked on the table below,
and perform the actions starting from the top until the problem is solved.
Sensor condition Check that the sensor is fixed without looseness, then
1 softly rub the sensors surface with a soft cloth or
Sensor operation With the maintenance modes MONITOR function,
check that the operation of the two below are
normal.
- Subcartridge empty sensor
- Subcartridge full sensor
The checking procedure is as follows.
(1) Remove the subcartridges.
2
(2) With moving the reflecting object such as a cut
media closer to and away from the sensor, check
the sensors status.
(3) If the sensor operates normally, perform the
action at the step 3.
(4) If the sensor does not operate, perform the
actions at the steps 4, 5, and 6.
3 Subcartridge Replace the subcartridge.
Sensor Replace the sensors whose defective operation was
5
found at the step 2.
5-81

5-82
5.5.44 System Error 261x: Subcartridge Full Sensor Error
<Description>
The subcartridge full sensor continues to indicate FULL though the FULL subcartridge
supplied the prescribed amount of ink.
X Subcartridge No.
0 No.1
1 No.2
2 No.3
3 No.4
4 No.5
5 No.6
6 No.7
7 No.8
<Faulty module>
<1> Subcartridge
<2> Print head
<3> Capping unit
<4> PHOTO SENSOR4 (subcartridge full sensor)
<5> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<Action>
With the subcartridges causing the error, check the Items to be Checked on the table
below, and perform the actions starting from the top until the problem is solved.
check that the sensor operates normally.
2 media closer to and away from the sensor, check
the sensors status.
action at the step 3, 4, and 5.
actions at the steps 6, 7, 8.
Capping unit Check that the capping unit sacks the ink normally. If
3
the ink sacking is not normal, recover it.
Print head Check that the print head, corresponding to the
4 subcartridge causing the error, ejects ink normally. If
the ink ejection is not normal, recover it.
5-83

Subcartridge Remove the subcartridge. Then, with holding the part
A, slowly shake the subcartridge in the arrow
directions so that the subcartridge would rotate by 180
degrees.
FULL detection window
END detection window
If the problem persists, replace the subcartridge.

Harness condition Check that, with the sensor, the harness condition is
proper as follows.
6
7 Sensor Replace the sensor.
5-84
5.5.45 System Error 262x: Subcartridge Empty Sensor Error
<Description>
The subcartridge empty sensor does not indicate EMPTY though the FULL subcartridge
supplied the prescribed amount of ink.
X Subcartridge No.
0 No.1
1 No.2
2 No.3
3 No.4
4 No.5
5 No.6
6 No.7
7 No.8
<Faulty module>
<1> Subcartridge
<2> Print head
<3> Capping unit
<4> PHOTO SENSOR4 (subcartridge empty sensor)
<5> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<Action>
With the subcartridges causing the error, check the Items to be Checked on the table
below, and perform the actions starting from the top until the problem is solved.
check that the sensor operates normally.
2 media closer to and away from the sensor, check
the sensors status.
action at the step 3, 4, and 5.
actions at the steps 6, 7, 8.
3
5-85

Subcartridge Remove the subcartridge. Then, with holding the part
A, slowly shake the subcartridge in the arrow
directions so that the subcartridge would rotate by 180
degrees.
FULL detection window
END detection window
If the problem persists, replace the subcartridge.

Harness condition Check that, with the sensor, the harness condition is
proper as follows.
6
7 Sensor Replace the sensor.
5-86
5.5.46 System Error 263X: Subcartridge Information Error
<Description>
The subcartridge is not genuine.
X Subcartridge No.
0 No.1
1 No.2
2 No.3
3 No.4
4 No.5
5 No.6
6 No.7
7 No.8
<Faulty module>
Subcartridge
<Action>
Replace the subcartridge.
5-87
5.5.47 System Error 270X: Ink Supply Pump Sensor Error
<Description>
While the ink supply motor for the subcartridge is running, ink supply sensor X does not
change even after the specified time period has lapsed.
X Ink supply pump sensor No.
0 No.1
1 No.2
2 No.3
3 No.4
4 No.5
5 No.6
6 No.7
7 No.8
<Faulty module>
<1> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<2> SUPPLY PUMP (ink supply pump)
<Action>
With the ink supply pump sensor, check the Items to be Checked on the table below, and
perform the actions starting from the top until the problem is solved.
Harness condition Check that, with the motors and sensors, the harness
condition is proper as follows.
1
Motor and sensor operation With the maintenance modes ACTUATOR function,
operate the ink supply pump causing the error with TO
SUBTANK or TO INKPAC. Then check that the motor
operates.
If the motor does not operate, the error was caused by
2
the motor-related problem. If the motor operates, the
error was caused by the sensor-related problem or the
defective roller (PUMP).
Then stop the ink supply pump operation with STOP
(CLOSE).
3 SUPPLY PUMP Replace the SUPPLY PUMP.
5-88
5.5.48 System Error 280X: Ink Usage Upper-limit Error
<Description>
The ink usage amount calculated by the Printer exceeded the ink cartridges capacity.
X Ink cartridge No.
0 No.1
1 No.2
2 No.3
3 No.4
4 No.5
5 No.6
6 No.7
7 No.8
If this error is detected, the relevant ink cartridge, even with ink remained, becomes
inapplicable to the Printer.
This error is caused when the capping unit or print head is defective. Sometimes it may be
caused by the improper ink usage, e.g. topping off the ink level.
<Faulty module>
<1> Capping unit
<2> Print head
<Action>
Replace the ink cartridge causing the error.
Then check the Items to be Checked on the table below, and perform the actions starting
Printers maintenance and With the SP-926 obtain the Printers maintenance and
1
error history error history before this error (see the Section 2.6).
3
5-89
5.5.49 System Error 2900: Take-up Motor Overcurrent
<Description>
Overcurrent has been detected in the take-up motor.
<Faulty module>
<1> Take-up motor
Take-up Motor
Take-up Motor HV74
<2> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<3> CABLE(TU-MOT1)-ASSY(HV104)
<6> CABLE(TU-MOT)L-ASSY(HV74)
<Action>
Media Check that the taken-up media weight is the maximum
1
applicable weight or less.
2 Gear Visually check that the motors gear is not defected.
Harness condition Check that, with the motor, the harness condition is
proper as follows.
3
4 Motor Replace the motor.
5-90
5.5.50 System Error 2920: Unrolling Motor Overcurrent
<Description>
Overcurrent has been detected in the unrolling motor.
<Faulty module>
<1> Unrolling Motor (unrolling motor)
<2> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<6> CABLE(TU-MOT)L-ASSY(HV74)
<Action>
Media Check that the taken-up media weight is the maximum
applicable weight or less.
1
Check that the media is not static cling, that is, the media is
not sticky.
Harness condition Check that, with the motor, the harness condition is proper
as follows.
3
5-91
5.5.51 System Error 293X: Suction Pump Motor Overcurrent
<Description>
Overcurrent has been detected in the suction pump motor.
X = 0: Suction pump motor 1
X = 1: Suction pump motor 2
X Suction pump motor No.
0 Suction pump motor 1
1 Suction pump motor 2
<Faulty module>
<1> PUMP-F-ASSY
<2> MOTOR (CAP) ASSY-HV
<3> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<Action>
Harness condition Check that, with the motor, the harness condition is proper
as follows.
2
5-92
5.5.52 System Error 2a0X: Servo Error
<Description>
An error occurred at the servo control.
X Servo error
Though the X motor was driven at the initial operation,
0
the X motors encoder value does not change.
Though the Y motor was driven at the initial operation,
1
the linear encoder value does not change.
2 Servo interruption error.
<Faulty module>
System error 2a00:
<1> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<3> PAPER-FEED-MOTOR-ASSY (X motor)
<4> DECELERATION-BELT (Dcelerating belt )
<5> X-PULLEY-ASSY (X pulley)
<6> CABLE(X-Y) relay (HV104)
<7> CABLE(XENC-IF)-ASSY(HV104)
System error 2a01:
<1> PCB-ASSY-ACT1
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<3> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<4> Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY (Y motor)
<5> SUS belt
SUS-BELT-104
SUS-BELT-HV74
<6> TIMING-BELT-Y (Timing belt)
<7> Y-DRIVE-PULLEY-ASSY (Driving pulley)
<8> Y-DRIVEN-PULLEY-ASSY (Driven pulley)
<9> Encoder Sensor(SIIT) (Linear encoder)
<10> Linear scale
T-FENCE-104
T-FENCE-HV74
<12> Carriage cable

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
5-93
<13> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
<14> CABLE(X-Y) relay (HV104)
System error 2a02:
<1> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
System error 2a00:

X motors harness condition Check that, with the motor unit and encoder unit, the
1
3 X motor Replace the x motor.
4 Decelerating belt Replace the decelerating belt.
5 X pulley Replace the x pulley.
System error 2a01:

Y motors harness condition Check that the harness condition is proper as follows.
Encoder Sensor (SIIT)s or Check that the harness condition is proper as follows.
linear encoders harness - The connectors are connected securely.
2 condition - The cable is not disconnected.
5-94

5
damaged.
6
friction.
7
11 Y motor Replace the Y motor.
12 SUS belt Replace the SUS belt.
13 Timing belt Replace the timing belt.
14 Driving pulley Replace the driving pulley.
15 Driven pulley Replace the driven pulley.
Encoder Sensor (SIIT), or Replace the Encoder Sensor (SIIT).
16
linear encoder
17 Linear scale Replace the linear scale.
System error 2a02:

5-95
5.5.53 System Error 2b00: FIRE END Detection Error
<Description>
At each scan, the FIRE END flag is issued when the droplets ejection is completed. If the
FIRE END flag is not detected, the Printer issues this error.
<Faulty module>
<1> Encoder Sensor(SIIT) (linear encoder)
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<3> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<4> Linear scale
T-FENCE-104
T-FENCE-HV74

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<7> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
<Action>
Linear scale Softly rub the linear scale with a soft cloth or lint-free
paper dampened with ethanol. Be careful so that:
1
- The linear scale is not scratched, or
- The stuck parts are not removed.
Encoder Sensor (SIIT)s or Check that the harness condition is proper as follows.
linear encoders harness - The connectors are connected securely.
2 condition - The cable is not disconnected.
5-96

5
damaged.
6
friction.
7
9 PCB-ASSY-HCB1 Replace the PCB-ASSY-HCB1
Encoder Sensor (SIIT), or Replace the Encoder Sensor (SIIT).
10
Linear Encoder
11 Linear scale Replace the linear scale.
12 PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Replace the PCB-ASSY-IPB3
5-97
5.5.54 System Error 2d0X: Automatic Print Adjustment Calibration Error
<Description>
An error has been detected during voltage check of the automatic print adjustment.
<Faulty module>
<1> PCB-ASSY-ADJ1
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<3> CABLE(ADJ-AD)-ASSY
<4> FFC-ADJ
<Action>
PCB-ASSY-ADJ1 sensors Check that the sensors for automatic print adjustment
condition are not dirty.
1 Wipe softly the surface of the sensors with a dry soft
cloth or a piece of paper.
*Do not use ethanol or other substances.
FFCs connector connection Reconnect the FFC both in the PCB-ASSY-HCB1M
side and in the PCB-ASSY-ADJ1 side.
damaged.
3 - FFCs terminal part is unstuck from its base.
- FFCs edge parts are not abraded away with friction.
4
- The harness is not caught in the other parts.
- The cable coating is not damaged.
Replace the harness if a problem is found.
5 PCB-ASSY-ADJ1 Replace the PCB-ASSY-ADJ1
6 PCB-ASSY-HCB1M Replace the PCB-ASSY-HCB1M
5-98
5.5.55 System error 2e0X: Wrinkle Sensor Error
<Description>
An error has been detected with the wrinkle sensor.
X Wrinkle sensor
0 Right side
1 Left side
2 Both
<Faulty module>
<1> PIEZO-SENSOR-L-ASSY
<2> PIEZO-SENSOR-R-ASSY
<3> PCB-ASSY-PZF1
<4> PCB-ASSY-HCB1S
<5> SENSOR(THICKNESS)MAINTENANCE
<Action>
Harness condition Inspect the PIEZO-SENSOR-X-ASSY harness condition
and check the following.
- The connectors on both the sensor and the PZP1
1 board are connected securely.
- The harness is not caught in the other parts.
- The cable coating is not damaged.
PZF1 board installation - Check that the PZF1 board is correctly installed.
- Remove and reinstall the PZF1 board.
2
If the board connectors are dirty, wipe them softly using a
soft cloth or a piece of paper moistened with ethanol.
Position of the plates for Execute (5) CHCK WRINKLE SENSOR in 3.4.3 PH.MAIN
wrinkle sensor check and check that the wrinkle sensors contact the check
plates during the check operation.
If the sensors and the plates do not contact, check the
following.
- Wiping height (See 7.4 Adjusting the Height of the
3
Wiping Unit)
- Wiping position (See 7.26 Correcting the Wiping
Position)
- Any deformation of the check plates on both sides of
the wiping unit.
- Any deformation of the PIEZO-SENSOR-X-ASSY.
5-99

SENSOR(THICKNESS) - Check that the gap sensor solenoid operates and that
MAINTENANCE Thickness-Sensor pin operates correctly (see
P.3-75).
- Check that the Thickness-Sensor is not dirty. If it is
dirty, clean it.
4 - Readjust the gap sensor height (see 7.13 Adjusting
the Height of the Gap Sensor).
Then execute #MEASURE WIPE H in the ADJUST menu
(see P.3-46).
If the problem is not solved, replace
SENSOR(THICKNESS)MAINTENANCE.
PIEZO-SENSOR-X-ASSY System error 2e00:
Replace the PIEZO-SENSOR-R-ASSY.
System error 2e01:
5 Replace the PIEZO-SENSOR-L-ASSY.
System error 2e02:
Replace both the PIEZO-SENSOR-R-ASSY and the
PIEZO-SENSOR-L-ASSY.
6 PCB-ASSY-PZF1 Replace the PCB-ASSY-PZF1
7 PCB-ASSY-HCB1S PCB-ASSY-HCB1S
5-100
5.5.56 System Error 301X: CRG-FFC Connection Error
<Description>
A connection error occurred with the carriage cable (FFC) connected to the
PCB-ASSY-IPB3.
If the connector part is not connected securely at least at one side of the four FFCs, the
detection line is disconnected, which issues an error.
This error is detected during the Printers operation.
X IPB-HCB FFC connector
0 CN9
1 CN10
2 CN11
3 CN12
<Faulty module>
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<3> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<4> Carriage cable

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<Action>
3
5-101

damaged.
4
friction.
7 FFC Replace the FFC corresponding to the error code.
5-102
5.5.57 System Error 3020: RSM-PTG FIFO Connection Error
<Description>
A connection error occurred with the carriage cable (FFC) connected to the
PCB-ASSY-IPB3.
If the Printer is unable to perform the write test successfully on the FIFO between
PCB-ASSY-IPB3(RSM) and PCB-ASSY-HCB1(PTG), the error is issued, detection line is
disconnected, which issues an error.
This error is detected during the Printers operation.
<Faulty module>
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<3> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<4> Carriage cable

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<Action>
3
5-103

damaged.
4
friction.
5-104
5.5.58 System Error 3100: Edge sensor Error
<Description>
Though the edge sensors sensitivity was adjusted, the output voltage is not within the
expected range.
<Faulty module>
<1> SENSOR(EDGE)MAINTENANCE
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<5> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
<Action>
1 platen rub it with a soft cloth or lint-free paper dampened
with wiper cleaning liquid or cap cleaning liquid.
SENSOR(EDGE)MAINTENANCE Check that the harness connector condition is
proper as follows.
2 - The cable coating is not defected.
Remove the sensor, softly rub it with a soft cloth or
lint-free paper dampened with ethanol, and
re-connect it.
The two sheet metals below fixed Check that the two sheet metals are fixed on the
on the FFCs PCB-ASSY-HCB1: FFCs PCB-ASSY-HCB1. If they are not fixed on
- Plate-Fix (FFC) the PCB-ASSY-HCB1, fix them.
- HOLDER-FFC Note
To fix the FFC, these two sheet metals were newly
Note that the Plate-Fix (FFC) and HOLDER-FFC
are included into the recommended part below:
Subsection, 6.4.8 FASTENING BRACKET, FFC.
5-105

FFCs connector connection Reconnect the FFC both in the PCB-ASSY-HCB1
side and in the PCB-ASSY-IPB3 side.
V-formed folded parts width at the Check that, with the FFC, the V-formed folded
PCB-ASSY-HCB1-side FFC parts width is proper. If not, adjust it. For the
5
adjusting procedure, see the Subsection, 6.7.5
damaged.
6
friction.
7 Subsection 6.4.5 IP-7900: CARRIAGE CABLE
HV104 and CABLE CARRIER, IP-7700:
CARRIAGE CABLE HV74 and CABLE
CARRIER74, step 9.
Robot cables connector Reconnect the robot cable in both
connection PCB-ASSY-HCB1 side and PCB-ASSY-ACT1
side.
8 Before connecting, check that the connector
terminals and cable connection part are not
disconnected. If a connection failure is found,
replace the robot cable.
5-106
5.5.59 System Error 3110: Carriage Upper Limit Sensor Error
<Description>
The carriage height upper limit sensor status does not change.
<Faulty module>
<1> PHOTO SENSOR 5 (Carriage UP Sensor)
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<3> Motor(HeadBase)ASSY

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<6> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
<Action>
Motor(HeadBase)ASSY Check that the carriage operates up and down.
1 operation If it does not operate, it is highly possible that the
problem is caused by the defective sensor.
PHOTO SENSOR 5(Carriage Check that the harness condition is proper as follows.
UP Sensor) - The connectors are connected securely.
2 Check that no obstruction is pinched in the sensor.
Remove the sensor, softly rub it with a soft cloth or
lint-free paper dampened with ethanol, and re-connect
it.
Motor(HeadBase)ASSY Check that the harness condition is proper as follows.
3 - The harness is not pinched by the other parts.
Adjust the timing belts tension.
If the error persists, replace the motor.
5-107

6
damaged.
7
friction.
8
5-108
5.5.60 System Error 3120: Carriage Up/Down Motor Interruption Error
<Description>
Though the carriage up/down motor operations pulse level was set to FPGA, at the pulse
output completion no interruption is performed.
(Note that this error is not caused by the carriage up/down motor and carriage up sensor.)
<Faulty module>
<1> PCB-ASSY-HCB1

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<4> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<5> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
<Action>
3
5-109

damaged.
4
friction.
5
8 PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Replace the PCB-ASSY-IPB3
5-110
5.5.61 System Error 3130: Gap Sensor Error
<Description>
The gap sensors output voltage is not within the prescribed range.
<Faulty module>
<1> SENSOR(THICKNESS)MAINTENANCE
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<5> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
<Action>
SENSOR(THICKNESS)MAINTEN Check that the harness condition is proper as
ANCE follows.
1
The two sheet metals below fixed Check that the two sheet metals are fixed on the
on the FFCs PCB-ASSY-HCB1: FFCs PCB-ASSY-HCB1. If they are not fixed on the
- Plate-Fix (FFC) PCB-ASSY-HCB1, fix them.
- HOLDER-FFC Note
To fix the FFC, these two sheet metals were newly
Subsection, 6.4.8 FASTENING BRACKET, FFC.
FFCs connector connection Reconnect the FFC both in the PCB-ASSY-HCB1
side and in the PCB-ASSY-IPB3 side.
V-formed folded parts width at the Check that, with the FFC, the V-formed folded parts
PCB-ASSY-HCB1-side FFC width is proper. If not, adjust it. For the adjusting
4
procedure, see the Subsection, 6.7.5
5-111

damaged.
5
friction.
6 Subsection 6.4.5 IP-7900: CARRIAGE CABLE
HV104 and CABLE CARRIER, IP-7700:
CARRIER74, step 9.
Before connecting, check that the connector
7
8 PCB-ASSY- HCB1 Replace the PCB-ASSY- HCB1.
5-112
5.5.62 System Error 3140: Head Cooling Fan Error
<Description>
The print head cooling fan was rotated for the specified time period or longer,
but the print head temperature did not decrease.
<Faulty module>
<1> FAN1 (print head cooling fan)
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<5> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
<Action>
Environmental temperature Check that the environmental temperature is within
1
the operating temperature specification.
FAN1 (print head cooling fan) Enter the maintenance mode, from the actuator menu
operate the print head cooling fan, and check that the
fans operate.
If some fans do not operate, check that, with the
defective fans, the harness condition is proper as
follows.
2
If no problem is found with the harness, replace the
fans.
If the wiper does not operate while issuing the motors
operating sound, reassemble the wiping unit.
5-113

5
damaged.
6
friction.
7
5-114
5.5.63 System Error 320X: Head Drive Voltage Error
<Description>
The head drive voltage fails to be the expected voltage.
X Head No.
0 Head 1
1 Head 2
2 Head 3
3 Head 4
4 Head 5
5 Head 6
6 Head 7
7 Head 8
<Faulty module>
<1> HC ASSY
<3> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<4> PCB-ASSY-IPB3

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<6> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
<7> INKJET-HEAD-S508 (print head)
<Action>
Note
If this error occurs, be sure to perform the actions 1 to 6.
The print head cable fixed on the HC ASSY If no HC ASSY is fixed, fix it. For the
1 procedure, see the subsection 6.7.1 Cover
(CarriageUnder) ASSY and HC ASSY.
5-115

The two sheet metals below fixed on the Check that the two sheet metals are fixed
FFCs PCB-ASSY-HCB1: on the FFCs PCB-ASSY-HCB1. If they are
- Plate-Fix (FFC) not fixed on the PCB-ASSY-HCB1, fix
- HOLDER-FFC them.
Note
To fix the FFC, these two sheet metals
were newly established as recommended
2 parts.
Note that the Plate-Fix (FFC) and
HOLDER-FFC are included into the
recommended part below:
Subsection, 6.4.8 FASTENING BRACKET,
FFC.
Robot cable fixed to the cable carriers arm With a cable tie, fix the robot cable to the
part PCB-ASSY-HCB1-side cable carriers arm
part.
3
IP-7700: CARRIAGE CABLE HV74 and
CABLE CARRIER74, step 9.
PCB-ASSY-IPB3 side.
4
lint-free paper dampened with ethanol
Robot cables connector connection Reconnect the robot cable in both
PCB-ASSY-HCB1 side and
PCB-ASSY-ACT1 side.
5 Before connecting, check that the
connector terminals and cable connection
part are not disconnected. If a connection
failure is found, replace the robot cable.
V-formed folded parts width at the Check that, with the FFC, the V-formed
PCB-ASSY-HCB1-side FFC folded parts width is proper. If not, adjust it.
6 For the adjusting procedure, see the
Subsection, 6.7.5 PCB-ASSY-HCB1
(Carriage board).
5-116

Units below connected to the Reconnect the print head cable, and supply
PCB-ASSY-HCB1 the power again.
At 3200 If the problem persists, replace the print
Print head cable to connect print head 1 head cable A with the other print head
At 3201 cable B. If the error is solved at the print
Print head cable to connect print head 2 head cable As original position, and found
At 3202 at the cable As current position, the print
Print head cable to connect print head 3 head cable is assumed to be defected. So
At 3203 replace the print head cable with a new
7
Print head cable to connect print head 4 one.
At 3204 Remove the print head cable A from the
Print head cable to connect print head 5 print head, and connect the print head to
At 3205 the other print head cable B. If the problem
Print head cable to connect print head 6 is found at the print head cable B, the print
At 3206 head is assumed to be defective. So
Print head cable to connect print head 7 replace the print head.
At 3207
FFCs external view Check the following to ensure that the FFC
is not damaged.
- FFCs terminal part is not unstuck from
8 its base.
- FFCs edge parts are not abraded away
with friction.
5-117
5.5.64 System Error 330X: No Head
<Description>
Cannot detect the connection of the print head.
X Head No.
1 Head 1
2 Head 2
3 Head 3
4 Head 4
5 Head 5
6 Head 6
7 Head 7
8 Head 8
<Faulty module>
<1> HC ASSY
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<3> HEAD CABLE HV (Print head cable)

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<7> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
<Action>
Note
The print head cable fixed on If no HC ASSY is fixed, fix it. For the procedure, see
1 the HC ASSY the subsection 6.7.1 Cover (CarriageUnder) ASSY
and HC ASSY.
HEAD CABLE HV (print head Check that, with the print head causing the error, the
cable) harness condition is proper as follows.
If the harness is damaged, replace it.
5-118

Cause determination: Exchange the corresponding harnesses between:
- Print head; or - the print head A causing the error; and
- Other parts - another print head B with no error
Then check the error number indicated.
If the operation panel indicates that the error was
3
detected with the print head B, it is assumed that the
error cause is the print head A.
If the operation panel still indicates that the error was
detected with the print head A, it is assumed that the
error cause is not print head.
6
damaged.
7
friction.
8
INKJET-HEAD-S508 (print Replace the print head causing the error.
11
head)
5-119
5.5.65 System Error 340X: Head Information Error
<Description>
An error has been detected in print head information.
X Head No.
1 Head 1
2 Head 2
3 Head 3
4 Head 4
5 Head 5
6 Head 6
7 Head 7
8 Head 8
<Faulty module>
<1> HC ASSY
<2> PCB-ASSY-HCB1

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<7> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
<Action>
Note
and HC ASSY.
5-120

3
6
damaged.
7
friction.
8
11
head)
5-121
5.5.66 System Error 350X: Head Thermistor Error
<Description>
The print head thermistors value is:
- 15 C or less; or
- 95 C or more
X Head No.
1 Head 1
2 Head 2
3 Head 3
4 Head 4
5 Head 5
6 Head 6
7 Head 7
8 Head 8
<Faulty module>
<1> HC ASSY
<3> PCB-ASSY-HCB1

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<7> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
<Action>
Note
If this error occurs, be sure to If no HC ASSY is fixed, fix it. For the procedure, see
1 perform the actions 1 to 6. the subsection 6.7.1 Cover (CarriageUnder) ASSY
and HC ASSY.
5-122

3
6
damaged.
7
friction.
8
11
head)
5-123

5-124
5.5.67 System Error 360X: Head Heater Error (High Temperature)
<Description>
The print head heaters temperature thermistor detected a temperature exceeding 45 C.
X Head No.
0 Head 1
1 Head 2
2 Head 3
3 Head 4
4 Head 5
5 Head 6
6 Head 7
7 Head 8
<Faulty module>
<1> HC ASSY
<2> HEAD CABLE HV (Print head cale)
<3> PCB-ASSY-HCB1

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<7> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
<Action>
Note
and HC ASSY.
5-125

3
6
damaged.
7
friction.
8
11
head)
5-126
5.5.68 System Error 361X: Head Heater Error (Target Temperature Not Reached)
<Description>
Within 15 minutes after the control panel shows PREHEATING or PH WARMING UP, the
print head temperature does not reach the specified temperature.
X Head No.
0 Head 1
1 Head 2
2 Head 3
3 Head 4
4 Head 5
5 Head 6
6 Head 7
7 Head 8
<Faulty module>
<1> HC ASSY
<3> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<Action>
Note
and HC ASSY.
Environmental temperature Check that the environmental temperature is 5C to
2
40C
HEAD CABLE HV Check that, with the print head causing the error, the
(head cable) harness condition is proper as follows.
4
5-127

5 PCB-ASSY-HCB1 Replace the PCB-ASSY-HCB1
INKJET-HEAD-S508 Replace the print head causing the error.
6
(print head)
5-128
5.5.69 System Error 4XXX: Program Error (Mechanical Control-related)
<Description>
A firmware internal error occured.
<Faulty module>
<1> Firmware
<2> PHOTO INTERRUPTER (Home position sensor)
<3> Robot cable
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
<5> PCB-ASSY-HCB1
<6> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
2 Home position sensor Replace the sensor.
Robot cables connector Reconnect the robot cable in both
connection PCB-ASSY-HCB1 side and PCB-ASSY-ACT1
side.
3 Before connecting, check that the connector
V-formed folded parts width Check that, with the FFC, the V-formed folded
at the PCB-ASSY-HCB1-side parts width is proper. If not, adjust it. For the
4
FFC adjusting procedure, see the Subsection, 6.7.5
damaged.
- FFCs terminal part is not unstuck from its
5 base.
friction.
PCB-ASSY-IPB3 side.
6
5-129

5-130
5.5.70 System Error 5XXX: Program Error (Interface Related)
<Description>
A firmware internal error occured.
<Faulty module>
<1> Firmware
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
5-131
5.6 If No Error Message Appears

5.6.1 No Message Appears
<Description>
The message Booting up appears when initializing the system program. This message
does not appear.
<Faulty module>
<1> OPERATION-PANEL (operation panel)
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<3> Panel cable
PANEL CABLE(HV104)
PANEL CABLE(HV74)
<4> CABLE(ACT-IPB)-ASSY(HV104)
<Action>
CABLE(ACT-IPB)-ASSY(HV104) Check the harness condition so that the
2
connectors are connected securely.
Panel cables harness condition Check that the harness condition is proper as
follows.
3
4 OPERATION-PANEL Replace the OPERATION-PANEL.
5-132
5.7 Others
5.7.1 Abnormality date or time
<Phenomenon>
The timezone was specified, but the date and time do not run normally.
<Faulty module>
<1> IC(EEPROM)
<2> PCB-ASSY-IPB3
<Action>
EEPROM Re-insert the EEPROM.
1
If the problem persists, replace the EEPROM.
5-133
Chapter 6 Parts Replacement

(Disassembly/Reassembly)
This chapter explains the procedures for disassembly and reassembly required when
replacing parts of this device.
6.1 How to Read Disassembly/Reassembly

Procedures
This chapter describes the procedures for replacing parts (disassembly/reassembly)
based on the following definitions.
<Removal>: Describes a disassembly procedure.
<Assembly>: Describes a reassembly procedure. Because the reassembly process is

the exact opposite of the disassembly process, the descriptions of the
reassembly procedures are omitted here and only the relevant cautions
are described.
Cautions
To facilitate the reassembling process after replacing parts, check how the device is
assembled carefully before starting disassembly.
If descriptions in this document differ from the actual state, the actual state takes
precedence.
Note that some screws require the washers. Remove or assemble the parts carefully so
that you do not lose the washers.
6-1
6.2 Part Names

6.2.1 Part Names and Layout
6.2.1.1 Part Names and Layout (IP-7900)

(14)
(10) (18)
(21)
(17) (20)
(8)
(1)
(6)
(13)
(9)
(2)
(26) (3)
(19)
(16) (4)
(15)
(11)
(7)
(12)
(5)
The illustration shows IP-7900-00

comprehensively. The parts
(22) configuration are common among
(29) (23)
(24) (28) the Printer models
(25)
IP-7900-01/02/03.
(27)
(1) COVER(HV)FTR (15) COVER(HV104)YRL-B

(2) COVER(HV)RST (16) COVER(HV)SBF
(3) COVER(HV)RSB (17) COVER(HV)FML
(4) COVER(HV)FBR-R (18) COVER(HV104)YRC
(5) COVER(HV104)RBR (19) COVER(HV104)YRC-B
(6) COVER(HV104)YRR (20) AC(HV104)ASSY
(7) COVER(HV104)YRR-B (21) COVER(HV104)AC
(8) COVER(HV)FMR (22) COVER(HV104REAR) R
(9) OPERATION-PANEL (23) COVER(HV104REAR) C
(10) COVER(HV)FTL (24) COVER(HV104REAR) L
(11) COVER(HV)LST (25) COVER(FW-CARD) REAR
(12) COVER(HV)LSB (26) INKBOX COVER(HV)
(13) COVER(HV)FBL (27) INKBOX-REARCOVER
(14) COVER(HV104)YRL (28) ST-COVER
(29) Pinch-Arm-Guard(104)
Figure 6.1 Part names and Layout (IP-7900)
6-2
6.2.1.2 Part Names and Layout (IP-7700)
(14) (18)
(10) (21) (20) (8)
(1) (6)
(17)
(13) (9)
(2)
(3)
(25)
(4)
(19) (16)
(15)
(11)
(12)
(7)
(5)
The illustration shows IP-7700-00
comprehensively. The parts
configuration are common among
(28) the Printer models
(22) (23) (27) IP-7700-01/02/03.
(23)
(24)
(26)
(1) COVER(HV)FTR (15) COVER(HV104)YRL-B

(2) COVER(HV)RST (16) COVER(HV)SBF
(3) COVER(HV)RSB (17) COVER(HV)FML
(4) COVER(HV)FBR-R (18) COVER(HV74)YRC
(5) COVER(HV104)RBR (19) COVER(HV74)YRC-B
(6) COVER(HV104)YRR (20) AC(HV74)ASSY
(7) COVER(HV104)YRR-B (21) COVER(HV74)AC
(8) COVER(HV)FMR (22) COVER(HV74REAR) C-ASSY
(9) OPERATION-PANEL (23) COVER(HV104REAR) L
(10) COVER(HV)FTL (24) COVER(FW-CARD) REAR
(11) COVER(HV)LST (25) INKBOX COVER(HV)
(12) COVER(HV)LSB (26) INKBOX-REARCOVER
(13) COVER(HV)FBL (27) ST-COVER
(14) COVER(HV104)YRL (28) Pinch-Arm-Guard(74)
Figure 6.2 Part names and Layout (IP-7700)
6-3
6.2.2 Operation Panel
Code for Required

Unit name for distribution
Model distribution*2 Qty/service
No. See
*1 Code for service
Service part name Qty/unit
operation
OPERATION-PANEL U00112316501 1
1 6.3.19
OPEPANE-UNIT U00111522300 1
*1: If a part is exclusively applied to some Printer models, the information is described. If
not mentioned otherwise, the part is commonly applied among the all Printer models.
*2: Issue your purchase order with the part codes attached.
6.2.3 Exterior Parts
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
COVER-FTR U00112318700 1
1 6.3.2
COVER(HV)FTR U00110853000 1
COVER-RST U00112320000 1
2 6.3.4
COVER(HV)RST U00110891200 1
COVER-RSB U00112322200 1
3 6.3.5
COVER(HV)RSB U00110855200 1
COVER-FBR-R U00112324400 1
4 6.3.3
COVER(HV)FBR-R U00110856300 1
COVER-104-YRR U00112328800 1
5 6.3.6
COVER(HV104)YRR U00110858500 1
COVER-104-YRR-B U00112330100 1
6 6.3.7
COVER(HV104)YRR-B U00110859600 1
COVER-FMR-SET U00112332300 1
7 6.3.2
COVER(HV)FMR U00110860700 1
COVER-FTL U00112334500 1
8 6.3.1
COVER(HV)FTL U00110863100 1
COVER-LST U00112336700 1
9 6.3.13
COVER(HV)LST U00110864200 1
COVER-LSB U00112338000 1
10 6.3.14
COVER(HV)LSB U00110866400 1
COVER-FBL U00112340200 1
COVER(HV)FBL U00110867500 1
11 COVER-FBL U00112340200 1 6.3.12
COVER(HV)FBL U00110867500 1
IP7900-22/23 COVER-FLB U00112340201 1
COVER-104-YRL U00112342400 1
12 6.3.16
COVER(HV104)YRL-CD U00116521700 1
COVER-104-YRL-B U00112344600 1
13 6.3.17
COVER(HV104)YRL-B U00110869700 1
6-4
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
COVER-SBF U00112346800 1
14 6.3.15
COVER(HV)SBF U00110870800 1
COVER-FML U00112348100 1
15 6.3.1
COVER(HV)FML U00110871000 1
COVER-104-YRC U00112350300 1
IP-7900 6.3.9
COVER(HV104)YRC U00110872100 1
16
COVER-74-YRC U00113912800 1
IP-7700 6.3.9
COVER(HV74)YRC U00113354800 1
COVER-104-YRC-B U00112352500 1
IP-7900 6.3.11
COVER(HV104)YRC-B U00110873200 1
17
COVER-74-YRC-B U00113914100 1
IP-7700 6.3.11
COVER(HV74)YRC-B U00113355000 1
ACRYLIC-COVER-104-ASSY U00112354700 1
IP-7900 6.3.18
AC(HV104)ASSY U00110874300 1
18
ACRYLIC-COVER-74-ASSY U00113916300 1
IP-7700 6.3.18
AC(HV74)ASSY U00113335700 1
ACRYLIC-COVER-104 U00112356000 1
IP-7900 6.3.18
COVER(HV104)AC U00110879800 2
19
ACRYLIC-COVER-74 U00113956700 1 6.3.18
IP-7700
COVER(HV74)AC U00113360500 2
ONE-WAY-HINGE-1 U00112358200 1
20 6.3.18
One-way hinge U00109644600 1
ONE-WAY-HINGE-3 U00112362600 1
21 6.3.18
One-way hinge U00109646800 1
INKBOX-COVER U00112366100 1
22 6.3.21
INKBOX COVER(HV) U00111030600 1
INKBOX-REARCOVER U00112368300 1
23 6.3.21
INKBOX REARCOVER(HV) U00111033000 1
SUBTANK-COVER U00112370500 1
24 6.3.15
ST-COVER U00110555800 1
IP-7900-00, -01/ MICRO SWITCH HV U00113225500 1
6.3.20
IP-7700-00, -01 SWITCH (Interlock)-ASSY U00096639600 2
25 IP-7900-02, -03, MICRO SWITCH HV U00113225500 1
-20, -21/ SWITCH (Interlock)-ASSY U00096639600 1 6.3.20
IP-7700-02, -03,
-20, -21
Vacuum Fan SIIT U00100707600 1
IP-7900 6.3.23
BLOWER FAN U000966431** 6
26
Vacuum Fan SIIT U00100707600 1
IP-7700 6.3.23
BLOWER FAN U000966431** 4
6-5
6.2.4 Dolly
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
CASTER U00103536000 1
1
Caster U00100946200 4
6.2.5 Drive
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
DECELERATION-BELT U00112372700 1
1 6.5.1
Decelerating belt 1
PAPER-FEED-MOTOR-ASSY U00112374001 1
2 6.5.1
Paper feed motor assy 1
X-PULLEY-ASSY U00112376200 1
3 6.5.1
X-PULLY U00110649300 1
Media detect and Line sensor SIIT U00100696400 1 6.5.2,
4
PCB-ASSY-SNS1 U00093087000 2 6.5.3
FAN4 U00112040800 1
IP-7900 6.5.4
Suction Blower ASSY HV U00110954200 5
5
FAN4 U00112040800 1
IP-7700 6.5.4
Suction Blower ASSY HV U00110954200 4
PHOTO INTERRUPTER U00103386300 1
6 6.5.8
Photo interrupter U00084544701 1
PINCH KNOB SET U00117384600 1
7 6.5.9
2
6-6
6.2.6 Platen Area
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
IP-7900-02, -03, PLATEN-104 U00112379500 1
6.12.3
-20, -21 *3 PLATEN-ASSY U00110740400 1
IP-7900-00, -01 PLATEN-104-NND U00120336600 1

6.12.3
*4 PLATEN-ASSY(104)-NND U00120234300 1
1
IP-7700-02, -03, PLATEN-74 U00113918500 1
6.12.3
-20, -21 *3 PLATEN-ASSY(74) U00113249200 1
IP-7700-00, -01 PLATEN-74-NND U00120337700 1

6.12.3
*4 PLATEN-ASSY(74)-NND U00120333300 1
EDGE-GUARD-MK U00118325200 1
2 6.12.4
PINCH-ROLLER-ASSY(D9-60) U00120011500 1
IP-7900 6.5.6
U00120011500 40
3
PINCH-ROLLER-ASSY(D9-60) U00120011500 1
IP-7700 6.5.6
U00120011500 29
PINCH-SPRING U00112385200 2
IP-7900 6.5.6
80
4
PINCH-SPRING U00112385200 2
IP-7700 6.5.6
58
PINCH-ROLLER(D9-60) U00120010400 1
IP-7900 6.5.6
40
5
PINCH-ROLLER(D9-60) U00120010400 1
IP-7700 6.5.6
29
STOPPER-EDGE-GUARD U00112389600 2
6 6.12.4
STOPPER(EG) U00110753800 2
GRIT-ROLLER-104 U00112391800 1
IP-7900 6.5.7
HV-GR(104)2 U00120105000 1
7
GRIT-ROLLER-74 U00113920700 1
IP-7700 6.5.7
GR-HV(74)2 U00120106100 1
PINCH ARM SET U00117658100 5
8 IP-7900 6.5.10
ARM-HEAD U00113821700 40
PINCH ARM SET U00117658100 5
9 IP-7700 6.5.10
ARM-HEAD U00113821700 29
*3: Ungrooved platen
*4: Grooved platen
6-7
6.2.7 Paper Guide
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
REAR-PAPER-GUIDE-104 U00112393100 1
IP-7900 6.12.2
REAR-PG(104)-ASSY U00110757300 1
1
REAR-PAPER-GUIDE-74 U00113922000 1
IP-7700 6.12.2
REAR-PG(74)-ASSY U00113459500 1
NET-PGR-104 U00112395300 1
IP-7900 6.12.6
NET-R(104) U00110760600 1
2
NET-PGR-74 U00113924200 1
IP-7700 6.12.6
NET-R(74)-CD U00117091100 1
FRONT-PAPER-GUIDE-104 U00112397500 1
IP-7900 6.12.1
FRONT-PG-ASSY(104) U00110762800 1
3
FRONT-PAPER-GUIDE-74 U00113926400 1
IP-7700 6.12.1
FRONT-PG-ASSY(74) U00113233400 1
NET-PGF-104 U00112399700 1
IP-7900 6.12.7
PGF-R355-NET U00110770700 1
4
NET-PGF-74 U00113928600 1
IP-7700 6.12.7
PGF-R355-NET(74)-CD U00116999800 1
GUIDE-CUTTER-104 U00112401000 1
IP-7900 6.12.1
GUIDE-CUTTER(104) U00110778600 1
5
GUIDE-CUTTER-74 U00113930800 1
IP-7700 6.12.1
GUIDE-CUTTER(74)-ASSY U00113241300 1
HOOK-TENSIONBAR U00112403200 5
IP-7900 6.12.1
HOOK-TB U00110780800 5
6
HOOK-TENSIONBAR U00112403200 4
IP-7700 6.12.1
HOOK-TB U00110780800 4
UREA-SCREW-Lgy U00112405400 5
IP-7900 6.12.1
Urea painted screw (light-grey) U00111392800 5
7
UREA-SCREW-Lgy U00112405400 4
IP-7700 6.12.1
Urea painted screw (light-grey) U00111392800 4
PIPE-GUARD-PG-104 U00112407600 1
IP-7900
PIPE-PG-ASSY U00110781000 1
8
PIPE-GUARD-PG-74 U00113932100 1
IP-7700
PIPE-PG-ASSY(74) U00113246800 1
6-8
6.2.8 Media Drying Fan
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
AFTER-FAN-104 U00112409800 1
IP-7900 6.14.1
AFTER-FAN-ASSY(104) U00110785400 1
1
AFTER-FAN-74 U00113934300 1
IP-7700 6.14.1
AFTER-FAN-ASSY(74) U00113467400 1
FANSLIT(AFTER-FAN) U00112412200 1
IP-7900 6.14.2
FANSLIT-FS U00110458100 7
2
FANSLIT(AFTER-FAN) U00112412200 1
IP-7700 6.14.2
FANSLIT-FS U00110458100 5
BLOWER(AFTER-FAN) U00112414400 1
IP-7900 6.14.2
BLOWER3-FS U00110459200 7
3
BLOWER(AFTER-FAN) U00112414400 1
IP-7700 6.14.2
BLOWER3-FS U00110459200 5
CAP(AFTER-FAN) U00112416600 1
4 6.14.2
CAP-LOUVERb-FS U00110460300 2
FAN3 U00111991400 1
IP-7900 6.14.2
FAN(MEDIA COOL) ASSY HV U00109791000 20
5
FAN3 U00111991400 1
IP-7700 6.14.2
6-9
6.2.9 Roll Feed Take-up Unit
6.2.9.1 Roll Feed Take-up Unit (IP-7900-00, -01)

Code for Required
distribution*2 Qty/service
No. See
Code for service
operation
FEED-DRIVE-UNIT-104 U00112418800 1
1 *1 6.13.1.1
Feed-Drive-Unit U00111587500 1
FEED-AND-TAKE-UP-TIMING-BELT U00112783400 2
2 *1 6.13.1.3
Timing belt U00091862800 4
ROLLER Assy U00097301200 1
3 6.13.1.2
ROLLER(Urethan60-35) U00092147500 4
ROLLER FOLLOW Assy U00097302301 1
4 6.13.1.4
ROLLER(F-R FOLLOW) U00091900100 4
FT-SCROLLER-SUPPORT U00112420100 1
5 *1 6.13.1.4
Scroller-Support U00111594300 2
ANTI-ELECTROSTATIC BRUSH U00112422300 1
6 6.13.1.4
JYODEN-B(SE-CutSuper) U00093528000 2
PF-FRICTIONROLLER U00112424500 1
7 6.13.1.5
ROLLER-FRICTION(104) U00111471600 1
FRICTION ROLLER SET(104) U00120334400 1
8 6.13.1.6
PF-FRICTIONROLLER-ASSY U00116036800 1
PF-EMITSENSOR U00112426700 1
9 6.13.1.7
PF-EMITSENSOR-UNIT U00111600000 1
FEED-DETECTOR U00112428000 1
10 6.13.1.8
SensorAssy-FeedJyuko U00111601100 1
BRACKET-SENSOR-TU U00112432400 1
11 *1 6.13.1.9
BRACKET(SensorTU) U00111503200 1
PHOTO SENSOR1 U00097350600 1
12 6.13.1.7
ELPARTS U00091396101 2
13 6.13.1.8
ELPARTS U00091534401 2
14 6.13.1.8
ELPARTS U00091395001 2
TENSIONBAR-TU-HV U00113876800 1
15
TENTION-BAR-UNIT(HV) U00111616700 1
SCROLLER-STOPPER(DRIVE) U00114464200 1
16 6.13.1.10
SCROLLER-STOPPER(DRIVE)-ASSY U00114465300 1
SCROLLER-STOPPER(SUPPORT) U00114467500 1
17 6.13.1.11
SCROLLER-STOPPER(SUPPORT)-ASSY U00114468600 1
MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET U00114888300 1
18 6.13.1.12
MOTOR-BR-ASSY U00111596500 1
6-10
Code for Required

No. See
Code for service
operation
MOTOR-ASSY(TAKEUP)-SET U00114889400 1
19 *1 6.13.1.13
Motor-Assy(TakeUp) U00111606600 1
CASTER(SIIT) U00101678500 2
20 *1
Caster U00043889501 8
*1: The recommended part differs depending on the category below:
(a) IP-7900-00 and -01
(b) IP-7900-02 and -03
6-11
6.2.9.2 Roll Feed Take-up Unit (IP-7900-02, -03, -20, -21, -22, -23)
Code for Required
No. See
Code for service
operation
ROLLER Assy U00097301200 1
1 6.13.2.1
ROLLER(Urethan60-35) U00092147500 4
ROLLER FOLLOW Assy U00097302301 1
2 6.13.2.2
ROLLER(F-R FOLLOW) U00091900100 4
FT-SCROLLER-SUPPORT(C) U00117665800 1
3 *1 6.13.2.2
Scroller-Support U00117326200 2
ANTI-ELECTROSTATIC BRUSH U00112422300 1
4 6.13.2.2
JYODEN-B(SE-CutSuper) U00093528000 2
PF-FRICTIONROLLER U00112424500 1
5 6.13.2.3
ROLLER-FRICTION(104) U00111471600 1
6 6.13.2.4
PF-FRICTIONROLLER-ASSY U00116036800 1
7 6.13.2.5
FEED-DETECTOR U00112428000 1
8 6.13.2.6
SensorAssy-FeedJyuko U00111601100 1
Take-up Motor U00112048700 1
9 MOTOR(TakeUp) U00112248000 1 6.13.2.7
Gear head U00114747600 1
10 6.13.2.5
ELPARTS U00091396101 2
11 6.13.2.6
ELPARTS U00091534401 2
12 6.13.2.6
ELPARTS U00091395001 2
TENSIONBAR-TU-HV U00113876800 1
13
TENTION-BAR-UNIT(HV) U00111616700 1
SCROLLER-STOPPER(DRIVE) U00114464200 1
14 6.13.2.8
SCROLLER-STOPPER(DRIVE)-ASSY U00114465300 1
SCROLLER-STOPPER(SUPPORT) U00114467500 1
15 6.13.2.9
SCROLLER-STOPPER(SUPPORT)-ASSY U00114468600 1
MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET(C) U00117666000 1
16 *1 6.13.2.10
(a) IP-7900-00 and -01
(b) IP-7900-02, -03, -20, -21, -22 and -23
6-12
6.2.9.3 Roll Feed Take-up Unit (IP-7700-00, -01)

Code for Required
No. See
Code for service
operation
FEED-AND-TAKE-UP-TIMING-BELT U00112783400 2
1 *1 6.13.3.1
2 6.13.3.2
PHOTO SENSOR1 U00097350600 1 6.13.3.2
3
EL PARTS U00091396101 2 6.13.3.5
PHOTO SENSOR2 U00097351700 1 6.13.3.3
4
EL PARTS U00091534401 2 6.13.3.4
PHOTO SENSOR3 U00097352800 1 6.13.3.3
5
EL PARTS U00091395001 2 6.13.3.4
MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET U00114888300 1
6 *1 6.13.3.6
PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74 U00113936500 1
7 6.13.3.7
PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74ASSY U00113844300 1
8 6.13.3.8
FEED-DETECTOR-74 U00113938700 1
9 6.13.3.3
SensorAssy-FeedJyuko-74 U00113939800 1
BRACKET-SENSOR-TU-74 U00113940000 1
10 6.13.3.5
BRACKET(SensorTaUp) U00113580000 1
TENSIONBAR-TU-HV-74 U00113946600 1
11
TENTION-BAR-UNIT(HV74) U00113863400 1
MOTOR-ASSY(TAKEUP)-SET-74 U00117391400 1
12 *1 6.13.3.1
TAKEUP-MOTOR-ASSY U00113849800 1
POM-RollerAssy U00113948800 1
13 6.13.3.9
POM-Roller U00113560700 2
ROLLER-ASSY-74 U00117388100 1
14
URETHAN-ROLLER U00113848700 2
FLANGE-STOPPER-C-ASSY U00117389200 1
15
FRANGE-STOPPER-C-ASSY U00114807300 1
FLANGE-STOPPER-W-ASSY U00117390300 1
16 *1
FRANGE-STOPPER-W-ASSY U00114782500 1
(a) IP-7900-00 and -01
(b) IP-7900-02 and -03
6-13
6.2.9.4 Roll Feed Take-up Unit (IP-7700-02, -03, -20, -21)

Code for Required
No. See
Code for service
operation
1 6.13.4.1
2 6.13.4.1
EL PARTS U00091396101 2
PHOTO SENSOR2 U00097351700 1 6.13.4.2
3
EL PARTS U00091534401 2 6.13.4.3
PHOTO SENSOR3 U00097352800 1 6.13.4.2
4
EL PARTS U00091395001 2 6.13.4.3
MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET(C) U00117666000 1
5 *1 6.13.4.9
PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74 U00113936500 1
6 6.13.4.4
7 6.13.4.5
PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74ASSY U001117021300
FEED-DETECTOR-74 U00113938700 1
8 6.13.4.2
SensorAssy-FeedJyuko-74 U00113939800 1
BRACKET-SENSOR-TU-74 U00113940000 1
9 6.13.4.6
BRACKET(SensorTaUp) U00113580000 1
Take-up Motor HV74 U00113984800 1
10 *1 6.13.4.8
MOTOR(F/T) U00113850000 1
TENSIONBAR-TU-HV-74 U00113946600 1
11
TENTION-BAR-UNIT(HV74) U00113863400 1
POM-RollerAssy U00113948800 1
12 6.13.4.7
POM-Roller U00113560700 2
ROLLER-ASSY-74 U00117388100 1
13
URETHAN-ROLLER U00113848700 2
FLANGE-STOPPER-C-ASSY U00117389200 1
14
FRANGE-STOPPER-C-ASSY U00114807300 1
(a) IP-7900-00 and -01
(b) IP-7900-02, -03, -20 and -21
6-14
6.2.10 Media Cooling
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
FAN3 U00111991400 1
1 IP-7900 6.14.2
FAN3 U00111991400 1
2 IP-7700 6.14.2
6-15
6.2.11 Y Drive
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY U00112438100 1
1 6.4.2
Y drive motor assembly 1
TIMING-BELT-Y U00112440300 1
2 6.4.2
Y-DRIVE-PULLEY-ASSY U00112442500 1
3 6.4.2
Drive pulley assembly 1
T-FENCE-104 U00112444700 1
IP-7900 6.4.4
T-FENCE-HV U00110738200 1
4
T-FENCE-HV74 U00113941100 1
IP-7700 6.4.4
T-FENCE-HV74 U00113364000 1
SUS-BELT-104 U00112446000 1
IP-7900 6.4.3
SUS-BELT-HV U00110715600 1
5
SUS-BELT-HV74 U00113942200 1
IP-7700 6.4.3
SUS-BELT-HV74 U00113823000 1
Y-DRIVEN-PULLEY-ASSY U00112448200 1
6 6.4.1
Driven pulley assembly 1
SCREW-CAP U00112450400 2
7 6.4.7
Screw cap 2
CARRIAGE CABLE HV104 U00111973400 4
IP-7900 6.4.5
FFC-ASSY(HV104) U00111391700 4
8
CARRIAGE CABLE HV74 U00113982600 4
IP-7700 6.4.5
FFC-ASSY(HV74) U00113867800 4
PHOTO INTERRUPTER U00103386300 1
9 6.4.6
6-16
6.2.12 Board Area
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
IP-7900-00, -01/ POWER SUPPLY(24V) U00111965500 1
1 6.6.1
IP-7700-00, -01 Power Supply Unit(24V) U00111897000 1
2 6.6.1
IP-7700-02, -03 Power supply unit U00115947000 1
3 6.6.1
IP-7700-00, -01 Power Supply Unit(38V) U00111898100 1
4 6.6.1
IP-7700-02, -03 Power supply unit U00115948100 1
PCB-ASSY-IPB3 U00111967700 1
5 6.6.1
PCB-ASSY-IPB3-300 U00115312401 1
PCB-ASSY-ACT1 U00111968800 1
6 6.6.1
PCB-ASSY-ACT1 U00108656803 1
PCB-ASSY-TRC2 U00111970100 1
7 6.6.1
PCB-ASSY-TRC2 U00108662501 1
IC(EEPROM) U00111969000 1
8 6.6.3
EEPROM U00113179400 1
IP-7900-00, -01/ FAN2 U00111990300 1
6.6.2
IP-7700-00, -01 FAN(PSU) ASSY HV U00111902500 4
9 FAN2 U00111990300 1
IP-7900-02, -03/
FAN(PSU) ASSY HV U00111902500 1 6.6.2
IP-7700-02, -03
POWER SUPPLY(24V) U00111965500 1
6-17
6.2.13 Carriage
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
SPRING-CARRIAGE-HOLD U00112452600 2
1 6.7.10
SPRING-CARRIAGE U00110669500 2
BRACKET-ARM-STOPPER U00112454800 2
2 6.7.10
SPRING-ARM-STOPPER U00110668400 2
CARRIAGE-PLATE U00112456100 1
3 6.7.10
CARRIAGE-PLATE-ASSY U00110660500 1
INKJET-HEADS508 U00112458300 1
4
Inkjet head 508GS U00109928200 8
CARRIAGE(MAINTENANCE-UNIT) U00112460500 1
5
CARRIAGE(MAINTENANCE-UNIT) 1
SENSOR(THICKNESS)MAINTENAN U00112467300 1
CE
6 6.7.4
SENSOR(THICKNESS)MAINTENAN 1
CE ASSY
SHIELD-AIR U00112469500 1
7 Shield(Air-L) U00111222000 1
Shield(Air-R) U00111223100
COVER-CARRIAGE-UNDER U00112471700 1
8 6.7.1
Cover(CarriageUnder)ASSY U00111224200 1
MOTOR-HEADBASE U00112473000 1
9 6.7.9
Motor(HeadBase) ASSY U00111235400 1
TIMING-BELT(HEADBASE) U00112475200 1
10 6.7.9
Media detect and Line sensor SIIT U00100696400 1
11 6.7.4
PCB-ASSY-SNS1 U00093087000 1
Except the PCB-ASSY-HCB1 U00111971200 1
12 IP-7900-22/23 PCB-ASSY-HCB1S U00115715201 1 6.7.5
PCB-ASSY-HCB1S U00115715202 1
HEAD CABLE HV U00111972300 1
13 6.7.2
Head cable HV U00115946800 8
Encoder Sensor(SIIT) U00101638100 1
14 6.7.7
LINEAR ENCODER ASSY (LONG) U00118455600 1
FAN1 U00111989200 1
15
FAN (CARRIAGE) ASSY HV U00109790800 3
GAP SENSOR U00111980200 1
16
Micro-displacement sensor U00111218500 1
17 6.7.8
Solenoid Assy(SIIT) U00101664000 1
18 6.7.4
SOLENOID ASSY (MV) U00097848000 1
6-18
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
SENSOR(EDGE)MAINTENANCE U00115924400 1
19 6.7.4
1
FASTENING BRACKET, FFC U00118331800 1
20 Plate-Fix(FFC) U00118339700 1 6.4.8
HOLDER-FFC U00096594600 1
21 IP7900-22/23 AUTO ADJ FFC, H3 U00133674600 1 6.3.12
6.2.14 Ink Box
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
INKBOX-UNIT-HV U00112477400 1
IP-7900 6.10.1
INKBOX-UNIT(HV) U00111013700 1
1
INKBOX-UNIT-HV74 U00113943300 1
IP-7700 6.10.1
INKBOX-UNIT(HV-74) U00113454000 1
SUPPLYPUMP U00112479600 1
2 6.10.2
SUPPLYPUMP-UNIT U00111016100 8
PUMP-TUBE-ASSY U00112481800 1
3 6.10.3
INKPUMP TUBE(HV) U00111020500 8
PCB-ASSY-INK4 U00111976700 1
4 6.10.4
PCB-ASSY-INK4 U00108658100 8
5 6.10.5
6-19
6.2.15 Subcartridge Box
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
SUBCARTRIDGE-BOX-HV U00112487500 1
1 6.11.1
SUBTANK BOX ASSY U00110521100 1
POSITIONING-PIN U00112485300 16
2 6.11.2
INKBOX POSITIONING PIN U00110470400 16
3 6.11.3
SENSOR U00097771400 16
4 6.11.4
PCB-ASSY-INK4 U00111976700 1
5 6.11.2
PCB-ASSY-INK4 U00108658100 8
6-20
6.2.16 Ink Flow System
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
SUPPLY-TUBE-Y U00112489700 1
1
SUPPLY TUBE(SP-ST)01 U00110577300 1
SUPPLY-TUBE-Lm U00112491000 1
2
SUPPLY-TUBE-C U00112493200 1
3
SUPPLY-TUBE-Gy U00112495400 1
4
SUPPLY-TUBE-Bk U00112497600 1
5
SUPPLY-TUBE-Lc U00112499800 1
6
SUPPLY-TUBE-M U00112501100 1
7
SUPPLY-TUBE-Lgy U00112503300 1
8
TUBE-ASSY U00112505500 1
IP-7900
TUBE ASSY U00110532300 1
9
TUBE-ASSY-74 U00113944400 1
IP-7700
TUBE ASSY (HV-74) U00113422400 1
CABLE-CARRIER U00112507700 1
IP-7900 6.4.5
Cable carrier HV U00110567200 1
10
CABLE-CARRIER-74 U00113945500 1
IP-7700 6.4.5
Cable carrier(HV-74) U00113420200 1
ROBOT CABLE HV104 U00118631200 1
IP-7900 CABLE(ACT-HCB)1-ASSY(HV104) U00111354601 6.4.9
1
CABLE(ACT-HCB)R-ASSY(HV104) U00115317000
11
ROBOT CABLE HV74 U00118632300 1
IP-7700 CABLE(ACT-HCB)1-ASSY(HV74) U00113755401 6.4.9
1
CABLE(ACT-HCB)R-ASSY(HV104) U00115317000
6-21
6.2.17 Capping Unit
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
CAPPING-STATION-HV U00112509000 1
1 6.9.1
CAPPING-UNIT(HV) U00111097100 1
MOTOR(CAP)-UD U00112511200 1
2 6.9.2
MOTOR(CAP)ASSY-HV U00111115100 1
TORQUE-LIMITER U00112513400 1
3 6.9.4
Torque limiter U00059101700 1
PUMP-F-ASSY U00112515600 1
4 6.9.5
PUMP-F-ASSY(HV) U00111129600 8
JOINT(CAP) U00112517800 2
5 6.9.6
Joint (CAP Sa) U00066733700 16
CAP-HV U00112519100 1
6 6.9.6
8
SOLENOID-CAP U00112521300 1
7 6.9.3
SOLENOID-ASSY(HV) U00111139700 4
RUBBER(VALVE) U00112523500 1
8 6.9.3
RUBBER(VALVE-HV) U00111137500 8
PIN(FLOAT)-CAP U00112525700 1
9 6.9.7
PIN(FLOAT) U00095869100 4
LEVER(CAP)-ASSY U00112527000 1
10 6.9.8
LEVER(CAP)-HV-ASSY U00111121700 1
PLATE(CARRIAGE)-CAPPING U00112529200 1
11
PLATE(CARRIADGE-HV-R) U00111125200 1
O-RING(TO-PUMP) U00112531400 30
12 6.9.5
Damper o-ring U00076378400 8
MICRO SWITCH 4 U00111978000 1
13
SWITCH(HV SENSOR)ASSY U00111375000 1
BEARING_10B (HV) U00135746800 10
14 6.9.9
BEARING(10B) U00095842100 4
6-22
6.2.18 Spittoon Unit
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
SWITCH(SPIT) U00112533600 1
1 6.12.5
SPIT-SW-ASSY U00111179200 1
CASE(SPIT-AREA)-ASSY U00112535800 1
2 6.12.5
SPIT(WET)-ASSY U00111181400 1
6.2.19 Wiping Unit
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
WIPING-STATION-HV U00112537100 1
1 6.8.1
WIPING-UNIT U00111156600 1
CASE-WIPE-LOWER U00112539300 1
2 6.8.3
WIPE-LOWER-ASSY U00111173500 1
MOTOR(WIPE) U00112541500 1
3 6.8.4
MOTOR(CAPPING) U00095881400 1
SWITCH(WIPE) U00112543700 1
4 6.8.2
WIPE-SW-ASSY U00111169100 1
FRAME-CHAIN-WIPE U00112547200 1
5
FRAME(CHAIN-LOWER) U00111161200 7
FRAME-CHAIN-WIPE(Lgy) U00112545000 1
6
FRAME(CHAIN-LOWER) U00111161200 1
TRAY(OVERFLOW) U00112549400 1
7
CASE(WIPE-BOTTOM) U00110448000 1
6-23
6.2.20 Waste Liquid
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
TRAY(WI)-TUBE(WI) U00112551600 1
1 6.3.22
TRAY(WI)+TUBE(WI) 1
IP-7900-00, -01/ SWITCH(WI) U00112833000 1
2 6.3.22
IP-7700-00, -01 1
IP-7900-02, -03/ SWITCH(WI) U00112833001 1
3 6.3.22
IP-7700-02, -03 1
6.2.21 Jigs
Model
No. Unit name for distribution Code for distribution*2 Qty/unit See
*1
1 HEAD-PRINT-CONTROL-JIG-SET U00113101700 1 7.12
2 T-SENSOR-INSTALL-JIG U00113105200 1 7.13
3 CAPPING-ADJUST-TOOL(HV) U00113142300 2 7.7
4 WIPING-ADJUST-TOOL(HV) U00113144500 2 7.4
HB-SHIM-SET U00113111800 1 7.8,
5
7.13
6 HEADBASE(UPDN)GREASE U00114927600 1 7.24
7 NOZZLE CLEANING STICK SET U00117726600 1 5.1
8 Scroller height adjustment tool SIIT(D) U00116493600 1 7.20
PLATEN-SHIM-SET U00113107400
SHIM(M4)0.1 U00084456000 30
SHIM(M4)0.2 U00084457100 30 7.9,
9 15
SHIM(P3B)0.1 U00089242700 7.23
SHIM(P3B)0.2 U00089241600 15
AR
6-24
6.2.22 Scroller
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
FLANGE(PAPER-TUBE) U00112946500 1
1 IP-7900
Shikan-Frange Kit-HV U00111629200 2
6.2.23 Mesh Printing Kit (Option)
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
TRAY(HV-104) U00114000600 1
IP-7900
TRAY-PLATEN(104) U00110791100 1
1
TRAY(HV-74) U00114030000 1
IP-7700
TRAY-PLATEN(74) U00113824100 1
TRAY-SPIT(HV) U00114005200 1
2
TRAY-SPIT U00110793300 1
MESH-GUARD(HV) U00114006300 1
3
HV-Mesh-Guard U00110796600 1
6.2.24 Maintenance Parts
Code for Required

No. See
*1 Code for service
operation
CUTTING SUPPORT PLATE (HV104) U00115873700 1
IP-7900
PLATE(CUT-SUPPORT)HV104 U00115871500 1
1
CUTTING SUPPORT PLATE (HV74) U00115874800 1
IP-7700
PLATE(CUT-SUPPORT)HV74 U00115872600 1
6-25
6.3 Disassembly and Reassembly of Exterior Parts

6.3.1 COVER(HV)FML and COVER(HV)FTL
<Removal>
1. Open the COVER(HV)FML cover, and

remove the screw securing the right
side.
COVER(HV)FML
2. Half open the COVER(HV)FML cover

(until you see a screw), and remove the
screw securing the left side. COVER(HV)FTL
COVER(HV)FML
3. Hold the COVER(HV)FTL and the

COVER(HV)FML, and pull them forward
to remove them.
Caution
Be careful not to break tabs hooked at
two positions on the upper part of the
cover.
6-26
6.3.2 COVER(HV)FMR and COVER(HV)FTR
<Removal>
1. As the COVER(HV)FMR and the

COVER(HV)FTR are located at the
symmetrical positions of the
COVER(HV)FML and the
COVER(HV)FTL, take the same steps
as described in Section 6.3.1 to remove
the covers.
6.3.3 COVER(HV)FBR-R
<Removal>
1. Remove the three screws and pull the

COVER(HV)FBR-R forward to remove
it.
COVER(HV)FBR-R
6-27
6.3.4 COVER(HV)RST
<Removal>
1. Remove the seven screws to remove

the COVER(HV)RST. COVER(HV)RST
6-28
6.3.5 COVER(HV)RSB
<Removal>
1. Remove the COVER(HV)FBR-R. (See

Subsection 6.3.3)
2. Remove the COVER(HV)RST. (See

Subsection 6.3.4)
3. Remove the three screws.
Caution
Screws that were not removed in the
above step are also used to fasten other
parts. Be careful about the order of
securing parts when reassembling.
COVER(HV)RSB
4. Lift up the COVER(HV)RSB slightly to

remove it in order to unhook the upper
part of it from the tabs. Tabs
6-29
6.3.6 COVER(HV104)YRR
<Removal>
1. Remove the screws, four at the upper

side, three at the rear side and two at
the lower front side, which are on the
COVER(HV104)YRR. COVER(HV104)YRR
<Rear Side> <

R
e
a
r
S
i
d
e
>
Front Side
2. Tilt the COVER(HV104)YRR forward to

remove it.
6-30
6.3.7 COVER(HV104)YRR-B
<Removal>
1. Remove the COVER(HV104)YRR. (See

Subsection 6.3.6)
2. Remove the five screws to remove the

COVER(HV104)YRR-B.
Caution
Hold the cover while removing it.
COVER(HV104)YRR-B
6.3.8 COVER(HV104)RBR
<Removal>
1. Remove the COVER(HV)RSB. (See

Subsection 6.3.5)
2. Remove the four screws.
3. Slide the COVER(HV104)RBR to the

left to remove it.
Slide the cover to the left

to remove it
COVER(HV104)RBR
6-31
6.3.9 IP-7900: COVER (HV104) YRC / IP-7700:COVER(HV74)YRC
<Removal>
1. Remove the front cover.
Remove the AC(HV104)ASSY. (See

Subsection 6.3.18.1)
Remove the AC(HV74)ASSY. (See IP-7900 COVER(HV104)YRC

Subsection 6.3.18.2) COVER(HV74)YRC
IP-7700
2. Remove the four screws at the front
side.
3. Remove the screws at the rear side.
Remove the six screws at the rear side.
Remove the five screws at the rear side.
4. Remove the four screws on the upper

side.
IP-7900 COVER(HV104)YRC
5. IP-7700 COVER(HV74)YRC
Position two or more people to hold

each end of the COVER(HV104)YRC,
and tilt it forward to remove it.
Position two or more people to hold

each end of the COVER(HV74)YRC,
and tilt it forward to remove it.
6-32
6.3.10 IP-7900: Pinch-Arm-Guard (104) / IP-7700:Pinch-Arm-Guard (74)
6.3.10.1 Pinch-Arm-Guard (104)
<Removal>
1. Remove the nine screws, and remove

the Pinch-Arm-Guard (104).
2 screws
2 screws
Pinch-Arm-Guard (104)
6.3.10.2 Pinch-Arm-Guard (74)
<Removal>
1. Remove the eight screws, and remove

the Pinch-Arm-Guard (74).
2 screws 2 screws
6-33
6.3.11 IP-7900: COVER (HV104) YRC-B / IP-7700:COVER(HV74)YRC-B
6.3.11.1 COVER(HV104)YRC-B COVER (HV104) YRC
COVER (HV104) YRC-B

<Removal>
1. Remove the COVER(HV104)YRC. (See

Subsection 6.3.9)
2. Remove the Pinch-Arm-Guard (104).

(See Subsection 6.3.10)
3. Remove the four screws securing the
COVER(HV104)YRC-B, and then
remove the cover with two or more
people lifting it.
Caution
Screws that were not removed in the above step are also used to fasten other parts. To
reinstall the parts, first attach the screws removed in the above step, then install the other
exterior parts.
6.3.11.2 COVER(HV74)YRC-B
<Removal> COVER(HV74)YRC
1. Remove the COVER(HV74)YRC. (See COVER(HV74)YRC-B

Subsection 6.3.9)
2. Remove the Pinch-Arm-Guard (74).

3. Remove the four screws securing the

COVER(HV74)YRC-B, and then
remove the cover with two or more
people lifting it. Pinch-Arm-Guard (74)
Caution
Screws that were not removed in the above step are also used to fasten other parts. To
reinstall the parts, first attach the screws removed in the above step, then install the other
exterior parts.
6-34
6.3.12 COVER(HV)FBL
<Removal>
1. Remove the four screws to remove the

COVER(HV)FBL.
COVER(HV)FBL
6.3.13 COVER(HV)LST
<Removal>
1. Remove the seven screws to remove

COVER(HV)LST
the COVER(HV)LST.
6-35
6.3.14 COVER(HV)LSB
<Removal>
1. Remove the COVER(HV)FBL. (See

Subsection 6.3.12)
2. Remove the COVER(HV)LST. (See

Subsection 6.3.13)
3. Remove the three Screws that were not

used to fasten the COVER(HV)FBL and
the COVER(HV)LST.
Caution
parts. To reinstall the parts, first attach the
screws removed in the above step, then
install the other exterior parts. COVER (HV) LSB
4. Lift up the COVER(HV)LSB slightly to

remove in order to unhook the upper
part of it from the tabs.
6-36
6.3.15 COVER(HV)SBF
<Removal>
1. Remove the ST-COVER by rotating the

two UREA-screws shown in the photo.
UREA-screws
2. Remove the five screws to remove the

COVER(HV)SBF.
ST-COVER
COVER(HV)SBF
6-37
6.3.16 COVER(HV104)YRL
<Removal>
1. Remove screws, two at the lower front

side, four on the upper side and three at Two screws at the lower front
the rear side, which are on the side
COVER(HV104)YRL.
COVER(HV104)YRL
<
R
2. Tilt the COVER(HV104)YRL forward to e
remove it. a
r
S
i
6.3.17 COVER(HV104)YRL-B d
e
<Removal> >
1. Remove the COVER(HV)LST. (See

Subsection 6.3.13)
2. Remove the COVER(HV)SBF. (See

Subsection 6.3.15)
3. Remove the COVER(HV104)YRL. (See

Subsection 6.3.16)
4. Remove the four screws to remove the

COVER(HV104)YRL-B. COVER(HV104)YRL
Caution
parts. To reinstall the parts, first attach the
screws removed in the above step, then
install the other exterior parts.
COVER(HV104)YRL-B
COVER(HV)LST
6-38
6.3.18 IP-7900: AC (HV104) ASSY / IP-7700:AC(HV74)ASSY, One-way Hinge
6.3.18.1 AC(HV104)ASSY, One-way Hinge
<Removal>
1. The AC(HV104)ASSY is secured with

screws to the position shown in the
figure via the SHAFT(HV104)AC. (The
figure shows the assembly having been
removed.)
Be careful to hold the AC(HV104)ASSY

while removing screws in the A portion
(two screws each on the left and right
sides) and remove the assembly. AC (HV104) ASSY
Cautions
Assign two or more persons to this
operation.
Be careful not to scratch the acrylic
board.
A
2. To remove the one-way hinge, first

remove the plastic cover One-way hinge Screws
(HOLDER(HV)ACL), remove the two securing a
screws securing the metal plate, and plate.
then remove the one-way hinge.
The figure shows the right side of the
Printer. The same procedure is required
for the left side.
SHAFT(HV104)AC
3. To remove the COVER(HV104)AC,
place the AC(HV104)ASSY on a level
place such as a floor, and remove the
12 screws placed on the part to be
replaced.
6-39
6.3.18.2 AC(HV74)ASSY, One-way Hinge
<Removal>
1. The AC(HV74)ASSY is secured with

screws to the position shown in the
figure via the SHAFT(HV104)AC.
Be careful to hold the AC(HV74)ASSY

while removing screws in the A portion
(two screws each on the left and right
sides) and remove the assembly.
Cautions AC(HV74)ASSY
Assign two or more persons to this
operation.
Be careful not to scratch the acrylic
board.
A
2. To remove the one-way hinge, first

remove the plastic cover One-way hinge Screws
(HOLDER(HV)ACL), remove the two securing a
screws securing the metal plate, and plate.
then remove the one-way hinge.
The figure shows the right side of the
Printer. The same procedure is required
for the left side.
SHAFT(HV104)AC
3. To remove the COVER(HV74)AC, place
the AC(HV74)ASSY on a level place
such as a floor, and remove the 12
screws placed on the part to be
replaced.
6-40
6.3.19 Operation Panel (OPEPANE-UNIT)
<Removal>
1. Remove the COVER(HV)RST(2) and

the COVER(HV104)YRR(6).
2. Remove the panel cable connected to

the rear of the OPEPANE-UNIT.
OPEPANE-UNIT
Panel cable HV
3. Remove the three screws securing the

OPEPANE-UNIT to remove the
OPEPANE-UNIT.
Caution
Hold the OPEPANE-UNIT while
removing it so that you do not drop it.
Upgrade the firmware (both the boot
and system programs) to be the latest.
If a shielded cable is applied to the
operation panel connection cable OPEPANE-UNIT
(Panel cable HV), the frame ground
connection cable is not required. So
cut the frame ground connection cable
at its bottom end.
6-41
6.3.20 MICRO SWITCH HV (interlock)
Note
The MICRO SWITCH HV position differs depending on the Printer model as follows.
IP-7900-00/01 and IP-7700-00/01:
The printers capping unit side and wiping unit side
IP-7900-02/03/20/21 and IP-7700-02/03/20/21:
Capping unit side only
<Removal>
1. Open the front cover.
Open the AC(HV104)ASSY (acrylic

cover).
Open the AC(HV74)ASSY (acrylic

cover).
2. Check the installation position.
The MICRO SWITCH HV is installed at

the Printers capping unit side and
wiping unit side.
The MICRO SWITCH HV is installed

only at the Printers capping unit side.
MICRO SWITCH HV
3. Remove the front paper guide.
Remove the FRONT-PG-ASSY (104).
Remove the FRONT-PG-ASSY (74).
6-42
4. Remove the interlock cable connected

to the SWITCH(Interlock) ASSY.
MICRO SWITCH HV (inside case)
5. Remove screws securing the MICRO

Cable
SWITCH HV to remove the assembly.
MICRO SWITCH HV
6-43
6.3.21 INKBOX COVER(HV) and INKBOX REARCOVER(HV)
<Removal>
1. Remove the INKBOX COVER(HV) by

lifting it up while pushing in the tab T
(shown in the figure). a
b
face
INKBOX COVER(HV)
2. Remove the two screws on the left and

right sides to remove the INKBOX
REARCOVER(HV).
3. If you need to remove the face, remove

the ten screws placed on the face.
6-44
6.3.22 TRAY(WI)-TUBE(WI) and SWITCH(WI)
<Removal>
Screws securing WASTE-BOTTLE-UNIT(HV)
1. Remove the waste liquid bottle on the
WASTE-BOTTLE-UNIT(HV).
2. Remove the fours screws and the

WASTE-BOTTLE-UNIT(HV).
LEVER(WASTE)
3. Remove the CABLE(WASTE)-ASSY.
The figure at right shows the assembly
being installed.
Cautions
For IP-7900-00/01 and IP-7700-00/01,
use the long cable, SWITCH(W1),
U00112833000.
For IP-7900-02/03/20/21 and
Screw
IP-7700-02/03/20/21, use the short
cable, SWITCH(W1), U00112833001.
SWITCH(WI)
4. To remove TRAY(WI)-TUBE(WI),
remove the COVER(HV)FBR-R first,
then remove the two screws to TRAY(WI)-TUBE(WI)
disassemble the TRAY(WI).
6-45
6.3.23 BLOWER FAN
<Removal>
BLOWER FAN
BLOWER FAN
1.
Remove the COVER(HV104)YRC. See

the Subsection 6.3.9.
Remove the COVER(HV104)YRC. See

the Subsection 6.3.9.
2. Remove the connector connected to the

BLOWER FAN to be replaced.
3. Remove the two screws and the

BLOWER FAN to be replaced.
BLOWER FAN
6-46
6.4 Disassembly and Reassembly of Y Drive Parts

6.4.1 Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY
<Removal>
1. Remove the following parts:

COVER(HV)LST (11)
COVER(HV)LSB (12)
COVER(HV)RST (2)
2.
IP-7900 SUS-BELT-104
Rotate two screws on the IP-7700 SUS-BELT-74
Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY to loosen the
tension of the SUS-BELT-104.
Caution
The tension of the SUS-BELT-104
secures the Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY. As
no screws are used to secure the Y-DRIVEN-PULLEY-ASSY
assembly, hold the assembly while
removing it so that you do not drop it.
Rotate two screws on the

Caution
The tension of the SUS-BELT-74 secures
the Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY. As no
screws are used to secure the assembly,
hold the assembly while removing it so
that you do not drop it.
6-47
3.
Rotate the two screws on the


4. Remove the Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY.
Caution
Before the installation, be sure to adjust
the SUS belt tension (see 7.1 Adjusting
the SUS-BELT-104 Tension or
Adjusting the SUS-BELT-74 Tension.
6-48
6.4.2 TIMING-BELT-Y, Y-DRIVE-PULLY-ASSY, and Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY
6.4.2.1 For Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY old model (U00112438100)
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY
(maintenance parts)
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY (old model) configuration
6-49
Caution
Visually check the TIMING-BELT-Y.
If a crack or worn-away part is found with the TIMING-BELT-Y, replace it.
When no crack or worn-away part is found, the procedure to remove
Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY is not required. So skip the steps 2 and 3 to remove the
Y-DRIVEN-PULLEY-ASSY, and go straight to the step 4.
<Removal>

COVER(HV)LST (11)
COVER(HV)LSB (12)
COVER(HV)RST (2)
2. When the TIMING-BELT-Y is to be

removed, loosen the SUS belt as IP-7900 SUS-BELT-104
follows. IP-7700 SUS-BELT-74

Rotate the two screws on the Y-DRIVEN-PULLEY-ASSY

3. When the TIMING-BELT-Y is to be

removed, remove the screws at the
SUS belt as follows.
Among the screws securing the

SUS-BELT-104, remove only the ones
on the carriage side to loosen the
SUS-BELT-104.

SUS-BELT-74, remove only the ones on
the carriage side to loosen the
SUS-BELT-74.
6-50
4. Check that the ferrite core shown in the

figure is not clamped. If the ferrite core
is clamped, remove it.
Ferrite core
Motor
Remove the motors connector. At the

same time, remove the screw, and then
the FG line and the braided wire.
Motor
Connector
FG line
Braided wire
5. To loosen the tension of the BRACKET (DSE64B-SUPPORT)

TIMING-BELnT-Y, loosen five screws Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY
securing the y
BRACKET(DSE64B-SUPPORT) and
the BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)-S2M.
Caution Y-DRIVE-PULLEY-
ASSY
To install the Y-DRIVEN-MOTOR-ASSY,
refer to the step below for Assembly. At
the installation, be sure to adjust the
TIMING-BELT-Ys tension (see 7.2
Adjusting the Tension of the
TIMING-BELT-Y.
TIMING-BELT-Y
BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)
Y motor cable (for maintenance)
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY
(maintenance parts)
6-51
6.
When the Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY is to BRACKET(DSE64B-SUPPORT)

be removed, loosen the tension of the
parts below:
- TIMING-BELT-Y
- SUS-BELT-104
When the Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY is to

be removed, loosen the tension of the
parts below:
- TIMING-BELT-Y
BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)-S2M
- SUS-BELT-74
TIMING-BELT-Y
BRACKET(DSE64B-SUB)-S2M
7. Remove the bearing and BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)-S2M

TIMING-BELT-Y by disassembling:
- BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)-S2M
- BRACKET(DSE64B-SUB)-S2M
B
e
a
r
8. When the Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY is to i
be removed, remove it with the n
procedure below. g
BRACKET (DSE64B-SUPPORT)
(1) Remove the parts below from the
Printers sheet metal:
- BRACKET(DSE64B-SUPPORT)
by removing the screws fixing them.
(2) Remove the two BRACKETs from

the Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY by
removing the eight screws fixing
them.
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY
y
6-52
<Assembly>
The procedure to install Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY is explained as below.
Note
On installing Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY, be sure to adjust the TIMING-BELT-Ys tension
(see 7.2 Adjusting the Tension of the TIMING-BELT-Y).
If the SUS belt tension was loosen for the part removal, be sure to adjust the SUS belt
tension (see 7.1 Adjusting the SUS-BELT-104 Tension or Adjusting the
SUS-BELT-74 Tension).
Apply the grease to the TIMING-BELT-Y.
Motor
Hexagon socket head set screw with

flat point
PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2M
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY
(maintenance part)
Bearing
TIMING-BELT-Y
Hexagon socket head bolt
6-53
1. The procedure below is explained on

the situation that:
Y-DRIVE-PULLY-ASSY
- The BRACKET(DSE64B-SUPPORT),
BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)-S2M, and
BRACKET(DSE64B-SUB)-S2M were
removed from the Printer.
- The TIMING-BELT-Y was installed on

the Y-DRIVE-PULLEY-ASSY.
Disconnect the two connectors from TIMING-BELT-Y

Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY.
2. Insert the Motors

PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2M into the PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2M
BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)-S2Ms hole.
3. Temporarily fix the Motor and the

BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)-S2M with
four hexagon socket head bolts.
4. Remove the two hexagon socket head Motor

set screws with flat point fixing the
PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2M, and apply
the screw locking agent to the screws. Hexagon socket head set
Then return the screws to the screws with flat point
PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2Ms original
position, and tighten them temporarily.
5. Apply the grease to the

PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2M.
6-54
6. Hook the TIMING-BELT-Y on the

PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2M.
TIMING-BELT-Y
TIMING-BELT-Y
7. Set the bearing to the

PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2Ms hole. BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)-S2M
Then fix the parts below with four
screws.
- BRACKET(DSE64B-SUB)-S2M
Bearing
6-55
8. With pressing the (1) With pressing the

PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2M to the PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2
bearing, finally tighten the two hexagon M
socket head set screws with flat point.
(2) Finally tighten the two

hexagon socket head set
screws with flat point.
Bearing
9. Finally tighten the four hexagon socket

head bolts to fix the parts below: Motor
- Motor
- BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)-S2M BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)-S2M
10. Temporarily tighten the four screws to

fix the BRACKET(DSE64B-SUPPORT) BRACKET (DSE64B-SUPPORT)
on the Motor.
6-56
11. Temporarily tighten the screws to fix the BRACKET (DSE64B-SUPPORT)

whole BRACKETs with the
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY fixed.
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY
TIMING-BELT-Y
Y-DRIVE-PULLY-ASSY
12. As with each part fixed temporarily,
adjust the TIMING-BELT-Ys tension
(see Section 7.2).
Cautions
On adjusting the TIMING-BELT-Ys
tension, be sure to confirm that the
parts below are not misaligned
vertically (see Section 7.2):
- PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2M
- TIMING-BELT-Y
The parts misaligned vertically may
cause:
- Acceleration of the
TIMING-BELT-Ys abrasion TIMING-BELT-Y
- Adverse affect on the SUS belt
- Media jams
- Printers malfunction
If the TIMING-BELT-Y is worn away,
replace it with a new one prepackaged
with Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY.
13. Connect the braided wire, FG line and

connector that were removed in
previous procedure.
If the ferrite core was clamped, clamp it.
Motor
Connector
FG line
Braided wire
6-57
6.4.2.2 For Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY new model (U00112438101)
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY (new model) configuration

(Ferrite cores and cables not included)
Note
The difference with the old model is that the BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)-S2M and
BRACKET(DSE64B-SUB)-S2M form now an assembly.
<Removal>
1. Refer to the (12) MOVE CARRIAGE

(p.3-46) in 3.4.4 ADJUST Menu to
move the carriage to the maintenance
area, and turn the Printer breaker to off.
ADJUST -> #MOVE CARRIAGE ->

>MAINTENANCE
Note
If moved to the wiping position, the
carriage will go down with the risk that the
print heads bump into the platen.
2. Push the carriage to move it manually

from the maintenance area to the wiping
position.
3. Remove the following parts.

COVER (HV) LST(11)
COVER (HV) LSB(12)
COVER (HV) RST(2)
6-58
4. Loosen the SUS belt.

IP-7700 SUS-BELT-74

Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY to loosen the Y-DRIVEN-PULLEY-ASSY
5. After removing the Cover

(CarriageUpper) and Cover
(CarriageUnder) ASSY, remove the
SUS belt securing screw on one side.

SUS-BELT-104, remove only the ones
on the carriage side to loosen the
SUS-BELT-104.

SUS-BELT-74, remove only the ones on
the carriage side to loosen the
SUS-BELT-74.
6-59
6. Pull the SUS belt on the right side of the

carriage, and place the SUS belt on the
left side in the Y rail.
Note
Be careful that the SUS belt slack
generated by pulling does not fall on the
capping unit or contact other parts.
SUS belt
7. If the ferrite cores shown in the figure

are attached, remove them.
Ferrite core
Motor
Remove the motor cable from the
terminal.
At this time, remove also the FG line
and the braided wire secured with one
screw.
Motor
Terminal
Connector
FG line
Braided wire
6-60
8. Loosen the screw shown in the figure.
9. Loosen the five screws securing the
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY
BRACKET(DSE64B-SUPPORT) and
y
BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)-S2M and
loosen the TIMING-BELT-Y.
Caution Y-DRIVE-PULLEY-
To install the Y-DRIVEN-MOTOR-ASSY, ASSY
refer to the step below Assembly. At the
installation, be sure to adjust the
TIMING-BELT-Ys tension (see 7.2
Adjusting the Tension of the
TIMING-BELT-Y).
TIMING-BELT-Y
BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)
Y motor cable (for maintenance)
6-61
10. Remove the Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY

and the Y-DRIVE-PULLEY-ASSY
together.
Note
Be careful not to damage the SUS belt.
6-62
<Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY installation>
The procedure to install the Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY is shown below.
1. Remove the screw securing the

BRACKET(DSE64B-SUPPORT) from
the Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY removed
earlier.
2. Mount the
BRACKET(DSE64B-SUPPORT) with
four screws to the
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY to be installed.
Do not fully tighten the screws yet.
3. Attach the Y-DRIVE-PULLEY-ASSY to

the TIMING-BELT-Y of the
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY.
Note
Apply grease to the TIMING-BELT-Y.
6-63
4. Install the Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY and

Y-DRIVE-PULLEY-ASSY together to the
Printer.
Do not fully tighten the screws securing
the Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY.
Note
Be careful not to damage the SUS belt.
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY
TIMING-BELT-Y
Y-DRIVE-PULLY-ASSY
5. Adjust the TIMING-BELT-Y tension (see
Section 7.2) with the parts described in
the procedure above temporarily
assembled.
Cautions
On adjusting the TIMING-BELT-Ys
tension, be sure to confirm that the parts
below are not misaligned vertically (see
Section 7.2):
- TIMING-BELT-Y
The parts misaligned vertically may
cause:
- Acceleration of the TIMING-BELT-Ys
abrasion TIMING-BELT-Y
- Adverse affect on the SUS belt
- Media jams
- Printers malfunction
6-64
6. Install the braided wire, FG line, and

connector removed earlier back to their
original positions. If the ferrite cores
were attached, put them back in their
original positions.
Motor
Connector
FG line
Braided wire
<Y-DRIVE-PULLEY-ASSY installation>
1. Execute the Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY

installation procedure from step 3 to the
end.
<TIMING-BELT-Y installation>
1. Loosen the screw securing the

BRACKET(DSE64B-SUPPORT) from
the Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY removed
earlier.
2. Remove the BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)-S2M

BRACKET(DSE64B-SUB)-S2M from
the Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY.
TIMING-BELT-Y
3. Replace the TIMING-BELT-Y with the
new one and install the BRACKET(DSE64B-SUB)-S2M
BRACKET(DSE64B-SUB)-S2M.
Note
Apply grease to the TIMING-BELT-Y.
4. Execute the Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY

installation procedure from step 3 to the
end.
6-65
6.4.3 IP-7900: SUS-BELT-104 / IP-7700: SUS-BELT-74
<Removal>

COVER(HV)FTR(1)
COVER(HV)RST(2)
COVER(HV)FMR(8)
COVER(HV)FTL(10)
COVER(HV)LST(11)
COVER(HV)FML(17)
2.
Rotate two screws on the IP-7700 SUS-BELT-74
Rotate two screws on the

tension of the SUS-BELT-74. Y-DRIVEN-PULLEY-ASSY
3. Remove the Cover (CarridgeUnder)

ASSY.
Cover (CarridgeUnder) ASSY
4.
Remove the two screws securing the

SUS-BELT-104 from the left and right
sides of the carriage.
Remove the two screws securing the

SUS-BELT-74 from the left and right
sides of the carriage.
Position of screws securing the SUS-BELT-104

Position of screws securing the SUS-BELT-74
6-66
5.
Pull the SUB belt out of a hole on the Y

rail. The figure at right shows the
position where the SUS-BELT-104
should be pulled out.
Pull the SUB belt out of a hole on the Y

rail. The figure at right shows the
position where the SUS-BELT-74
should be pulled out.
Cautions
Reinstallation of the SUS-BELT-104 requires the reverse procedure of that used for
removal. When putting the SUS-BELT-104 through the Y rail hole, using a metal tape
may help make your work easier. Attach the belt to a tip of the metal tape with adhesive
tape or other material.
Before the installation, be sure to adjust the SUS belt tension (see 7.1 Adjusting the
SUS-BELT-104 Tension or Adjusting the SUS-BELT-74 Tension).
Cautions
Reinstallation of the SUS-BELT-74 requires the reverse procedure of that used for
removal. When putting the SUS-BELT-74 through the Y rail hole, using a metal tape may
help make your work easier. Attach the belt to a tip of the metal tape with adhesive tape
or other material.
Before the installation, be sure to adjust the SUS belt tension (see 7.1 Adjusting the
SUS-BELT-104 Tension or Adjusting the SUS-BELT-74 Tension).
6-67
6.4.4 IP-7900: T-FENCE-104 / IP-7700: T-FENCE-74
<The illustrations below show the parts difference depending on the Printer type.>
TYPE A TYPE B
The linear scale (T-FENCE-104 or T-FENCE-74) is The linear scale (T-FENCE-104 or T-FENCE-74) is
installed on the Y rails upper part installed on the Y rails front face
Spring(T-FENCE)
T-FENCE-104
Spring(T-FENCE)
Spring(T-FENCE)
Y rail T-FENCE-104
T
Y Y rail
T
P Y
E P Spring(T-FENCE)
E
A
B
Spring(T-FENCE)
T-FENCE-74
Spring(T-FENCE) Spring(T-FENCE)
T-FENCE-74
Y rail Y rail
T
T
Y
Y Spring(T-FENCE)
P
P
E
E
A
B
6-68
6.4.4.1 TYPE A: The linear scale (T-FENCE-104 or T-FENCE-74) is installed on the Y

rails upper part
<Removal>
COVER(HV)RST(2)
COVER(HV)LST(11)
COVER(HV104)YRC(18)
COVER(HV104)YRC-B(19)
COVER(HV)RST(2)
COVER(HV)LST(11)
COVER(HV74)YRC(18)
2.
Remove the Spring(T-FENCE) on the

left and right sides of the T-FENCE-104.
Spring (T-FENCE) on the left
Remove the Spring(T-FENCE) on the

left and right sides of the T-FENCE-74.
3.
Remove the nine HOLDER(T-FENCE)

units. HOLDER(T-FENCE)
Remove the seven HOLDER(T-FENCE)

units.
6-69
4. Remove one HOLDER-T-FENCE-HV

unit. IP-7900
Caution
Note that, among the stoppers, only the
4th one from the left (viewing from the
rear side) is a HOLDER-T-FENCE-HV HOLDER-T-FENCE-HV
instead of a HOLDER(T-FENCE).
Caution IP-7700
Note that, among the stoppers, only the
2nd one from the left (viewing from the
rear side) is a HOLDER-T-FENCE-HV
instead of a HOLDER(T-FENCE).
HOLDER-T-FENCE-HV
5.
From the CABLE(Y-Encoder) on the

right side of the carriage, pull the
T-FENCE-104 out to remove.
From the CABLE(Y-Encoder) on the

right side of the carriage, pull the
T-FENCE-74 out to remove.
6-70
<Assembly>
1.
Place the T-FENCE-104 on Y-rail, then

hitch Spring(T-FENCE) to the left and
right hooks.
Spring(T-FENCE) on the left

Cautions
Do not reverse the T-FENCE-104. It must
be attached so that:
Seen from the Printers rear side, the
T-FENCE-104 is in the right side.
The Spring(T-FENCE)-mounting holes
at the T-FENCE-104's right and left are
at the T-FENCE-104's upper part.
Place the T-FENCE-74 on Y-rail, then

hitch Spring(T-FENCE) to the left and
right hooks.
Cautions
Do not reverse the T-FENCE-74. It must
be attached so that:
Seen from the Printers rear side, the
T-FENCE-74 is in the right side.
The Spring(T-FENCE)-mounting holes
at the T-FENCE-74's right and left are
at the T-FENCE-74's upper part.
6-71
2. Spring(T-FENCE)
Install the A portion of the

HOLDER-T-FENCE-HV. Insert the
T-FENCE in this portion and fasten it so IP-7900
that it will not move. B
Caution
Ensure that there is no gap between the A
T-FENCE-104 and the top of Y rail.
Spring(T-FENCE)
Install the A portion of the

HOLDER-T-FENCE-HV. Insert the
T-FENCE-74 in this portion and fasten it Spring(T-FENCE)
so that it will not move.
Spring(T-FENCE)
Caution
Ensure that there is no gap between the A IP-7700
T-FENCE-74 and the top of Y rail.
6-72
3.
Insert a sheet of coated paper into the

T-FENCE-104, and install nine
HOLDER(T-FENCE) units.
Remove the coated paper after
fastening the parts.
Cautions
Do not put pressure on the joint part of the T-FENCE-104.
Pull the joint part slightly upward to make sure that it does not come off.
Make sure that the T-FENCE-104 can slide after installation (without A portion).
Print the test pattern 6 (1 dot checker board design in black unicolor) to confirm that no
vertical shading stripe appears on the joint part of the T-FENCE-104.

T-FENCE-74, and install seven

T-FENCE-74, and install four
Cautions
Do not put pressure on the joint part of the T-FENCE-74.
Pull the joint part slightly upward to make sure that it does not come off.
Make sure that the T-FENCE-74 can slide after installation (without A portion).
Print the test pattern 6 (1 dot checker board design in black unicolor) to confirm that no
vertical shading stripe appears on the joint part of the T-FENCE-74.
6-73
6.4.4.2 TYPE B: The linear scale (T-FENCE-104 or T-FENCE-74) is installed on the Y

rails front face
<Removal>
1. Set the Printer in offline. With the MENU REW IND FORM FEED
button, display the service menu.
PH.REC PH.MAIN
2. With the Right button, enter the service

#CAP CLEANING
menu. Then the cap cleaning menu is
displayed. >
3. With the OK button check the #CAP CLEANING

confirmation message, and then press
the OK button again. * OK?
With this operation the carriage moves.

CARRIAGE MOVING
When the carriage transfer is completed,
the Printer issues a warning beep. PLEASE WAIT
4. Open the front cover. OPEN COVER

CLEAN CAP
5. By pressing the CANCEL button and

Power switch at the same time, turn off
the Printer.
6. Open the capping unit cover and wiping

unit cover.
7. Place the banner media or PVDC film

on the capping unit, and cover the cap
with it.

COVER (HV)LST(11).
6-74
9. Remove the Cover-Encoder with one

screw.
Cover-Encoder
10.
<Left side>
Disconnect the T-FENCE-104 from the
springs connected to the
T-FENCE-104s both edges.
Disconnect the T-FENCE-74 from the

springs connected to the T-FENCE-74s Springs
both edges.
<Right side>
Springs
6-75
<Assembly>
1. Temporarily remove the

Bracket-Encoder with two screws.
LINEAR ENCODER ASSY(LONG)
2. Move the carriage to the maintenance

Bracket-Encoder
area.
3.
Fix the T-FENCE-104s wiping unit side

hole to the wiping unit side Holder-Ends
screw.
Note
Do not install the T-FENCE-104 reversed,
considering that:
The T-FENCE-104s connection part
must be nearer to the wiping unit.
The T-FENCE-104s hole must be in
the upper part.
Fix the T-FENCE-74s wiping unit side

hole to the wiping unit side Holder-Ends
screw.
Note
Install the T-FENCE-74 so that it is flat on
the Y rails upper face, considering that:
The T-FENCE-74s connection part
must be nearer to the wiping unit.
The T-FENCE-74s hole must be in the
upper part.
6-76
4.
Temporarily attach the T-FENCE-104 to

the Y rails part indicated in the right
figure. Note that the tape position must
be on the T-FENCE-104s face where
no scale is indicated.
Temporarily attach the T-FENCE-104 to

the Y rails part indicated in the right
figure. Note that the tape position must
be on the T-FENCE-104s face where
no scale is indicated.
5.
While moving the carriage slowly to the

left side, pass the T-FENCE-104
through the gap between the carriage
and Y-rail.
Note
Carefully set the T-FENCE-104 so that it
does not scratch the carriage.
While moving the carriage slowly to the

left side, pass the T-FENCE-74 through
the gap between the carriage and Y-rail.
Note
Carefully set the T-FENCE-74 so that it
does not scratch the carriage.
6-77
6.
As soon as the T-FENCE-104s top is

found at the linear encoder installation
position, stop the carriage and pull out
the T-FENCE-104.
As soon as the T-FENCE-74s top is

found at the linear encoder installation
position, stop the carriage and pull out
the T-FENCE-74.
7.
Temporarily fix the Bracket-Encoder, LINEAR ENCODER ASSY(LONG)

removed at the step 1, with two screws
so that the Bracket-Encoder covers the
T-FENCE-104.
Temporarily fix the Bracket-Encoder,

removed at the step 1, with two screws
so that the Bracket-Encoder covers the Bracket-Encoder
T-FENCE-74.
8.
Fix the T-FENCE-104s capping-unit

side hole to the capping-unit side
Holder-Spring-End.
Fix the T-FENCE-74s capping-unit side

hole to the capping-unit side
Holder-Spring-End.
6-78
9.
Set the T-FENCE-104 into the holder.
Note
If the T-FENCE-104 does not fit easily, do
not squeeze it but remove the spring
temporarily.
Set the T-FENCE-74 into the holder.
Note
If the T-FENCE-74 does not fit easily, do
not squeeze it but remove the spring
temporarily.
10.
Adjust the T-FENCE-104s position so

that it is at the center of the linear
encoder. Then fix the linear encoder by
tightening the two screws.
Adjust the T-FENCE-74s position so

that it is at the center of the linear
encoder. Then fix the linear encoder by
tightening the two screws.
6-79
11.
Again check that the T-FENCE-104 was

installed properly.
Note
The T-FENCE-104s improper installation
may:
- cause the degraded print image
accuracy; and
- damage the T-FENCE-104.
Again check that the T-FENCE-74 was

installed properly.
Note
The T-FENCE-74s improper installation
may:
- cause the degraded print image
accuracy; and
- damage the T-FENCE-74.
12. Fix the Cover-Encoder with one screw.
13. Install the COVER(HV)RST(2) and

COVER(HV)LST(11).
14. Remove the covering placed on the

capping unit.

Power switch at the same time, turn
the Printer power off.
17. Turn the Printer on, and check the

Printer operates normally.
Note
Perform the cap cleaning and print head
cleaning, as the print heads and the caps
are possibly dry.
6-80
6.4.5 IP-7900: CARRIAGE CABLE HV104 and CABLE CARRIER,

IP-7700: CARRIAGE CABLE HV74 and CABLE CARRIER74
<Removal>
1. Operate the operation panel to switch

the cap and carriage into open status.
2. Turn the power off.
3. Remove an exterior cover so as to

expose all of the carriage cables and
cable carrier.
4.
Remove the REAR PG(104)-ASSY.
5.
Remove the TUBE HOLDER(HV) units TUBE HOLDER(HV)

from two positions on the CARRIAGE
CABLE HV104.
Remove the TUBE HOLDER(HV) units

from two positions on the CARRIAGE
CABLE HV74.
6.
Remove the insulock ties from the TUBE HOLDER(HV)

CARRIAGE CABLE HV104.
Remove the insulock ties from the

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74.
6-81
7. Remove the cover on the top of carriage PCB-ASSY-HCB1

so as to expose the PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
8. Manually move the carriage to the

wiping unit side.
9. Check the cable carrier HV nearest to

the carriage. Then remove the cable Ferrite core
carrier HVs arm.
Notes
When only the FFC (CARRIAGE Robot cable
CABLE HV104/74) is replaced, do not
cut the cable tie so that the tie is
reused. FFC
When the cable carrier HV is replaced,
cut the cable tie. Then install a new Cable tie
Cable carrier HVs lid
cable carrier HV in the same way as
the previous cable carrier HV.
10. Remove all the arms in a portion shown

in the figure of the cable carrier HV.
6-82

PLATE(FFC-CABLE) on the carriage.
PLATE(FFC-CABLE)
12. If the FASTENING BRACKET, FFC is

installed on the PCB-ASSY-HCB1, FASTENING BRACKET, FFC
remove it and the two screws.
13.
PCB-ASSY-HCB1
Remove the CARRIAGE CABLE HV104
connected in the PCB-ASSY-HCB1.

connected in the PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
14.
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
connected in the PCB-ASSY-IPB3.

connected in the PCB-ASSY-IPB3.
6-83
15.
To pull out the CARRIAGE CABLE

HV104 smoothly, it must be loosened in
advance as shown in the figure at right.
To pull out the CARRIAGE CABLE

HV74 smoothly, it must be loosened in
advance as shown in the figure at right.
16.
Pull the CARRIAGE CABLE HV104 out

of the rear on the cap side.
Caution
When pulling the part out, be careful not
to slack off or pull other cables or tubes.
Pull the CARRIAGE CABLE HV74 out

of the rear on the cap side.
Caution
When pulling the part out, be careful not
to slack off or pull other cables or tubes.
6-84
<Assembly>
1. Place the PET SHEET(HV) flat to cover

the partition plate.
PET SHEET(HV)
Partition plate
2. Adjust the PET SHEET(HV) position so

that the distance below is 70mm. PET SHEET(HV)
From: PET SHEET(HV)s top
To: Tube alignment cutouts
base face of the 70mm
HOLDER(CABLE-COVER)
Base face
Tube alignment cutout
PCB-ASSY-HCB1
HOLDER(CABLE-COVER)
HOLDER(CABLE-COVER)
3.
Fold the CARRIAGE CABLE HV104s 5 to 10mm

PCB-ASSY-HCB1 side as shown in the 10mm
right figure.
10mm
Fold the CARRIAGE CABLE HV74s
PCB-ASSY-HCB1 side as shown in the
10mm 10mm
right figure.
Blue plate
6-85
4.
Place the CARRIAGE CABLE HV104
CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
on the PET SHEET(HV).
Then place another PET SHEET(HV)
on it.
Place the CARRIAGE CABLE HV74 on

the PET SHEET(HV).
Then place another PET SHEET(HV)
on it.
5. Adjust the FFC position so that the

distance from the
HOLDER(CABLE-COVER)s base face
to each blue plates edge is as follows.
Adjust the positions of the FFC and PET

SHEET(HV) so that the distances below
From: HOLDER(CABLE-COVER)s
base face
To: FFCs blue plates and PET
SHEET(HV)
are as shown in the figure below.
PET SHEET(HV)
70 mm 160 mm 190 mm 220 mm 250 mm
70 mm
Base face PET SHEET(HV)
Blue plate
Base face
HOLDER(CABLE-COVER)
6-86
6. Set the robot cable (5-pin) along the

Robot cable (5-pin)
ditch inside the cable carrier. Note that
the ditch is found in the Y rails opposite
side.
Then adjust the distance below to be

105 mm
From: HOLDER(CABLE-COVER)s
base face
To: Robot cable connectors top
However, this adjustment is not required
when the robot cable is fixed with a
cable tie.

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
Robot cable
Y rail side
Tube assembly
Cable carrier HV
7. Install the PLATE(FFC-CABLE) using

two screws.
PLATE(FFC-CABLE)
8.
Connect the CARRIAGE CABLE HV104 CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
to the PCB-ASSY-HCB1 connector.
Connect the CARRIAGE CABLE HV74

to the PCB-ASSY-HCB1 connector.
PCB-ASSY-HCB1
6-87
9. If the FASTENING BRACKET, FFC is

installed on the PCB-ASSY-HCB1, fix FASTENING BRACKET, FFC
the following parts together to the
FASTENING BRACKET, FFC with two
screws.
- 2 PET SHEET(HV)s
- 4 FFCs
Tighten the two screws above with the
FFC manually pressed.This operation
protects the FFCs so that they are not
pressed by the cover after the cover is
installed.
10. Connect the robot cable to the

PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
Then insert the robot cables slackening

part into the gap between the case and
the PCB-ASSY-HCB1, so that the robot
cable does not hit the FASTENING
BRACKET, FFC.
11. With a cable tie fix the robot cable to the

arm nearest to the cable carriers
carriage.
Notes Robot Cable
Install the cable tie properly as shown

in the figure below.
Skip this step if the robot cable has
already been fixed.
Ensure that the robot cable position is
not misaligned even if it is pulled. Arm
Insulock tie
Straighten the cable tie The cable tie is curved

at this position. at this position.
Cable
Cable
carriers arm
carriers arm
Robot cable
Robot cable
Straighten the cable tie The cable tie is curved

at this part. at this position.
<Cable tie installed properly> <Cable tie installed improperly>
6-88
12.
Move the CARRIAGE CABLE HV104

and the PET SHEET(HV) in and out to
adjust their positions and remove all
unnecessary slack.
Move the CARRIAGE CABLE HV74

and the PET SHEET(HV) in and out to
adjust their positions and remove all
unnecessary slack.

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
13. Install the cable carrier HVs hooks on

their original position.
14. Install the HOLDER(CABLE-COVER)

using four screws.
HOLDER(CABLE-COVER)
6-89
15.
In the vicinity of electrical components,

arrange the CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
cables and the robot cables as shown in
the figure.

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
In the vicinity of electrical components,
arrange the CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
cables and the robot cables as shown in
the figure.

CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
16. Install the two TUBE HOLDER(HV) to

their designated locations.
TUBE HOLDER(HV)
TUBE HOLDER(HV)
17. By manually slide the carriage rightward

and leftward, ensure that the FFC and
the robot cable are not strongly pulled.
6-90
18. Attach the cover back in place.
Note
Check the space between the tubes and the cable carrier by looking at the inner side of
the arc formed when the cable carrier is in the home position.
Adjust the space if it is large.
Adjust if the space is large.

Adjust with the following procedure.
(1) Remove the PLATE(FFC-CABLE). (2) Pull the tubes for which you noticed a
large space toward the board side.
(3) Check the space between the tubes and (4) Install the PLATE(FFC-CABLE).
the cable carrier.
6-91
6.4.6 PHOTO INTERRUPTER (home position sensor)
<Removal>

the COVER(HV104)YRR(6).
2. Remove a cable connected to the

PHOTO INTERRUPTER.

PHOTO INTERRUPTER. Y rail rear side
PHOTO
INTERRUPTER
<For the IP-7900-22/23>
1. Remove the PCB-ASSY-HCB1 board

see Subsection 6.7.5).
2. Remove the screw and the PHOTO

INTERRUPTER.
PHOTO INTERRUPTER
U00084544701
3. Install the new photo interrupter.
4. Reinstall the parts removed in step 1.
6-92
6.4.7 SCREW-CAP
<Removal>
1. Remove the COVER(HV)RST.

Cross-recessed pan head screw
2. While pressing the
Y-DRIVEN-PULLEY-ASSYs shaft to the
Printer direction so that it would not
come away, remove the following:
- Two cross-recessed pan head screws
- Two SCREW-CAPs
Screw cap
SCREW-CAP
Note
Do not touch the SUS belt with your
hand.
Before the installation, be sure to
adjust the SUS belt tension (see 7.1
Adjusting the SUS-BELT-104
Tension or Adjusting the
SUS-BELT-74 Tension).
6-93
6.4.8 FASTENING BRACKET, FFC
On applying the FASTENING BRACKET, FFC stocked at your site, refer to the procedure
below.
<Assembly>
1. Remove the COVER(CARRIAGE-EL)

(see Subsection 6.7.1).
2. On the PCB-ASSY-HCB1, remove the

two screws shown in the right figure.
3. With slightly lifting up the PET

SHEET(HV) holding the FFC inside, set
the Plate-Fix(FFC) between the
PCB-ASSY-HCB1 and PET
SHEET(HV).
Before setting, distinguish
the parts right from left.
Shorter side Plate-Fix(FFC)

Longer side
4. Fix the Plate-Fix(FFC) with the two

screws removed at the step 2.
6-94
5. Fix the HOLDER-FFC with the two

screws included in the FASTENING
BRACKET, FFC.
HOLDER-FFC
6. Fix the COVER(CARRIAGE-EL).
Cautions
Confirm that:
At the FASTENING BRACKET, FFC-installed part, the FFC is sandwiched by the PET
SHEET(HV) (see Subsection 6.4.5).
At the FFC connection part with the PCB-ASSY-HCB1, the FFC is properly folded
V-shapedly.
The robot cable does not touch the Plate-Fix(FFC) and HOLDER-FFC (see Subsection
6.4.5).
The FFC and the robot cable are not strongly pulled, even though the carriage is
manually slid rightward and leftward (see Subsection 6.4.5).
6-95
6.4.9 IP-7900: ROBOT CABLE HV104 / IP-7700: ROBOT CABLE HV74
<Removal>
1. From the operation panel, set the cap

and carriage to Open
2. Turn the Printer off.
3. Remove the exterior cover so that you

can see the carriage cable and the
entire cable carrier.
4.
5.
Remove the clamp fixing the ROBOT

CABLE HV104.
Remove the clamp fixing the ROBOT

CABLE HV74.
6. Remove the cover at the carriages PCB-ASSY-HCB1

upper part so that you can see the
PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
6-96
7. Manually slide the carriage to the wiping

unit side.
8. Cut the cable tie attached to the cable Ferrite core

carrier HV nearest to the carriage. (attached only at IP-7700-02/03)
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
CARRIAGE CABLE
Cable carrier HVs arm

Cable tie
9. Remove the all cable carrier HVs arms

shown in the right photo.
10. At the carriage, remove the

PLATE(FFC-CABLE) and two screws.
Note
As shown in the picture to the right, the
installation holes on the
PLATE(FFC-CABLE) are placed on its
left side. If the plate is installed in the PLATE(FFC-CABLE)
wrong orientation, the installation holes
will come to the right side improperly.
Confirm the position of the installation
holes and pay attention to the orientation
of the PLATE(FFC-CABLE) when
installing it..
6-97
11.
Unplug the ROBOT CABLE HV104s

connector connected to the PCB-ASSY-HCB1
PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
Unplug the ROBOT CABLE HV74s CARRIAGE CABLE

connector connected to the
PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
ROBOT CABLE HV104s connector or

ROBOT CABLE HV74s connector

PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
Then remove the ferrite core.

PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
Then remove the ferrite core.
Ferrite core (attached only at IP-7700-02/03

and IP-7700-02/03)
12. ROBOT CABLE HV104s connector or

Unplug the ROBOT CABLE HV104's
PCB-ASSY-ACT1s CN30. Note that
CN30 is located to the center position
horizontally and in the back from you.
Unplug the ROBOT CABLE HV104's

PCB-ASSY-ACT1s CN30. Note that
CN30 is located to the center position
horizontally and in the back from you.
PCB-ASSY-ACT1
6-98
13.
Slacken the ROBOT CABLE HV104 as

shown in the right photo so that it is
removed smoothly.
Slacken the ROBOT CABLE HV74 as

shown in the right photo so that it is
removed smoothly.
14.
Pull out the ROBOT CABLE HV104

from the capping unit side rear face.
Pull out the ROBOT CABLE HV74 from

the capping unit side rear face.
Note
Pull out carefully so that the other cables
are slackened or pulled out.
<Assembly>
1.
Install the ROBOT CABLE
HV104/ROBOT CABLE HV74 as
installed at the steps 5 to 13 in the
IP-7700: CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
and CABLE CARRIER74, installation
procedure.
2.
Install the ferrite core removed at the

step 11 in the Subsection 6.4.5 IP-7900:
CARRIAGE CABLE HV104 and
CABLE CARRIER, IP-7700:
CARRIER74, installation procedure.
6-99
3.
At the area below the supply-side paper

guide, as the photo below shows.
At the area below the supply-side paper

guide, as the photo below shows.
ROBOT CABLE HV104

ROBOT CABLE HV74
4.
ROBOT CABLE HV104s connector or
Pass the ROBOT CABLE HV104
through the hole at the black sponge
nearest to the capping unit. Then
connect the cable to the
PCB-ASSY-ACT1s CN30.
Pass the ROBOT CABLE HV104

through the hole at the black sponge
nearest to the capping unit. Then
connect the cable to the
PCB-ASSY-ACT1s CN30.
PCB-ASSY-ACT1
5. Install the removed exterior cover on the

original position.
6-100
Note
Check the space between the tubes and the cable carrier by looking at the inner side of
the arc formed when the cable carrier is in the home position.

Adjust with the following procedure.
(1) Remove the PLATE(FFC-CABLE). (2) Pull the tubes for which you noticed a
large space toward the board side.
(3) Check the space between the tubes and (4) Install the PLATE(FFC-CABLE).
the cable carrier.
6-101
6.5 Disassembly and Reassembly of X Drive Parts

6.5.1 PAPER-FEED-MOTOR-ASSY, DECELERATION-BELT, and X-PULLY-ASSY
<Removal>

COVER (HV) LST(11)
COVER(HV)LSB(12)
COVER(HV)RST(2)

BRACKET(FAN120)L.

X-PULLY-BRACKET.
Then you can remove the DECELERATION-BELT
X-PULLY-ASSY.
X-PULLY
Caution
Springs and several other parts are
placed between the X-PULLY-BRACKET
and the pully shaft. Be careful not to lose
any of them. X-PULLEY-BRACKET
PAPER-FEED-MOTOR-ASSY
Pulley shaft
6-102
4. Remove the screw and the FG cable of

the PAPER-FEED-MOTOR-ASSY.
5. Remove the three screws and the

PAPER-FEED-MOTOR-ASSY.
6. To remove the DECELERATION-BELT,

first remove the four screws and the
motor.
DECELERATION-BELT
Note
At the installation procedure, be sure to adjust the DECELERATION-BELTs tension (see
7.3 Adjusting the Tension of the DECELERATION-BELT).
6-103
6.5.2 Media detect and Line sensor SIIT (media discharge sensor)
<Removal>
1.
IP-7900 FRONT-PG-ASSY(104)
Remove the FRONT-PG-ASSY(104). IP-7700 FRONT-PG-ASSY(74)

FRONT-PG-
(See Subsection 6.12.1) ASSY(74)
Remove the FRONT-PG-ASSY(74).

Media discharge sensor
2.
MEDIA-SENSOR-BR-FPG
Remove the screw and the
MEDIA-SENSOR-BR-FPG from the
rear side of the FRONT-PG-ASSY(104).
Remove the screw and the

MEDIA-SENSOR-BR-FPG from the
rear side of the FRONT-PG-ASSY(74).
3. Remove the media discharge sensor

from the MEDIA-SENSOR-BR-FPG.
6-104
6.5.3 Media detect and Line sensor SIIT (media feed sensor)
<Removal>
1.
Remove the REAR-PG(74)-ASSY. (See

Subsection 6.12.2)
Remove the REAR-PG(74)-ASSY. (See

Subsection 6.12.2)
2. Remove the connector plugged in the

Media ditect and Line sensor SIIT.
3. Remove the screw and the

MEDIA-SENSOR-BRACKET
MEDIA-SENSOR-BRACKET.
4. Remove the screw and the media feed Media feed sensor
sensor from the
MEDIA-SENSOR-BRACKET.
screw
Sensor bracket
(MEDIA-SENSOR-BRACKET)
6-105
6.5.4 FAN 4 (suction fan)
<Removal>
1.


2.
Unplug the cable connector of the FAN

4 to be removed.
FAN4
Unplug the cable connector of the FAN

4 to be removed.
FAN4
3. Remove the two screws and the FAN4

to be replaced.
6-106
6.5.5 PINCH-ROLLER-ASSY
<Removal>
1. Move the carriage to the wiping unit

side.
COVER(HV)FMR (8)
COVER(HV)RST (2)
COVER(HV104)RBR (5)
COVER(HV)FML (17)
COVER(HV)LST (11)
ST-COVER (28)
COVER(HV)SBF (16)
Pinch-Arm-Guard(104)
COVER(HV)FMR (8)
COVER(HV)RST (2)
COVER(HV104)RBR (5)
COVER(HV)FML (17)
COVER(HV)LST (11)
ST-COVER (27)
COVER(HV)SBF (16)
Pinch-Arm-Guard(74)
3. Remove the STAY(Y-RAIL)R

STAY(Y-RAIL)R
4. Rotate the pressure control knob to the

left to raise the PINCH-ROLLER.
6-107
5. Remove the STOPPER(CAMSHAFT-L).
STOPPER(CAMSHAFT-L)
6. Prior to removing the cam shaft, remove

the STOPPER(CAMSHAFT-R) located
at the gear part on the pressure control
knob side by removing the two fixing
screws.
STOPPER(CAMSHAFT-R)
7. Remove the GEAR(PINCH-20) from the

cam shaft.
GEAR(PINCH-20)
8. Pull out the cam shaft until the

PINCH-ROLLER-ASSY to be replaced
is disengaged. Cam shaft
6-108

PINCH-ROLLER-ASSY.
Issues to be checked at installation

Install the PINCH-ROLLER-ASSY as follows.
Upper part to be pressed upward
Left part to be
pressed leftward,
that is, to the
capping unit side
Do not press the

PINCH-ROLLER-ASSY from
its bottom part, but hold its
Torque to fasten screws: 0.8 Nm side parts and press the
PINCH-ROLLER-ASSY
upward.
When installing the GEAR(PINCH-20) to the cam shaft, do not set the GEAR(PINCH-20)
reversed.
Install the GEAR(PINCH-20) so that its

side with the thicker boss faces inward.
6-109
6.5.6 PINCH-ROLLER and PINCH-SPRING
Notes
Depending on the manufacturing period, PINCH-ROLLER-ASSY differs as follows.
(a) Its ARM-HEAD can be removed.
(b) Its ARM-HEAD cannot be removed
To remove the PINCH-ROLLER-ASSY including the removable ARM-HEAD, see
Subsection 6.5.10 PINCH ARM SET.
Removable ARM-HEAD Unremovable ARM-HEAD
<Removal>
2. By rotating the pressure control knob

clockwise, lift the PINCH-ROLLER.
3. While slightly pressing the

PINCH-ROLLER-ASSYs parts
indicated in the right photo outward,
remove the PINCH-ROLLER.
Note
Press the PINCH-ROLLER-ASSYs
edge parts carefully, as they snap
easily.
After installing the PINCH-ROLLER,
ensure that the PINCH-ROLLER
rotates smoothly.
PINCH-ROLLER
6-110
6.5.7 IP-7900:GRIT-ROLLER-104 / IP-7700:GRIT-ROLLER-74
<Removal>
COVER (HV) RST(2)

COVER (HV104) YRR(6)
COVER (HV) FMR(8)
COVER (HV) FMR-S(9)
COVER (HV) FTL(10)
COVER (HV) LST(11)
COVER (HV104) YRL(14)
COVER (HV104) YRL-B(15)
COVER (HV) FML(17)
COVER(HV104)YRC(18)
COVER(HV)FTR(1)
COVER(HV)RST(2)
COVER(HV104)YRR(6)
COVER(HV)FMR(8)
COVER(HV)FMR-S(9)
COVER(HV)FTL(10)
COVER(HV) LST(11)
COVER(HV104)YRL(14)
COVER(HV104)YRL-B(15)
COVER(HV)FML(17)
COVER(HV74)YRC(18)
2. Remove the X-PULLY-ASSY.(See

Subsection 6.5.1)
3. Rotate the pressure control knob to the

left to raise the PINCH-ROLLER.
4. Remove the PINCH-ROLLER-ASSY.

6-111
5.
Bearing holder

Remove the hexagon socket head cap
screw placed at the right edge of the
GRIT-ROLLER-104 to remove the
bearing holder.
Remove the hexagon socket head cap

screw placed at the right edge of the
GRIT-ROLLER-74 to remove the
bearing holder.
GRIT-ROLLER-104
GRIT-ROLLER-74
6. Remove PAPER-FEED-MOTOR-ASSY
and the X-PULLY-ASSY. (See
Subsection 6.5.1)
7.
First slide the GRIT-ROLLER-104 to the

wiping unit side, then lift it up from the
cap side to remove.
First slide the GRIT-ROLLER-74 to the

wiping unit side, then lift it up from the
cap side to remove.
6-112
6.5.8 PHOTO INTERRUPTER (grip sensor )
<Removal>
1. The figure on the right shows the Grip sensor

location of the grip sensor used for
detecting HP of the pressure control
knob.
To remove it, first open the pressure

control knob cover, unplug the
connector, remove the screw, and then
remove the grip sensor together with its
bracket.
Pressure control knob
6-113
6.5.9 PINCH KNOB SET
Totally two PINCH KNOB SETs are installed at:

- Printers supply side; and
- Printers take-up side
They are removed or installed with the same procedure.
PINCH KNOB SET
<Removal>
PINCH KNOB SET
1. Remove the pressure control knob,

PINCH KNOB SET and one fixing
screw.
6-114
<Assembly>
1. Insert the SPRING(CLICKER),

HOLDER(BALL), and steel ball into the
KNOB(L82)s hole shown in the right Steel ball
figure.
HOLDER(BALL)
SPRING(CLICKER)
Set the HOLDER(BALL) so that the

SPRING(CLICKER) is inserted into
the HOLDER(BALL)s deeper hole.
KNOB(L82)
2. Insert the parallel pin into the shafts

hole.
Parallel pin
3. Align the KNOB(1.82)s cutout shown in

the figure with the parallel pin so that
the cutout direction matches the parallel
pin direction. Also align the steel ball Parallel pin
with the sheet metals oval hole. Then
Shaft
set the shaft into hte KNOB(82). Oval hole
Cutout
Steel ball
KNOB(L82)
6-115
4. Align the shafts D-formed cut part with

the KNOB(L82)s D-formed cut part.
5. Tighten the screw at the KNOB(L82)s

center, and fix the PINCH KNOB SET.
6. Check that the labels, Open, High,

Normal, and Low are located at the
correct positions. Arrow
Protrusion
(1) Align the PINCH KNOB SETs
protrusion with the arrow position
shown in the figure.
(2) Check that the label positions are

correct as shown in the figure
below.
Protrusion
Open
High
Low
Normal
6-116
(3) When you relabel them, first stick

the Open label. Then rotate the
pressure control knob for one level
and stick the Law label. In the same
way, stick the labels Normal and
High after the knobs one-level
rotation each.
6-117
6.5.10 PINCH ARM SET
PINCH ARM SET
ARM-HEAD
<Removal>
2. By rotating the pressure control knob

clockwise, lift the PINCH-ROLLER.
3. While, with a screwdrivers tip, pressing

the position arrowed in the right photo,
remove the ARM-HEAD by pulling it to
your side.
ARM-HEAD
4. By silghtly pushing the ARM-HEADs

both sides outward, remove the ARM-HEAD
PINCH-ROLLER.
Note
At installing the ARM-HEAD, check that
the PINCH-ROLLER installed on the
ARM-HEAD rotates smoothly.
PINCH-ROLLER
6-118
6.5.11 PINCH-SPRING
<Removal>
1.
Remove the Pinch-Arm-Guard(104).
Pinch-Arm-Guard(104)
Pinch-Arm-Guard(74)
2. Remove the PINCH-SPRING.
PINCH-SPRING
6-119
6.6 Disassembly and Reassembly of Electrical

Parts
6.6.1 PCB-ASSY-ACT1 (actuator board), PCB-ASSY-IPB3 (main board),
PCB-ASSY-TRC2, POWER SUPPLY (24V), and POWER SUPPLY (38V)
Note
To replace the PCB-ASSY-ACT1, upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
To replace the PCB-ASSY-IPB3, see Subsection 6.6.4 Setting Procedures when
Replacing the Main Board (IPB3).
POWER SUPPLY (24V) TRAY(PSU)HV
POWER SUPPLY (38V)
TRAY(EB)HV
PCB-ASSY-TRC2
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
PCB-ASSY-ACT1
POWER SUPPLY (24V) TRAY(PSU)HV
POWER SUPPLY (38V)
TRAY(EB)HV
PCB-ASSY-TRC2
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
PCB-ASSY-ACT1
6-120
<Removal>
1. To remove the PCB-ASSY-ACT1 and

the PCB-ASSY-IPB3, remove the
TRAY(EB)HV first. To remove the power
supply unit and the PCB-ASSY-TRC2,
remove the TRAY(PSU)HV first. In
either case, remove the fixing screws to
pull the tray out.
2. Disconnect all relevant cables on the

board, then remove each board.
6-121
6.6.2 FAN2 (electrical unit cooling fan)
<Removal>
1. Remove the two P-tight screws from

inside of the EL-BOX-ASSY(HV).
FAN2
EL-BOX-ASSY(HV)
FAN2
EL-BOX-ASSY(HV)
2. Remove the Electrical unit cooling fan

HV by removing the two P-tight screws
on the outside of the
EL-BOX-ASSY(HV).
6-122
6.6.3 IC(EEPROM)
<Removal>
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
1. Insert a flathead precision screwdriver
under the IC (EEPROM) on the
PCB-ASSY-IPB3 to remove the IC.
Cautions
Make sure that the power is turned off
prior to replacement.
Implement correct antistatic measures.
Ensure the polarity is correct for
installation.
Be sure to install the package so that
its circular cutout to indicate the pin 1
side is found at the right side. If it is
installed upside down and the power is
supplied, EEPROM is damaged.
To replace the IC(EEPROM), see
Subsection 6.6.4 Setting Procedures
when Replacing the Main Board
(IPB3).
Caution IC(EEPROM)
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS
REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE.DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES
ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
6-123
6.6.4 Setting Procedures when Replacing the Main Board (IPB3)
Cautions
At replacing the Main board (IPB3), turn the power off without executing fillcap, because
the Printer with the Main board (IPB3) replaced must be turned on without fillcap.
After the replacement of the Main board (IPB3) has been completed, upgrade the
firmware to the latest version.
(1) If the EEPROM is normal while only the main board has failed (Reinstall the
EEPROM and replace the main board)
When it is possible to reinstall the EEPROM from the current main board onto a new board,
follow the procedure below.
(1) Reinstall the EEPROM on the current main board onto a new board.
(2) Upgrade the engine firmware to be the latest.
(3) Turn the Printer on.
(4) Engine maintenance mode of operation panel:
In the SYSTEM menu, configure the following settings.
- SAVE CALIBS: Save the EEPROM contents in the factory default area of the
flash memory.
- SAVE EEPROM: Save the EEPROM contents in the backup area of the flash
memory.
(2) If only the EEPROM fails while the main board is normal (replace only the EEPROM)
When installing a new EEPROM on a new main board, follow the procedure below.
(1) Install a new EEPROM on a new main board.
(3) Turn the Printer on.
- As the EEPROM is not initialized, the Printer is started with EEPROM
initialization check error (system error 1650).
- System backup information on the board is restored in the EEPROM using
firmware recovery processing.
(4) Turn the power off and on again to boot the system.
- If EEPROM initialization check error (system error 1650) is issued again,
backup information is damaged. Boot the system in the POC skip mode
(CANCEL + power-on), and select RESTORE CALIBS in the setup menu.
6-124
(3) If both the EEPROM and main board has failed (replace both the EEPROM and
engine board)
Replacing the EEPROM and main board together will result in the mechanical correction
value parameters and counter information such as the running distance being lost
Do not replace them at the same time.
To avoid this problem, try step (1) or (2) depending on the failure level to enable the user
to use the contents of the EEPROM or the backup area in the flash ROM.
When it is impossible to use engine system information, execute the following steps.
(1) Install a new main board.
(3) Skip POC and turn the Printer on.
- Press the CANCEL button and power switch at the same time to skip POC and
turn the Printer on.
- The EEPROM is not initialized; therefore, the Printer is started with EEPROM
error (1109), and the operation panel is displayed in English.
(4) Maintenance mode of operation panel:
In the SYSTEM menu, configure the following settings.
- INIT EEPROM: Initialize the EEPROM.
- LANGUAGE: Specify the language used to display messages on the
LCD.
- DATE(YY/MM/DD): Specify the date (year, month, day).
- SYSTEM TIME: Specify the time (hour, minute, second).
- SERIAL No.: Specify the serial number of the Printer.
- NO. OF INK COLORS: Specify the ink color quantity.
In the service menu, configure the following settings.
- INK CHARGE DONE: Set to YES.
(6) Enter the correction values for mechanical adjustment and head adjustment.
<If parameters are recorded>
- If the mechanical adjustment parameters for the old main board are recorded,
enter the correction values related to the mechanical and head adjustments
without especially performing the adjustment.
<If parameters are not recorded>
- Perform the mechanical and head adjustments, and enter the correction values
related to the mechanical and head adjustments.
6-125
<Correction values related to mechanical and head adjustments>

- Correcting the cap position: See 7.6 Correcting the Cap Position.
- Correcting the wiping unit position: See 7.4 Adjusting the Height of the
Wiping Unit.
- Correcting the nozzle position:
See the Advanced Operation Guide or Basic Operation Guide.
- Correcting the right and left head position:
- Correcting the head position (main scanning direction):
- Correcting the bidirectional print position:
- Correcting the media advance value:
- Correcting the edge sensor position adjustment:
- Correcting the platen height: See 7.9 Adjusting the Platen Flatness.
- Correcting the wiping unit height: See 7.4 Adjusting the Height of the Wiping
Unit.
(7) Maintenance mode of operation panel: In the SYSTEM menu, configure the
following settings.
- SAVE CALIBS: Save the EEPROM contents in the factory default area of the
flash memory.
- SAVE EEPROM: Save the EEPROM contents in the backup area of the flash
memory.
Cautions
At replacing the Main board (IPB3), turn the power off without executing fillcap, because
the Printer with the Main board (IPB3) replaced must be turned on without fillcap.
After the replacement of the Main board (IPB3) has been completed, upgrade the
firmware to the latest version.
6-126
6.7 Disassembly and Reassembly of Carriage

Assembly and Head Parts
6.7.1 Cover (CarriageUnder) ASSY and HC ASSY
<Removal>
1. Turn the power off and manually move

the carriage to the cap side.

COVER(HV104)YRR(6)
COVER(HV)FTR(1)
COVER(HV)FMR(8)
COVER(HV)RST(2)*
COVER(HV)RSB(3)*
*: When accessing inside from the side.
3. Remove the two screws and the Cover

(CarriageUpper). Cover (CarriageUpper)
4. Remove the two screws on the rear side

and the Cover (CarriageUnder) ASSY.
Disconnect also the fan cable.
Caution
Item to be managed at replacement.
Torque to fasten screws: 0.78Nm
6-127
5. Open the clamp, remove the head cable,

and remove the HC ASSY with two HC ASSY
screws.
Note
Items to be checked at installation
The head cable must be doubled in a
U-formation and clamped.
The head cable must not be double
obliquely.
When the carriage is capped, the head
cables upper part than the clamp must
be tightened slightly more than its
lower part. Note that the lower part is
loosened.
6-128
6.7.2 HEAD CABLE HV
<Removal>
1. Remove the Cover (CarriageUnder)

ASSY (see Subsection 6.7.1).
2. Remove the HC ASSY (see Subsection

6.7.1).
3. Pull out the replaced HEAD CABLE

HVs connectors in the both sides, and
remove the HEAD CABLE HV.
HEAD CABLE HV
4. From the HEAD CABLE HV, remove the

ferrite core in the following procedure:
HEAD CABLE HV
A
(1) Hold the ferrite cores left holder
Left holder
(2) Pull the left holder in the arrow A
direction.
(3) Hold the feffite cores right holder.
(4) Pull the right holder in the arrow B
direction. Right holder Ferrite core
B
<Assembly>
1. Install the ferrite core removed at the

removal procedure on the new HEAD
CABLE HV in the following procedure.
(1) Slip the HEAD CABLE HV in the Left holder

ferrite core, and fix it with the left
holder.
Ferrite core
6-129
(2) Adjust the ferrite cores position so

that the distance below is 30mm as
30mm
From: PCB-ASSY-HCB1
To: Ferrite core holders left edge
(3) Fix ferrite core also with the right

holder.
HEAD CABLE HV
2. Connect the HEAD CABLE HVs

connectors to the HCB1s connector
and the print head connector.
PCB-ASSY-HCB1
3. Install the HC ASSY.
4. Install the Cover(CarriageUnder) ASSY.
6-130
6.7.3 Ink Tube
<Removal>

ASSY (see Subsection 6.7.1) .

6.7.1).
3. Rotate the joint part of the ink tube to be

replaced, and remove it.
Cautions
Execute the above step while turning
the tip of the ink tube upward.
Place a plug on the removed tube to
prevent ink from coming out of the
tube.
T
u
<Assembly>
b
e
Caution
Vertically connect the ink tube tip to the
tube socket shown in the right photo.
Maintaining the tips perpendicular
position, rotate the ink tube tip. Adjust the
distance below to be 5.0 5.5 mm.
Rotate the tip carefully so that the 5 to 5.5 mm
distance is not less than 5 mm.
From: Ink tube tips lowermost position
To: Tube socket bases uppermost
position
Tube socket
Tube socket base
< For the IP-7900-22/23>
To remove the ink tube, rotate the joint

part counterclockwise and pull the ink
tube upward.
6-131
6.7.4 SENSOR(THICKNESS)MAINTENANCE ASSY and

SENSOR(EDGE)MAINTENANCE
Before the removal and installation, be sure to:

- Remove the spittoon case
(Remove carefully not to drop the spittoon absorber liquid.)
- Move the carriage to the position on the spittoon case
Media sensor
SENSOR(THICKNESS)MAINTENANCE ASSY
<Removal>

ASSY. (See Subsection 6.7.1) <Cover(EdgeSensor) viewed from bottom>
5. Remove the Cover(EdgeSensor).
Note
The Cover(EdgeSensor) is classified into
two depending on its production period.
<Previous type> <Current type>
Cover(EdgeSensor)
(EdgeSensorGuard)
Remove the Cover(EdgeSensor) and one screw. After removing the screw, remove the Cover(EdgeSensor)
by vertically lowering it so that the Cover(EdgeSensor)s
claw and semicircular hole do not hit the other parts.
6-132
6. Remove the Cover(Thickness-Sensor).
Cover(Thickness-Sensor)
7. Remove the connector plugged in the
SENSOR(THICKNESS)MAINTENANCE
ASSY.
8. Remove the SENSOR(THICKNESS)

MAINTENANCE ASSY by removing the
three fixing screws.
9. Remove the
connector and the screw, and then
remove the
SENSOR(EDGE)MAINTENANCE.
6-133
<Assembly>
For previous-type part, Cover(EdgeSensor):

Install the part, by reversing the removal procedure.
For new-type part, Cover(EdgeSensor):
Install the part with the procedure below.
Thickness-Sensors
1. Pass the Thickness-Sensors pin pin
through the Cover(EdgeSensorGuard)s
rectangle hole.
Cover(EdgeSensorGuard)
2. Hookthe Cover(EdgeSensorGuard)s
two claws on the carriage base plates
rectangle hole. Under the carriage, look
up the rectangle hole, and check that
the two claws are hooked securely.
Rectangle hole
Thickness-Sensors pin
3. While pressing the
Cover(EdgeSensorGuard)s face to be
attached to the
Cover(Thickness-Sensor), press the
two claws to the rectangle hole in the Y
rail direction. (See the figure on the next
page.)
Note
Press carefully so that the claws hooked
at the step 2 do not come unhooked. Claw
<Cover(EdgeSensorGuard) viewed from bottom>
6-134
4. While sliding the

Cover(EdgeSensorGuard) to the M3x6 scrwe hole
take-up side, assemble the
Cover(EdgeSensorGuard) to the
Headbase(L-Plate) so that the
Cover(EdgeSensorGuard)s hook part is
engaged on the Headbase(L-Plate).
Then align the screw hole A of the right

photo with the sheet metal parts screw
hole.
When the hook part is engaged correctly,
Cover(EdgeSensorGuard) is fixed, and Slide the Cover(EdgeSensorGuard)
the two fixing hole positions are aligned to align the two screw holes.
completely.
Hook part
Press the claw to Y rail direction. Slide to the take-up direction
2
m
m
Cover(EdgeSensorGuard) Engage the hook part. Engage the hook part.

<Cover(EdgeSensorGuard) viewed from top>
5. By tightening the screw, fix the

Cover(EdgeSensorGuard).
6. Install the spittoon case.
7. Return the carriage to the home

position.
6-135
Note
When installing the SENSOR(THICKNESS)MAINTENANCE ASSY, be sure to adjust the
gap sensor height (see 7.13 Adjusting the Height of the Gap Sensor).
When installing the SENSOR(EDGE)MAINTENANCE, be sure to adjust edge sensor
position (see 7.19 Correcting the Edge Sensor Position).
6-136
6.7.5 PCB-ASSY-HCB1 (Carriage board)
<Removal>

COVER(HV)RST(2)
COVER(HV104)YRR(6)
COVER(HV)FTR(1) Cover
COVER(HV)FMR(8)
2. Remove the seven screws and the

cover on the PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
Cover (CarriageUpper)
3. Disconnect the cable connected to the

PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
4. Remove the 11 screws and the

PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
PCB-ASSY-HCB1
6-137
<Assembly>
Note
After installation, upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
1. Install the PCB-ASSY-HCB1 using 11

screws.
PCB-ASSY-HCB1
2. Connect the cables connected to the

PCB-ASSY-HCB1.
3. Check the folded part of the carriage

cable below:
For IP-7900: CARRIAGE CABLEHV104 CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
For IP-7700: CARRIAGE CABLE HV74
If the V-formed parts angle shown in the

figure below exceeds 90, adjust the
angle with the following procedure.
5 -10 mm
PCB-ASSY-HCB1
6-138
3-1. Remove the PLATE(FFC-CABLE).

3-2. Remove the COVER (HV104) YRC-B,
and then TUBE HOLDER(HV).
5 -10 mm
3-3. Fold the CARRIAGE CABLE HV104 so
that, at the V-formed folded part, the
distance shown in the right figure is 5-10
mm.
3-4. Adjust the FFC position so that the
distance from the
HOLDER(CABLE-COVER)s base face to
each blue plates edge is as follows.
160 mm 190 mm 220 mm 250 mm
Base face
Base face Blue plate
HOLDER(CABLE-COVER)
PLATE(FFC-CABLE)
3-5. As the right photo shows, install
the PLATE(FFC-CABLE)
carefully not to connect it upside
down.
3-6. Slacken the CARRIAGE CABLE
HV104 in the cable carrier so that
the slackened part is 5mm longer
than the one at being tightened. PLATE(FFC-CABLE) PLATE(FFC-CABLE)
3-7. Install the TUBE HOLDER(HV). was correctly installed. was installed upside
down.
3-8. Install the COVER (HV104).
6-139
3-1. Remove the PLATE(FFC-CABLE).

3-2. Remove the COVER (HV104) YRC-B,
and then TUBE HOLDER(HV).
5 -10 mm
3-3. Fold the CARRIAGE CABLE HV74 so
that, at the V-formed folded part, the
distance shown in the right figure is 5-10
mm.
3-4. Adjust the FFC position so that the
distance from the
HOLDER(CABLE-COVER)s base face to
each blue plates edge is as follows.
160 mm 190 mm 220 mm 250 mm
Base face
Base face
Blue plate
HOLDER(CABLE-COVER)
PLATE(FFC-CABLE)
3-5. As the right photo shows, install
the PLATE(FFC-CABLE)
carefully not to connect it upside
down.
3-6. Slacken the CARRIAGE CABLE
HV74 in the cable carrier so that
the slackened part is 5mm longer
than the one at being tightened.
3-7. Install the TUBE HOLDER(HV). PLATE(FFC-CABLE) PLATE(FFC-CABLE)
was correctly installed. was installed upside
3-8. Install the COVER (HV74). down.
6-140
4. Install the cover on the Cover

PCB-ASSY-HCB1 using seven screws.
5. Assemble the following parts:

COVER(HV)RST(2)
COVER(HV104)YRR(6)
COVER(HV)FTR(1)
COVER(HV)FMR(8)
6. Upgrade the firmware (both the boot

and system programs) to be the latest.
6-141
6.7.6 Head Assembly
Cautions
Because ink tends to dry and solidify after a short period, the head must be replaced as
soon as possible. Note that leaving the part without the cap on for a long period of time
will cause the nozzle to clog, which may damage the head.
You do not need to purge ink prior to replacing the head.
Be sure to adjust the head while replacing it. (See Section 7.12 Print Head Alignment)
Be sure to charge the ink after replacing the head.
Do not put any more pressure on the head because it contains an air damper.
<Removal>
1. By operating the operation panel, enter

the maintenance mode.
2. Perform #REPLACE PH of the service

menu.
3. Following the operation panel indication,

turn the Printer off with the operation
panels POWER switch.

ASSY (see Subsection 6.7.1).

6.7.1).
6. Disconnect the cable on the head

assembly to be replaced (see
Subsection 6.7.2).
7. Remove the tube on the head assembly

to be replaced (see Subsection 6.7.3).
8. Remove the head assembly to be

replaced with four screws.
6-142
<Assembly>
1. Place the replacement head assembly,

and tighten the screws slightly.
2. Perform the print head alignment with

the print head alignment tools. See
Section 7.12 Print Head Alignment.
3. Reinstall the tube.
Caution
Vertically connect the ink tube tip to the
tube socket shown in the right photo.
Maintaining the tips perpendicular
position, rotate the ink tube tip. Adjust the
distance below to be 5.0 5.5 mm.
From: Ink tube tips lowermost position 5 to 5.5 mm
To: Tube socket bases uppermost
position
Rotate the tip carefully so that the
distance is not less than 5 mm.
Tube socket
Tube socket base
<For the IP-7900-22/23>
Connect the ink tube to the print head.
Check that the two tabs are

correctly hooked.
Tab
4. Connect back the cable to the original

position.
5. Turn the power on.
6-143

select the all replaced print heads, and
press the OK button. Then the ink
system to the replaced print heads is
charged.
Note
Be sure to perform the operation above
only for the replaced print heads. If
performed for an incorrect print head, the
print head may be damaged.

perform the cleaning operation.
8. Install the head and adjust it. (See

Chapter 7 Adjustment)
9. Print the print head alignment diagnostic

plots for confirmation. (See Chapter 7
Adjustment)
10. If the diagnostic plots show that the print

head alignment quality is not acceptable,
perform the print head x and tilt
alignments. See Section 7.12 Print
Head Alignment.
11. Install the HC ASSY.
12. Install the Cover (CarriageUnder) ASSY.
6-144
6.7.7 Encoder Sensor(SIIT)
With the IP-7900-00/01 and IP-7700-00/01 Printers, the replacement procedure differs
depending on the linear scales position. Identify your procedure properly based on the
description below:
The linear scale is installed on the Y rail.
Replace the linear encoder folowing the procedures Case 1.
Note: With the Case 1, the Printers current linear encoder is replaceable also with its
previous recommended part, Encoder Sensor (SIIT), U00101638100. The
previous part is applicable only at Case 1, as its cable is shorter.
The linear scale is installed below the Y rail in the platen side.
Replace the linear encoder folowing the procedures Case 2.
With the the IP-7900-02/03 and IP-7700-02/03 Printers, replace the linear encoder
following the procedures Case 2.
6.7.7.1 Case 1: The linear scale is installed on the Y rail.
<Removal>
1. Move the carriage to the cap side.

ASSY. (See Subsection 6.7.1)
3. Remove the connector plugged into the

Encoder Sensor(SIIT).
4. Remove the screw and the Encoder

Sensor(SIIT) together with the attached
HOLDER(SENSOR).
Encoder Sensor(SIIT)
6-145
5. Remove the CABLE(Y-Encoder)ASSY

from the HOLDER(SENSOR). HOLDER(SENSOR)
Caution
<on installation>
Check whether the Encoder Sensor(SIIT)
comes in contact with the side or top of
T-FENCE-104. Examine it visually by
moving the carriage.
Caution
<on installation>
Check whether the Encoder Sensor(SIIT)
comes in contact with the side or top of
Encoder Sensor(SIIT)
T-FENCE-74. Examine it visually by
moving the carriage.
<Assembly>
1. Reversing the Step above, install a new

linear encoder.
Caution Tie the cables.

When the cables are longer than Movable part
required, below the HCB1 board tie the
cables with the cable tie attached. Be
careful so that the cables do not touch the
moving part.
6-146
6.7.7.2 Case 2: The linear scale is installed below the Y rail.
<Removal>
1. Remove the exterior cover in the COVER(CARRIAGE-EL)

capping unit side.
2. Remove the all three carriage covers.
3. harnesses from the HCB1 board. Note

that the linear encoders connector is at
the second position from your side on
the boards left edge. HCB1board
Connector
4. Remove the HCB1 board.
5. Remove the linear encoders cable from

the three fixing clamps.
6. Remove the Cover-Encoder with one

screw.
Screw
Cover-Encoder
6-147
7. Unscrew the two screws, and remove

the linear encoder with the Linear encoder
Bracket-Encoder installed.
S
c
r
Bracket-Encoder
e
w
8. Unscrew the two screws, and remove

the linear encoder from the Bracket-Encoder
Bracket-Encoder.
Screw
Linear Encoder
6-148
<Assembly>
1. With the two screws removed at the

removal procedure, install a new linear
encoder on the Bracket-Encoder.
2. Cover the linear scale with the liner

encoder, and install the linear encoder
with the two screws removed at the Linear Encoder
removal procedure.
Linear Scale
Screw
3. Adjust the linear encoder position so

that the linear scale is at the linear
Adjust the linear
encoders center. Then fix the linear
encoder position.
encoder with the two screws.
Screw
4. Again check that the linear scale

position is at the linear encoders center.
Caution
If the linear encoder position is not
adjusted correctly, the linear scale may
touch the linear encoder, which may
damage these parts.
5. Install the Cover-Encoder with one

screw.
Cover-Encoder
6-149
6. Fix the linear encoders cable at the

three clamp positions.
Twist one full turn of the

cable around the
capping unit side clamp.
Through the clamp, pass the linear Tighten the cable

encoders cable with the other at this part.
existing cables. Do not twist the cable
around the clamp.
To ensure the carriages
up/down operation, slacken
the cable between the two
clamps.
Do not twist the cable

around the clamp.
7. Install the HCB1 board, and connect the

harnesses to the all connectors. Note
HCB1 board
that the linear encoders connector is at
the second position from your side on
the boards left edge.
Connector
8. Install the all three carriage covers.
9. Install the exterior cover.
6-150
6.7.8 PHOTO SENSOR5 (carriage up sensor)
<Removal>


SENSOR5 (Carriage Up Sensor).
Caution
Adjusting the Height of the GAP
SENSOR is required after replacing the
PHOTO SENSOR5 (Carriage UP
Sensor). (See Chapter 7 Adjustment)
PHOTO SENSOR5
6-151
6.7.9 Motor(HeadBase)ASSY and Timing Belt
<Removal>
1. Remove the PCB-ASSY-HCB1. (See

Subsection 6.7.5)

Bracket(43M). Motor(HeadBase)ASSY
3. Remove the timing belt.
Caution
When reinstalling the timing belt, first
Bracket(43M)
loosen the screw securing the
Motor(HeadBase)ASSY, then press a
spring scale toward the
Motor(HeadBase)ASSY to adjust the Timing belt
tension of the timing belt.
Adjustment value: 1.0 kgf
4. Remove the Motor(HeadBase)ASSY

connector, and remove the assembly
from the Bracket(43M) by removing the
four screws.
Bracket(43M)
6-152
6.7.10 CARRIAGE-PLATE-ASS, SPRING-ARM-STOPPER, and

SPRING-CARRIAGE
<Removal>

2. Move the carriage to the central position

of the platen.
3. Remove the five screws on the rear

board (REAR-RAIL) that secures the
head base to the carriage.
4. Use a jig (PLATE(HB-PT-JiguBase))

designed specially for placing the head
base.
Place the jig on the platen and put the
print head on the jig.
When you do not have the jig, at the

print head bottoms four corners place
some bases, for example:
- the HB-SHIM-SETs four
Shim(HeadBase-HV)s so that the Shim(HeadBase-HV)
print head would not be damaged.
6-153
5. Remove the SUS belt.
6. Remove the two screws and the two CARRIAGE-PLATE-ASSY

SPRING-ARM-STOPPER units (one
screw on each unit), placed on the left
and right sides of the lower part of the
CARRIAGE-PLATE-ASSY.
SPRING-ARM-STOPPER
SPRING-CARRIAGE
7. As the upper part of the

CARRIAGE-PLATE-ASSY is hooked on
the Y rail with bearings, pull the bottom
side of the CARRIAGE-PLATE-ASSY
slightly forward, then lift it up to remove
it.
Caution
After replacing the
CARRIAGE-PLATE-ASSY, be sure to
adjust the head base inclination (see
Section 7.8), and SUS-BELT-104 tension
(see Section 7.1).
Caution
After replacing the
CARRIAGE-PLATE-ASSY, be sure to
adjust the head base inclination (see
Section 7.8), and SUS-BELT-74 tension
(see Section 7.1).
6-154
6.7.11 PIEZO-SENSOR-L-ASSY (only for IP-7900-22/23)
<Removal>
1. Turn the Printer off and then remove the

following covers.
- COVER(HV)FTR (See Subsection

6.3.2)
- COVER(HV)FMR (See Subsection
6.3.2)
- COVER(HV104)YRR (See
Subsection 6.3.6)
2. Remove the following carriage covers. Cover (CarriageUpper) ASSY
- Cover (CarriageUpper) ASSY (See

Subsection 6.7.1)
- Cover (CarriageUnder) ASSY (See
Subsection 6.7.1)
Cover (CarriageUnder) ASSY
3. Remove the following three parts.

(1) Remove the two screws and

remove the
SUPPORT-SENSOR-L-HM-JS.
(2) Remove the screw and the

Cover(EdgeSensorGuard).
(3) Remove the screw and the

Cover(Thickness-Sensor).
SUPPORT-SENSOR-L-HM-J
S
6-155
4. Disconnect the harness connector and Harness securing clamp

remove the harness from the clamp.
Connector
5. Remove the PIEZO-SENSOR-L-ASSY

following the procedure below.
(1) Insert a thin stick in the location

shown on the picture on the right
inside the carriage to push the
PIEZO-SENSOR-L-ASSY claw.
Claw
(2) With the claw pushed, slide the

PIEZO-SENSOR-L-ASSY in the
arrow direction to remove it.
Slide direction
6-156
<Assembly>
1. Insert the claw on the left of the

PIEZO-SENSOR-L-ASSY into the gap
on the left of the carriage.
Insert the claw in the gap between the

HeadBase(L-Plate) and the HeadBase(HV) (red line).
Slide the PIEZO-SENSOR-L-ASSY

inside the Printer to install it.
Gently pull the part to check that the

claw is engaged.
6-157
2. Insert the PIEZO-SENSOR-L-ASSY into

the positioning pin.
Positioning pin holes
Screw holes
3. Install the
SUPPORT-SENSOR-L-HM-JS on top of
the PIEZO-SENSOR-L-ASSY and
secure it with two screws.
SUPPORT-SENSOR-L-HM-J
S
Note
Pay attention to the part orientation when installing the SUPPORT-SENSOR-L-HM-JS.

4. Install the Cover(EdgeSensorGuard)
and the Cover(Thickness-Sensor).
5. Connect the harness connector and

secure the harness with the clamp.
6. Reinstall all the covers that have been

removed.
6-158
6.7.12 PIEZO-SENSOR-R-ASSY (only for IP-7900-22/23)
<Removal>

following covers.

6.3.2)
6.3.2)
Subsection 6.3.6)
2. Remove the following carriage covers.

Subsection 6.7.1)
Subsection 6.7.1)
3. Remove the six screws and remove the

SUPPORT-SENSOR-R-HM-JS. Harness clamp
SUPPORT-SENSOR-R-HM-JS
4. Disconnect the harness connector.
6-159
5. Remove the PIEZO-SENSOR-R-ASSY.
6-160
<Assembly>
1. Install the PIEZO-SENSOR-R-ASSY to

the right side of the carriage aligned to
the positioning pin.
The positioning holes are the holes in

the middle of the three holes vertically
aligned.
Note
Pay attention to the orientation when
installing the part. Positioning hole (middle)
Sholdek screw holes (upper)
Screw holes
(bottom)
2. Secure the PIEZO-SENSOR-R-ASSY
with three Sholdek screws.
Note
Pay attention not to catch the
PIEZO-SENSOR-R-ASSY inside the
Sholdek screws.
3. Place the
SUPPORT-SENSOR-R-HM-JS on top
of the PIEZO-SENSOR-R-ASSY and
secure it with three screws.
Note
Pay attention to the orientation when
installing the part.
4. Connect the harness connector and

secure the harness with the clamp.
6-161
6.7.13 PCB-ASSY-PZF1
<Removal>
1. Remove the screw and remove the

PCB-ASSY-PZF1.
PCB-ASSY-PZF1
Note
Keep an eye on the connector when standing in front of the Printer to install the
PCB-ASSY-PZF1 board to the PCB-ASSY-HCB1S board.
2. Disconnect the harness from the

PCB-ASSY-PZF1 board.
6-162
6.8 Disassembly and Reassembly of Wiping Unit

Part
6.8.1 WIPING-UNIT
<Removal>
1. Move the carriage to the capping unit

side.

COVER(HV)FBL(13)
COVER(HV)FML(17)
COVER(HV)FTL(10)
COVER(HV)LST(11)
COVER(HV)LSB(12)
3. Remove connectors plugged into the

WIPING-UNIT.
4. Remove the four screws and the

WIPING-UNIT by lifting it upward.
WIPING-UNIT
Note
Be sure to adjust the wiping units position and height (see the sections, 7.4 Adjusting the
Height of the Wiping Unit and 7.5 Positioning the Wiping Unit.
6-163
6.8.2 SWITCH(WIPE) (wiper home position sensor)
<Removal>

COVER(HV)FTL(10)
COVER(HV)FBL(13)
COVER(HV)FML(17)
2. Remove the screw and the wiper home

position sensor.
Wiper home position sensor
Note
<For the IP-7900-22/23>
Perform the procedure in 7.27 Adjusting
the SWITCH(WIPE),H3 Position when
replacing the SWITCH(WIPE),H3.
Slit
6-164
6.8.3 WIPE LOWER ASSY
<Removal>
1. Remove the COVER(HV)FBL(13), and

the COVER(HV)FML(17).
2. Remove the screw and the WIPE

LOWER ASSY together with the Tube
attached tube.
WIPE LOWER ASSY
<For the IP-7900-22/23>
<Removal>
1. Remove the COVER(HV)FBL-H3.
2. Remove the three screws and pull the

WIPE-DRAIN-ASSY upward to remove
it.
WIPE-DRAIN-ASSY
3. If wiper cleaning liquid is contained

inside, wait until all the liquid has been
drained.
6-165
4. Remove the screw and pull the

WIPE-LOWER-ASSY toward you to
remove it.
Note
Wiper cleaning liquid may remain in the
WIPE-LOWER-ASSYs outlet. It is
recommended to obstruct the outlet with
a cloth when removing the
WIPE-LOWER-ASSY to prevent the
liquid from leaking.
6-166
<Assembly>
1. Install the new WIPE-LOWER-ASSY to

the wiping unit using one screw. Tube
Note
With the IP-7900-22/23, use the
WIPE-LOWER-ASSY version 01.
The procedure from step 2 needs to be
performed only with the IP-7900-22/23.
WIPE LOWER ASSY
2. Install the WIPE-DRAIN-ASSY to the

wiping unit. Seen from above
Pass the extremity of the
WIPE-DRAIN-ASSYs pin through the
WIPE-LOWER-ASSY outlet (rubber
hole) and temporarily fix it with three
screws.
Outlet (rubber hole)
Extremity of the WIPE-DRAIN-ASSYs pin
Seen from the front
6-167
3. Push the WIPE-DRAIN-ASSY

downward and tighten the three screws.
Note
WIPE-DRAIN-ASSY
Tighten the screws when the round
protruding parts of the
WIPE-DRAIN-ASSY are on the upper
sides of the slotted holes.
Correct Incorrect
4. Move the WIPE-DRAIN-ASSYs cock up

and down to check that it opens and
closes correctly.
Cock
5. Fill the wiping unit with wiper cleaning

liquid and install the
COVER(HV)FBL-H3.
Note
When the wiping unit is filled, check that
the cock is correctly closed (no liquid is
leaking).
6-168
6.8.4 MOTOR(WIPE) (wiping motor)
<Removal>

side.

COVER(HV)FTL(10)
COVER(HV)LST(11)
COVER(HV)LSB(12)
COVER(HV)FBL(13)
COVER(HV)FML(17)
3. Remove connectors plugged into the

wiping motor.
4. Note that the SWITCH(WIPE) cable

lock is installed on a plate. Disconnect
relevant cables from the cable lock.

BRACKET(WIPE-MOTOR-HV).
BRACKET(WIPE-MOTOR-HV)
6. Remove the three screws and the BRACKET(WIPE-MOTOR-HV)

wiping motor from the
BRACKET(WIPE-MOTOR-HV).
Wiping motor
6-169
6.9 Disassembly and Reassembly of Cap Unit Part

6.9.1 CAPPING-STATION-HV
<Removal> Capping Unit

side. CAP-HV

COVER(HV)FTR(1)
COVER(HV)RST(2)
COVER(HV)RSB(3)
COVER(HV)FBR-R(4)
COVER(HV104)RBR(5)
COVER(HV)FMR(8)
PUMP-F ASSY
3. Remove all connectors plugged into the
CAPPING-STATION-HV.
4. Remove the CAPPING-STATION-HV by

removing the four screws.
Note
At the position of the screw to be removed for the height adjustment, the SHIM is
inserted. So do not lose it when removing the CAPPING-STATION-HV. At the assembly,
be sure to return the SHIM to the original position.
Before the assembly, be sure to adjust the capping unit position and cap position (see
the sections, 7.7 Positioning the Capping Unit and 7.6 Correcting the Cap Position).
After the replacement, check that there is no air leak when the caps are closed (see the
next page).
6-170
<How to check leak tightness of the capping unit>
Jig: CAPPING-SEAL-TOOL (HV)
1. Remove the COVER(R)ASSY-MW.

area. (See 3.4.4 ADJUST Menu (13)
MOVE CARRIAGE on p.3-46.)
3. Place and press the glass surface of the

jig onto the cap as shown in the picture
to the right, and turn the suction pump
on.
CAPPING-SEAL-TOOL (HV)
4. When the negative pressure gauge

indicates -70 Kpa, turn the suction
pump off.
Remove the glass surface from the cap
and check the two following points.
- The pressure decreases to -70 Kpa

or less in 10 seconds after the
suction has been turned off.
- The pressure does not increase by 2
Kpa or more in 30 seconds after the
suction has been turned off.
5. Turn the air release solenoid on to

release the pressure.
6-171
6.9.2 MOTOR(CAP)ASSY-HV
<Removal>
<Installation Position of MOTOR(CAP)ASSY-HV>
side.
MOTOR(CAP)ASSY-HV

COVER(HV)FTR(1)
COVER(HV)RST(2)
COVER(HV)RSB(3)
COVER(HV)FBR-R(4)
COVER(HV)FMR(8)

MOTOR(CAP)ASSY-HV.

BRACKET(PUMPGEAR-HV).
BRACKET(PUMPGEAR-HV)
5. Remove the MOTOR(CAP)ASSY-HV

Cover
connector.
6. Remove the screw and the plate cover.
Connector

MOTOR(CAP)ASSY-HV.
6-172
6.9.3 SOLENOID-ASSY(HV) (air release solenoid), RUBBER(VALVE-HV)
<Removal>

side.
2. Remove the CAPPING-UNIT(HV). (See

Subsection 6.9.1)
3. Remove relevant connectors plugged

into the CAPPING-UNIT(HV).
4. Remove all ink tubes connected to the

Ink tube
CAP-HV.
Caution
When removing ink tubes, be careful not
to spill ink in the tube, and use a shop
cloth or other kind of material to prevent
the splotch of ink.
CAP-HV
5. Remove the two screws on the

FRAME(VALVE-HV).
FRAME(VALVE-HV)
6. Remove the four screws on the lower

part of the solenoid.
6-173
7. Remove the two fixing screws inside the

CAPPING-UNIT(HV) and remove the
SOLENOID-ASSY(HV).
SOLENOID-ASSY(HV)
8. Remove the screw, the

HOLDER(VALVE-HV), and then the
RUBBER(VALVE-HV).
HOLDER(VALVE-HV)
RUBBER(VALVE-HV)
6-174

After installing the RUBBER(VALVE-HV), check that it was installed with no gap at the
positions shown in the right figure.
Check that no gap is found at the two positions.

If a gap is found, eliminate it by rotating the two
screws shown in the figure above.
Connect the ink tubes as shown in the figure below.
6-175
6.9.4 Torque Limiter
<Removal>

side.

Subsection 6.9.1)

BRACKET(GEAR-HV) carefully so that
the GEAR(IDLER) is not removed.
4. Remove the torque limiter axis.
Caution
As the torque limiter axis is held by the
bearing 3A, be careful not to lose the
bearing.
Torque limiter axis
5. Remove the gear (E). Bearing 3A BRACKET(GEAR-HV)
6. Remove the E ring.
7. Remove the GEAR(TL-HV).
8. Remove the torque limiter.

Torque limiter
Caution E ring
As the torque limiter is fastened by a

parallel pin, be careful not to lose the
parallel pin.
Gear (E)
Parallel pin GEAR(TL-HV)
6-176
6.9.5 PUMP-F-ASSY(HV)
<Removal>

side.

Subsection 6.9.1)
3. Remove a transparent cover covering

the PUMP-F-ASSY(HV).
4. Remove the ink tube connected to the Joint part

PUMP-F-ASSY(HV) from joint part.
PUMP-F-ASSY(HV)
Damper o-ring
6-177
5. Remove the two hexagon nuts from

each PUMP-F-ASSY (HV) unit, and Hexagon nuts
remove the PUMP-F-ASSY (HV) from
the frame.
Note that, a gear is installed at the

upper part of the PUMP-F-ASSY(HV) at
the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth
from the left edge. So, to remove these
four PUMP-F-ASSY(HV)s, at first
disengage the PUMP-F-ASSY(HV) from
the gear by sliding it downward, and pull
the PUMP-F-ASSY(HV).

When pinching an ink tube into the protrusion of the CASE(WASTE), be sure to make
the tip of the ink tube contact the inside bottom of the CASE(WASTE).
Install the PUMP-F-ASSY(HV) units so that each roller position is aligned as the figure
below shows.
Change the position of the weights (roller (pump)) seen from the
HOLDER(PUMP-F)s window.
With the weight With the weight With the weight With the weight
at the right. at the top. at the right. at the top.
6-178
6.9.6 Joint (CAP Sa), CAP-HV
<Removal>

side.

COVER(HV)FTR(1)
COVER(HV)RST(2)
COVER(HV)RSB(3)
COVER(HV)FBR-R(4)
COVER(HV)FMR(8)
3. Remove the screw on the

COVER(CAP-F), and remove the
COVER(CAP-F) from the COVER(CAP-F)
FRAME(UD-HV).
FRAME(UD-HV) S
c
4. Remove the CAP-HV while lightly r
pushing in the tabs on the CAP-HV. CAP-HV e
Tab w
Joint (CAP Sa)
6-179
5. Remove the joints (CAP Sa) from the

CAP-HV. Note that two joints (CAP Sa)
must be removed from one CAP-HV. Joint (CAP Sa)
If the joint (CAP Sa) is not removed with
the CAP-HV but left on the FRAME
(UD-HV), remove the joint (CAP Sa)
from the FRAME (UD-HV) by inserting a
tip of a tweezers or a screwdriver
between the joint (CAP Sa) and the
FRAME (UD-HV).
Note
FRAME(UD-HV)
Do not scratch the surface of the joint
(CAP Sa) with the tweezers or
screwdriver.
6-180
<Assembly>
Note
Before the assembly, clean the all parts with alcohol and dry them sufficiently.
1. On the FRAME (UD-HV), clean the ink

smearing of the two bosses to be
covered with the joints (CAP Sa), with a
swab or cleaning paper soaked with
alcohol.
Then hold it until the cleaned parts dry

sufficiently.
2. With the joint (CAP Sa), clean the ink

smearing inside the joint (CAP Sa)
indicated in the right figure, making
circles along the lines on the inner
surface, with a swab or cleaning paper
soaked with alcohol.

sufficiently.
6-181
3. With the CAP-HV, clean the ink

smearing of the two pins surface, with a
swab or cleaning paper soaked with
alcohol.

sufficiently.
4. Cap the joint (CAP Sa) each on the

CAP-HVs two pins so that the distance
below is 2mm.
From: Top of the joint (CAP Sa) sleeve
To: Top of the CAP-HVs pin
Note
On capping and pressing the joint (CAP 2mm
Sa) on the CAP-HV, note that the pin is
inserted into the joint with some catch.
If it is inserted smoothly, it is assumed Joint (CAP Sa)
that the joint (CAP Sa) and the CAP-HV Sleeve
are not cleaned or dried perfectly.
5. Mount the CAP-HV assembled at the

step 4 in the FRAME (UD-HV) with its
SHEET (CAP) hole side facing the valve
assembly side of the FRAME (UD-HV).
6-182
6. Press the CAP-HVs both edges

indicated in the right figure at the same
time, so that the joint (CAP Sa) is
installed securely onto the bosses of the
FRAME (UD-HV).
TIP
Before installing on the bosses, press
the joint (CAP Sa)s flange part through
the CAP-HVs bottom part.
7. Hook the claw of the COVER (CAP-F)s

top on the FRAME (UD-HV), and fix
them with a screw.
6-183
6.9.7 CAP-ASSY(MW) (only for IP-7900-22/23)
<Removal>

area.
2. From the FRAME(UD-HV), remove the

COVER(CAP-F) and securing screw. COVER(CAP-F)
Screw
FRAME(UD-HV)
3. Softly press the CAP,MW tabs to

remove the CAP,MW. CAP,MW
Tab
Joint (CAP Sa)
4. Remove the joints (CAP Sa) from the

CAP,MW (there are two joints per cap).
If a joint (CAP Sa) stays on the
Joint (CAP Sa)
FRAME(UD-HV), use a pair of tweezers
or a screwdriver to remove the joint
(CAP Sa) from its seating surface.
Note
Pay attention not to damage the joint
(CAP Sa) or FRAME(UD-HV) surface
with the tweezers and the screwdriver.
FRAME (UD-HV)
6-184
<Assembly>
New CAP-ASSY: CAP-ASSY with the Plate(JC) attached.
New CAP-ASSY
Plate(JC)
1. Clean all the ink by wiping the entire

circumference of the two tubes, used to
set the joints (CAP Sa) of the
FRAME(UD-HV), with sheet mount
cleaning liquid.
FRAME(UD-HV)
Area to clean
2. Install the spacers (JC) around the two

tubes used to set the joints (CAP Sa).
You do not have to pay attention to the
spacer (JC) sides or the position of the
notch.
Spacer (JC)
6-185
3. Apply sheet mount cleaning liquid onto

the entire inside surface of the outside
edge of the joints (CAP Sa). (There is
no problem if the liquid also adheres to
the inside edge.)
Joint (CAP Sa)
Sheet mount
cleaning liquid
4. Adjust the springs so that they are

placed perpendicular to the cap, and
rotate them clockwise two turns or more
to insert them. Check that the surfaces
of all the springs are at the same height.
Perpendicula
r
5. Place the cap so that the side with the

SHEET(CAP) hole comes to the
solenoid side. SHEET(CAP) hole
Make sure that the springs enter the
three tubes on the FRAME(UD-HV),
and then set the cap carefully.
Solenoid side
FRAME(UD-HV)
6-186
6. Set the installation jig.

Check that the jigs four corners are on Jig
the PLATE(JC).
7. Push the jig inside with both hands as

shown in the picture.
Next, push the jig three more times just
strong enough to feel the
SPRING(FLORT-HV).
SPRING(FLORT-HV)
8. Check that the four PLATE(JC) are

inside the FRAME(UD-HV). Push the jig
again if they are not all inside.
FRAME(UD-HV)
PLATE(JC)
6-187
9. Check that the two snap-fits are

engaged. If not, push them with your
finger until they engage.
Snap-fits
Correct position: The snap-fit is engaged. Wrong position: The snap-fit is not engaged.
10. Hook the tabs at the extremity of the

COVER(CAP-F) to the FRAME(UD-HV),
and then secure with the screw.
COVER(CAP-F)
FRAME(UD-HV)
Note
After you have finished replacing the cap, check that there is not leakage when the cap is
closed (see 6.9.1).
6-188
6.9.8 PIN(FLOAT)
<Removal>

side.

COVER(HV)FTR(1)
COVER(HV)RST(2)
COVER(HV)RSB(3)
COVER(HV)FMR(8)
COVER(HV)FBR-R(4)
3. Remove the hexagon socket PIN(FLOAT)

cross-recessed head TP machine screw
on each PIN(FLOAT), and then remove
the PIN(FLOAT).
PIN(FLOAT)
6-189
6.9.9 LEVER(CAP)-HV-ASSY
<Removal>

side.

COVER(HV)FTR(1)
COVER(HV)RST(2)
COVER(HV)RSB(3)
COVER(HV104)YRR(6)
COVER(HV)FBR-R(4)
3. Remove the CAPPING-UNIT(HV).
4. Remove a screw securing the

LEVER(CAP)-HV-ASSY and cable the
connector plugged into the
SCREW(CAM-LOCK-HV), then remove
the LEVER(CAP)-HV-ASSY. (Note that SCREW(CAM-LOCK-HV)
the micro switch 4 is inside the
assembly.)
Caution
When setting the LEVER(CAP)-HV-ASSY
and SCREW(CAM-LOCK-HV), set the
cap height to the middle position. Do not
set it to the highest position or the lowest
position.
LEVER(CAP)-HV-ASSY
6-190
6.9.10 BEARING(10B)
<Removal>

side.
2. Remove the CAPPING-UNIT (HV) (see

Subsection 6.9.1).
3. Remove the cables from the clamp

installed on the
BRACKET(PUMPGEAR-HV
)
4. Remove the two screws and remove the

5. Remove the E-ring on each GEAR

(PUMP-HV) and remove the two GEAR GEAR(PUMP-HV)
(PUMP-HV).
E-ring
6-191
6. Remove the E-ring on each

BEARING(10B) and remove the four
BEARING(10B).
< Left side > < Right side >
GEAR(PUMP-HV)
BEARING(10B)
BEARING(10B)
E-ring E-ring
6-192
6.10 Disassembly and Reassembly of Ink Box Part

6.10.1 INKBOX-UNIT(HV)
<Removal>
1. From the operation panel, execute an

ink purge operation (see Section 7.10
Initial Ink Charge and Ink Purge).
Then, after the operation is completed,
turn the printer power off.

INKBOX REAR COVER(HV).
3. Remove all cables and tubes connected

to the INKBOX-UNIT(HV).
4. Remove the two fixing screws at the

front and the two at the rear, and then
remove the INKBOX-UNIT(HV).
Fixing screw at the front side
Fixing screw at the rear side
6-193
6.10.2 SUPPLY PUMP (ink supply pump)
<Removal>


INKBOX REAR COVER(HV).
3. Remove the two screws and the stay on

the side where you will replace the parts.
Remove the stay on the left side to
replace parts on the left side.
Remove the stay on the right side to
replace parts on the right side.
Stay
4. Remove the cables connected to the

motors and sensors

CASE-FILTER(PIN-TYPE).
Caution
The CASE-FILTER(PIN-TYPE) and the
tubes cannot be disassembled.
CASE-FILTER(PIN-TYPE)
6-194

PLATE(HV). PLATE(HV)
SUPPLY PUMP-UNIT
7. Disconnect the joint of the tube

connected to the SUPPLY PUMP-UNIT.
Caution
When removing tubes, be careful not to
spill ink in the tube, and place a shop
cloth or other kind of material on nearby Joint
parts to prevent them from being
splotched by ink.
SUPPLY PUMP-UNIT

SUPPLY PUMP-UNIT from the
PLATE(HV).
SUPPLY PUMP-UNIT
Note
After the replacement, reset the supply pumps accumulated operation time (see
Subsection 3.4.9).
6-195
6.10.3 PUMP TUBE ASSY(HV)
<Removal>
1. Remove the SUPPLY PUMP-UNIT.

2. Remove the roller (PUMP) and replace

it with a new PUMP TUBE ASSY(HV). Roller (PUMP)
PUMP TUBE ASSY(HV)
Cautions
Do not wipe out grease applied to the tube.
Install the tube at the insulation lock tie position.
After the replacement, reset the supply pumps accumulated operation time (see
Subsection 3.4.9).
6-196
6.10.4 PCB-ASSY-INK4
<Removal>

INKBOX REAR COVER(HV) at the rear
side.
2. To replace the INKBOX POSITIONING

PIN, first remove the two screws.

PCB-ASSY-INK4.
INKBOX POSITOING PIN

BRACKET with the PCB-ASSY-INK4 PCB-ASSY-INK4
attached to it.
5. Remove the two screws, and then

remove the PCB-ASSY-INK4 from the
BRACKET.
6-197
6.10.5 PHOTO SENSOR5 (ink cover sensor)
<Removal>
1. Open the ink box cover.
2. Remove the ink tray (Y).

Ink tray (Y) installation position
3. Insert your hand into an installation hole

of the ink tray (Y) to pinch a tab on the
ink cover sensor, and then pull the
sensor upward to remove it from the
installation hole.
Cautions
When removing a switch, be careful
not to disconnect the wiring.
When the ink cover sensor again, note
that the ink box must be removed in
advance.
6-198
6.11 Disassembly and Reassembly of Subcartridge

Unit Parts
6.11.1 SUBTANK BOX ASSY
<Removal>

2. Remove the ST-COVER(28).
3. Remove the ink color replacement

cartridge.
4. Remove the five screws and the

COVER(HV)SBF(16).
5. Remove the tube joint connected to the

SUPPLY PUMP-UNIT.
6. Catch the remaining ink in the tube.
6-199
7. Loosen the eight screws securing the

SUBTANK BOX ASSY.
Left side of the Right side of the

SUBTANK BOX ASSY SUBTANK BOX ASSY
Bottom of the
SUBTANK BOX ASSY
8. Remove all cables connected to the

SUBTANK BOX ASSY.
9. Remove the joint (NEEDLE (Sub-TANK)

5 mm diameter ASSY) of the
TUBE-ASSY connected to the head
side.
10. Remove the eight screws that were

loosened previously, and remove the
SUBTANK BOX ASSY.
6-200
6.11.2 INKBOX POSITIONING PIN and PCB-ASSY-INK4
<Removal>
2. Remove the COVER(HV) SBF(16).
3. Remove the eight screws securing the

SUBTANK BOX ASSY.
Left side of the Right side of the

SUBTANK BOX ASSY SUBTANK BOX ASSY
Bottom of the
SUBTANK BOX ASSY
4. Slide the SUBTANK BOX ASSY forward.

BRACKET(PCB-INK4)
(You do not have to remove it.)
INKBOX POSITIONING PIN
5. To remove the INKBOX POSITIONING
PIN, insert a short screwdriver from the
rear side of the SUBTANK BOX ASSY
(on the operation panel side) and
remove the two screws.
6. To remove the PCB-ASSY-INK4, insert

a short screwdriver from the rear side of PCB-ASSY-INK4
the SUBTANK BOX ASSY (on the
operation panel side), remove the two
screws to remove the
BRACKET(PCB-INK4), and then
remove the two screws to disassemble
the PCB-ASSY-INK4.
SUBTANK BOX ASSY rear view
6-201
6.11.3 PHOTO SENSOR4 (subcartridge empty sensor, subcartridge full sensor)
<Removal>
2. Remove the COVER(HV)SBF(16).
3. Remove the eight screws and the

SUBTANK FACE.
4. Remove the PHOTO SENSOR4 to be

replaced (consisting of eight full sensors
and eight empty sensors with one screw
for each sensor) together with the
attached bracket. PHOTO SENSOR4
The following figure shows a slot to

insert a screwdriver in order to remove
the PHOTO SENSOR4.
PHOTO SENSOR4 PHOTO SENSOR4

(full sensor) (empty sensor)
6-202
6.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR5 (subcartridge cover sensor)
<Removal>
2. Remove the five screws and the

COVER(HV)SBF(16).
3. Remove the screw and the subcartridge

cover sensor.
6-203
6.12 Disassembly and Reassembly of Paper Guide

and Platen Area Parts
6.12.1 IP-7900: FRONT-PG-ASSY(104) and GUIDE-CUTTER(104) /
IP-7700: FRONT-PG-ASSY(74) and GUIDE-CUTTER(74)
<Removal>
2. FRONT-PG-ASSY(104)
FRONT-PG-ASSY(74)
Remove the 12 screws on the
GUIDE-CUTTER(104) and the 10
screws at the bottom, and then remove
the FRONT-PG-ASSY(104).
Remove the eight screws on the GUIDE-CUTTER(104)

GUIDE-CUTTER(74) and the eight GUIDE-CUTTER(74)
screws at the bottom, and then remove
the FRONT-PG-ASSY(74).
Caution
Be sure to check the correct cable to be
disconnected because heater and
thermistor cables are also connected.
Urea painted screw

(light-grey)
HOOK-TB

b
o
t
t
o
6-204 m

6.12.2 IP-7900: REAR PG(104)-ASSY / IP-7700: REAR PG(74)-ASSY
<Removal>
1.
Remove Pinch-Arm-Guard (104). (See

Subsection 6.3.10)
Remove Pinch-Arm-Guard (74). (See

Subsection 6.3.10)
2.
Remove the fixing screws to remove the IP-7900 REAR PG(104)-ASSY

REAR PG(104)-ASSY. IP-7700 REAR PG(74)-ASSY
Remove the fixing screws to remove the

REAR PG(74)-ASSY.
Caution
Be sure to check the correct cable to be
disconnected because heater and
thermistor cables are also connected.
6-205
6.12.3 PLATEN ASSY
<Removal>
2. Remove the EDGE-GUARD-MK located

on the left and right side of the platen.
3.
Remove the eight screws on each of the

11 rows (a total of 88 screws) and
remove the PLATEN ASSY.
Remove the eight screws on each of the

eight rows (a total of 64 screws) and
remove the PLATEN ASSY.
Caution
Be sure to disconnect only the relevant
cables and not to disconnect the FG,
heater or thermistor cables that are
also connected.
Note that the platen fixing screw is
tightened with washer. Remove the
parts carefully so that you do not lose FG cable
the washers.
Heater connector
6-206

Be careful when installing the parts so
that cables do not become caught
between parts.
Drop cables into the cable groove on
the platen holder.
Tighten the platen fixing screws with
washers carefully so that:
Screw
Washer
- The washers are not reversed. Wiping unit side Capping unit side
- The fixing torque is 0.8 Nm.
- The screws are fixed in the order
below:
Vertically from the most far-positioned
one in the direction to your side.
Horizontally from the
center-positioned one in the direction (2) (1) (3)
to the outer side
After fixing the screws, be sure to
adjust the platen flatness (see Section
7.9).
6-207
6.12.4 EDGE-GUARD-MK and STOPPER(EG)
<Removal>
1. Remove the two screws shown in the

figure below. If the STOPPER(EG) is
attached, remove it. Note that the
STOPPER(EG) is attached or is not
attached depending on the
manufacturing period.
2. Slide the EDGE-GUARD-MK to remove

it. EDGE-GUARD-MK
Note
The edge guard is classified into two as
follows depending on its production
period.
- EDGE-GUARD
- EDGE-GUARD-MK
STOPPER(EG)
<Assembly>
1. Slide the EDGE-GUARD-MK, and fix it

on the platen.
Note
Install the EDGE-GUARD-MK carefully
so that:
The media would be engaged with the
EDGE-GUARD-MK; and
Its side with the screw via spacer faces
the Y rail side.(EDGE-GUARD-MK)
2. Fix the two screws shown in the figure

on the platen.
Note
Do not apply the STOPPER(EG).
6-208
6.12.5 CASE(SPIT-AREA)ASSY (spittoon case) and SWITCH (SPIT) (spittoon

detection sensor)
<Removal>
1. Open the capping cover.
Spittoon unit
2. Rotate a painted screw to remove the

spittoon case.
Urea painted screw

SPIT(WET)-ASSY
3. Unplug a cable connector, and remove

the fixing screws in order to remove the
FRAME(SPIT).
FRAME(SPIT)
6-209
4. Remove the screw and the spittoon

detection sensor. FRAME(SPIT)
Cautions
Be careful not to spill the ink when
handling the spittoon case.
When installing the unit, press it
closely to the lower and front sides of
the platen.
Spittoon detection sensor
6-210
6.12.6 IP-7900: NET-PGR-104 / IP-7700: NET-PGR-74
<Assembly>
1.
Apply MagicTape-R1 to the attached

position.
Apply MagicTape(74)-R1 to the

attached position.
MagicTape-R1
2.
Hook NET-PGR-104's tabs on the paper

guide.
Hook NET-PGR-74's tabs on the paper

guide.
Note
Tighten the NET-PGR-104/NET-PGR-74 so that it would not be wrinkled or waved.
6-211
6.12.7 IP-7900: NET-PGF-104 / IP-7700: NET-PGF-74
<Removal>
2.
FRONT-PG-ASSY(104)
Remove the 11 TP screws and the FRONT-PG-ASSY(74)
GUIDE-CUTTER(104).
Remove the eight TP screws and the

GUIDE-CUTTER(74).
GUIDE-CUTTER(104)
GUIDE-CUTTER(74)
3.
Remove the 11 bind screws and the

PGF-NET-SUPPORT (the sheet metal
under the GUIDE-CUTTER).
Remove the seven bind screws and the

PGF-NET-SUPPORT (the sheet metal
under the GUIDE-CUTTER).
4. Remove the NET-PGF by removing the

hook and loop fastener at its lower part.
6-212
<Assembly>
1.
Place the NET-PGF inside the

PGF-NET-SUPPORT, and secure it
using 11 bind screws.
Place the NET-PGF inside the

PGF-NET-SUPPORT, and secure it
using seven bind screws.
2.
Install the GUIDE-CUTTER(104) using

11 TP screws.
TInstall the GUIDE-CUTTER(74) using

eight TP screws.
3. Fix the NET-PGF with the hook and loop

fastener at its lower part.
Note
Tighten the NET-PGF, avoiding wrinkles or waves.
6-213
6.13 Disassembly and Reassembly of Feed and

Take-up Parts
Note
After the reassembly, be sure to adjust the roll feed and take-up reel unit (see Section
7.20).
6-214
6.13.1 Disassembly and Reassembly of Feed and Take-up Parts (IP-7900-00/01)
6.13.1.1 FEED-DRIVE-UNIT-104
<Removal>
Shaft-Stopper-Fix-R
Shaft-Stopper-Fix-R, and then the
Shaft-Stopper-Fix-R
screw and the
Shaft-Stopper-Fulcrum-R.
FEED-DRIVE-UNIT-104
2. Remove the four screws that are
securing the FEED-DRIVE-UNIT-104.
6-215
6.13.1.2 ROLLER Assy
<Removal>

Cover(Feed-Drive).
Cover(Feed-Drive)

BRACKET(D-RingBumper)F.
BRACKET(D-RingBumper)F
3. Remove the two screws on each

ROLLER Assy cover, and then remove ROLLER Assy
the ROLLER Assy covers.
6-216

COVER(FE-DRIVE-C).
COVER(FE-DRIVE-C)

BRACKET(FDRunit)C.
BRACKET(FDRunit)C
6. Remove BEARING-12 and ROLLER Assy

GuidRing60-PS from the Drive-Shaft.
RING(D-RingGuide)
BEARING-12
7. Remove the two hexagon socket head

cap screws and then remove the
ROLLER Assy from the Drive-Shaft.
ROLLER Assy
6-217
6.13.1.3 FEED-AND-TAKE-UP-TIMING-BELT
<Removal>

Cover(Feed-Drive).
Cover(Feed-Drive)

BRACKET(D-RingBumper)F.
BRACKET(D-RingBumper)F
3. Remove the two screws on each ROLLER Assy

ROLLER Assy cover, and then remove
the ROLLER Assy covers.
6-218

COVER(FE-DRIVE-C).
COVER(FE-DRIVE-C)

BRACKET(FDRunit)C.
BRACKET(FDRunit)C
6. Remove the three screws and the BRACKET(BEARING-SUPPORT)Fe

BRACKET(BEARING-SUPPORT)Fe.
6-219
7. Remove the four screws of the drive unit

box.
Caution
The timing belt tension can be adjusted
by moving this drive unit box up or down.
Therefore, when installing the motor, first
fasten the ROLLER(Urethan60-35) shaft
and install this drive unit box. Then
temporarily tighten the screws and adjust
the tension before fully tightening the
screws. Drive unit box
Tension: 2.0 to 2.5 kgf
8. Remove the drive unit box.

The
FEED-AND-TAKE-UP-TIMING-BELT
outside the drive unit box must be
removed in this step.
FEED-AND-TAKE-UP
-TIMING-BELT
Drive unit box
9. FEED-AND-TAKE-UP-TIMING-BELT
inside the drive unit box.
6-220
6.13.1.4 FT-SCROLLER-SUPPORT, ANTI-ELECTROSTATIC BRUSH,

ROLLER FOLLOW ASSY
<Removal>
1. Remove the screw and the

ANTI-ELECTROSTATIC BRUSH.
FT-SCROLLER-SUPPORT
Note
If you want to remove only the
ANTI-ELECTROSTATIC BRUSH, skip
the following steps for removing the
FT-SCROLLER-SUPPORT.
ANTI-ELECTROSTATIC BRUSH

FT-SCROLLER-SUPPORT. FT-SCROLLER-SUPPORT
3. Remove the two screws and open the

FT-SCROLLER-SUPPORT.
Hinge
6-221
4. Remove E ring on the ROLLER

FOLLOW Assy shaft to remove the ROLLER FOLLOW Assy
ROLLER FOLLOW Assy.
E ring
6-222
6.13.1.5 PF-FRICTIONROLLER
o
PF-FRICTIONROLLER
r
Note
Be sure to adjust the media feed direction after replacing the PF-FRICTIONROLLER
<Removal>
1. Remove the six screws on each cover

attached at both extremities of the
PF-FRICTIONROLLER, and then
remove the covers.
6-223
2. Remove the screws of the bracket fixing

the unrolling motor. Then remove the Timing belt
unrolling motor with the timing belt and
bracket attached.
Note
Before replacing with a new unrolling
motor, apply grease to the timing belt and
pully.
Unrolling Motor
3. Remove the four screws on each side.
4. Remove the PF-FRICTIONROLLER.
6-224
5. From the wiping unit side of the

removed PF-FRICTIONROLLER,
remove the E-ring, bearing, and bracket.
Then remove the shaft by loosening the
two hexagon socket head set screws.
6. Remove the pulley, E-ring, bearing, and

bracket from the
PF-FRICTIONROLLERs capping unit
side.
Note that the assembly part with the

both-side shafts removed is identified as
PF-FRICTIONROLLER in the OKI Data
Infotechs parts list.
6-225
6.13.1.6 FRICTION ROLLER SET(104)
<Removal>

remove the covers.

bracket attached.
Unrolling Motor
6-226
3. Remove the four screws from the wiping

unit side BRACKET-RollerShaft.
4. Remove the four screws from the

capping unit side
BRACKET-RollerShaft.
5. Remove the FRICTION ROLLER SET(104)

with:
- Wiping unit side BRACKET-RollerShaft
- Capping unit side BRACKET-RollerShaft
Wiping unit side

BRACKET-RollerShaft
6-227
6.13.1.7 FEED-DETECTOR,
PHOTO SENSOR2 (supply-side media end sensor's light-receiving unit), and
PHOTO SENSOR3 (supply-side media slack sensor's light-receiving unit)
<Removal>

PF-EMITSENSOR cover.
PF-EMITSENSOR
2. Unplug the PHOTO SENSOR1

(supply-side media slack sensor's
light-emitting unit or supply-side media
end sensors light-emitting unit)
connector.
PHOTO SENSOR1
3. Remove the four screws and the entire

PF-EMITSENSOR.
Screw position (left) Screw position (right)
6-228
<Removal>

FEED-DETECTOR.

FEED-DETECTOR
FEED-DETECTOR.
Note
To remove the FEED-DETECTOR as an
assembly, the FEEDING-UNIT must be
disconnected from the Printer main body.
3. To remove the PHOTO SENSOR2

(supply-side media end sensor's PHOTO SENSOR2
light-receiving unit), and PHOTO
SENSOR3 (supply-side media slack
sensor's light-receiving unit) individually,
remove the screw securing each
sensor.
PHOTO SENSOR3
FEED-DETECTOR
6-229
6.13.1.9 BRACKET-SENSOR-TU
<Removal>
TensionBar-Guide-Kotei
1. Remove the four screws and the sensor
cover on the TensionBar-Guide-Kotei.
Sensor's cover
2. Unplug the sensor connectors.

If you remove the PHOTO SENSOR2
(take-up slack upper limit sensor) or
PHOTO SENSOR3 (take-up slack lower
limit sensors light-emitting unit),
remove it with one screw.
PHOTO SENSOR2
PHOTO SENSOR3
3. To remove the BRACKET-SENSOR-TU,

first unplug the connector, then remove
the two screws.

(takeup-side media slack sensors
light-emitting unit) individually, remove
the screw.
BRACKET-SENSOR-TU PHOTO SENSOR1
6-230
6.13.1.10 SCROLLER-STOPPER(DRIVE)
<Removal>
1. Remove the scroller.
2. Remove the
SCROLLER-STOPPER(DRIVE) with
three screws.
SCROLLER-STOPPER(DRIVE)
6.13.1.11 SCROLLER-STOPPER(SUPPORT)
<Removal>
2. Remove the
SCROLLER-STOPPER(SUPPORT)
with two screws.
6-231
6.13.1.12 MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET
<Removal>
1. Remove the COVER-RollBaseL-R and

four screws.
COVER-RollBaseL-R

motor.
3. Remove the MOTOR-BR-ASSY with

timing belt included and four screws.
Note
On installing the MOTOR-BR-ASSY, with
tightening the MOTOR-BR-ASSY fix it
with four screws.
Timing belts tension: 1.5 Nm
< Note >

With some MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SETs,
or depending on the manufacturing
period, the external view is as shown
MOTOR-BR-ASSY
6-232
6.13.1.13 MOTOR-ASSY(TAKEUP)-SET
(1) MOTOR-ASSY(TAKEUP)-SET
1. Remove the COVER(TakeUp-Drive)

and five screws.
COVER(TakeUp-Drive)
BRACKET(BEARING_SUPPORT)Tu
2. Remove the
BRACKET(BEARING_SUPPORT)Tu
and four screws.
3. Remove the
BRACKET(BEARING_SUPPORT)C
and four screws.
BRACKET(BEARING_SUPPORT)C
Connector connected to the motor

4. Remove the
MOTOR-ASSY(TAKEUP)-SETs
connector connected to the motor.
6-233
5. Remove the
MOTOR-ASSY(TAKEUP)-SET and four
screws.
MOTOR-ASSY(TAKEUP)-SET
MOTOR-ASSY(TAKEUP)-SET
Note
At installing the
MOTOR-ASSY(TAKEUP)-SET,
temprarily fasten the four screws, and
check that the tension is 20 to 25 Nm.
Then finally fasten the four screws.
6-234

(IP-7900-02/03/20/21/22/23)
6.13.2.1 ROLLER Assy
Note
After removing or installing the FEED-UNIT-R or TakeUp-Unit-R, be sure to adjust the roll
feed and take-up reel unit (see Section 7.20).
Inside the FEED-UNIT-R

FEED-UNIT-R
<Removal>
ROLLER Assy
1. Remove the FEED-UNIT-R and four

screws from the Printers BEAM.
2. Remove the
BRACKET(D-RingBumper)FT-CD with
four screws.
BRACKET(D-RingBumper)FT-CD
6-235
3. Remove the BRACKET(FDRunit)A1-CD BRACKET(FDRunit)B1-CD

with seven screws.
BRACKET(FDRunit)A1-CD
4. When the far-positioned ROLLER Assy Sprint pin

is removed, follow the procedure below.
ROLLER Assy
(1) Remove the parts on the shaft in the RING(D-RingGuid)
following order.
- Torque limiter
- Sprint pin
- Bearing
- E-ring
- RING(D-RingGuid)
(2) Loosen the two hexagon socket
head set screws.
(3) Remove the ROLLER Assy.
5. When the ROLLER Assy in your side is

removed, follow the procedure below.
ROLLER Assy
(1) Remove the parts on the shaft in the
following order.
- Bearing
- E-ring
- RING(D-RingGuid)
(2) Loosen the two hexagon socket
head set screws.
(3) Remove the ROLLER Assy.
6-236
Inside the TakeUp-Unit-R
ROLLER Assy
TakeUp-Unit-R
<Removal>
1. Remove the plug connected to the

TensionBar-Guide-Kotei.
2. Remove the three screws and

TensionBar-Guide-Kotei.
TakeUp-Unit-R

TakeUp-Unit-R from the Printers
BEAM.
6-237
4. Remove the four screws and the Bracket(TDRunit)B-CD

Bracket(TDRunit)B-CD.
5. Remove the eight screws and the

Bracket(TDRunit)C1-CD.
Bracket(TDRunit)C1-CD
6. Remove the bearing and the

RING(D-RingGuid) from the shaft.
7. Remove the ROLLER Assys. Loosen

the two screws for each ROLLER
Assys.
ROLLER Assy
6-238
6.13.2.2 FT-SCROLLER-SUPPORT(C), ANTI-ELECTROSTATIC BRUSH, and

ROLLER FOLLOW ASSY
<Removal>
ANTI-ELECTROSTATIC BRUSH
1. Remove one screw and the
ANTI-ELECTROSTATIC BRUSH.
Note
If only the ANTI-ELECTROSTATIC
BRUSH is removed, the steps below to
remove the FT-SCROLLER-SUPPORT
(C) is not necessary.
FT-SCROLLER-SUPPORT

FT-SCROLLER-SUPPORT(C). FT-SCROLLER-SUPPORT
3. From the FT-SCROLLER-SUPPORT(C),

remove the two ShaftHolder-A-CDs.
Note that two screws must be removed
for each ShaftHolder-A-CD.
ShaftHolder-A-CD
6-239
4. Remove the E-ring of the ROLLER

FOLLOW Assys shaft, and then remove ROLLER FOLLOW Assy
the ROLLER FOLLOW Assy.
E-ring
6-240
6.13.2.3 PF-FRICTIONROLLER
o
PF-FRICTIONROLLER
r
Note
Be sure to adjust the media feed direction after replacing the PF-FRICTIONROLLER
<Removal>

remove the covers.
6-241

bracket attached.
Note
pully.
Unrolling Motor
4. Remove the PF-FRICTIONROLLER.
6-242

removed PF-FRICTIONROLLER,

bracket from the
PF-FRICTIONROLLERs capping unit
side.

PF-FRICTIONROLLER in the OKI Data
Infotechs parts list.
6-243
<Removal>

remove the covers.

the unrolling motor. Then remove the
Timing belt
bracket attached.
Unrolling Motor
6-244


capping unit side

with:
-Wiping unit side BRACKET-RollerShaft
-Capping unit side BRACKET-RollerShaft
Wiping unit side

BRACKET-RollerShaft
6-245
6.13.2.5 PF-EMITSENSOR,
PHOTO SENSOR2 (supply-side media slack sensor's light-emitting unit), and
PHOTO SENSOR3 (supply-side media end sensor's light-emitting unit)
The procedure is the same as the one for the IP-7900-00/01.

See 6.13.1.7 FEED-DETECTOR, PHOTO SENSOR2 (supply-side media end sensor's
light-receiving unit), and PHOTO SENSOR3 (supply-side media slack sensor's
light-receiving unit).
PHOTO SENSOR2 (supply-side media end sensor's llight-receiving unit), and

See 6.13.1.8 FEED-DETECTOR, PHOTO SENSOR2 (supply-side media end sensor's
light-receiving unit), and PHOTO SENSOR3 (supply-side media slack sensor's
light-receiving unit).
6-246
6.13.2.7 Take-up Motor

Take-up Motor
TakeUp-Unit-R
<Removal>
1. Remove the four screws and Bracket(TDRunit)B-CD

Bracket(TDRunit)B-CD.
2. Disconnect the connector to the

Take-up Motor.
6-247

set screws at the Drive-Shaft-A-CD part.
4. Loosen the four screws and remove the

Take-up Motor.
Take-up Motor
6-248
6.13.2.8 SCROLLER-STOPPER(DRIVE)
<Removal>
2. Remove the E-ring and pull out the pin. SCROLLER-STOPPER(DRIVE)

SCROLLER-STOPPER(DRIVE).
E-ring
6.13.2.9 SCROLLER-STOPPER(SUPPORT)
<Removal>
SCROLLER-STOPPER(SUPPORT).
6-249
6.13.2.10 MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET(C)
<Removal>

COVER-RollBaseL-CD.
COVER-RollBaseL-CD

motor.
3. At each timing belt, remove the four

screws and the
MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET(C).
Note
On installing the
MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET(C), with
tightening the MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET(C)
fully fasten the four screws.
MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET(C)
6-250
6.13.3 Disassembly and Reassembly of Feed and Take-up Parts (IP-7700-00/01)
6.13.3.1 MOTOR-ASSY(TAKEUP)-SET-74 and FEED-AND-TAKE-UP-TIMING-BELT
<Removal>
Note
In the procedure below, some photos show the take-up motor and FEED-AND-TAKE-UP
TIMING BELT removed from the Printer. However, the all removal procedure below is
possible without removing them from the Printer.
The following procedures photos and figures shows the IP-7700-00/01. Though the
appearance may differ depending on the Printers model, perform the same procedure.
Unit including the parts to be removed at

this procedure
1. Remove the Tension-Bar-Guide-Kotei,

STAY(TB-Kotei), and STAY(TB-Kotei-F).
STAY(TB-Kotei)
STAY(TB-Kotei-F)
Tension-Bar-Guide-Kotei
6-251
2. Remove the COVER(TaUpMotor) with

four screws.
COVER(TaUpMotor)
3. Remove the connector of the Take-up

Motor HV74.
Take-up Motor
HV74
Connector
MOTOR-ASSY(TAKEUP)-SET-74
6-252
4. Remove the four screws on the rear

side of the BRACKET(TaUpCapSide),
and remove the
BRACKET(TaUpMotorSub).
BRACKET(TaUpMotorSub)

MOTOR-ASSY(TAKEUP)-SET-74.
Notes
(1) On replacing the take-up motor,
adjust the timing belt's tension. The
timing belt's tension is adjusted with
the screws removed at this step.
Timing belt's tension: 2.0 to 2.5 kgf
(2) The right photo shows the
PIPI(FeTa-SHAFT) with the the
take-up motor and
FEED-AND-TAKE-UP TIMING BELT
removed. However, the all TAKEUP-MOTOR-ASSY
replacement procedures are possible
without removing them from the
PIPE(FeTa-SHAFT).
6. Remove the switches.
6-253
7. Remove the
BRACKET(TaUpSideBase4a) with six
screws.
8. Remove the
FEED-AND-TAKE-UP-TIMING-BELT.
6-254
6.13.3.2 PF-EMITSENSOR and

PHOTO SENSOR1 (supply-side media slack sensor's light-emitting unit and
supply-side media end sensor's light emitting unit)
<Removal>

PF-EMITSENSOR cover.
PF-EMITSENSOR
2. Unplug the PHOTO SENSOR1

(supply-side media slack sensor's
light-emitting unit or supply-side media
end sensor's light-emitting unit)
connector.
PHOTO SENSOR1 (supply-side media slack senso's

light-emitting unit)
PHOTO SENSOR1 (supply-side media media end senso's

light-emitting unit)
3. Remove the four screws and the entire

PF-EMITSENSOR.
Screw position (left) Screw position (right)
6-255
6.13.3.3 FEED-DETECTOR-74,
<Removal>

FEED-DETECTOR-74.
2. Remove the four screws and the FEED-DETECTOR-74

FEED-DETECTOR-74.

PHOTO SENSOR2
(supply-side media end sensor's
light-receiving unit), and PHOTO
SENSOR3 (supply-side media slack
sensor's light-receiving unit) individually,
remove the screw securing each
sensor.
PHOTO SENSOR3
FEED-DETECTOR-74
6-256
6.13.3.4 TensionBar-Guide-Kotei Part,

PHOTO SENSOR2 (take-up slack upper limit sensor's light-receiviing unit),
and PHOTO SENSOR3 (take-up slack lower limit sensor's light-receiviing unit)
<Removal>
1. Remove the four screws and the sensor
cover on the TensionBar-Guide-Kotei.
Sensor's cover
2. Unplug the sensor connectors.

To remove the PHOTO SENSOR2
(Take-up slack upper limit sensor's
light-receiviing unit) or the PHOTO
SENSOR3 (Take-up slack lower limit
sensor's light-receiviing unit), remove
the screw securing each sensor.
PHOTO SENSOR2
(Take-up slack upper limit
sensor's light-receiviing unit)
PHOTO SENSOR3
(Take-up slack upper limit
sensor's light-receiviing unit)
6-257
6.13.3.5 BRACKET-SENSOR-TU-74 and

PHOTO SENSOR1 (take-up slack sensor's light-emitting unit)
<Removal>
1. Unplug the connector, remove the two

screws, and then remove the
BRACKET-SENSOR-TU-74.

sensor's light-emitting unit).
Photo sensor 1
BRACKET-SENSOR-TU-74 (light-emitting unit)
6-258
6.13.3.6 MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET
<Removal>
1. Remove the COVER-RollBaseL-R and

four screws.
COVER-RollBaseL-R

motor.
3. Remove the MOTOR-BR-ASSY with

Note
On installing the MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET,
with tightening the
MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET fully fasten the
four screws.
<Note>
With some MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SETs,
or depending on the manufacturing
period, the external view is as shown
MOTOR-BR-ASSY
6-259
6.13.3.7 PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74
o
PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74
r
Note
Be sure to adjust the media feed direction after replacing the PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74.
<Removal>

PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74, and then
remove the covers.
6-260

bracket attached.
Note
pully.
Unrolling Motor
4. Remove the PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74.
6-261

removed PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74,

bracket from the
PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74s capping
unit side.

PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74 in the OKI
Data Infotechs parts list.
6-262
<Removal>

remove the covers.

bracket attached.
Unrolling Motor
6-263


capping unit side

with:
Wiping unit side

BRACKET-RollerShaft
6-264
6.13.3.9 POM-Roller-Assy
<Removal>
Note
Remove the POM-Roller-Assy with the same procedure as for removing the
BRACKET(Feed-WipeSide)-UNIT and BRACKET(TaUp-WipeSide)-UNIT.
In the procedure below some photos show the ROM-Roller-Assy removed from
PIPE(FeTa-SHAFT). However, However, the all replacement procedure is possible
without removing it from the PIPE(FeTa-SHAFT).
Be sure to adjust the media feed direction after replacing the POM-Roller-Assy.
1. Remove the four screws totally, that is,

two screws each for right and left side
faces.
2. Remove the E-ring.
E-ring
3. Remove the POM-Roller-Assy.
POM-Roller-Assy
6-265

(IP-7700-02/03/20/21)
6.13.4.1 PF-EMITSENSOR and

PHOTO SENSOR1 (supply-side media slack sensor's light-emitting unit and
supply-side media end sensor's light emitting unit)

See 6.13.3.2 PF-EMITSENSOR and PHOTO SENSOR1 (supply-side media slack
sensor's light-emitting unit and supply-side media end sensor's light emitting unit).
For the PHOTO SENSOR1 (takeup-side media slack sensors light emitting unit), see
6.13.3.5 BRACKET-SENSOR-TU-74 and PHOTO SENSOR1 (take-up slack sensor's
light-emitting unit).
6.13.4.2 FEED-DETECTOR-74,

See 6.13.3.3 FEED-DETECTOR-74, PHOTO SENSOR2 (supply-side media end
sensor's light-receiving unit), and PHOTO SENSOR3 (supply-side media slack
sensor's light-receiving unit).
6.13.4.3 TensionBar-Guide-Kotei Part,

PHOTO SENSOR2 (take-up slack upper limit sensor's light-receiviing unit),
and PHOTO SENSOR3 (take-up slack lower limit sensor's light-receiviing unit)

See 6.13.3.4 TensionBar-Guide-Kotei Part, PHOTO SENSOR2 (take-up slack upper
limit sensor's light-receiving unit), and PHOTO SENSOR3 (take-up slack lower limit
sensor's light-receiving unit).
6-266
6.13.4.4 PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74
o
PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74
r
Note
Be sure to adjust the media feed direction after replacing the PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74.
<Removal>

remove the covers.
6-267

bracket attached.
Note
pully.
Unrolling Motor
4. Remove the PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74.
6-268

removed PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74,

bracket from the
PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74s capping
unit side. Then remove the shaft by
loosening the two hexagon socket head
set screws.

PF-FRICTIONROLLER-74 in the OKI
Data Infotechs parts list.
6-269
<Removal>

remove the covers.

the unrolling motor. Then remove the
Timing belt
bracket attached.
Unrolling Motor
6-270


capping unit side

with:
Wiping unit side

BRACKET-RollerShaft
6-271
6.13.4.6 BRACKET-SENSOR-TU-74

See 6.13.3.5 BRACKET-SENSOR-TU-74 and PHOTO SENSOR1 (take-up slack
sensor's light-emitting unit).
6.13.4.7 POM-Roller-Assy

See 6.13.3.9 POM-Roller-Assy.
6-272
6.13.4.8 Take-up Motor HV74
<Removal>
Note
In the procedure below, some photos show the parts removed from the Printer. The all
actual procedure does not require the parts removal.
Unit including the parts to be

removed at this procedure
1. Remove the Tension-Bar-Guide-Kotei,

STAY(TB-Kotei), and STAY(TB-Kotei-F).
STAY(TB-Kotei)
STAY(TB-Kotei-F)
Tension-Bar-Guide-Kotei
6-273
2. Remove the COVER(TaUpMotor) with

four screws.
COVER(TaUpMotor)
3. Remove the Take-up Motor HV74's

connector.
Take-up Motor HV74

Connector
6-274

set screws and loosen the four screws,
then remove the Take-up Motor HV74.
6-275
6.13.4.9 MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET(C)
<Removal>
1. Remove the COVER-RollBased-CD

and four screws.
COVER-RollBaseL-CD

motor.
3. Remove the MOTOR-BR-ASSY(C) with

Note
At installing the MOTOR-BR-ASSY(C),
securely fasten the
MOTOR-BR-ASSY(C)s four screws
while applying the tension below to the
timing belt.
MOTOR-BR-ASSY-SET(C)
6-276
6.14 Disassembly and Reassembly of Media Drying

Fan Parts
6.14.1 IP-7900: AFTER-FAN-ASSY(104) / IP-7700: AFTER-FAN-ASSY(74)
<Removal>
1.
Unplug the connecting section of the

cable connector connecting the
AFTER-FAN-ASSY(104) and the Printer.
Unplug the connecting section of the

cable connector connecting the
AFTER-FAN-ASSY(74) and the Printer.
IP-7900 AFTER-FAN-ASSY(104) Connecting section of connector
IP-7700 AFTER-FAN-ASSY(74) Connecting section of connector
2.
Remove the AFTER-FAN-ASSY(74) by

removing the fixing screws and painted
screw in the AFTER-FAN-ASSY(74)'s
both sides.
Remove the AFTER-FAN-ASSY(74) by

removing the fixing screws and painted
screw in the AFTER-FAN-ASSY(74)'s
both sides.
6-277
6.14.2 FANSLIT-FS, BLOWER3-FS, CAP-LOUVERb-FS, and FAN3 (media

cooling fan)
1. The figures below show how to remove

and install the FANSLIT-FS, the
BLOWER3-FS using one screw, the
CAP-LOUVERb-FS using two screws,
and the FAN3 (media cooling fan).
<FANSLIT-FS and CAP-LOUVERb-FS removal>
Remove the CAP-LOUVERb-FS,

and then slide the FANSLIT-FS to
remove it.
FANSLIT-FS
CAP-LOUVERb-FS
<BLOWER3-FS removal>
Remove the two parts above, and

then remove the BLOWER3-FS.
BLOWER3-FS
6-278
6.15 Disassembly and Reassembly of

PCB-ASSY-ADJ1
Note
These parts are included only in the IP-7900-22/23.
6.15.1 Disassembly and Reassembly

following covers.

6.3.2)
6.3.2)
Subsection 6.3.6)
Cover (CarriageUpper) ASSY

2. Remove the following carriage covers.

Subsection 6.7.1)
Subsection 6.7.1)
3. Insert a 4 mm hexagonal wrench into

the hole (1) shown on the picture on the
right on the right side of the Printer,
insert it into the hexagonal hole (2) on
the capping unit, and rotate it clockwise
to uncap the part.
(1)
(2)
6-279
4. Move the carriage manually to the left.
5. Disconnect the
PIEZO-SENSOR-R-ASSY connector
and remove the harness from the
clamp.
Connector
Clamp
6. Remove the screw and remove the

COVER-ADJ1 with the
PIEZO-SENSOR-R-ASSY still installed. COVER-ADJ1
7. Remove the two screws, disconnect the

connector and the FFC, and then
remove the PCB-ASSY-ADJ1.
PCB-ASSY-ADJ1
6-280
<Assembly>
1. Install the new PCB-ASSY-ADJ1.
2. First connect the harness to the

PCB-ASSY-ADJ1, and then secure it
with the screws.
3. Reinstall the parts and the clamps that

have been removed, and reconnect the
disconnected connectors
6-281
6.15.2 Cleaning the Lens Surface of the PCB-ASSY-ADJ1 Sensor
1. Remove the PCB-ASSY-ADJ1 (see the

subsection 6.15.1).
2. Clean the three sensor surfaces using a

cleaning swab.
Note
Do not moisten the cleaning swab with
any liquid; otherwise the sensor may be
damaged.
Rear side
Three sensor surfaces
3. Reinstall the parts removed in step 1.
6-282
This chapter explains the adjustment items required for parts replacement or
maintenance.
7-1
7.1 Adjusting the SUS-BELT-104 Tension or

Adjusting the SUS-BELT-74 Tension
After replacing the Y-DRIVE-PULLY-ASSY, Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY, and carriage in the Y

drive section, adjust the tension of the SUS-BELT-104.
Cautions
Return the carriage to the capping unit side, and measure the tension in the center of
the belt.
Place the SUS-BELT-104 to the center (between the top and bottom) of the
Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY.
Move the carriage to the left and right, and adjust the tension so that the SUS-BELT-104
does not move up and down on the Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY.
Turn the tension adjustment screw of the Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY, and adjust the
tension of the SUS-BELT-104. Then move the carriage in both ways (between the cap
and wipe) a few times by hand to soften the belt, and measure the tension.
After replacing the Y-DRIVE-PULLY-ASSY, Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY, and carriage in the Y

drive section, adjust the tension of the SUS-BELT-74.
Cautions
Return the carriage to the capping unit side, and measure the tension in the center of
the belt.
Place the SUS-BELT-74 to the center (between the top and bottom) of the
Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY.
Move the carriage to the left and right, and adjust the tension so that the SUS-BELT-74
does not move up and down on the Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY.
Turn the tension adjustment screw of the Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY, and adjust the
tension of the SUS-BELT-74. Then move the carriage in both ways (between the cap
and wipe) a few times by hand to soften the belt, and measure the tension.
7-2
1.
Press the center of the SUS-BELT-104

using a BeltTension-Jig, and read the
value with which the belt has come into
contact with the Y rail.
Caution
Do not touch the SUS-BELT-104 directly
by hand. Measurement portion
Measurement portion
BeltTension-Jig
Press the center of the SUS-BELT-74
using a BeltTension-Jig, and read the
value with which the belt has come into
contact with the Y rail.
Caution
Do not touch the SUS-BELT-74 directly
by hand.
Adjusting screw
2.
While turning the tension adjustment IP-7900 SUS-BELT-104

screw of the Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY, IP-7700 SUS-BELT-74
adjust so that the tension matches the
following value.
<Adjustment value>
Tension: 1.90.1N (0.2 kg)
Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY
While turning the tension adjustment

screw of the Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY,
adjust so that the tension matches the
following value.
<Adjustment value>
Tension: 2.30.1N (0.24 kg)
7-3
7.2 Adjusting the Tension of the TIMING-BELT-Y

After replacing the Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY and Y-DRIVEN-PULLY-ASSY in the Y drive
section, adjust the tension of the TIMING-BELT-Y.
1. Remove the motors connector.
2. Loosen five screws fixing the

BRACKET(DSE64B-SUPPORT) and BRACKET (DSE64B-SUPPORT)
BRACKET(DSE64B-MAIN)-S2M.
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY
TIMING-BELT-Y
Y-DRIVE-PULLY-ASSY
3. Remove the cable clamp shown in the

right figure.
Cable clamp
4. Hook the push-pull gauge with 10 kg

(98N) capacity onto the hole where the
cable clamp was fixed.
Push-pull gauge with 10 kg (98N) capacity

(TENSION METER ASSY)
7-4
5. Pull the push-pull gauge.
<Adjustment value>
Tension: 34.3N2N (3.5 kg)
6. With the tension above maintained,

fasten the screw (1), and then (2) (1) (2)
securely.
<Adjustment value>
Torque: 1.5Nm
Note
Be sure to fasten the screw (2) only after
the (1).
7. Securely fasten the three screws shown

in the right figure.
<Adjustment value>
Torque: 1.5Nm
8. Remove the push-pull gauge.
7-5
9. With the carriages reciprocating

operation, confirm that the two parts Motor
below are not misaligned vertically.
- TIMING-BELT-Y
(1) Move the TIMING-BELT-Y to the

PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2Ms
center position.
(2) After the carriages one

reciprocation, visually confirm that
the TIMING-BELT-Y is not
misaligned vertically.
(3) If the misalignment is not solved,

repeat the steps 1 to 8.
PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2M TIMING-BELT-Y
<OK> <NG>
During carriage reciprocation, the During carriage reciprocation, the

TIMING-BELT-Y operates as follows while TIMING-BELT-Y operates as follows while
the TIMING-BELT-Y does not touch the the TIMING-BELT-Y touches the
PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2Ms upper and PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2Ms upper and
lower edge parts. lower edge parts.
- The TIMING-BELT-Ys position is always - The TIMING-BELT-Y is not leveled.
fixed. - During the carriage reciprocation, the
- During the carriage operation, the TIMING-BELT-Y always moves only in
TIMING-BELT-Y does not move either upper or lower direction. When the
vertically. TIMING-BELT-Y position is reversed,
- During the carriage operation, the TIMING-BELT-Y touches the
TIMING-BELT-Y does not move to upper PULLY(Y-MOTOR-36Z)-S2Ms opposite
side, that is, pulley's upper edge or lower edge part.
side, that is, pulley's lower edge.
7-6
10. Securely fasten the screw shown in the

figure so that the screw touches the
sheet metal, then apply the screw
locking agent to the screw part.
11. Set the cable clamp removed at the step

2.
12. Fully tighten the screws securing the

BRACKET(DSE64B-SUPPORT).
7-7
7.3 Adjusting the Tension of the

DECELERATION-BELT
After replacing the PAPER-FEED-MOTOR-ASSY in the X drive section, adjust the tension
of the DECELERATION-BELT.
Caution
Before adjusting the tension of the DECELERATION-BELT, remove the
Y-DRIVE-MOTOR-ASSY and FG cable (L130).
The TIMING-BELT-Y tension adjustment is also required. See the section 7.2.
1. Loosen three fixing screws of the

PAPER-FEED-MOTOR-ASSY.
2. Move the plate to the left and right, and

adjust the tension of the DECELE
DECELERATION-BELT. RATION-
BELT
<Adjustment value>
Tension: 50N2N (5 kg)
X-PU
LLY-B
RACK
ET
A X-PULLY-BRACKET
When the push-pull gauge cannot be

hooked on the hole shown in the figure,
remove the X-PULLY-BRACKET with
Hole on which a push-pull two screws, and press the position A
gauge is to be hooked from the front cover side.
7-8
7.4 Adjusting the Height of the Wiping Unit

Correct the wiper position against the print head in the wiping unit.
Caution
If the initial value is used as the correction value, the system error (wiper position
adjustment value error) will occur when the printer has been turned on.
1. Enter the maintenance mode. (See 3.2

Operation in Maintenance Mode)
2. Hold down the MENU button until the PRINTER SETUP

ADJUST menu appears.
ADJUST HEATER
3. Press the Left button to enter the #TEST PRINTS

ADJUST menu.
>NOZZLE PRINT
4. Press the Down button to display #MOVE CARRIAGE

#MOVE CARRIAGE.
>HOME
5. Press the OK button.
6. Press the Down button to select WIPE, #MOVE CARRIAGE

and press the OK button to move the
carriage to the wiping unit side. >WIPE

Shield(Air-R).
8. At the same time, also remove the four

screws and the Shield(Air-L) on the left. Shield(Air-R)
7-9
9. Remove the Cover(CarriageUpper) and Cover(CarriageUpper)

Cover(CarriageUnder). See the section
6.7.
Cover(CarriageUnder)
10. Adjust the wiping unit's wiper position

against the print head.
For this step, two procedures below are
available:
(1) Procedure without the

WIPING-HEIGHT-TOOL(HV).
(2) Procedure with the
WIPING-HEIGHT-TOOL(HV).
If you bring a
WIPING-HEIGHT-TOOL(HV) with
yourself, select (1), and if not, select (2).
(1) Procedure without the WIPING-HEIGHT-TOOL(HV)
(a) By manually rotating the pulley,

lower the pulley slowly. Then move
the print head closer to the wiper
blade's tip.
(b) If the eight gaps between the wiper

blade's tip and the corresponding
print head are not equal, loosen the
screw shown in the right figure, and
adjust the positions so that the all
gaps are equal.
Head Head
wiper blade wiper blade
G
a
p
7-10
(2) Procedure with the WIPING-HEIGHT-TOOL(HV)
(a) While turning the pulley of the

carriage by hand, lift the carriage
until the jig can be inserted.
(b) Remove the

CHECK-SENSOR-L-HM-JS and the
CHECK-SENSOR-R-HM-JS.
(c) Place the TOOL(CAPPING-ADJUST)s CHECK-SENSOR-L-HM-JS

at four portions on the top of the wiper.
CHECK-SENSOR-R-HM-J
TOOL(CAPPING-ADJUST) S
WIPING-HEIGHT-TOOL(HV) TOOL(CAPPING-ADJUST)
TOOL(CAPPING-ADJUST)
(SPACER(WIPE) x 4)
11. While turning the pulley by hand,

carefully lower the carriage so that it
runs into the SPACER(WIPE)s.
If the jig does not equally run into four
portions, loosen the screws shown on
the right and adjust the position so that
the jig equally comes into contact with
them.
12. While turning the pulley by hand, lift the

carriage and remove the
SPACER(WIPE)s.
13. Reinstall both the Shield(Air-R) and the

Shield(Air-L) that have been removed in
the previous steps. Use three screws for
each.
14. In #MOVE CARRIAGE, move the #MOVE CARRIAGE

carriage to the home position.
>HOME
15. Enter the #MEASURE WIPE HEIGHT #MEASURE WIPE HEIGHT

menu in the ADJUST menu.
>
7-11
16. Press the OK button. #MEASURE WIPE HEIGHT

*OK?
17. Press the OK button. CARRIAGE MOVING

This starts the wiper height detection
operation of the carriage. PLEASE WAIT
During this operation, the wiper height MEASURE W IPE HEIGHT *OK?
measurement value parameter is
specified automatically. H:XX.Xmm
18. Press the OK button. #MEASURE WIPE HEIGHT

>
7-12
7.5 Positioning the Wiping Unit

After replacing or reinstalling the wiping unit, position it.
Notes
Be sure to perform Adjusting the Height of the Wiping Unit before this adjustment.
At a usual position adjustment, the procedure below does not require the wiping unit
positioning jig. Use the jig only when the wiping unit position must be adjusted with high
accuracy.
<Wiping unit positioning jig>
WIPING-ADJUST-TOOL(HV)
(BLOCK(WIPING-ADJUST))
1. Place the wiping unit in the WIPE

Wiping unit
LOWER ASSY, and temporarily tighten
four fixing screws of the wiping unit.
WIPE LOWER ASSY
2. Place the BLOCK(WIPING-ADJUST)s

in the rear left and right of the wiping
unit.
BLOCK(WIPING-ADJUST)
3. Press the positioning jig against the Y

rail, and fully tighten four fixing screws
at that position.
7-13
7.6 Correcting the Cap Position

Correct the cap position for the head in the capping unit (home position).

2. Hold down the MENU button until the

PRINTER SETUP
ADJUST HEATER

ADJUST menu.
>NOZZLE PRINT
4. Press the Down button to display #CAP #CAP POSITION

POSITION, and press the OK button.
>Y.Ymm
5. Visually check that the cap is positioned

in the center of the head.
PH PH PH PH
PH PH PH PH
Head maintenance Capping Unit
Capping Unit
7-14
Press the Up, Down, Left, and Right buttons, and enter the correction value.
(-): Capping unit side
(+): Wiping unit side
Caution
If 0 is specified as the correction value,
capping will fail.
<Adjustment value>
Units: mm
Range: -5.0 to +5.0
6. Open and close the rear cover to correct

the cap position of the carriage based
on the correction value that was entered
in the step above.
7. Repeat the steps 4 to 6 to correct so

that the cap is positioned in the center
of the head.
7-15
7.7 Positioning the Capping Unit

After replacing or reinstalling the capping unit, position it using a jig.
<Capping unit positioning jig>
CAPPING-ADJUST-TOOL(HV)
(TOOL(CAPPING-ADJUST) x 2)
1. Install the capping unit, and temporarily

tighten four fixing screws.
Caution
Place the capping unit gently with both
hands at the HOLDER(CAP).
2. Remove the screw on each

Plate(BaseHolder) placed on the left
and right sides of the Head Base, and
remove the two Plate(BaseHolder).
Plate(BaseHolder)
7-16
3. Place the positioning

TOOL(CAPPING-ADJUST)s to the
capping unit. (See the figure below.)
TOOL(CAPPING-ADJUST)
4. Closely attach the TOOL(CAPPING-ADJUST)

TOOL(CAPPING-ADJUST)s to the
Head Base face, where the cappping
unit is adjusted.
Head base
Capping unit
5. Fully tighten the fixing screws that were
tightened temporarily in the step 1.
Note
Fixing torque: 1.5 Nm
6. Remove the
TOOL(CAPPING-ADJUST).
7. Assemble the Plates(BaseHolder).
7-17
8. Loosen the screw fixing the

PLATE(CARRIAGE-HV-L) and
temporarily fix the
PLATE(CARRIAGE-HV-L) at the
uppermost position.
Also loosen the screw fixing the
PLATE(CARRIAGE-HV-R) and
temporarily fix the
PLATE(CARRIAGE-HV-R) at the
uppermost position.
Then temporarily fix the PLATE at the
uppermost position.
PLATE(CARRIAGE-HV-R)
PLATE(CARRIAGE-HV-L)
PLATE(BaseHolder)
PLATE(BaseHolder)
With the IP-7900-22/23, leave a

space of 3.1 mm between the
plates.
Space of 3.1 mm
With the IP-7900-22/23, adjust to the position of the lower plate.
9. Turn the printer on.
10. With the operation panel enter the

maintenance mode.
11. Execute #UNCAP CARRIAGE in the

PH.MAIN menu.
7-18
12. Adjust the PLATE(CARRIAGE-HV-L)

position so that the clearance between
the PLATE(CARRIAGE-HV-L) and
Plate(BaseHolder) is 0.3 mm.
13. Similarly adjust the

PLATE(CARRIAGE-HV-R) position so
that the clearance between the
PLATE(CARRIAGE-HV-R) and
Plate(BaseHolder) is 0.3 mm.
14. Check visually that the capping position,

if the result is not good, correct the cap
position for the head in the capping unit
(see 7.6 Correcting the Cap Position).
7-19
7.8 Adjusting the Tilt of the Head Base

Use the head base tilt adjustment jig set to adjust the parallelism with the platen in the
plate (head base stopper) assembly.
<Head base tilt adjustment jig>
HB-SHIM-SET
(Shim(HeadBase-HV) x 2)
1. Adjust the tilt with the carriage cover

removed (the head exposed).
Note
The wrinkle sensors (see 6.7.11 and
6.7.12) and the automatic print
adjustment sensors (see 6.15.1) should
be removed with the IP-7900-22/23.
2. Move the carriage to the center position

of the platen.
3. Place Shim(HeadBase-HV) s at the

adjustment positions (convex parts) at
the left and right of the carriage.
Shim(HeadBase-HV) Shim(HeadBase-HV)
7-20
Shim position (Convex part)
4. Loosen the five screws of the rear board

(REAR-RAIL) that secures the head to
the carriage.
5. Remove the two screws of the pulley

cover of the carriage. While turning the
pulley by hand, lower the carriage until it
runs into the left shim.
6. Turn the tilt adjustment screw to adjust

the tilt of the rear board (REAR-RAIL)
so that the right Shim(HeadBase-HV) is
level with the left one.
Tilt adjustment screw
Caution
Turning the screw clockwise lowers the
carriage (tilts the REAR-RAIL to the
right). Turning the screw
counterclockwise lifts the carriage (tilts
the REAR-RAIL to the left).
7-21
7.9 Adjusting the Platen Flatness
<Overview>
Measure the 11 post positions height based on the height of the platen post position
nearest to the capping unit side. So at this basic platen post, set the PLATEN-GAUGE-KIT
scale to 0, then measure the height at each platen post position and at each screw head
position.
Obtain an error between the height of the highest post and that of the other posts, and
determine the number of shims in each post so that the error is within standard value.
Insert shims so that the other posts are under the highest post.
<Specified value>
At the heater off: The difference between the maximum value and the minimum value is
0.15 mm or less.
At the heater on: The difference between the maximum value and the minimum value is
0.3 mm or less.
One scale of dial gauge: 0.01 mm
<Overview>
Measure the 8 post positions height based on the height of the platen post position
nearest to the capping unit side. So at this basic platen post, set the PLATEN-GAUGE-KIT
scale to 0, then measure the height at each platen post position and at each screw head
position.
Obtain an error between the height of the highest post and that of the other posts, and
determine the number of shims in each post so that the error is within standard value.
Insert shims so that the other posts are under the highest post.
<Specified value>
At the heater off: The difference between the maximum value and the minimum value is
0.15 mm or less.
At the heater on: The difference between the maximum value and the minimum value is
0.3 mm or less.
One scale of dial gauge: 0.01 mm
<Platen flatness measurement tool>
PLATEN-GAUGE-KIT PLATEN-SHIM-SET:
(CapWipePT collimating tool): U00113109600 U00113107400
SHIM(M4)0.1 SHIM(P3B)0.1
(30pcs) (15pcs)
(30pcs) (15pcs)
7-22
1. Set the Printer in offline. With the MENU REW IND FORM FEED
button, display the PH.MAIN menu.
PH.REC PH.MAIN
2. With the Right button, enter the #CAP CLEANING

PH.MAIN menu. Then the cap cleaning
menu is displayed. >
3. With the OK button check the #CAP CLEANING

confirmation message, and then press
the OK button again. * OK?
With this operation the carriage moves. CARRIAGE MOVING

When the carriage transfer is completed,
the Printer issues a warning beep. PLEASE WAIT
4. Open the front cover, and then the

OPEN COVER
capping cover.
CLEAN CAP
Note
Check that the carriage stands still with
its position elevated.

Power switch at the same time, turn off
the Printer.
COVER(HV104)YRR
6. Remove the COVER(HV104)YRR and
the COVER(HV)FMR. See the
subsections 6.3.6 and 6.3.7.
COVER(HV)FMR

area.
7-23
8. Remove the Cover(CarriageUpper) and Cover(CarriageUpper)

the Cover(CarriageUnder). See the
section 6.7.
9.
Remove the
FRONT-PAPER-GUIDE-104 and the
REAR-PAPER-GUIDE-104. See the
subsections 6.12.1 and 6.12.2.
Remove the FRONT-PAPER-GUIDE-74

and the REAR-PAPER-GUIDE-74. See
the subsections 6.12.1 and 6.12.2.
10. Install the PLATEN-GAUGE-KIT onto

the carriage with the procedure below.
(1) Press the PLATEN-GAUGE-KIT

onto the carriage.
(2) With applying the force downward,

tighten the two screws.
7-24
11. Check that the screw is located at the

screw keyholes upper position, or that
the PLATEN-GAUGE-KIT is fixed
properly.
12. Move the carriage so that the

PLATEN-GAUGE-KITs gauge head is
just above the first platen post, that is,
nearest to the capping unit side.
Gauge head
13. Set the pressure control knob to

Normal.
14. Set the two dial gauges value to 0.
Note
Before setting the value to 0, check that
the dial gauges gauge head is not set at
the counter sunk holes.
7-25
15.
While moving the carriage, measure the

11 platen posts height, and record the
difference between:
- Each platen post's height; and
- Basic platen post's height
as platen gap.
Note
For one platen post, measure the height
in the grit roller side and the rear paper
guide side. So totally measure the 22
positions height for 11 platen posts.
While moving the carriage, measure the

8 platen posts height, and record the
difference between:
- Each platen posts height; and
- Basic platen posts height
as platen gap.
Note
For one platen post, measure the height
in the grit roller side and the rear paper
guide side. So totally measure the 16
positions height for 8 platen posts.

side.
7-26
17. Insert the SHIM(M4) or SHIM(P3B)

between the platen and platen post so
that, among the all dial gauge values, SHIM(M4) SHIM(P3B)
the difference between the maximum
value and the minimum value is within
0.15 mm.
Note
At the Printers rear side insert the
SHIM(P3B), and at the Printers front
side insert the SHIM(M4).
Each shim is classified into two
depending on the thickness: 0.1 mm or
0.2 mm. So adjust the dial gauge value
combining the two.
Shim insertion position in the Printers front side Shim insertion position in the Printers rear side
18. After inserting the shims, again

measure the platen gap at the platen
post explained at the steps 12-16.
19. Repeat the steps 17 to 18 for:

- Adjustment with shims
- Platen gap measurement
until the difference between the
maximum value and the minimum
value becomes within 0.15 mm.
7-27
20. Install the previously removed paper

guide to the original position.
Install the FRONT-PAPER-GUIDE-104

and REAR-PAPER-GUIDE-104.
Install the FRONT-PAPER-GUIDE-74

and REAR-PAPER-GUIDE-74.
21. By pressing the operation panels

Power switch, turn on the Printer.
22. Set the three media heaters

temperature as follows.
<Setup value>
Afterheater: 65C
Printheater: 45C
Preheater: 50C
23. Check that each heater temperature

was increased to the setup value, and
hold the Printer for approx. 30 minutes
to stabilize the temperature.
24. Set the two dial gauges value to 0.
Note
Before setting the value to 0, check that
the dial gauges gauge head is not set at
the counter sunk holes.
25. While moving the carriage, measure the

other platen posts height, and record
the difference between:
- Each platen posts height; and
- Basic platen posts height
as platen gap.
7-28
26. Check that, among the platen gaps

measured at each platen post, the
difference between the maximum vlaue
and the minimum value is within 0.3 mm.
If the specified value above is not

satisfied, set the media heater to off,
check that the media heater
temperature was cooled down to the
ordinary temperature, press the
CANCEL button and OK button at the
same time. Then repeat the operation
from the step 12.
Note
Be sure to turn off the heaters, as they
contains high voltage parts.
27. Remove the PLATEN-GAUGE-KIT.

Cover(CarriageUpper)
28. Install the Cover(CarriageUpper) and
the Cover(CarriageUnder).
29. Install the COVER(HV104)YRR and COVER(HV104)YRR

COVER(HV)FMR.
COVER(HV)FMR
7-29
7.10 Initial Ink Charge and Ink Purge

7.10.1 Initial Ink Charge
Cautions
Do not release the pressure control knob, nor open the front cover.
When the ink charge is suspended by some reason such as ink running out or pressure
control knob error, do not continue the ink charge operation. If it is continued, waste ink
may overflow from the waste ink bottle.
When it is suspended, terminate the ink charge with the either of the two operations
below.
1. Set a new subcartridge and start the ink charge again.

2. Supply the ink from the ink cartridge.
1. Press the ONLINE button to enter the

offline mode.

REW IND FORM FEED
PH.MAIN menu appears.
PH.REC PH.MAIN
3. Press the Right button to enter the

#PH.MAIN
PH.MAIN menu.
#CAP CLEANING
4. Press the Down button, select the #PH.MAIN

#PH.MAIN menu, and press the OK
button. *STORE INK SYS
5. Press the Down button to enter the #INK SYSTEM OPT

*INITIAL CHARGE menu.
*INITIAL CHARGE
6. Press the OK button. #INK SYSTEM OPT

*BOTTLE OK?
7. Check that the waste ink bottle is OPEN

installed, and press the OK button.
SUBCARTRIDGE COVER
8. Remove the subcartridge cover.

LOAD SUBCARTRIDGE
CCC LOAD SUBCART
7-30
9. Place the subcartridge. CLOSE

SUBCART COVER
10. Place the subcartridge cover. OPEN

INK COVER
11. Open the ink box cover. LOAD

DUMMY INKPACK
12. Place the dummy ink cartridge.

CLOSE
INK COVER
13. Close the ink box cover.

START INK FILLING
*BOTTLE OK?
14. Check that the waste ink bottle is CHARGING INK

PLEASE WAIT XXX
The subcartridge charge, subcartridge
lower-channel charge, and normal #INK SYSTEM OPT
cleaning operations are then completed.
>INITIALCHARGE
7-31
7.10.2 Purging Ink
Cautions
Two ink purge procedures are available:
- Ink purge only for a single color
- Simultanous ink purge for some colors
However, some ink share the suction pump driving motor with the other ink. Such an ink
must be purged separately from the other ink sharing the motor.
Before the ink purge, replace the waste ink bottle with a new one.
For the ink purge, allow the Printer for 3 minutes or so.
1. Press the ONLINE button to enter the

offline mode.


REW IND FORM FEED
PH.REC PH.MAIN
4. Press the Right button to enter the #PH.MAIN

PH.MAIN menu.
#CAP CLEANING
5. Press the Down button, select the #PH.MAIN

#PH.MAIN menu, and press the OK
button. *STORE INK SYS
6. Press the Down button to enter the #PH.MAIN

*PURGE INK SYS menu.
*PURGE INK SYS
7. Press the OK button. #INK SYSTEM OPT

*BOTTLE OK?
8. Check that the waste ink bottle is

CLOSE
SUBCARTRIDGE COVER
9. Remove the subcartridge cover.

REMOVE SUBCARTRIDGE
7-32
10. Remove the subcartridge. LOAD

DUMMY SUBCARTRIDGE
11. Install the dummy subcartridge. CLOSE

SUBCARTRIDGE COVER
12. Place the subcartridge cover.

OPEN
INK COVER
13. Open the ink box cover.

REMOVE
INK PACK
14. Remove the ink tray. CLOSE

INK COVER
15. Close the ink box cover.

START PURGING
*BOTTLE OK?
16. Check that the waste ink bottle is PURGING

PLEASE WAIT
Purging starts.
7-33
7.11 Checking Nozzles

7.11.1 Printing the CHECK NOZZLE


ADJUST HEATER

ADJUST menu.
>NOZZLE PRINT
4. Press the OK button, and select the
adjustment pattern.
5. Press the Down button to enter the

>CHECK NOZZLE menu. #TEST PRINTS
>CHECK NOZZLE
6. Press the OK button. #TEST PRINTS

>OK?
7. Press the OK button to print the

#TEST PRINTS
selected pattern.
*EXECUTING
M K C Y
Media
advance
Lg Lc GY Lm direction
8. Use a magnifier glass (x10) to observe

the entire printing and check that
missing dot are not found in each color
pattern.
Caution
If an image quality error has occurred due to a nozzle ejection failure at installation or
operations, execute PH RECOVERY, FILLCAP, or PURGE INK SYS to recover the error.
For the recovery procedure, see the following section.
7-34
7.11.2 Cleaning


REW IND FORM FEED
PH RECOVERY menu appears.
PH.REC PH.MAIN
3. Press the Left button to enter the PH #PH RECOVERY

RECOVERY menu.
>NORMAL
4. Press the OK button. #PH RECOVERY

The head with the displayed number is *STRONG:87654321
subject to cleaning.
5. Press the Right or Left button, move #PH RECOVERY

the cursor, and use the Up or Down
button to toggle the number. *STRONG:87654321
Toggling erases the numeric value 8 to

1. #PH RECOVERY
*STRONG:8 5

#PH RECOVERY
The selected head number is displayed *BOTTLE OK?
on the operation panel.
(8 5 in this example)

#PH RECOVERY
*CLEANING XXX
Cleaning is then completed. #PH RECOVERY

>STRONG
7-35
7.11.3 Fillcap
Fillcap fills the cap with ink, soaks the head (nozzle side) with ink, and leaves it for the
specified time to resolve nozzle clogging. This function is available when a nozzle is still
clogged after the cleaning was repeated.
To use this function, select WASH PRINTHEADS in the user mode.
Cautions
For the fillcap, allow the Printer for 2 to 16 hours.
After recovery has been completed with fillcap, be sure to perform normal cleaning.
1. Press the ONLINE button.

REW IND FORM FEED
PH.REC PH.MAIN

#PH.MAIN
PH.MAIN menu.
#CAP CLEANING
4. Press the Down button to enter the

*WASH PRINTHEADS menu.
5. Press the OK button. #WASH PRINTHEADS

>
6. Press the OK button to perform

#WASH PRINTHEADS
operations based on the guidance.
*OK?
7-36
7.11.4 Installing and Relocating the Printer
Perform the ink charge after the Printer is installed or relocated. If the ink charge is not
completed successfully, air or dusts may remain in the nozzle. In such a case, purge the
ink and again charge the ink system. Then check the nozzle ejection performance with the
CHECK NOZZLE pattern.
1. Purge ink. (See 7.10 Initial Ink Charge

and Ink Purge.)
2. Charge ink. (See 7.10 Initial Ink

Charge and Ink Purge.)
3. Print the CHECK NOZZLE pattern, and

check that no missing dot is found. (See
7.11 Checking Nozzles.)
7-37
7.12 Print Head Alignment

After removing and installing a print head for replacement, perform the print head
mechanical alignment before the calibration with parameter input.
The print head alignment is classified into two as follows.

Print head x alignment
The print head is aligned in subscanning direction, or media feed direction.
Adjust this
position.
Media output
Adjust this
direction
position.
Adjust this
position.
Print head tilt alignment
The print heads tilt is aligned.
Print head
Notes
During the print head alignment process, print the print head alignment diagnostic plot
many times to assess the current print head alignment quality. Based on the diagnostic
plot, with the print head alignment tools perform the print head alignment. Repeat this
procedure until the print head alignment is optimal.
The print head x and tilt alignments must be performed at the same time, by inserting
the PIN(AdjestHEAD) into each adjustment position.
The print head x alignment result affects the print head tilt alignment, and vice versa.
When you perform either of the two, be sure to check the other alignment.
7-38
<Print head alignment tools>
BOX(lever) Lever(Adjust) PIN(AdjustHEAD)
PIN(HeadHolder)L PIN(HeadHolder)S SPRING(HEADAdjust)
Plate(Adjust)
Plate(Adjust) is applied only at the situation

below:
- At setting the PIN(AdjustHEAD), its tapered
part does not touch the print head. As a
result the print head cannot be adjusted.
So, in most cases, the Plate(Adjust) is not
necessary.
<Adjustment positions for print head alignment>

The adjustment positions for the print head alignment are shown below.
Print heads rear side
Head base Head base
For print head

tilt alignment
PIN(HeadHoler)S
For print head x alignment PIN(HeadHolder)L
adjustment hole
adjustment hole
Print heads front side
7-39
7.12.1 Print Head Alignment to Referenced Position
1. Install a new print head, and temporarily

tighten the four print head fixing screws.
2. Install the ink tube and cable.
PIN(HeadHolder)L
3. To determine the print heads
referenced position, at the new print
heads rear part, insert the
PIN(HeadHolder)L into the adjustment
hole on the head base. Then insert the
PIN(HeadHolder)S at the print heads
front part.
PIN(HeadHolder)S
4. Fully tighten the print head fixing screws
temporarily tightened at the step 1.
5. Turn on the Printer power.
7-40
6. Print the diagnostic plot to check the

print head x and tilt alignments.
By selecting CHECK MECHANICALS

with the procedure below, the both print
head x and tilt alignment diagnostic
plots are printed.
(1) Enter the maintenance mode. (See

3.2 Operation in Maintenance
Mode.)
(2) Hold down the MENU button until PRINTER SETUP

the ADJUST menu appears.
ADJUST HEATER
(3) Press the Left button to enter the #TEST PRINTS

ADJUST menu.
>NOZZLE PRINT
(4) Press the OK button to select

#TEST PRINT.
(5) Hold down the Down button until #TEST PRINTS

the >CHECK MECHANICALS
appears. >CHECK MECHANICALS
(6) Press the OK button. #TEST PRINTS

*OK?
(7) Press the OK button. #TEST PRINTS

*EXECUTING
7. Assess the current print head alignment

quality by checking the print head x and
tilt alignment diagnostic plots. When the
diagnostic plot shows a good quality,
complete the print head alignment.
If the diagnostic plots show a poor

quality, perform the print head x and tilt
alignments with the procedure below.
Repeat the print head alignments until
the diagnostic plots show a good quality.
7-41
d)
a)
e)
b)
a)
f)
c)
b)
c)
Print head tilt alignment diagnostic plot (8 colors) Print head x alignment diagnostic plot (8 colors)
<Print head tilt alignment diagnostic plot and alignment>
a): Printed at 1st scanning

b): Printed at 2nd scanning
c): Printed at 3rd scanning
- Plots a) and b) show 9.0mm overlap.

- Plots b) and c) show 9.0mm overlap.
The print head tilt kinks the overlapped lines at the first and second scanning. So align the
print head tilt so that the overlapped lines should be straight, without kink.
[NG] [OK]
Align the print head tilt by setting the alignment tool at Gy so that the print head x
alignments are consistent at Gy and K.
7-42
<Print head x alignment diagnosis>
d): Printed to check the front side print head x alignment

e): Printed to check the referenced print heads x alignment in the front and rear sides
f): Printed to check the rear side print head x alignment
Between the diagnostic plots at right, center, and left, apply the center one for diagnosis.
OK (The plots show that the print head alignment quality is optimal.)
Lm Gy Lc Gy Lgy
d) Reference Reference The positions of Lm, Lc, and Lgy are the
K Gy same as of Gy.
Reference
e) The position of Gy is the same as of K.
Reference
Y K C K M
f) Reference Reference The positions of Y, M, and C are the
same as of K.
OK (The plots show that the print head alignment quality is acceptable if the all conditions below are satisfied.
No more alignment is required)
Gy Gy Lgy
Lm Lc - Lm, Lc, and Lgy misalignment
d) Reference Reference directions to Gy are all consistent.
K
- Lm, Lc, and Lgy misalignment
e) Reference Gy amounts to Gy are all within 50m.
Reference Gy
K - The misalignment direction at d) is
f) Y K C M consistent with at f).
Reference Reference
Gy misalignment amount to K is within

50m.
- Y, C, and M misalignment directions

to K are all consistent.
- Y, C, and M misalignment amounts
to K are all within 50m.
- The misalignment direction at f) is
consistent with at d).
NG (The plots show that the print head alignment quality is not acceptable if, within the front-side or rear-side
print heads, the misalignment direction differs depending on the color. A further alignment is required.)
Lm Lgy
Gy Gy
d) Lc Lm, Lc, and Lgy misalignment
Reference Reference
K directions to Gy are not consistent.
e) Reference Gy
Y Reference Gy M
f) K K
C
Reference Reference
7-43
NG (The plots show that the print head alignment quality is not acceptable if, within the front-side and
rear-side print heads, the misalignment direction differs depending on the color. A further alignment is
required.)
Gy Gy
Lm Lc Lgy
d) Reference Reference Lm, Lc, and Lgy misalignment
K directions are not consistent with at f).
Reference Gy
e)
Reference
K K
Y, C, and M misalignment directions
f) Reference Reference
Y C M are not consistent with at d).
NG (The plots show that the print head alignment quality is not acceptable if the print head misalignment
amount exceeds 50m. A further alignment is required.)
Gy Lc Gy Lgy
d) Lm Reference Reference
To the referenced Gy, Lm print head
K
misalignment amount exceeds 50m.
Reference Gy
e)
Reference
K C K
Y M
f) Reference Reference
7-44
7.12.2 Print Head X and Tilt Alignments at Front Side
1. Install BOX(lever), Lever(Adjust),

PIN(HeadHolder)L, and
PIN(HeadHolder)L
PIN(AdjustHEAD)s.
PIN(AdjestHEAD)
(Set for x alignment)
PIN(AdjestHEAD)
2. Hook the SPRING(HeadAdjust).
3. Perform the print head x and tilt

Lever(Adjest) BOX(lever)
alignment with the procedure below.
Print head x alignment:

To move the print head to the rear side,
clockwise turn the PIN(AdjestHEAD)
inserted into the x alignment hole. One
turn moves the print head by 0.1 mm.
To move the print head to the front side,
counterclockwise turn the
PIN(AdjestHEAD).
Print head tilt alignment:

To tilt the print head clockwise,
inserted into the tilt alignment hole. One
turn tilts the print head by 0.1 mm.
To tilt the print head counterclockwise,
PIN(AdjestHEAD). Position to hook SPRING(HeadALdjust)
(for front-side print heads)
4. Print the print head diagnostic plots and
assess the print head alignment quality.
Repeat this procedure until the plots
show the good quality.
5. When the plots show the good quality,

fully tighten the four print head fixing
screws.
6. Remove the tools installed at the steps

1 and 2.
7-45
7.12.3 Print Head X and Tilt Alignments at Rear Side
1. Install BOX(lever), PIN(HeadHolder)L, PIN(HeadHolder)L

Lever(Adjust), and PIN(AdjustHEAD)s.
PIN(AdjestHEAD)
PIN(AdjestHEAD)
(Set for tilt alignment)
2. Hook the SPRING(HeadAdjust).
3. Perform the print head x and tilt

alignment with the procedure below. Lever(Adjest) BOX(lever)
Print head x alignment:

To move the print head to the rear side,
inserted into the x alignment hole. One
turn moves the print head by 0.1 mm.
To move the print head to the front side,
PIN(AdjestHEAD).
Print head tilt alignment:

To tilt the print head clockwise,
inserted into the tilt alignment hole. One
turn tilts the print head by 0.1 mm.
To tilt the print head counterclockwise,
PIN(AdjestHEAD). Position to hook SPRING(HeadAdjust)
(for rear-side print heads)
4. Print the print head diagnostic plots and
assess the print head alignment quality.
Repeat this procedure until the plots
show the good quality (see 7.12.1).
5. When the plots show the good quality,

fully tighten the four print head fixing
screws.
6. Remove the tools installed at the steps

1 and 2.
7-46
7.13 Adjusting the Height of the Gap Sensor

The procedure below is required when:
- The gap sensor or the carriage height upper limit sensor (Carriage Up Sensor) was
replaced; or
- They were removed or fixed.
Perform the operations below to detect the horizontal gap accurately between the carriage
and the media.
- Adjusting the gap sensor position
- Storing the gap sensor adjustment value in the Printer
<Gap sensor position>
<Gap sensor adjustment jig>
Jig name External view
Gap sensor height measurement Shim(HeadBase-HV)
shim
Thickness sensor height BLOCK(T-SensorJigPT)20.4
adjustment jig
Placed in parallel with the plate.
7-47
1. Rotate the pressure control knob

clockwise to be at the OPEN position,
and lift the pressure roller.
2. Remove the media from the printer.
3. Close the front cover.
4. Ensure that the pressure control knob is

set to OPEN, and turn the power on.
Note
Be sure to set the pressure control knob
to OPEN. If the power is turned on
without the pressure control knob to
OPEN, the gap sensor may be damaged.
5. When the operation panel displays

LOAD MEDIA, select #MEASURE
PLATEN H on the operation panel to
measure the platen height.
(1) Press the MENU button to display

PH.MAIN menu.
(2) Enter the maintenance mode. (See

3.2 Operation in Maintenance
Mode.)
(3) Hold down the MENU button until PRINTER SETUP

the ADJUST menu appears.
ADJUST HEATER
(4) Press the Left button to enter the #TEST PRINTS

ADJUST menu.
>NOZZLE PRINT
(5) Hold down the Down button until #MEASURE PLATEN H

the #MEASURE PLATEN H menu
appears. >
(6) Press the OK button. #MEASURE PLATEN H

*OK?
(7) Press the OK button.

CARRIAGE MOVING
PLEASE WAIT
7-48
The carriage moves to the platen height detection position.
OPEN COVER
TO ALIGN PLATEN H
6. Switch the pressure control knob to

Normal.
7. Remove the Cover(CarriageUnder) and

the Cover(CarriageUpper). Cover(CarriageUpper)
8. Remove the Cover(Pulley) and two

screws.
Cover(Pulley)
9. Open the cover, and loosen three fixing

screws of the cap sensor.
7-49
10. Place the Shim(HeadBase-HV)s

8.0-mm angular cutout, shown in the
figure below, on the adjustment position
(convex part) at the bottom of the
carriage.
8.0-mm angular cutout
Shim(HeadBase-HV)
11. Lower the carriage until it comes into

contact with the shim while turning the
pulley counterclockwise by hand.
Cautions
In this step, contact means that the shim
slightly rubs the carriage adjustment
position (convex part).
12. Remove the Shim(HeadBase-HV), then

place the BLOCK(T-SensorJigPT)20.4
as shown in the figure (securely press it
against the carriages side face.
BLOCK(T-SensorJigPT)20.4
13. Tighten three fixing screws of the gap

sensor.
7-50
14. Remove the adjustment jig.
15. Return the covers removed for CLOSE COVER

adjustment to their original positions.
16. Close the front cover. CARRIAGE MOVING

PLEASE WAIT
The platen height measurement operation has been then completed.

The gap sensors adjustment value is automatically stored in the Printer.
MEASURE PLATEN H
H:XX.Xmm TH:YYYY
XX, X: Height of platen

YYYY: Gap threshold
17. Measure the wiping unit height (see 7.4
Positioning the Wiping Unit).
7-51
7.14 Correcting the Head Position (Main Scanning

Direction)
Print a ADJUST PH POS adjustment pattern and correct each head position
based on the black in the main scanning direction.
<Lower-level menus>
Y, Lm, C, Gy, K, Lc, M, Lg
<Parameter>
XX (-32 to +31)
Units:1 dot
<Correction procedure>

ADJUST HEATER

ADJUST menu.
>ADJUST
3. Press the OK button, and select an

adjustment pattern.
4. Hold down the Down button until the

#TEST PRINTS
>ADJUST PH POS menu appears.
>ADJUST PH POS

#TEST PRINTS
*OK?

#TEST PRINTS
*EXECUTING
7. Judge the printing results.

For each color, enter the number of the
printing result with the straightest line as
the correction value.
7-52
.................
-32 -31 -30 -29 -4 -3 -2 -1
.................
+0 +1 +2 +3 +28 +29 +30 +31
7-53

Operation in Maintenance Mode.)

PRINTER SETUP
ADJUST HEATER
10. Press the Left button to enter the #PH TO PH VAL

ADJUST menu.
#K >00
11. Press the Down button to display the

#PH TO PH VAL menu, and press the
OK button.
12. Press the Up and Down buttons to #PH TO PH VAL

select an ink color.
#Gy >+00
13. Press the OK button. #PH TO PH VAL

In this step, determine the polarity (+/-)
of the correction value, and enter the #Gy *+00
numeric value that is assigned to the
most appropriate one of the left and
right position correction patterns.
14. Press the OK button to decide the #PH TO PH VAL

entered value.
#Gy >+00
15. Press the Left button to return to the #PH TO PH VAL

higher-level menu.
#K >+00
7-54
7.15 Correcting the Right and Left Print Head

Positions
Print the adjustment pattern, and adjust each print heads print positions in L row and R
row.
<Lower-level menus>
<Parameters>
XX (-32 to +31)
Units:1 dot


ADJUST HEATER

ADJUST menu.
>NOZZLE PRINT
4. Press the OK button and select the

adjustment pattern.
5. Hold down the Down button until the #TEST PRINTS

>ADJUST PH R/L menu appears.
>ADJUST PH R/L

*OK?

*EXECUTING
8. Check the printout.

For each color, select the printout
showing the straightest line, and enter
its number as the adjustment value.
7-55
................................
-32 -31 -30 -29 -4 -3 -2 -1
................................
+0 +1 +2 +3 +28 +29 +30 +31
7-56

#PH R/L ADJ VAL
#PH R/L ADJ VAL menu, and press the
OK button. #K >+00
10. Press the Up and Down buttons to #PH R/L ADJ VAL
select an ink color.
#Gy >+00
11. Press the OK button. #PH R/L ADJ VAL

In this step, determine the polarity (+/-)
of the correction value, and enter the #Gy *+00
numeric value that is assigned to the
most appropriate one of the left and
right position correction patterns.
12. Press the OK button to decide the #PH R/L ADJ VAL
entered value.
#Gy >+00
13. Press the Left button to return to the #PH R/L ADJ VAL
higher-level menu.
#K >+00
7-57
7.16 Correcting the Bidirectional Print Positions

(Row L)
Print out the adjustment pattern, and correct the bidirectional print positions of each head
(row L).
Note
The bidirectional print position differs depending on the two factors: print mode and image
improve mode.
CHECK BIDIR
Print mode Image improve mode
BIDIR ADJ
1 NORMAL1, NORMAL 2, HIGH, LESS SPRAY
2 QUALITY, DENSITY2 LOW,
3 DRAFT1 MEDIUM,
HIGH, FINE GRAIN
4 FINEDRAFT
<Lower-level menus>
<Parameter>
XX (-32 to +31)
Units:1 dot

ADJUST HEATER

ADJUST menu.
>ADJUST
3. Press the OK button, and select an
adjustment pattern.
Note
From the next step, the procedure is
explained taking CHECK BIDIR1 as
example.
7-58

CHECK BIDIR1 menu appears.
>CHECK BIDIR1

*OK?

*EXECUTING

If the printing results are good, this
procedure is completed.
Otherwise, follow the procedure below
to correct the values.
<NG> <OK>
7-59


ADJUST HEATER

ADJUST menu.
>NOZZLE PRINT
11. Press the Down button to display one of #BIDIR ADV 1L CCC
the following messages.
>XX:YY Z
When correcting the row L:
#BIDIR ADV 1 L
When correcting the row R:
#BIDIR ADV 1 R
XX: Media number

Z: Registration mark
CCC: Ink color or place
YY: Bidirectional correction set value
12. Press the OK button, move the cursor to #BIDIR ADV 1L CCC
XX, and select the media number.
>XX:YY Z
Caution
The bidirectional positions vary
depending on the thickness of media. Be
sure to select media.
13. Move the cursor to CCC, and select the

ink color. #BIDIR ADV 1L CCC
>XX:YY Z
14. Move the cursor to YY, and specify the #BIDIR ADV 1L CCC
correction value.
>XX:YY Z
15. Press the OK button to decide the
entered value.
16. Press the Left button to return to the

higher-level menu.
7-60
7.17 Correcting the Bidirectional Print Positions

(Row R)
Print out the adjustment pattern, and correct the bidirectional print positions of each head
(row R). For the procedure, see 7.16 Correcting the Bidirectional Print Positions (Row
L).
7-61
7.18 Correcting the Media Advance Value

Print the adjustment value, and adjust the initial media advance value for each media
applied.
<Parameters>
97.0 to 106
Caution
For the adjustment, set the media, heater temperature, and take-up condition to the ones
same as at your actual operation.
<Media advance adjustment pattern>

The following shows the basic media advance adjustment patterns.

2. At installing media, select SELECT

MEDIA and specify the type of the
applied media.
7-62
3. Enter the MEDIA ADV PRINT menu,

Pattern printing with correction value 99.00%
and select ROUGH(NORMAL).
4. Select the correction value with which

the even pattern is printed while a white (2)
or black line is not found in the part on
the side of line (1) in area (2) as shown
in the figure. (1)
Combine Bk and C.
Enlarged view of area (2)
5. Select the MEDIA ADV VALUE menu,

and enter the correction value that was
selected in step 4.
6. Enter the MEDIA ADV PRINT menu, Pattern printing with correction value (current set value -0.12%)
and select DETAIL for printing.
Pattern printing with correction value (current set value -0.06%)
7. Select the correction value in the same
way as for the step above. Pattern printing with correction value (current set value)
8. Select the MEDIA ADV VALUE menu, Pattern printing with correction value (current set value +0.06%)
and enter the correction value that was

selected in step 7. Pattern printing with correction value (current set value +0.12%)
7-63
7.19 Correcting the Edge Sensor Position

Print out the edge sensor adjustment pattern, and correct the edge sensor position. After
printing, measure each distance and specify the parameter.
<Parameters>
5 mm, 0.1 mm/Step


ADJUST HEATER
3. Press the Left button to enter the

#TEST PRINTS
ADJUST menu.
>NOZZLE PRINT

>CHECK EDGE SENSOR menu
appears. >CHECK EDGE SENSOR

*OK?

*EXECUTING
7-64
Measure the margin of the printing

result with a square, and obtain an error
between the measured margin and the
value (15 mm) shown in the 508 nozzles
specifications.
(Blank by the even number
of heads)
If the printing results are good, this 15 mm
procedure is completed.
Otherwise, follow the procedure below
to correct the value.
508 nozzles
(All nozzles)
9. Press the Left button to enter the #EDGE SENSOR ADJ VAL
ADJUST menu.
>Y.Ymm

#EDGE SENSOR ADJ VAL menu, and
press the OK button.
11. Based on the printed sensor adjustment #EDGE SENSOR ADJ VAL
pattern, enter the correction value of the
edge sensor position. >+Y.Ymm
12. Press the OK button to decide the #EDGE SENSOR ADJ VAL
entered value.
>+0.0mm
13. Press the Left button to return to the

higher-level menu.
7-65
7.20 Adjusting the Roll Feed and Take-up Reel Units

After replacing the roll feed and take-up reel units, adjust the levelness and verticality of
the scroller.
<Roll feed and take-up reel unit adjustment tool>
Scroller height adjustment tool SIIT(D)
Chain
S-shaped hook
S-shaped hook
7-66
7.20.1 Adjusting the Roll Feed and Take-up Reel Units (IP-7900)
7.20.1.1 Adjusting the Levelness
1. Measure the distance from the BEAM to

the scroller at the capping unit side and
wiping unit side respectively.
Capping unit side Wiping unit side
2. Loosen the four screws securing the

Scroller-Support at the wipe side, move
the unit back and forth to adjust it to the
distance at the capping unit side.
3. Tighten the screws.
7-67
7.20.1.2 Adjusting the Verticality

To straighten the media feed direction, parallelize the take-up scroller to the
FRONT-PG-ASSY(104) by adjusting the take-up scroller height.
<Adjustment procedure>
1. Twist the scroller height adjustment tool

SIIT(D)s chain around the takeup-side
scroller. Then fix the chain by hooking
one s-shaped hook on the other.
2. Hook the scroller height adjustment tool

SIIT(D) tops L-shaped part on the
platens media supply side.
3. In the capping unit side, measure the

distance between the platens media
supply side and the take-up scroller.
4. In the wiping unit side, measure the

distance between the platens media
supply side and the take-up scroller.
7-68
5. Loosen the two fixing screws at the side

face of the Scroller-Support(TakeUp).
Scroller-Support(TakeUp)
6. By rotating the height adjustment bolt,

adjust take-up scrollers wiping unit side
height to be the same as its capping unit Height adjustment bolt
side height.
7. After adjustment, tighten the loosened

screws.
7-69
7.20.2 Adjusting the Roll Feed and Take-up Reel Units (IP-7700)
7.20.2.1 Straightening media feed direction by adjusting take-up scroller height

(IP-7700-00/01)
To straighten the media feed direction, parallelize the paper tube to the
FRONT-PG-ASSY(74) by adjusting the paper tube height.
1. Set the paper tube with the scroller

flange to the roll feed unit.

SIIT(D)s chain around the takeup-side
scrollers paper tube. Then fix the chain
by hooking one s-shaped hook on the
other.
Scroller height adjustment tool

SIIT(D)
3. In the capping unit side, hook the

L-formed part of the scroller height
adjustment tool SIIT(D)s top on the
platens groove for media edge guard at
your side.
7-70
4. Measure the distance between the

platens media inlet side in the capping
unit side and the paper tube.
5. Move the scroller height adjustment tool

SIIT(D) to the wiping unit side.
6. As in the capping unit side, also

measure the distance between the
platens media inlet side in the wiping
unit side and the paper tube.
7. Loosen the four fixing screws at the

right and left side faces of the
BRACKET(TaUp-WipeSide).
7-71
8. By rotating the height adjustment bolt, Adjustment bolt

align the scroller flanges height to the
one in the capping unit side.
Note that the difference between in the

wiping unit side and in the capping unit
side must be within 1mm.
9. After the adjustment, tighten the two

screws loosened at the step 7.
10. Repeat the adjustment above also in

the media supply side.
(1) In the supply-side capping unit side,

hook the L-formed part of the
scroller height adjustment tool
SIIT(D)s top on the platens groove
for Y rail-side media edge guard.
Then measure the distance to the
supply-side paper tube.
(2) Set the Scroller height adjustment

tool SIIT(D) to the wiping unit side,
and measure the distance. Adjust
so that the paper tube is parallel.
Fixing screw
11. Adjust the tension bar guides height
with the same procedure above.
(1) Set the tension bar to the tension

bar guide.
(2) Loosen the

TensionBar-Guide(TU)HV74s fixing
screw, and adjust so that the right
and left heights are the same.
Adjustment bolt
TensionBar-Guide(TU)HV74
7-72
12. Align the edges of the

Bracket(TaUp-CapSide) and
BRACKET(FEED-CapSide).
(1) Set the steal measure to the inside

of the BRACKET(TaUp-CapSide). BRACKET(TaUp-CapSide)
(2) Adjust the

BRACKET(FEED-CapSide)
position so that its side face is an
extension of the steal measure.
Note
Be sure to measure the part shown in the
figure.
BRACKET(FEED-CapSide) Adjustment point
7-73
7.20.2.2 Straightening media feed direction by adjusting take-up scroller height

(IP-7700-02/03/20/21)
To straightening the media feed direction, parallelize the paper tube to the
FRONT-PG-ASSY(74) by adjusting the paper tube height.
1. Install the paper tube with the scroller

flanges to the take-up reel unit.

SIIT(D)s chain around the capping unit
side paper tube. Then fix the chain by
hooking one s-shaped hook on the
other.
3. In the capping unit side, hook the

L-formed part of the scroller height
adjustment tool SIIT(D)s top on the
platens groove for the media edge
guard at your side.
Note
Be sure to set the scroller height
adjustment tool SIIT(D)s scale part
vertically to the cutter groove.
4. In the capping unit side, measure the

distance below:
From: Platens cutter groove
To: Paper tube
BRACKETT(GUIDE-BAR)
5. Move the scroller height adjustment tool
SIIT(D) to the wiping unit side.
6. In the wiping unit side, measure the

distance below:
From: Platens cutter groove
To: Paper tube
7. Loosen the four screws fixing the

BRACKET(GUIDE-BAR). Then rotate
the adjustment bolt so that the
distances measured at the steps 4 and
6 are consistent.
8. Tighten the four screws fixing the Adjustment bolt

BRACKET(GUIDE-BAR).
7.20.3 Adjusting the Height of the Peel Roller
7-74
1. In the same way as for the vertical

adjustment, make a loop with the end of
a string, and pass it through the peel
roller.
2. In the wiping unit side, insert the scroller

height adjustment tool SIIT(D)s top into
the platens groove for the Y rail-side
media edge guard.
3. Read the scroller height adjustment tool

SIIT(D)s values.
4. Similarly with the operation in the wiping

unit side, in the capping unit side, insert
the scroller height adjustment SIIT(D)s
top into the platens groove for the Y
rail-side media edge guard.
7-75
5. In the same way as for the wiping unit

side, measure the distance in the Scroller height adjustment tool SIIT(D)
capping unit side.
6. Loosen four height fixing screws of the

peel roller.
7. Use the height adjustment bolt to adjust

so that the wiping unit side is level with
the capping unit side. Then tighten the
fixing screws.
7-76
7.21 Adjusting the Feed and Take-up Sensors

When the media supply sensor and take-up sensor are replaced, adjust the light sensors
below.
Sensors in the printers roll feed unit side
- Two light-emitting units on the drive units side face
- Two light-receiving units on the beam.
Sensors in the printers take-up reel unit side
- One light-emitting units on the beam
- Two light-receiving unit on the drive units side face
7-77
7.21.1 Adjusting the Media End Sensor
Adjust the supply-side media end sensors light-emitting direction.
Note
Without this adjustment, the Printer cannot detect the media presence. As a result,
unrolling roller will not operate correctly.
1. Remove the cover on the media feed

sensors light emitting unit.
2. Unplug the connector at the supply-side

media slack sendors light-emitting unit
(lower side).
3. At the supply-side media end sensor,

turn the light-emitting units direction Light-emitting units direction
adjustment screw (pan-head machine adjustment screw at the
screw M3), and adjust the sensors suppy-side media end sensor,
upper and lower light-receiving units
position so that they receive the light, Supply-side media end
that is, the light-receiving units LED is sensors light-emitting unit
solid red.
4. Tighten the adjustment screw gradually Supply-side media slack

until the supply-side media slack sensor sensors light-emitting unit
(lower side) does not receive light.
5. Further tighten the adjustment screw by

one turn.
Supply-side media end sensors

light-receiving unit
(The LED is ON when the step 4
is completed.)
Supply-side media slack

sensors light-receiving unit
(The LED is OFF when the step
4 is completed.)
7-78
6. Check that the supply-side media end

sensor (upper side) is receives light,
and return the connector removed at the
step 2 to its original position.
7. Return the cover to its original position.
7-79
7.21.2 Adjusting the Media Slack Sensor
Adjust the supply-side media slack sensors light emitting direction.
Note
Without this adjustment, the Printer cannot detect the media presence. As a result,
unrolling roller will not operate correctly.
1. Remove the cover on the media feed

sensors light emitting unit.
2. Unplug the connector at the supply-side

media end sendors light-emitting unit
(upper side).
3. At the supply-side media slack sensor,

turn the light-emitting units direction
adjustment screw (pan-head machine
screw M3), and adjust the sensors
upper and lower light-receiving units
position so that they receive the light,
that is, the light-receiving units LED is Supply-side media end sensors
solid red. light-emitting unit
Supply-side media slack sensors

4. Tighten the adjustment screw gradually
light-emitting unit
until the supply-side media end sensor
(upper side) does not receive light. Light-emitting units direction
adjustment screw at the supply-side
media slack sensor,
5. Further tighten the adjustment screw by

one turn.
Supply-side media end sensors
(The LED is OFF when the step 4 is
completed.)
Supply-side media slack sensors

(The LED is ON when the step 4 is
completed.)
7-80
6. Check that the supply-side media slack

sensor (lower side) receives light, and
return the connector removed at the
step 2 to its original position.
7-81
7.21.3 Adjusting the Take-up Sensor (Upper and Lower Limits)
Takeup-side media slack sensor detects the media slack at the high limit position and the
low limit position. Adjust the sensors light-receiving direction with the procedure below.
Note
Without this adjustment, the take-up reel unit will not operate normally.
1. Remove the cover of the light-receiving

unit in the take-up sensor.
2. Loosen the adjustment screw of the

light-receiving unit.
3. Tighten the adjustment screw by

degrees, and further tighten it by one
turn when the sensor installing plate has
started moving.
4. Install the take-up sensor

(light-emission side) at the bottom of the
installation hole.
5. On the operation panel, select

MAINTENANCE MODE -> SENSORS
-> TUR SENSORS, and check that the
upper- and lower-limit sensors are
receiving light.
6. If the light is not received, tighten the

adjusting screw gradually until the light
is received.
7. Install the light-emitting unit at the top.
Light-receiving unit of take-up

upper-limit sensor
Adjustment screw
Light-receiving unit of take-up

lower-limit sensor
7-82
8. On the operation panel, select

MAINTENANCE MODE -> SENSORS,
and check that the upper- and
lower-limit sensors are receiving light.
9. If the light is not received, tighten the

adjusting screw gradually until the light
is received.
10. Repeat the steps 4 to 9, and adjust so

that the upper- and lower-limit sensors
can receive light even if the
light-emitting unit is installed at either of
the top or bottom.
11. Install the light-emitting unit at the

second position from the top.
Take-up sensor (Light-emission side)
Caution
The user does not need to adjust the upper and lower adjustment screws of the sensor
installing plate.
7-83
7.22 Adjusting the height of Shield(Air-L) and

Shield(Air-R)
Adjust the distances below to be 2mm:
- From platens top face to Shield(Air-L)s tip
- From platens top face to Shield(Air-R)s tip.
2 mm 2 mm

the Cover(CarriageUpper). Cover(CarriageUpper)
2. Slide the carriage to the maintenance

position, and turn off the printer with the
breaker.
3. Manually move the carriage so that the

carriages left side face is on the platen
fixing screws in the second row from the
capping unit side. Capping unit side
Align the carriages left side face with

the platen fixing screws in the second
row from the capping side.
7-84
4. Loosen the two screws fixing the

Shield(Air-L), and remove the
Shield(Air-L).
Note
The Shield(Air-L) is fixed at the two
screws avoiding the carriage height
sensor. One of the two is fixed with the
Shield(Air-L)s claw. So remove the screw
by pressing the claw with an elongated
tool such as screwdriver.
Shield(Air-L)
Remove the screw pressing the

claw with an elongated screwdriver.
5. With the Shim(HeadBase-HV), set the

distance between the head base and
the platen to 8 mm.
7-85
6. Place the Shield(Air-L) to the original

position, adjust the height with the
Tool(ShieldAir)U00113267200, and fix it
with the screws.
With the steps 1 to 6, the distance from

the platens top face to the Tool(ShieldAir)
Shield(Air-L)s tip becomes 2 mm. U00113267200
Shield(Air-L)
7. Samely as the step above, move the

carriage so that the carriages right side
face is on the platen fixing screws in the
second row from the capping unit side.
8. Loosen the three screws fixing the

Shield(Air-R). Then place the
Shield(Air-R) on the Tool(ShieldAir), and
fix it.
Shield(Air-R)
Tool(ShieldAir)
With the steps 7 to 8, the distance from

the platens top face to the
Shield(Air-R)s tip becomes 2mm.
2mm 2mm
7-86
7.23 Increasing Pinch-Roller-Assys Pressure

The main solution to increase the Pinch-Roller-Assys pressure is the Pinch-Rollers
replacement from at 8.0 to at 9.0 (Pinch-Roller(D9-60)).
If, even after the replacement above, the pressure is not

sufficient to advance media, add shims to the
Pinch-Roller-Assy with the procedure below.
With this procedure, the Pinch-Rollers tip is lowered by
approx. 0.7 mm. Pinch-Roller
For the shims, apply the PLATEN-SHIM-SETs
SHIM(P3B)0.2.
PLATEN-SHIM-SET:
U00113107400
(30pcs) (15pcs)
<Procedure to validate the Pinch-Roller-Assys pressure>
1. By rotating the pressure control knob SHIM(M4)0.2 SHIM(P3B)0.2

counterclockwise, lower the pressure (30pcs) (15pcs)
roller.
2.
Pinch-Arm-Guard(104)/
Pinch-Arm-Guard(74)
7-87
3. With a gap gauge, measure the gap

shown in the right figure.
<Specification>
Gap 0.3 mm:
Sufficient. No calibration is required.
Gap < 0.3 mm:
Insufficient. The pressures further
calibration is required.
4. If the gap is less than 0.3 mm, calibrate

the gap with the procedure below.
(1) Loosen the two screws shown in the

right figure.
(2) With pressing the Pinch-Roller-Assy

upward, tighten the two screws
above.
5. If, with the step 4 performed, the gap is

still less than 0.3 mm, add shims with
the procedure explained below. Pinch-Roller-Assy
7-88
<Procedure to add shims>
1. Remove the two springs.
2. By removing the two screws, loosen the

Pinch-Roller-Assy.
3. Insert the SHIM(P3B)0.2 into the gap

between Y rail and the loosen
Pinch-Roller-Assy.
Y rail
SHIM(P3B)0.2s setting position

on the Pinch-Roller-Assy
Pinch-Roller-Assy
SHIM(P3B)0.2s installation position on the Pinch-Roller-Assy
7-89
4. Temporarily fix the Pinch-Roller-Assy at

the original position with the two screws
so that the SHIM(P3B)0.2 would not
drop.
5. Adjust the SHIM(P3B)0.2 position to be

at the one shown in the right figure.
To adjust the SHIM(P3B)0.2 position,

you are recommended to insert your
finger from the Printers take-up side,
and to pull the SHIM(P3B)0.2.
6. Fix the two springs.
7. Repeat the steps 1 to 7 for each

Pinch-Roller-Assy requiring the
calibration.
8.
Install the the Pinch-Arm-Guard(104).
nstall the Pinch-Arm-Guard(74).
7-90
7.24 Greasing up Carriage Elevating System

Cover(CarriageUpper) (see section Cover(CarriageUpper)
6.7).
2. Remove the Cover(Pulley) with two

screws.
Cover(Pulley)
3. With HEADBASE(UPDN)GREASE,
grease up the bottom half of the
Screw(Lead) carefully not to grease it
Screw(Lead)
excessively. The width of the greased
area is recommended to be 3 mm.
Screw(Lead)s
Area to be greased bottom half
The recommended
greased area width is
approximately 3 mm.
7-91
4. Enter the maintenance mode. (see 3.2

5. Hold down the MENU button until

ADJUST menu appears. PRINTER SETUP
ADJUST HEATER
6. By pressing the Left button, enter the

#TEST PRINTS
ADJUST menu.
>NOZZLE PRINT
7. By pressing the Down button, display

#MOVE CARRIAGE. #MOVE CARRIAGE
>HOME
9. By pressing the Down button, select #MOVE CARRIAGE

>MAINTENANCE. Then press the OK
button to move the carriage to the >MAINTENANCE
maintenance area.
11. Manually rotate the pulley to elevate

and lower the carriage five times.
12. Close the front cover. CARRIAGE MOVING

PLEASE WAIT
13. Install the Cover(Pulley).
14. Install the Cover(CarriageUnder) and

Cover(CarriageUpper).
7-92
7.25 Correcting the wiping Position

(for all printers except the IP-7900-22/23)
Correct the position of the head and the wiping unit.
<Parameter>
5 mm, 0.1 mm increment
+: Moves the carriage toward the wiping unit.
: Moves the carriage toward the capping unit
1. Remove the cover.
Cover


ADJUST HEATER

ADJUST menu.
>NOZZLE PRINT
5. Press the Down button to display #MOVE CARRIAGE

#MOVE CARRIAGE, and then press
the OK button. >Y.Ymm
Using #MOVE CARRIAGE, move the

#MOVE CARRIAGE
carriage to the wipe side.
>WIPE
7-93
6. Check the height of the wiping unit. If

necessary, adjust its height referring to
7.5 Positioning the Wiping Unit.
Note
The distances between the eight wiper
blade tips and the heads must be equal
(the blades must be parallel).
7. Press the Left button to return.
8. Press the MENU button until the

MOTORS menu appears. TEST PRN SENSORS
MOTORS

#MEDIA HEATER
MOTORS menu.
>
10. Press the Down button to display #W IPE MOTOR

#WIPE MOTOR, and then press the OK
button. >SLOW
11. Make the wipe motor rotate with SLOW.
12. Confirm that the wiper blades are

positioned at the center of each head.
When the nozzle guard heads are
combined with wiper blades (type S),
the blades must be positioned at the
concave nozzle surface of the heads.
Align the position of the blade with the concave nozzle surface of the head.
Note
If multiple nozzle guard heads have been replaced, adjust them visually so that the centers
of the concave nozzle surfaces and the centers of the blades are almost parallel.
7-94
13. If the positions are not correct, enter the

ADJUST menu. PRINTER SETUP
ADJUST HEATER
#TEST PRINTS
>NOZZLE PRINT
14. Press the Down button to display #W IPE POSITION

#WIPE POSITION, and then press the
OK button. >Y.Ymm
Press the Up, Down, Right, and Left buttons, and enter the correction value.
(-): Capping unit side
(+): Wiping unit side
<Adjustment value>
Units: mm
Range: -5.0 to +5.0
15. Move the carriage again using #MOVE

CARRIAGE as in step 5, and check the
positions.
16. If the positions are not correct, repeat

steps 13 to 15.
17. When the adjustment is complete, move #MOVE CARRIAGE

the carriage to the home position.
>HOME
7-95
7.26 Correcting the Wiping Position (for the

IP-7900-22/23)
Correct the wiping position to the head and the wiping unit.
1. Remove the cover.
Cover


ADJUST HEATER

ADJUST menu.
>NOZZLE PRINT
5. Press the Down button to display #W IPING POS ADJUST

#WIPING POS ADJUST, and then
press the OK button. >

#W IPING POS ADJUST
*OK?
(The carriage moves to the wipe position.) CARRIAGE MOVING

PLEASE WAIT
7-96
7. Check that the slits on the wiper blade ADJ POS W/ R&L KEYS
extremities (thin parts) are positioned at
the center of the nozzle guards. xx.xmm OK/CANCEL
If the blades are not aligned, adjust their
position using the Right and Left buttons.
Each press on the Right or Left button
moves the carriage approximately 0.1
mm.
You may press the CANCEL button to

exit the wiping position adjustment
procedure and go directly to step 10.

Align the wiper blades so that their slits are
positioned at the center of the nozzle guards.
Note
Adjust the position so that the slits on the wiper blades of the heads at the front (Lc, Gy)
are approximately at the center of the nozzle guards.
8. When the position is correct, press the CARRIAGE MOVING

OK button.
PLEASE WAIT
(Slightly lower the carriage to make it
easier to check if the slits on the wiper
blade extremities (thin parts) are aligned
with the nozzle guards.)
7-97
9. If the position is correct, press the OK CONFIRM W IPING POS?

button.
OK/CANCEL
Or press the CANCEL button to adjust
the position again.
(In this case, return to step 7.)
(The carriage moves to the home

CARRIAGE MOVING
position.)
PLEASE WAIT
10. Return the cover to its original position. #W IPING POS ADJUST
>
7-98
7.27 Adjusting the SWITCH(WIPE),H3 Position
1. Restart the Printer and check that all

SPONGE WIPERS are positioned at
the center of the concave parts of the
WIPER SPONGES on the WIPE
LOWER ASSY.
WIPE LOWER ASSY
SPONGE WIPER
WIPER SPONGE
Printer front side Printer rear side
2. Adjust the SWITCH(WIPE),H3 position

following the procedure below if a
SPONGE WIPER comes above or
contacts a WIPER SPONGE as shown
below.
A B
Printer front side Printer rear side Printer front side Printer rear side
7-99
(1) Remove the COVER (HV) LST. SENSOR COVER

(2) Remove the SENSOR COVER.
(3) Loosen the screw securing the

SWITCH(WIPE),H3, move the
SWITCH(WIPE),H3 in the direction of
the arrow, and then secure the screw.
- In case of A
Move the SWITCH(WIPE),H3 in
the direction of the arrow A.
- In case of B
Move the SWITCH(WIPE),H3 in
the direction of the arrow B.
A B
(4) After the adjustment, restart the Printer

and check the position.
(5) If the SPONGE WIPERS are not in the
concave parts of the WIPER
SPONGES after the adjustment,
perform this procedure again.
3. After this adjustment is complete,

reinstall all the covers that have been
removed.
7-100
This chapter explains the following.
(a) Mechanical performance explanation on:

- Media feed system
- Carriage operation system
- Ink delivery system
(b) Performance explanation on:

- Electrical control system
- Engine controller firmware
8-1
8.1 Printer Performance Overview

The roll media installed on the Printer is advanced, with the grit roller, on the platen X
direction. The piezo-type print heads sliding on the platen in Y direction eject the color inks
so that the image is printed on the media. At the platen section, with the suction fan the
media is vacuumed to the platen and the gap between the media and print head is
maintained properly.
The print head is installed on the carriage, and the carriage, drivin via a SUS belt by the
carriage motor (DC servo motor), moves reciprocatingly in the Printers horizontal direction.
The print head position is detected using the linear scale, linear encoder and edge sensor.
The service station protects the print head surface by:
- Print head surface cleaning with the wiping unit
- Suction and capping operation with the capping unit
While printing, the service station performs cleaning operation pediodically at each
prescribed print distance.
After printing, the service station automatically performs capping operation at the capping
unit.
Ink is deilvered to the print head from the ink cartridge via the subcartridge.
The following components are installed: the preheater used to preheat media (on the media
supply side), the printheater to filtrate and cure ink (under the platen), and the afterheater to
dry ink (on the take-up side).
The media feed sensor and the paper discharge sensor are installed in the media feed
section and the paper discharge section respectively, and these sensors detect paper jams,
etc.
Y direction
Guide rail
Head
X direction
Afterheater
Peel roller
Media output Feed sensor

sensor
Printheater
Grit roller Preheater
Tension bar
Media
Figure 8.1 Outline Diagram of Printer Operation
8-2
8.2 Media Feed System

The media feed system consists of the units shown in the following mechanism diagrams.
<Mechanism diagram of media feed system: X-axis> (Sub scan)
Figure 8.2 Mechanism Diagram of Media Feed System (X-axis)
<Mechanism diagram of media feed system: Y-axis> (Main scan)
Figure 8.3 Mechanism Diagram of Media Feed System (Y-axis)
8-3
(1) Media feed unit
The media feed unit accommodates both the roll media feed and the cut-sheet media feed. The
media feed unit can be operated from the printer's rear side.
To supply the cut-sheet media, remove the roll media and set the cut-sheet media at the
guide line on the rear paper guide.
With the pressure control knob, the roller's grip pressure to media is set to LOW, MEDIUM,
HIGH, or OFF. When the pressure control knob is set to OFF, the grip pressure to media is
released. The grip pressure ON/OFF status is detected by the grip sensor. When the grip
pressure is set to OFF, no media is fed. So the printer operation is suspended as soon as
the grip sensor detects the grip pressure OFF status. When the grip sensor detects the grip
pressure ON status again, the detection is taken as the signal to perform the media
detection sequence. This sequence is required because the media may be changed during
the grip pressure OFF status.
The operation panel should be used to specify either roll media or cut-sheet media to be
fed. It should also be used to specify the media type.
The media feed sensor is a reflective photo sensor installed at the supply-side paper guide.
The sensor detects the media presence with the media rears reflection, and the engine
controller firmware identifies the media condition.
(2) Drive section
The drive section consists of the X motor (media feed motor), the grit roller, the pressure roller
and the Pressure control knob. The media feed motor is a DC servo motor used to deliver
media, controlled by the software servo control unit in the engine controller. Activating this
motor causes the grip roller to rotate, which delivers media gripped by the pressure roller. The
pressure roller is actuated or released with the pressure control knob.
(3) Platen and suction fans
When media is delivered to the platen, the suction fans absorb the media to the platen by
suctioning the air through holes on the platen, so that the media will not begin to float and come
in contact with the print head. Five suction fans are installed. Each of the five fans can be
driven independently based on the width of the media concerned. The suctioned air is expelled
from the bottom of the machine.
When media is delivered to the platen, the suction fans absorb the media to the platen by
suctioning the air through holes on the platen, so that the media will not begin to float and come
in contact with the print head. Four suction fans are installed. Each of the four fans can be
driven independently based on the width of the media concerned. The suctioned air is expelled
from the bottom of the machine.
8-4
(4) Paper guide and media output sensor
The paper guide is a guiding plate to output media. It is curved so that the media printed on the
platen is not folded. The media output sensor is a reflective photo sensor installed at the
takeup-side paper guide. The sensor detects the media presence with the media rears
reflection, and the engine controller firmware identifies the media condition.
(5) Interlock switch
The interlock switch is installed at the front cover, and detects the covers open or close status.
When the cover is opened, the interlock switch functions and forcibly turns off the carriage and
the other dangerous parts power.
(6) Take-up reel unit
The Printer allows lengthy printing, depending on the software application. When a lengthy
image is printed, the take-up reel unit is applied to take up the printout. The take-up reel unit
must be installed at the Printer installation.
The take-up reel unit comprises:
- Take-up side scroller motor

- Tension bar
- Tension bar guide
- Takeup-side media slack upper limit sensor
- Takeup-side media slack lower limit sensor
- Take-up scroller
At the Printer installation, a paper tube is installed on the take-up scroller. When another paper
tube is required, reuse the paper tube applied to the other roll media.On the scrollers paper
tube, attach the media edge with adhesive tape, then install the media so that it passes the
optical axis issued from the takeup-side media slack sensor.
When the media slackens with print operation, the takeup-side media slack upper limit sensors
optical path is interrupted and the firmware starts the take-up operation.
When the media slack decreases with the take-up opeation, the takeup-side media slack upper
limit sensors optical path is not interrupted and the firmware stops the take-up operation.
At operating the Printer without the take-up reel unit, place the tension bar on the take-up reel
units upper part.
(a) Outward/inward directions supported
Both outward and inward are accommodated for the scroller direction. The scroller direction
can be selected on any take-up modes. The scroller direction should be changed using a
take-up functional switch installed on the take-up reel unit. Only in slack winding mode, the
adjustment of the sensor arm position is required based on the direction - either inward or
outward - that is selected.
(b) ON/OFF
When you turn the take-up function switch to the center position, the take-up reel unit is turned
OFF.
8-5
8.3 Carriage Operation System

The carriage operation system consists of the following units.
(1) Carriage motor
The carriage motor is a DC servo motor positioned inside the left printer cover, used to
reciprocate the carriage and control its speed throughout the full range.
The linear encoder installed on the printer's Y rail detects the carriage's position and speed,
and controls the speed. (Ink firing timing is controlled with the linear encoder signals.)
(2) Carriage
The carriage is a printing unit installed on the printer's Y rail via bearing, driven by the carriage
motor via a steel belt. This unit is equipped with the carriage board, eight print heads, edge
sensor, linear encoder, carriage height sensor, media thickness sensor, and carriage up/down
motor, print head cooling fan, and gap sensor solenoid.
(3) Carriage board
HCB board is mounted on the carriage, which contains the functions below.
To relay the print data sent from the IPB board to the print head.
To control the sensors and actuators mounted on the carriage.
To generate the optimal print head drive voltage (for 16 channels) for each head's each
row.
(4) Edge sensor
Edge sensor is installed on the carriage's side face, which detects:
- the media presence on the platen.

- right and left of media
- front edge of media
Based on these data, IPB board's CPU detects the print start position and media slanting.
(5) Home position sensor
Home position sensor is a photo sensor positioned in the Y rail home position section of the
printer. Since the engine controller cannot identify the carriage position immediately after the
power is turned on, the home position sensor detects the initial position of the carriage by
shifting the carriage to the home position, which is the initial position when the power is turned
OFF after being in the ON state.
Home position sensor is a photo sensor positioned in the carriage. Since the engine controller
cannot identify the carriage position immediately after the power is turned on, the home
position sensor detects the initial position of the carriage by moving the carriage to the home
position, which is the position where the home position sensor turns OFF from the ON state.
8-6
(6) Linear encoder and linear scale
The linear encoder is a sensor installed on the carriages side face. At printing, the Printer
always needs to detect the carriages absolute position, so the linear scale is attached at the
carriages operation area.
The carriage position at the linear scale is sensed by the linear encoder. The linear encoder
generates A phase and B phase signals, and the two signals are misaligned by a quarter cycle.
By counting the pulses sensed by the linear encoder, the engine firmware controller always
identifies the carriages absolute position.
Besides, the signals detected by the linear encoder is applied for the Y motors servo control.
Based on this sensors output signal, the print heads ink ejection timing is generated.
(7) Carriage height upper limit sensor
Carriage height upper limit sensor is a U-shaped photo sensor mounted in the carriage, which
detects the upper limit position of the carriage's vertically movable part.
(8) Media thickness sensor
The media thickness sensor is a reflective photo sensor installed on the side of the carriage. It
reads the position of the media by moving the gap measuring part up and down to maintain the
clearance between the head and the media.
(9) Carriage up/down motor
A pulse motor that moves the carriage up and down. It moves the carriage up and down based
on values read by the carriage height sensor and the media thickness sensor.
(10) Print head cooling fan
The print head temperature is increased during the print operation. S the print head cooling fan
air-cools the print head. Three print head cooling fans are installed at the carriage cover.
(11) Gap sensor solenoid
The gap sensor solenoid is an actuator to raise or lower the part for measuring the height
between the media surface and the nozzle plate.
8-7
8.4 Ink Delivery System

As shown in the following figure, the ink system consists of the ink cartridges, ink box, ink
supply pump, ink supply tube, capping unit, wiping unit, carriage board (HCB1), IPB3
board, and ink system control firmware.
Figure 8.4 Ink System Outline Block Diagram
Figure 8.5 Conceptual Diagram of Ink System
8-8
(1) Head
The head used for this printer is driven by an electrostriction transducer. A pulse-like signal
voltage is applied to a piezo element to distort the element and change the cubic capacity of
the ink pressure chamber. As a result, ink is ejected.
The head used for this printer has 508 nozzles per color, and eight colors therefore eight heads
are lined up for concurrent performance to allow fast printing.
Driving frequency
The head is driven at 18.5 kHz per nozzle in standard mode.
Thermal control
Driving voltage is controlled on the temperature basis to maintain the proper viscosity
status of ink that varies depending on temperature.
Air damper
A damper is provided to alleviate the fluctuation of pressure in order to prevent ink inside
the tube from being moved by the accelerated carriage, and as a result, damaging head
meniscus.
Print head heater
The print head heater is installed in the print head. The heater is controlled by the engine
firmware based on the print head thermistor temperature so that the constant print head
temperature is maintained during the print operation.
(2) Ink cartridge
Ink is charged in a laminate film pack. Capacity is 1500 mL for each color. Packs should be
placed on the plastic ink tray before using. Sealed inside the tip of the pack (near the ink supply
section) is a memory chip to which various IDs were saved at the time of packing. Different logs
will be entered by the printer are.
Saved ID: Ink type ID (color)

Pack date
Log entered by the printer: Ink consumption
(3) Ink box
The ink box contains eight slots into which an ink cartridge is loaded. Slots accommodating
eight colors are provided at the right side of the printer. The ink box contains an ink needle and
an ink relay board, and incorporates a mechanism that prevents incorrect insertion of the ink
cartridge.
Mechanism to prevent incorrect insertion

To prevent incorrect insertion of the ink cartridge, the ink cartridge has a key that is
designated differently for each color, and the ink box has a slit on its inside corresponding
to a certain key. Thus, each ink cartridge can be inserted only into the specified slot.
Ink needle
By piercing the spout of the ink cartridge with a needle, ink will begin to flow from the pack
into the ink tube.
Ink relay board (PCB-ASSY-INK4)
The ink relay board is used to read/write from/to the memory inside the ink cartridge.
8-9
Ink box cover switch

The ink box cover switch is a micro switch positioned on the ink box covers inner side, and
detects the ink box covers open or close status. When this swich detects the cover close
status after the ink cartridge replacement, the ink cartridge replacement sequence starts.
(4) Ink supply tube
Ink in the ink cartridge loaded into this printer passes through the ink needle and the filter
supply pump, and is supplied to the head unit through the ink tube. The 20 micro filter that has
been installed immediately after the ink needle attachment traps the rubber residue generated
from the ink cartridge when the pack is punctured. When the ink cartridge is initially loaded, an
ink charging operation sends ink from each ink cartridge to each supply pump.
(5) Capping unit
Configuration
The capping unit is located on the printer's right side, and is driven by:
- two suction pump motors
- capping unit up/down motor
- four open air solenoids
- Capping unit sensor
The suction pumps rotate the pumps for ink suction. The capping unit up/down motor
vertically moves the capping unit.
Function
When the capping unit is at the carriage home position, it interlocks with the pump motor in
order to suck ink. It also protects the head surface by capping the head when it is at rest in
the carriage home position. Inside the rubber cap is a porous sheet, which prevents ink
from foaming up inside the cap when the ink should be being suctioned out, and clears ink
out at the dummy absorption operation.
Ink pump
For the ink pump, a rotary tube pump is adopted that suctions out the contents of a rubber
tube by wringing it. The ink pump operates the pump with a suction pump motor, and the
motor is used to rotate a cam roller to wring a rubber tube and suction out ink. Since the
tube pump constantly squashes the tube with the cam roller, ink cannot flow backwards.
Ink suction is performed for mono-color or eight colors at the same time by turning ON/OFF
the open air solenoid (to be described later). Waste ink suctioned by the pump section is
discharged into the waste ink bottle without further treatment.
Open air solenoid
DC solenoids are used for the open air solenoid. The solenoid's ON/OFF opens/closes the
orifice on the tip of a tube connected to cap rubber by using rubber attached to the tip of the
solenoid plunger. A spring is attached on the DC solenoid plunger, and its pressure is used
to close the orifice and retain the sealing. Four DC solenoids are used for the open air
solenoid, each of which controls the suction operation. When the ink suction operation
absorbs ink and alleviates pressure, the inside of the cap rubber is filled with ink. Then
removing (absorbing) the ink produces meniscus in the head nozzle. If this operation is
omitted, the meniscus is broken by the action to open the cap filled with ink. By turning ON
the open air solenoid and performing the suction operation (dummy absorption operation),
ink and air are sucked out of the cap, then the ink is removed and meniscus is produced.
8-10
(6) Wiping unit
Configuration
The wiping unit is located at the Printers left side, that is, the opposite side of the capping
unit. The wiper blade is used by attaching the urethane rubber to the chain.The chain is
rotated by the wiping unit so that the blades tip wipes the print head surface.
The rotation of the wiping motor, or stepping motor, is transmitted to the wiper, and the
wiper is rotated. The rotations direction does not change.
Function
The wiper blade wipes the surface of the head in order to prevent ink that is being ejected
from spraying in different directions. The pad is used to clean the wiper blade that has
wiped the head surface. The wipe-motor operation rotates the wiper blade.
(7) Waste ink bottle
The waste ink bottle is a high-density polyethylene (HDP E) bottle used to collect waste ink
suctioned by the pump. The maximum capacity of the bottle is approximately three liters.
8-11
8.5 Print-Related Functions

(1) Cleaning sequences
The printer contains the following cleaning sequences to ensure optimal printing. The cleaning
processes are performed mainly by the capping unit, wiping unit and ink delivery system
control firmware. Flushing is performed by the head unit and control firmware.
Manual cleaning
This sequence is activated by operating the menu of the operation panel. Use this
sequence when the nozzle that has dropped out has not been restored by the action of the
automatic cleaning process built into the printer.
Automatic cleaning
This sequence is activated automatically during printing.
Idle cleaning (Fillcap)
This sequence is activated automatically, when the printer is not used over the long term,
to maintain optimal printing condition for the next operation.
Interval, time required, and ink consumption
(For all printers except the IP-7900-22/23)
Time
Function Interval Ink consumption
required
Manual cleaning
Each operation 4.5 min. Approx. 2.1 ml /color
(normal)
Manual cleaning
(strong)
Auto cleaning At print start: Every 1554 scans
4.5 min. Approx. 2.1 ml /color
(Cleaning mode 1) At print end: Every 1665 scans
Fillcap is performed 72 hours after the
printer enters standby state, and then
Idle cleaning every 3 days. 0.12 min. Approx. 7.0 ml /color
The printer power should be kept on
for the fillcap operation.
8-12
(For the IP-7900-22/23)
Time
Function Interval Ink consumption
required
Manual cleaning
(normal)
Manual cleaning
(strong)
Print end
Print
Print mode or during
start
Auto cleaning print
(START & END) Max speed,
(DURING PRINT1) High speed, 14.0 m 15.0 m
(DURING PRINT2) Normal
High quality 10.5 m 11.3 m
Max quality 8.4 m 9.0 m
Print end
Print
Print mode or during
start
print
Auto cleaning Max speed,
(INK SAVE) High speed, 29.0 m 30.0 m
Normal
High quality 21.8 m 22.5 m
Max quality 17.4 m 18.0 m
Fillcap is performed 72 hours after the
printer enters standby state, and then
Idle cleaning every 3 days. 0.12 min. Approx. 7.0 ml /color
The printer power should be kept on
for the fillcap operation.
(2) Head driving voltage control
Print head drive voltage rank setting

To ensure the constant ink density and to stabilize the ink ejection, the print head drive
voltage rank is set up.
The print head drive voltage changes depending on the manufactured print heads
variation based on the variation of the manufacturing lot, material characteristics, and
production process. So the voltage rank is written on each print heads label at its
production line, and also stored in the print heads non-volatile memory.
When the print head is installed in the Printer, its drive voltage rank is automatically set up.
Temperature control
The ink viscosity increases at low temperature, and decreases at high temperature.At high
viscosity the energy to eject ink must be increased, on the contrary, at low viscosity the
required energy is decreased.
To control the ink ejection energy, the print head drive voltage changes with the digital
control system. In the system the print heads PZT element temperature is detected by a
thermistor. Then, based on the detected temperature and the print head drive voltage rank,
in the engine controllers firmware controls the prescribed drive voltage setting, and then
drives the print head.
The parameters for this temperature control is tabularized, and the table differs depending
on the ink color.
(3) Correction of bidirectional misalignment in the main scanning direction
This function corrects the ink spotting position at the bidirectional printing.
8-13
(4) Correction of distance between heads
This function corrects the ink spotting position's misalignment caused variation of head
installation positions or ink ejection speeds of the head by the head position variation or the
head's ink firing speed variation.
(5) Correction of edge sensor position
This function corrects the horizontal print start position on the media. With a software,
comparing with the specified value, this function corrects the individual Printer's variation.
(6) Correction of media advance
This function corrects the media advance variation. With a software the individual printer's
variation is corrected comparing with the specified value.
(7) Adjustment of dot positions in the subscanning direction
This function mechanically adjusts the position of each head in the media feed direction (by
adjusting screws) to adjust each head's ink spotting position.
(8) Adjustment of head inclination
This function mechanically adjusts the inclination of each head by rotating the head (using an
eccentric pin) to adjust each head's ink spotting position.
(9) Head R and L adjustment
This function adjusts ink firing timings on the row L and row R of each head.
8-14
8.6 Head driving principle

(1) Head structure
The ink driving section in the head consists of three parts, i.e., the cover plate (see figure A
below), actuator with pectinate grooves on PZT (see figure B below), and nozzle plate (see
figure C below).
Nozzle holes are in every two grooves of the nozzle plate, and ink is supplied only to grooves
with nozzle holes.
Two actuators having the configuration mentioned above are attached together so that cover
plates can be positioned outside.
Principle of operation
Electrodes are attached to both sides of the walls in the PZT groove. The electric potential of
electrodes on both sides of the groove with a nozzle is 0 V. On the other side, electrodes on the
opposite side of the walls are connected in order for the voltage to be applied to eject the ink.
When the voltage is applied to the electrodes of nozzles from which you want ink to be ejected,
the walls are distorted outward and the cubic capacity of the actuator is increased. When the
voltage returns to 0 V, the distortion of the walls is recovered, as is the cubic capacity of the
actuator. Ink is ejected due to this change in the cubic capacity of the actuator.
8-15
(2) Driving waveforms
At tickling operaion, the waveforms time width is shorter than at ejection operation.
1drop/dot
2drops/dot
3drops/dot
Tickling
8-16
8.7 Print Mode

Main print modes (Except for IP-7900-20/21/22/23 and IP-7700-20/21)
Resolution
(main scan/sub scan) Print Binary/ Driving
No. Print mode
Output path Variable bits frequency
Input [dpi]
[dpi]
1 DRAFT 1 720 x 360 720 x 360 4 Binary 18.5KHz
2 FINE DRAFT 1 540 x 540 540 x 540 6 Binary 13.8KHz
3 Normal 1 720 x 720 720 x 720 8 Binary 18.5KHz
4 High quality 720 x 720 720 x 720 16 Binary 18.5KHz
5 High density 2 720 x 720 720 x 720 16 Binary 18.5KHz
6 Normal 2 720 x 900 720 x 900 10 Binary 18.5KHz
(1) Draft 1 (720 x 360 dpi, 4-pass)
720dpi
Ejection in the row R

1 1
720dpi
Ejection in the row L
4 4
3 3
2 2 1Scan
1
1 1 2Scan
2
4 4
3 3Scan
3 3
4 4Scan
2 2
8-17
(2) Fine draft 1 (540 x 540 dpi, 6-pass)
540dpi
1 4 1 4 Ejection in the row R

540dpi
5 2 5 2 Ejection in the row L
6 3 6 3
1 4 1 4 1 1Scan
5 2 5 2 2 2Scan
6 3 6 3 3 3Scan
4 4Scan
5 5Scan
6 6Scan
8-18
(3) Normal 1 (720 x 720 dpi, 8-pass)
720dpi
1 5 1 5 Ejection in the row R

720dpi
6 2 6 2 Ejection in the row L
3 7 3 7
1 1Scan
8 4 8 4
2 2Scan
1 5 1 5
3 3Scan
6 2 6 2
4 4Scan
3 7 3 7
5 5Scan
8 4 8 4
6 6Scan
7 7Scan
8 8Scan
8-19
(4) High quality (720 x 720 dpi, 16-pass)
720dpi
1 9 5 13 1 9 5 13
720dpi
6 14 2 10 6 14 2 10
3 11 7 15 3 11 7 15
8 16 4 12 8 16 4 12
1 9 5 13 1 9 5 13
6 14 2 10 6 14 2 10
3 11 7 15 3 11 7 15
8 16 4 12 8 16 4 12
Ejection in the row L
1 1Scan 5 5Scan 9 9Scan 13 13Scan
8-20
(5) High density 2 (720 x 720 dpi, 16-pass)

Prints twice per dot.
720dpi
A E A E A E A E
720dpi
F B F B F B F B
C G C G C G C G
H D H D H D H D
A E A E A E A E
F B F B F B F B
C G C G C G C G
H D H D H D H D
A 1Scan, 5Scan Ejection in the row R
B 2Scan, 6Scan Ejection in the row L
C 3Scan, 7Scan
D 4Scan, 8Scan
E 9Scan, 13Scan
F 10Scan, 14Scan
G 11Scan, 15Scan
H 12Scan, 16Scan
8-21
(6) Normal 2 (720 x 900 dpi, 10-pass)
720dpi

1 6 1 6
900dpi
2 2 Ejection in the row L

7 7
3 8 3 8
1 1Scan
9 4 9 4
2 2Scan
5 10 5 10
3 3Scan
1 6 1 6
4 4Scan
7 2 7 2
5 5Scan
3 8 3 8
6 6Scan
9 4 9 4
7 7Scan
5 10 5 10
8 8Scan
9 9Scan
10 10Scan
8-22
8.8 Electrical Configuration

8.8.1 Overall Configuration
The following block diagram shows the overall electrical configuration of the printer.
Head Thermistor
DC24V DC38V Triac board Preheater

PSU PSU (PCB-ASSY-TRC2)
Sensor Carriage board Printheater
(PCB-ASSY-HCB1)
Fan
Afterheater
Actuator board
Motor (PCB-ASSY-ACT1)
PCB-ASSY-INK4 Ink cartridge(8)
Solenoid
PCB-ASSY-INK4 Subcartridge (8)
Sensor
Main board
USB (PCB-ASSY-IPB3)
PC Interlock switch
Thermistor
Solenoid Fan Motor

Operation panel
Figure 8.6 Overall Electrical Configuration
8-23
8.8.2 Description of Electrical Section
Head
The head is equipped with the PZT actuators for 508 nozzles. Eight heads are installed in the
printer.
The head is connected to the carriage board (HCB1) via 40-core cable.
Controller board (PCB-ASSY-IPB3)
The controller board controls the whole of this print engine, and allows the following
capabilities.
CPU: Adopts SH-3

Memory: Main memory (SDRAM), Flash memory (boot program, system program, test
patterns, engine parameters backup, and FPGA configuration data)
Host interface: Supports USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Print data processing: Uses FPGA-ATG and FPGA-RSM
Operation panel control: Operation panel interface function
FPGA-BTC: FPGA-BTC is an FPGA with capability of controlling peripheral access on
the IPB3 board, and of the XY servo controller. The configuration data
cannot be overwritten using CF card. Only starting from the on-board
configuration ROM is possible.
FPGA-ATG: FPGA-ATG is a FPGA with function to control USB interface and band
memory. The configuration data can be rewritten using CF card.
FPGA-RSM: FPGA-RSM is a FPGA with function of horizontal/vertical conversion and
image data masking. The configuration data can be rewritten using CF card.
Carriage board (PCB-ASSY-HCB1)
The carriage board controls the head and carriage, and allows the following function.
Receives image data from the IPB3 board, and transfers the data to the head.
Performs tickling and spitting to secure adequate head conditions.
Controls actuators and sensors on the carriage.
FPGA-PTG: FPGA-PTG is a FPGA with function to transfer data to the head, and to
control actuators/sensors/AD convertor on the carriage. The configuration
data can be rewritten using CF card.
Generates print head drive voltage (16 channels).
Drives print head heater.
8-24
Actuator board (PCB-ASSY-ACT1)
This board controls actuators and sensors in the printer, and allows the following functions.
Controls the carriage scan motor and media feed motor.

Controls the capping unit and wiping unit.
Control the suction fan, media drying fan, exhaust fan and other fans.
Controls motors and sensors in the ink delivery system.
Interfaces with the ink cartridge and subcartridge.
Interfaces with the TRC2 board.
Controls media heaters (the preheater, printheater, and afterheater).
Controls other motors and actuators.
FPGA-ABC1 is a FPGA with function to control devices on the ACT1 board. The
configuration data can be rewritten using CF card.
Triac board (PCB-ASSY-TRC2)
The triac board controls AC power to be supplied to media heaters, and has the following
functions.
Controls ON/OFF of the AC power supplied to each heater.

Issues a zero cross signal on AC power supply in printer side and heater side.
Ink board (PCB-ASSY-INK4)
The ink board connects ink cartridge and subcartridge. Each ink cartridge or subcartridge
requires one ink board. So, for eight colors, totally 16 ink boards are applied to the Printer.
Ink cartridge (PCB-ASSY-CCC3)
The ink cartridge has a board equipped with a memory device for retaining ink information.
(The board is physically the same as the board used for the subcartridge.)
Subcartridge (PCB-ASSY-CCC3)
The subcartridge includes a board equipped with memory for retaining ink information. (The
board is physically the same as that used for the ink cartridge.)
24VDC PSU
24VDC PSU is a power unit to supply 24VDC used to operate actuators. It includes circuits that
protect against excessive current and excessive voltage.
8-25
38VDC PSU
36VDC PSU is a power unit to supply DC power to operate logic circuits, and power to drive the
head and XY motor, as well as power used for logic circuit and actuators on the carriage. It
includes circuits that protect against excessive current and excessive voltage.
Operation panel
The operation panel is the sole control panel provided with the printer. The following describes
the main specifications:
LCD: 40 characters in 2 lines, with backlight

Input buttons: Up, Down, Right, Left, ONLINE, OK, CANCEL, MENU, and HEATER
LED: Online, Data, Error, Ink, and Roll
Interface: Serial type based on differential interface
Beeper: Separately-excited beeper
Image data path
The following diagram shows the image data path.
PCB-ASSY-IPB3
BM MASK
1.5GB Memory
32 16
PCB-ASSY-HCB1
USB ATG 8 RSM PTG Eight print

USB 16 16
PC M66590 heads
Figure 8.7 Image Data Path
(1) USB M66590

USB M66590 is a USB I/F controller device. It transfers image data to ATG via the bus
dedicated to DMA.
(2) FPGA-ATG
FPGA-ATG is a FPGA controls band memory. It has functions to transfer the image data
below:
- from M66590 to BM
- from BM to RSM
Only linear order processing is supported for image data transfer from PC.
8-26
(3) RSM
RSM is an FPGA responsible for horizontal/vertical conversion, masking, and adding white
data. It processes image data transferred from ATG, masks using data read from the mask
memory, and transfers the image data to PTG.
(4) PTG
PTG is an FPGA receiving image data sent from RSM, and transferring it to each head. It
has 16 pieces of input FIFO, one each for a row/heads. After reading data from FIFO, PTG
shifts the data in each head via independent circuit. The shift-in direction is different
between the row A and the row B of each head.
(5) Head
The head drives the actuator of each nozzle based on the shift-in image data.
8-27
Motors and solenoids
The following table lists motors and solenoids used for the printer.
Error
Name Type Voltage Driving board Control items Remarks
detection
Normal rotation,
Ink supply pump reverse rotation, Over current
DC motor 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1
motor 1 - 8 brake protection element
PWM control
Open air solenoid Over current
Solenoid 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1 ON/OFF
1-4 protection element
Capping unit Brake, UP/DOWN Over current
up/down motor PWM control protection element
Suction pump motor ON/OFF Over current
1-2 PWM control protection element
Normal rotation,
reverse rotation, Over current
Take-up motor DC motor 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1
brake, free protection element
PWM control
Normal rotation,
reverse rotation, Over current
Unrolling motor DC motor 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1
brake, free protection element
PWM control
Stepping Normal rotation, Over current
Wiping motor 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1
motor reverse rotation protection element
Normal rotation,
reverse rotation, Overcurrent
X motor DC motor 38V PCB-ASSY-ACT1
brake, free detection circuit
Software servo
Normal rotation,
reverse rotation, Overcurrent
Y motor DC motor 38V PCB-ASSY-ACT1
brake, free detection circuit
Software servo
Carriage up/down Stepping Normal rotation, Over current
24V PCB-ASSY-HCB1
motor motor reverse rotation protection element
GAP sensor Over current
Solenoid 24V PCB-ASSY-HCB1 ON/OFF
Solenoid protection element
8-28
Fans
The following table lists fans used for the printer.
Error
detection
Suction fan Sirocco 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Variable driving Lock detection
1-5 fan voltage via DA
converter
Media drying fan Axial fan 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Variable driving None Controlled
1 - 20 voltage via DA in units of
converter 4 en bloc
Exhaust fan 1 - 6 Sirocco 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1 ON/OFF None Controlled
fan in units of
6 en bloc
Electrical unit Axial fan 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Always ON None
cooling fan *1
PSU cooling fan Axial fan 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Always ON None
*2
Print head cooling Axial fan 24V PCB-ASSY-HCB1 Variable driving Over current
fan voltage via DA protection
converter element
*1: The IP-7900-00/01 requires two electrical unit cooling fans, and the IP-7900-02/03 requires one.
*2: The IP-7900-00/01 requires two PSU cooling fans, and the IP-7900-02/03 requires one.
Error Remark
Name Type Voltage Driving board Control items
detection s
Suction fan 1 - 4 Sirocco 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Variable driving Lock detection
fan voltage via DA
converter
Media drying fan Axial fan 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Variable driving None Controlled
1 - 14 voltage via DA in units of
converter 4 en bloc
Exhaust fan 1 - 4 Sirocco 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1 ON/OFF None Controlled
fan in units of
4 en bloc
Electrical unit Axial fan 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Always ON None
cooling fan*1
PSU cooling fan*2 Axial fan 24V PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Always ON None
Print head cooling Axial fan 24V PCB-ASSY-HCB1 Variable driving Over current
fan 1 - 3 voltage via DA protection
converter element
*1: The IP-7700-00/01 requires two electrical unit cooling fans, and the IP-7700-02/03 requires one.
*2: The IP-7700-00/01 requires two PSU cooling fans, and the IP-7700-02/03 requires one.
8-29
Heaters
The following table lists heaters used for the printer.
Error
detection
Preheater Aluminu AC PCB-ASSY-TRC2 Software PID control Thermistor 1 circuit
m foil Thermostat configuration
heater
Printheater Linear AC PCB-ASSY-TRC2 Software PID control Thermistor 3 circuits
heater Thermostat configuration
Afterheater Aluminu AC PCB-ASSY-TRC2 Software PID control Thermistor 3 circuits
m foil Thermostat configuration
heater
Head Chip 38V PCB-ASSY-HCB1 Software PID control Thermistor Included in
heater resistor Thermal fuse the head
Overheat
protection
8-30
Sensors
The following table lists sensors used for the printer.
Readout
Reading 1
Name Type 0 indication number at Remarks
component indication
disconnection
Ink cartridge Microprobe PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Yes No 1
detection 1 - 8 connector PIO-B
Subcartridge Microprobe PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Yes No 1
detection 1 - 8 connector PIO-B
Subcartridge full Reflective PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Intermediate Full 1 High level
sensor 1 - 8 photo sensor PIO-B value at dark
Subcartridge empty Reflective PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Intermediate End 1 High level
sensor 1 - 8 photo sensor PIO-B value at dark
Media slack sensor Discrete type PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Intermediate Slack 1 High level
photo sensor PIO-B value at dark
Media end sensor Discrete type PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Intermediate End 1 Low level at
photo sensor PIO-B value dark
Manual switch for Push switch *1 PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Unwind Stop 1
peel roller's reversal PIO-B
rotation
Manual switch for Push switch *1 PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Media feed Stop 1
peel roller's normal PIO-B
rotation
Main scroller wind Push switch *1 PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Take-up Stop 1
switch PIO-B
Main scroller feed Push switch *1 PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Media feed Stop 1
switch PIO-B
Take-up direction Rocker switch PCB-ASSY-ACT1 SW1 SW2 Logic 1
switch 1 PIO-B 0 0 ----
Take-up direction Locker switch PCB-ASSY-ACT1 1 0 Outward 1
switch 2 PIO-B 0 1 Inward
1 1 No
winding
Take-up media Discrete type PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Intermediate Upper limit 1 Low level at
slack upper limit photo sensor PIO-B value dark
sensor
Take-up media Discrete type PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Intermediate Lower limit 1 High level
slack lower limit photo sensor PIO-B value at dark
sensor
Ink supply pump Reflective PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Close Open 1 High level
sensor 1 - 8 photo sensor PIO-B at dark
Wiper position Leaf switch PCB-ASSY-ACT1 At home Not at home 1
sensor PIO-C position position
Capping unit sensor Leaf switch PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Lower Upper 1
PIO-C
Spittoon detection Leaf switch PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Yes No 1
sensor PIO-C
Home position Photo (For all printers except No Yes 1 High level
sensor interrupter the IP-7900-22/23) at dark
PCB-ASSY-ACT1
PIO-C
(for IP-7900-22/23)
PCB-ASSY-HCB1S
PTG
8-31
Readout
Reading 1
disconnection
Grip sensor Photo PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Close Open 1 High level
interrupter PIO-C at dark
Waste ink bottle Leaf switch PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Yes No 1
sensor PIO-C
Ink cover Photo PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Close Open 1 Low level at
sensor interrupter PIO-C dark
Subcartridge cover Photo PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Close Open 1 Low level at
sensor interrupter PIO-C dark
Internal fan PCB-ASSY-ACT1 Rotating Locked 1
element PIO-C
Suction fan lock
detection 1 - 5
Suction fan lock

detection 1 - 4
FFC connection By checking PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Yes No 1
detection GND FPGA-BTC
CN9 - CN12 connection on
HCB1
board
ACT1 board By checking PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Yes No 1
connection on
ACT1 board
TRC2 board By checking PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Yes No 1
connection on
TRC2 board
Zero cross Photocoupler PCB-ASSY-IPB3 At zero cross Not at zero 1
detection at printer on TRC2 board FPGA-BTC cross
power
Zero cross Photocoupler PCB-ASSY-IPB3 At zero cross Not at zero
detection at heater on TRC2 board FPGA-BTC cross
power
Operation panel Tact switch on PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Off On 1
power switch MCP3 board FPGA-BTC
Media discharge Reflective PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Low voltage: High voltage: 5V approx.
sensor photo sensor AD converter No reflective Reflective
object object
detected
Media feed sensor Reflective PCB-ASSY-IPB3 Low voltage: High voltage: 5V approx.
photo sensor AD converter No reflective Reflective
object object
detected
Edge sensor Reflective PCB-ASSY-HCB1 Low voltage: High voltage: 5V approx.
photo sensor AD converter No reflective Reflective
object object
detected
Carriage height Photo PCB-ASSY-HCB1 High carriage Low carriage 5V approx. Low level at
upper limit sensor interrupter FPGA-PTG: dark
Media thickness Height sensor PCB-ASSY-HCB1 Low voltage: High voltage: High voltage
sensor AD converter Reflective Reflective
object is far object
is near
8-32
Readout
Reading 1
disconnection
Linear encoder Reads linear PCB-ASSY-HCB1 1 Two
scale with FPGA-PTG outputs to A
optical sensor PCB-ASSY-IPB3 phase and
FPGA-BTC B phase
*1: The rocker switch is used with IP-7900-02/03 and IP-7700-02/03.
8-33
Thermistors
The following table lists thermistors used for the printer.
Readout
Reading
Name Type number at Remarks
component
disconnection
Environmental temperature Thermistor PCB-ASSY-IPB3
0.24V approx.
thermistor AD converter
Thermistor PCB-ASSY-IPB3
Preheater thermistor 0.24V approx.
AD converter
Afterheater thermistor Thermistor PCB-ASSY-IPB3
0.24V approx.
(capping unit side) AD converter
0.24V approx.
(center) AD converter
0.24V approx.
(wiping unit side) AD converter
Printheater (capping unit Thermistor PCB-ASSY-IPB3
0.24V approx.
side) AD converter
Printheater (center) 0.24V approx.
AD converter
Printheater (wiping unit side) 0.24V approx.
AD converter
Head PZT temperature Thermistor PCB-ASSY-HCB1
5V approx.
detection thermistor AD converter
Head driver IC temperature Thermistor PCB-ASSY-HCB1
5V approx.
detection thermistor AD converter
8-34
8.9 Engine Control Firmware

8.9.1 Function Block
The following block diagram shows USB/engine firmware functions.
Operation
Thermistor
panel
Operation Error monitoring Temperature

panel driver task correction task
USB I/F USB driver Print task

Setup task
Maintenance Meintenance
SIO driver
Mechanical Ink IC chip Sensor

control driver driver monitoring task
FLASH driver
FLASH Various actuators Ink IC chip Various sensors
Figure 8.8 Block Diagram of USB/Engine Firmware Functions
8-35
8.9.2 Performance Description
Description of operation: USB/engine firmware functions block

The USB/engine firmware runs on the IPB3 board to control each section of engine and
USB interface.
The following describes main function blocks of the USB/engine firmware.
Operation panel driver: Controls I/O of the LCD, LED, button and beeper on the
operation panel.
USB driver: Controls USB interface.
Mechanical control driver: Controls the printing performance of the mechanical system
and also controls various actuators to enable maintenance of
the ink system and control of the media heater.
Maintenance driver: Controls serial interface for the maintenance console.
Temperature correction task: Monitors the thermistor.
Sensor monitoring task: Monitors sensors.
Setup task: Allows various operations via the operation panel, and prints
various built-in patters.
FLASH driver: Reads from and writes to the flash memory.
Ink IC chip driver: Reads and writes from/to the IC chip included in the ink
cartridge.
Error monitoring task: Monitors sensors to check the anomalies of engine.
Print task: Controls the band memory and print data.
8-36
8.10 Power Supply Unit

This device uses two power supply units. The following explains 24VDC PSU, a power
supply outputting 24VDC, and 38VDC PSU, the other power supply outputting 38VDC.
8.10.1 Electric Specifications
AC input specifications
24VDC PSU 38VDC PSU
Rated input voltage 200-240VAC 200-240VAC

Input voltage range 180-260VAC 180-260VAC
Rated input frequency 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
Input frequency range 50/60Hz1Hz 50/60Hz1Hz
Number of phase Single Single
DC output specifications
IP-7900-00/01, IP-7700-00/01 IP-7900-02/03/22/23, IP-7700-02/03
DC24V PSU DC38V PSU DC24V PSU DC38V PSU
Output voltage 24VDC 38VDC 24VDC 38VDC

Rated current 25A 20.5A 12.5A 16.7A
Peak current 31A 40.2A 20A 55.5A
Adjusting range 21.6-27.0V 33.0-41.0V 21.6-28.8V 28.8-39.6V
8-37
8.10.2 Connector Specifications
AC input connectors
Pin No. 24VDC PSU 38VDC PSU
A1 NEWTRAL NEWTRAL
A2 NC NC
A3 LIVE LIVE
B1 NC NC
B2 NC NC
B3 NC NC
DC output connectors
Pin No. 24VDC PSU 38VDC PSU
A1 +24V +38V
A2 +24V +38V
A3 NC NC
A4 GND GND
A5 GND GND
B1 +38V +38V
B2 +38V +38V
B3 NC NC
B4 GND GND
B5 GND GND
8-38
AC input connectors
Pin No. DC24V PSU Pin No. DC38V PSU
1 LIVE FG FG
3 NEWTRAL L LIVE
5 FG N NEWTRAL
DC output connectors
Pin No. DC24V PSU Pin No. DC38V PSU
1

2
GND +38V
3

4
5

6
+24V GND
7

8
8-39
8.10.3 DC Power Supply Configuration
The printer is equipped with two power supply units with single output. The two power
supply units are connected to the printer power inlet via the printer power switch on the
printer's rear face.
Turning ON the printer power switch starts supply of AC power to the power supply units,
which outputs 24VDC and 38VDC respectively.
A green LED is provided on the front left of the power unit, enabling you to quickly check
whether the DC power has been output or not.
The above-mentioned 24VDC and 38VDC are first input to the ACT1 board, converted into
proper voltage, and then supplied to each unit. For details, see the power supply
schematic diagram and the table on the second page of the diagram.
Power Cable 24VDC

PSU
Printer power Printer power Actuator board
inlet switch (PCB-ASSY-ACT1)
38VDC
PSU
200-240VAC
8-40
The following table lists main DC power supplies on the boards and their destinations.
Note that even the same voltage supplied from the same board may be divided into two or
more lines. For details, see the appendix of power supply schematic diagram.
Board name DC power Connected to

IPB3 board 38V P5V generation, HCB1 board
5V Logic IC, 3.3V generation, 1.9V generation
3.3V Logic IC, FPGA I/O, 1.2V generation
1.9 V SH3 core
1.2V FPGA core
ACT1 board 38V P12V generation, P5V generation, P3.3V generation, P24VSF
generation (suction fan power supply), P24VMF generation
(media drying fan power supply), X motor, Y motor
24V Capping motor, suction pump motor, open air solenoid,
wiping motor, electrical unit cooling fan, PSU cooling fan,
exhaust fan, unrolling/take-up motors
12V Heater control circuit, interlock relay, XY motor driving circuit
5V Logic IC, sensors, P3.3V generation
3.3V Logic IC, FPGA I/O, P1.2V generation
1.2V FPGA core
HCB1 board 38V P5V generation, VDD2 generation, P12V generation, head
heater
VDD2 Head
24V Solenoid, carriadge up/down motor, head cooling fan
5V Logic IC, sensors, P3.3V generation, PREF generation
3.3V Logic IC, P1.2V generation, FPGA I/O
1.2V FPGA core
MCP3 board 5V Logic IC, LCD module, LCD backlight
3.3V Logic IC, CPLD
8-41
8.10.4 Upon Disconnection of Interlock
When the interlock on the printer side is disconnected, the printer blocks power output
using two relays on the ACT1 board. Power supply units output the voltage irrespective of
the interlock switch status. The following table shows units blocked from power supply. For
details, see the appendix of power supply schematic diagram.
Relay Power system Connected unit
38V line relay P36VAR Y motor

X motor
P36VCRG VDD2 (S508 head driving power supply)
Carriage up/down motor
Media thickness sensor solenoid
24V line relay P24VAR Capping unit up/down motor
Suction pump motor
Open air solenoid
Wiping motor
8-42
8.10.5 Power Output Voltage Variability
The power supply unit can be adjusted with an output voltage-variable volume.
The 24VDC power supply should be with the default setting at factory.
The 38VDC power supply is adjusted and factory-set to be 38V0.3V.
8.10.6 Power Supply Fan
Each power supply unit is equipped with a forced cooling fan. When the power is turned
ON from the operation panel, the fan starts rotation.
Two exhaust fans are also installed for the purpose of cooling the tray for electrical
components. The exhaust fans also start to run when the power is turned ON from the
operation panel.
The 38VDC PSU is equipped with a forced cooling fan. Regardless of the Printers power
ON/OFF operated from the operation panel, the fan always rotates when the printer power
switch is ON at the Printers rear face.
Besides, one exhaust fan is installed to cool the tray for electrical components. This fans
rotation is started by turning on the power with the operation panel.
8-43
8.10.7 Protection Circuit
The power supply units contain the following protection circuits.

IP-7900-00/01, IP-7700-00/01 IP-7900-02/03/20/21/22/23,
IP-7700-02 / 03
Protection circuit 24VDC PSU 38VDC PSU 24VDC PSU 38VDC PSU
Overcurrent Yes
protection function After shutdown, the power supply unit is automatically turned on.
Overvoltage Yes
protection function After shutdown, the power supply unit is turned on with the Printers power
supplied again as follows:
- The power switch at the Printers rear face is turned on; and
- Operation panels power switch is turned on.
Overheat protection Overheat protection cirsuit is incorporated. The overheat protection circuit
function functions and the power may be shut down at the situations below:
The power supply units forced cooling fan was stopped;
The electrical units forced cooling fan was stopped;
For the tray for the electrical components, air inlet or outlet was shut or
High temperature air flows into the Printer from the air inlet.
If the power output is shut down and the situation above is found, recover
the problem, and cool down the overheated unit. Then the output voltage is
supplied again with the rinters power supplied again as follows:
- The power switch at the Printers rear face is turned on; and
- Operation panels power switch is turned on.
8-44
8.11 Media Heater Section

8.11.1 Configuration
The media heater hardware consists of the following units.

Unit name Capability Remarks
Inputs heater control settings Display capabilities can be switched

Operation panel
Displays heater status using the heater button on the panel.
The heater control of this device is

Heater control
undertaken not by an independent CPU,
IPB3 board DA converter for detecting
but by the firmware running on the main
thermistor temperature
CPU (SH3).
TRC2 board interface.
ACT1 board
Thermistor interface
Only the preheater driving power is
supplied from the printer power side.
Driving power for other
heaters are supplied from the heater
power side.
The TRC2 board contains a fuse, and
overcurrent burns out the fuse.
Should
Controls ON/OFF of the AC
this occur, the TRC2 board should be
TRC2 board power current supplied to each
replaced because the fuse is not
heater.
replaceable.
On the TRC2 board is a LED lighting
up when each triac driving is turned
ON.
Checking the LED enables you to
locate the problem, whether it is on
the
AC side or on the control side.
A heater to warm up the
Preheater Symbol for pre: PRE
supply-side paper guide.
A heater to warm up the platen. It
is divided in three sections in the
Symbol for print: PRN
main scan direction, and each
Printheater The three heaters cannot be set to
section can control temperature
different temperatures independently.
independently in the HW
configuration.
A heater to warm up the
takeup-side paper guide.
This heater is separated into Symbol for post: AFT
Afterheater three units in the scanning The three heaters cannot be set to
direction, and each units different temperatures independently.
temperature is controlled
independently.
8-45
8.11.2 Block Diagram
TRC2 board
Preheater
Printer Relay Triac
power Fuse Thermostat
input
connector
Heater Thermistor
Fuse Relay Triac
power
input
connector Triac PRN heater (CAP)
Thermostat
Triac
Thermistor
Triac
PRN heater (CENTER)
Triac
Thermostat
Triac
Thermistor
PRN heater (WIPE)
Thermostat
Thermistor
Operation IPB3 ACT1 board AFT heater (CAP)
panel board Thermostat
Thermistor
AFT heater (CENTER)
Thermostat
Thermistor
AFT heater (WIPE)
Thermostat
Thermistor
8-46
Appendix
Appendix 1 shows the IP-7900 Printers connection diagram.

Appendix 1.1: IP-7900-00/01s connection diagram
Appendix 1.2: IP-7900-02/03/20/21s connection diagram
Appendix 2 shows the IP-7700 Printers connection diagram.

Appendix 2.2: IP-7700-02/03/20/21s connection diagram
Appendix 3 shows the electrical system diagram.

Appendix 3.1: IP-7900-00/01s and IP-7700-00/01s electrical system diagram
Appendix 3.2: IP-7900-02/03/20/21s and IP-7700-02/03/20/21s electrical system
diagram
Appendix 3.3: IP-7900-22/23s electrical system diagram
Appendix 4 contains additional instruction to replace print heads.
Appendix-1
Appendix 1 IP-7900 Wiring Diagram
Appendix 1.1 IP-7900-00/01 Wiring Diagram

Appendix 1.1.1 Power & InterLock Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-00/01)
Appendix-2
Appendix 1.1.2 Carriage & IPB3 I / F Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-00/01)
Appendix-3
Appendix 1.1.3 Blower & Fan Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-00/01)
Appendix-4
Appendix 1.1.4 Actuator Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-00/01)
Appendix-5
Appendix 1.1.5 TakeUp UNIT & Feed UNIT Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-00/01)
Appendix-6
Appendix 1.1.6 INK Cartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-00/01)
Appendix-7
Appendix 1.1.7 Subcartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-00/01)
Appendix-8
Appendix 1.2 IP-7900-02/03/20/21 Wiring Diagram

Appendix 1.2.1 Power & InterLock Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-9
Appendix 1.2.2 Carriage & IPB3 I / F Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-10
Appendix 1.2.3 Blower & Fan Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-11
Appendix 1.2.4 Actuator Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-12
Appendix 1.2.5 TakeUp UNIT & Feed UNIT Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-13
Appendix 1.2.6 INK Cartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-14
Appendix 1.2.7 Subcartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-15

Appendix 1.3.1 Input power & Heater Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-22/23)
Appendix-16
Appendix 1.3.2 Power & InterLock & Carriage Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-22/23)
Appendix-17
Appendix 1.3.3 Carriage & IPB3 I/F Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-22/23)
Appendix-18
Appendix-19
Appendix-20
Appendix-21
Appendix-22
Appendix 1.3.8 SubTank Cartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7900-22/23)
Appendix-23
Appendix 2 IP-7700 Wiring Diagram

Appendix 2.1.1 Power & InterLock Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-00/01)
Appendix-24
Appendix 2.1.2 Carriage & IPB3 I / F Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-00/01)
Appendix-25
Appendix-26
Appendix-27
Appendix-28
Appendix-29
Appendix 2.1.7 Subcartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-00/01)
Appendix-30

Appendix 2.2.1 Power & InterLock Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-31
Appendix 2.2.2 Carriage & IPB3 I / F Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-32
Appendix 2.2.3 Blower & Fan Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-33
Appendix 2.2.4 Actuator Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-34
Appendix 2.2.5 TakeUp UNIT & Feed UNIT Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-35
Appendix 2.2.6 INK Cartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-36
Appendix 2.2.7 Subcartridge Wiring Diagram (IP-7700-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-37
Appendix 3 Power Supply Schematic Diagram
Appendix 3.1 Power Supply Schematic Diagram (IP-7900-00/01, IP-7700-00/01)
Appendix-38
Appendix-39
Appendix 3.2 Power Supply Schematic Diagram (IP-7900-02/03/20/21, IP-7700-02/03/20/21)
Appendix-40
Appendix-41
Appendix 3.3 Power Supply Schematic Diagram (IP-7900-22/23)
Appendix-42
Appendix-43
Appendix 4 Instruction to Replace Print Heads
Appendix-44
Appendix 4
IP-7900/IP-7700
Instruction to Replace Print Heads
Ver2.6
Table of Contents
Required Items 1
Workflow Overview to Replace and Adjust Print Heads 2
Print Head Adjustment 3
1. Prior-to-Replacement Check 5
1. Print a CHECK NOZZLE pattern. 5

2. Print a CHECK MECHANICALS pattern. 6
3. Check remaining ink level. 7
4. Check the waste ink bottle. 7
2. Remove Covers 8
1. Turn the power OFF. 8

2. Remove the COVER(HV)FMR. 8
3. Remove the COVER(HV)FTR with two screws. 8
4. Remove the COVER(HV104)YRR with nine screws. 9
5. Remove the Cover (CarriageUpper) with four screws. 9
6. Remove the Cover (CarriageUnder) ASSY with four screws and three connectors.10
3. Replace Print Head 11
1. Check the color and position of the print head to be replaced. 11

2. Turn the power ON. 12
3. Enter the maintenance mode. 12
4. Select PH.MAIN> -> #REPLACE PRINTHEAD. 12
5. Remove the HEAD CABLE HV of the print head to be replaced. 13
6. Remove the ink tube of the print head to be replaced. 13
7. Remove the print head with four screws . 14
8. Install the new print head temporarily with four screws. 14
9. Install the ink tube. 14
10. Install the HEAD CABLE HV. 14
11. Determine the reference position of the print head. 15
4. Check the replaced print head 17
1. Print a CHECK NOZZLE pattern to check head conditions. 17

2. Check the CHECK NOZZLE printout. 18
5. Print Head Mechanical Adjustment - Tilt Adjustment 19
1. Remove the PIN(HeadHolder)S. 20

2. Install the head adjustment tools. 20
4. Check the CHECK MECHANICALS printout. 21
5. Check the print head tilt. 22
6. Adjust the print head tilt. 23
6. Print Head Mechanical Adjustment - X Alignment 24

2. Check the CHECK MECHANICALS printout. 26
3. Check the print head x alignment. 27
4. Adjust the print head x alignment. 29
5. Remove the head adjustment tools. 30
7. Install Covers 31
1. Turn the power OFF. 31

2. Install the Cover (CarriageUnder) ASSY with four screws and three connectors. 31
3. Install the Cover (CarriageUpper) with four screws. 32
4. Install the COVER(HV104)YRR with nine screws. 32
5. Install the COVER(HV)FTR with two screws. 33
6. Install the COVER(HV)FMR. 33
8. Head Position Adjustment 34

2. Print a ADJUST PH POS pattern. 35
3. Check the ADJUST PH POS pattern. 36
4. Input the correction value. 36
9. Head Right and Left Adjustment 37
1. Print a ADJUST PH R/L pattern. 38

2. Check the ADJUST PH R/L printout. 38
10. Bidirectional Print Position Adjustment 40
1. Check the firmware version. 42

2. Check IMAGE IMPROVE setting. 42
3. Check the print mode. 42
4. Print a BIDIRECTION x pattern. 43
5. Check the BIDIRECTION x printout. 44
11. Final Confirmation 46
1. Print TEST PRINTS ALL. 46

2. Print the user's data. 46
Memo 47
Required Items
1. Print head
INKJET-HEAD-S508 (U00112458300) Prepare necessary amount.
2. Print head adjustment JIG
BOX(lever) Lever(Adjust) PIN(AdjustHEAD)
PIN(HeadHolder)L PIN(HeadHolder)S SPRING(HEADAdjust)
Plate(Adjust)
Apply the Plate(Adjust) only on the situation below:

- Though you set a PIN(AdjustHead), its tapered
part does not touch the head, which disables
the adjustment operation.
Otherwise, it is rarely used.
3. Consumables
To prime the ink system, you are recommended to take ink packs below with you.
Ink packs
- Its color must be the same as the one of the position whose print heads are replaced; and
- Its remaining amount must be 20% or more of the initial quantity.
4. Required tools
- Phillips screwdriver 2 x 250mm

- Stubby screwdriver 2
- Magnifier with scale (20x)
TIP
You are recommended to adjust yellow head with blue LED light.
-1-
Workflow Overview to
Replace and Adjust Print Heads
(Required or roughly
estimated time)
Prior-to-Replacement Check 10 minutes
Check the printer condition before replacing the print head.
Remove Covers 20 minutes
Prepare to access print heads.
Remove Print Head 10 minutes
Remove the print head to be replaced.
Install Print Head 15 minutes
Replace the print head with a new one.
Print Head Tilt Alignment 30 minutes
Adjust the print head tilt alignment.
Print Head X Alignment 30 minutes
Adjust the print head x alignment.
Install Covers 20 minutes
Install the previously removed covers.
Print Head Position Adjustment 20 minutes
Adjust the print head's ink spotting position based on the one of the K print head.
Print Head Right and Left Adjustment 20 minutes
Correct the ink spotting positions fired from 2-row nozzles.
Print Head Bidirectional Print Position Adjustment 30 minutes
Correct ink spotting positions fired from the print head sliding rightward and leftward.
Final Confirmation 20 minutes
Print the customer's data to confirm that the problem has been solved.
Totally 3 hours and 45 minutes
-2-
Print Head Adjustment
Print head is adjusted to correct its ink spotting position.

To ensure the printer's image quality, the ejected ink must precisely drop on the position designated.
Print Head Adjustment Workflow
Print head tilt Print head x Right and left Bidirectional

alignment alignment Head Position
adjustment print position
Print head position is Ink ejecting timing is corrected from the

mechanically adjusted. operation panel.
- Print head tilt alignment
- Print head x alignment (back and forth)
- Print head position adjustment
Based on the K print head's ink spotting position, adjust each print head's ink firing timing.
Correct the ink firing timing so that the ink spotting

position aligns with the K ink spotting position.
-3-
- Print head right and left adjustment
Correct the ink firing timing from 2-row nozzles.
Left line Right line
Left line Right line Left line Right line Left line Right line
Delay the right line's ink firing timing, so that it aligns with
the left line's timing.
- Print head bidirectional print position adjustment
Match the ink spotting positions between the rightward and leftward printing.
Leftward Rightward Leftward Rightward
Adjust the leftward ink firing timing, so

that the ink spotting positions match
-4-
1 Prior-to-Replacement Check
Before and after the print head replacement, plot a TEST PRINT pattern with the printer.
By comparing the two patterns, you can check the printer's condition before and after the replacement.
1. Print a CHECK NOZZLE pattern.
Enter the maintenance mode.
PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
^ INK MEDIA REG V

< MEDIA M.ADV >
MAINTENANCE MODE
PASSWORD?
^ INK MEDIA REG V

< MEDIA M.ADV >
^ PRINTER SETUP V
< ADJUST HEATER >
# TEST PRINTS
> NOZZLE PRINT
# TEST PRINTS
> CHECK NOZZLE
# TEST PRINTS
> OK?
Media
output
direction
-5-
2. Print a CHECK MECHANICALS pattern.
# TEST PRINTS
> CHECK NOZZLE
# TEST PRINTS
> CHECK MECHANICALS
# TEST PRINTS
> OK?
Media
output
direction
After printing, press the ONLINE button to return to PRINTER READY.
PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
-6-
3. Check remaining ink level.
Check the ink pack contains 20% or more of the initial ink quantity.
If the ink level is less than 20%, replace it with a new one.
PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
Press the MENU button and following messages appear one after another.
# MEDIA USED
> 0000000m
Y1 INK LEVEL xxx

Lm2 INK LEVEL xxx
C3 INK LEVEL xxx

GY4 INK LEVEL xxx
K5 INK LEVEL xxx

Lc6 INK LEVEL xxx
M7 INK LEVEL xxx

Lg8 INK LEVEL xxx
# MEDIA USED
> 0000000m
PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
4. Check the waste ink bottle.
Check that the waste ink is not full.

If it is FULL, replace it with an empty waste ink bottle.
-7-
2 Remove Covers
1. Turn the power OFF.
PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
With pressing CANCEL button, press down the Power switch for a few seconds.
SHUTTING DOWN
PLEASE WAIT
2. Remove the COVER(HV)FMR.
COVER(HV)FMR
Pull the tab down, and slide

COVER(HV)FMR to the right.
3. Remove the COVER(HV)FTR with two screws.
COVER(HV)FTR
Remove the two screws

and pull it to your side.
-8-
4. Remove the COVER(HV104)YRR with nine screws.
COVER(HV104)YRR
5. Remove the Cover (CarriageUpper) with four screws.
-9-
6. Remove the Cover (CarriageUnder) ASSY with four screws and three connectors.
- 10 -
3 Replace Print Head
The operation below is performed with covers removed.

So be careful not to apply any stress on the cables nor damage them.
1. Check the color and position of the print head to be replaced.
8-color mode
Media
output
direction
Lg M Lc K Gy C Lm Y
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4-color mode
Media
output
direction
Y M C K K C M Y
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
- 11 -
2. Turn the power ON.
PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
3. Enter the maintenance mode.
PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
^ INK MEDIA REG V

< MEDIA M.ADV >
MAINTENANCE MODE
PASSWORD?
^ INK MEDIA REG V

< MEDIA M.ADV >
4. Select PH.MAIN> -> #REPLACE PRINTHEAD.
^ INK MEDIA REG V

< MEDIA M.ADV >
^ REWIND FORM FEED V

< PH.REC PH MAIN >
# PH MAIN
# CAP CLEANING
# REPLACE PRINTHEAD
>
# REPLACE PH
* OK?
CARRIAGE MOVING
PLEASE WAIT
- 12 -
5. Remove the HEAD CABLE HV of the print head to be replaced.
6. Remove the ink tube of the print head to be replaced.
TIP
When removing the tube, remaining ink may come out. Be
sure to protect the tube with cleaning paper.
- 13 -
7. Remove the print head with four screws .
Media
advance
direction
8. Install the new print head temporarily with four screws.
Media
advance
direction
9. Install the ink tube.
5.0 - 5.5 mm
Caution
Vertically connect the ink tube top to the tube socket shown in the photos above. Maintaining the
tops perpendicular position, rotate the ink tube top. Adjust the distance below to be 5.0 - 5.5
mm. Rotate the tip carefully so that the distance is not less than 5 mm.
From: Ink tube tops lowermost position
To: Tube socket bases uppermost position
10. Install the HEAD CABLE HV.
- 14 -
11. Determine the reference position of the print head.
To determine the position of the print head, apply two types of head adjustment jig: PIN(HeadHolder)L
and PIN(HeadHolder)S.
At the new print heads rear part, insert the PIN(HeadHolder)L into the fixing hole on the head base.
Then insert the PIN(HeadHolder)S into the fixing hole at the print heads front part.
Then tighten the loosen screws.
When tightening, be sure to pull the print head close enough to PIN(HeadHolder)S.
Print Head
Pull the print head enough

to touch the PIN(HeadHolder)S.
PIN(HeadHolder)S
PIN(HeadHolder)S PIN(HeadHolder)L
- 15 -
# REPLACE PH
* BOTTLE OK?
# SELECT REP-PH TUBE

*87654321
Display the replaced print head number only.
Press the Up or Down button to display or not display the number.
Press the Right or Left button to select a number.
# SELECT REP-PH TUBE

*8 5
# REPLACE PH XXXXXXXX
* BOTTLE OK?
# REPLACE PH XXXXXXXX
* EXECUTING ***
CLEANING XXXXXXXX
* BOTTLE OK?
CLEANING XXXXXXXX
PLEASE WAIT ***
INITIALIZING
PLEASE WAIT
PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
- 16 -
4 Check the replaced print head
The operation below is performed with the covers removed.

So be careful not to apply any stress on the cables nor damage them.
1. Print a CHECK NOZZLE pattern to check head conditions.
Enter the maintenance mode.
PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
^ INK MEDIA REG V

< MEDIA M.ADV >
MAINTENANCE MODE
PASSWORD?
^ INK MEDIA REG V

< MEDIA M.ADV >
^ PRINTER SETUP V
< ADJUST HEATER >
# TEST PRINTS
> NOZZLE PRINT
# TEST PRINTS
> CHECK NOZZLE
# TEST PRINTS
> OK?
Media
output
direction
- 17 -
2. Check the CHECK NOZZLE printout.
Media
output
direction
OK(One missing dot is acceptable) NO
If the result is NO, try the following steps.
STEP 1: Perform the periodical maintenance, and try #PH RECOVERY -> STRONG. See the User's Guide .
STEP 2: Check that the ink tube has been installed correctly, then try 3-3 (Maintenance mode),
3-4 (REPLACE print head), and 3-12 (Turn power on).
STEP 3: If the problem persists, replace the print head with another one. See 3 (Replace Print Head).
- 18 -
5 Print Head Mechanical Adjustment - Tilt Adjustment
If the print head tilt is not adjusted properly, a misalignment will appear on the overlapping part of
the first and second prints, and a straight line may get jagged.
To prevent these problems, align the print head tilt.
Third print
Misalignment
Media
output
Second print
Misalignment direction
First print
Third print
Media
output
Second print
direction
First print
- 19 -
1. Remove the PIN(HeadHolder)S.
2. Install the head adjustment tools.
For the fine adjustment of print head, apply BOX(lever), Lever(Adjust), PIN(AdjustHEAD), and
SPRING(HEADAdjust).
Note that the tools' installation method for the front-side heads, 2, 4, 6, and 8 are different
from the one of the rear-side heads, 1, 3, 5, and 7.
For front-side heads
For rear-side heads
Apply the Plate(Adjust) only on the situation below:

- Though you set a PIN(AdjustHead), its tapered
part does not touch the head, which disables
the adjustment operation.
Otherwise, it is rarely used.
- 20 -
# TEST PRINTS
> CHECK NOZZLE
# TEST PRINTS
> CHECK MECHANICALS
# TEST PRINTS
* OK?

Media

output

direction

4. Check the CHECK MECHANICALS printout.
Check the printout with a magnifier.

Print totally three check patterns.
Then apply the center pattern for checking.
Diagnostic pattern
Media
output
direction
Left Center Right
Print head x alignment

diagnostic pattern Print head tilt alignment
- 21 -
5. Check the print head tilt.
The figure below shows the positional relationship between the print heads and diagnostic pattern.
8-color mode

Media

output

direction

7 5 3 1
Pattern for Lg M Lc K Gy C Lm Y
rear-side print 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 6 4 2
Pattern for
front-side print heads
Check the pattern referring to the figures shown below.
For each print head, the head tilt alignment check pattern is printed three times.
Third print
Media
output
direction
Second print
First print
NO OK
- 22 -
6. Adjust the print head tilt.
Loosen the four screws fixing the print head, and adjust the print head tilt.
Media
output
direction
Rear-side print head

Front-side print head
PIN(AdjustHEAD)
Rear-side
Back-sideprint
headhead
Media
output
direction


Media
output
direction
After the adjustment, tighten the four screws with pressing the print head to the installed PIN(AdjustHEAD).
Print a CHECK MECHANICALS pattern and check the head tilt alignment.
Repeat the procedure above until no problem is found with the pattern printed.
- 23 -
6 Print Head Mechanical Adjustment - X Alignment
If x alignment is not adjusted properly, each color's print is misaligned.

To prevent this problem, adjust the print head x alignment.
Media
output
Misalignment direction
Media
output
direction
Second print
Media
output
direction
Misalignment
First print
Second print
Media
output
direction
First print
- 24 -
Workflow overview for print head x alignment
(a) K (5) is a reference position.
(b) Adjust Gy (4) head's x alignment based on the K (5).
Adjust Gy (4) carefully.

If it is not aligned correctly based
on the K (5), the front-side print
heads, Lm (2), Lc (6), and Lg (8)
are all misaligned.
(c) Align the Lm (2), Lc (6), and Lg (8) with the same line as Gy (4) position.
(d) Y (1), C (3) and M (7) should be in the same line of K (5).
- 25 -
# TEST PRINTS
> CHECK MECHANICALS
# TEST PRINTS
* OK?

Media

output

direction

2. Check the CHECK MECHANICALS printout.
Check the printout with a magnifier.

Print totally three check patterns.
Then apply the center pattern for checking.
Diagnostic pattern

Media

output

direction

Left Center Right
Print head x alignment Print head tilt
- 26 -
3. Check the print head x alignment.
The figure below shows the positional relationship between the print heads and diagnostic pattern.
8-color mode
Pattern for
rear-side print head
5 7 5 3 5 1 5

Media

output
direction

4 8 4 6 4 2 4
Lg M Lc K Gy C Lm Y
Pattern for
front-side print 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
The figure below shows three parts A, B, and C to be checked:
Part A Based on the K (5) image's bottom line, check that the bottom lines of the rear-side
heads Y (1), C (3), and M (7) images are on the same line.
Part B Based on the K (5) image's bottom line, check that the K (5) image's bottom line and
the front-side head Gy (4) image's top line are on the same line.
Part C Based on the Gy (4) image's top line, check that the front-side heads Lm (2), Lc (6),
and Lg (8) image's top lines are on the same line of Gy (4).
OK
C
A -> Y (1), C (3), and M (7) images' bottom lines are on the same line as the one of K
(5).
B -> Gy (4) image's top line is on the same as of K (5) image's bottom line.
C -> Lm (2), Lc (6), and Lg (8) image's bottom lines are on the same line as the one of
Gy (4).
- 27 -
A
A -> The Y (1), C (3), and M (7) images' bottom lines are misaligned with the one of K
(5). However they are all printed in the upper side of the K (5) bottom line, or all
in the lower side. The side is the same as the one shown in the part C.
OK
B -> The Gy (4) image's top line is misaligned, which is printed in the lower or upper
side of K (5) image's bottom line. The misalignment value must be within 50 m.
C -> The Lm (2), Lc (6), and Lg (8) images' bottom lines are misaligned with the one
of Gy (4). However they are all printed in the upper side of the Gy (4) bottom line,
or all in the lower side. The side is the same as the one shown in the part A.
Each misalignment value must be within 50 m.
BAD
A -> Some of the Y (1), C (3) and M (7) images' bottom lines are printed in the K (5)
bottom line's upper side, and the others in the lower side.
B
BAD
The misaligned lines' side on the part A is different from the one on the part C.
BAD
C
C -> One misalignment value is more than 50 m. The figure shows that, with Lm (2)
image, misalignment value exceeds 50 m against the Gy (4) image's bottom
line.
- 28 -
4. Adjust the print head x alignment.
For adjustment, loosen the four screws fixing each print head.
Media
output
direction

PIN(AdjustHEAD)
for head x alignment
Rear-side
Back-side
print
head
head


After adjustment, tighten the four screws with pressing the print head to the installed PIN(AdjustHEAD).
Again print a CHECK MECHANICALS pattern to ensure the proper adjustment.
Repeat the procedure above until no problem is found with the diagnostic pattern.
- 29 -
5. Remove the head adjustment tools.
Remove the five tools: BOX(lever), Lever(Adjust), PIN(AdjustHEAD),

SPRING(HEADAdjust), and PIN(HeadHolder)L.

- 30 -
7 Install Covers
1. Turn the power OFF.
# TEST PRINTS
> CHECK MECHANICALS
PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
Hold the CANCEL button and press the Power switch.
SHUTTING DOWN
PLEASE WAIT
2. Install the Cover (CarriageUnder) ASSY with four screws and three connectors.
- 31 -
3. Install the Cover (CarriageUpper) with four screws.
4. Install the COVER(HV104)YRR with nine screws.
COVER(HV104)YRR
- 32 -
5. Install the COVER(HV)FTR with two screws.
COVER(HV)FTR
Insert deeply and tighten the

screws.
6. Install the COVER(HV)FMR.
COVER(HV)FMR
Slide the COVER(HV)FMR to left.
- 33 -
8 Head Position Adjustment
To prevent the color misalignment in the subscanning direction, adjust the print head position.
Correct the ink firing timing of each head based on the K print head.
Adjust the firing timing to be aligned with the one of K.
Media
output
direction
The firing timing of K and C is not aligned.
Media
output
direction
After printing K, C firing timing is delayed.
- 34 -
PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
2. Print a ADJUST PH POS pattern.
^ INK MEDIA REG V

< MEDIA M.ADV >
^ PRINTER SETUP V
< ADJUST HEATER >
# TEST PRINTS
> CHECK NOZZLE
# TEST PRINTS
* CHECK NOZZLE
# TEST PRINTS
> ADJUST PH POS
# TEST PRINTS
* OK?
# TEST PRINTS
* EXECUTING
Media
output
direction
- 35 -
3. Check the ADJUST PH POS pattern.
By checking the ADJUST PH POS pattern, identify the print head's line most properly aligning with the basic
K (5)'s line. Then input the pattern's value as a correction value.
Media
output
direction
Identify the position most properly

aligned with K (5). Then input the
position's correction value. For example,
C (3) head is misaligned at the value -
20. However, at +2 the lines match.
Therefore, in this case, the correction
value is +2.
4. Input the correction value.
# TEST PRINTS
> ADJUST PH POS
# PH TO PH VAL
# Y1 > -01
# PH TO PH VAL
# Y1 > -01
Press the Up or Down button to select color to be set and press the OK button.
# PH TO PH VAL
# C3 * -01
Press the Up or Down button to select values.
Press the Right or Left button to move a cursor.
# PH TO PH VAL
# C3 * +02
Press the Left button to go back to color selection.
- 36 -
9 Head Right and Left Adjustment
A print head includes right and left nozzle lines. If the two lines' ink spotting positions are
misaligned, one line is printed as two lines.
The head right and left adjustment solves this problem.
Correct the timing of the ink fired from two nozzle lines.
Left line Right line
Left line Right line Left line Right line Left line Right line
Delay the firing timing of Right line so that it aligns with the one of Left line.
Media
output
direction
The timing of Left and Right lines does not much.
Media
output
direction
After printing Left line, delay the firing timing of Right line
and print the Right line.
- 37 -
1. Print a ADJUST PH R/L pattern.
# PH TO PH VAL
# C3 >+02
# TEST PRINTS
> CHECK NOZZLE
# TEST PRINTS
> ADJUST PH R/L
# TEST PRINTS
* OK?
# TEST PRINTS
* EXECUTING
Media
output
direction
2. Check the ADJUST PH R/L printout.
By checking the ADJUST PH R/L pattern, for each print head identify the two lines most properly aligning
into one line. Then input the pattern's value as a correction value.
Media
output
direction
The correction value for each print

head is the value with which two lines
are most properly aligned.
For example for C (3) head, at the
value -22 two lines are misaligned,
while at +2 two lines show one line.
- 38 -
# TEST PRINTS
> ADJUST PH R/L
# PH R/L ADJ VAL

# Y1 > +00
# PH R/L ADJ VAL

# Y1 > +00
# PH R/L ADJ VAL

# C3 > +00
Press the Up or Down button to select values.
# PH R/L ADJ VAL

# C3 * +02
For the different color print head, repeat the procedure above.
To select colors, press the Left button.
To complete adjustment, press the ONLINE button.
- 39 -
10 Bidirectional Print Position Adjustment
Bidirectional print position adjustment solves the problem that the ink spotting positions misalign
between the rightward and leftward prints.
Align the print positions at rightward and leftward prints.
Leftward Rightward Leftward Rightward
Adjust the leftward ink firing timing so that the leftward ink spotting
positions align with the rightward positions.
Rightward Leftward
Media
output
direction
The firing timing is not aligned.
Rightward Leftward
Media
output
direction
The firing timing is aligned.
- 40 -
(For the IP-7900-22/23)
- Perform AUTO BIDIR ADJUST.
Bidirectional print position adjustment is required for all the preset media.
See the Advanced Operation Guide for details on how to execute AUTO BIDIR ADJUST.
(For the other printers)

- Perform the procedure below.
Bidirectional print position adjustment is required for all the preset media.
Its adjustment pattern varies depending on the
IMAGE IMPROVE and PRINT MODE which a user has already specified.
With the firmware version 2.04 or later, the IMAGE IMPROVE settings were enhanced to:
- LOW
- MEDIUM
- HIGH, FINE GRAIN
- HIGH, LESS SPRAY
Be sure to specify a value to BIDIRECTION1 to activate HIGH, LESS SPRAY.
Lower than firmware version 2.04

IMAGE IMPROVE
#PRINT MODE
ON
NORMAL 1
NORMAL 2
BIDIRECTION2
QUALITY
DENSITY 2
DRAFT 1 BIDIRECTION3
FINE DRAFT BIDIRECTION4
Firmware version 2.04 or higher

IMAGE IMPROVE
#PRINT MODE
LOW MEDIUM HIGH, FINE GRAIN HIGH, LESS SPRAY
NORMAL 1
NORMAL 2
BIDIRECTION2 BIDIRECTION1
QUALITY
DENSITY 2
DRAFT 1 BIDIRECTION3
FINE DRAFT BIDIRECTION4
- 41 -
1. Check the firmware version.
PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
^ INK MEDIA REG V

< MEDIA M.ADV >
^ PRINTER SETUP V
< ADJUST HEATER >
Press the Down button for nine times.
# PRINTER FW VER
* 2.04_00 Check the firmware version.
2. Check IMAGE IMPROVE setting.
PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
^ INK MEDIA REG V

< MEDIA M.ADV >
# SELECT MEDIA
>02 : XXXXXXXXXX *
12 times
# IMAGE IMPROVE
> 02 : LOW Check IMAGE IMPROVE setting.
3. Check the print mode.
Ask the following to the user:

- Print mode;
- IMAGE IMPROVE settings for all the preset media; and
- Version of the firmware installed in the printer.
Apply the result in the previous page and operate the corresponding BIDIRECTION adjustment.
- 42 -
4. Print a BIDIRECTION x pattern.
PRINTER READY
ROLL : 1626/PAPER
^ INK MEDIA REG V

< MEDIA M.ADV >
^ PRINTER SETUP V
< ADJUST HEATER >
# TEST PRINTS
> CHECK NOZZLE
# TEST PRINTS
* CHECK NOZZLE
four times -> BIDIRECTION1

Press the Down button. five times -> BIDIRECTION2
six times -> BIDIRECTION3
seven times -> BIDIRECTION4
# TEST PRINTS
* BIDIRECTION 1
# TEST PRINTS
* OK?
# TEST PRINTS
* EXECUTING

Media
BIDIRECTION Pattern Right
output

direction

BIDIRECTION Pattern Left
- 43 -
5. Check the BIDIRECTION x printout.
On the BIDIRECTION x pattern, for each print head identify two lines most properly aligning
into one line. Then input the value of the pattern.
Input BIDIRECTION PATTERN L at #SET BIDIR MEDIA X L.
Input BIDIRECTION PATTERN R at #SET BIDIR MEDIA X R.
BIDIRECTION Pattern Right

Media

output

direction
BIDIRECTION Pattern Left
Input the correction value with which

two lines are most properly aligned.
For instance, for C (3) print head, at
value -22 lines are misaligned, while at
+2 the lines are aligned into one.
Therefore input +2 as a correction
value.
- 44 -
# TEST PRINTS
* BIDIRECTION 1
three times -> BIDIRECTION1 L

Press the Down button. four times -> BIDIRECTION1 R
five times -> BIDIRECTION2 L
six times -> BIDIRECTION2 R
seven times -> BIDIRECTION3 L
eight times -> BIDIRECTION3 R
nine times -> BIDIRECTION4 L
ten times -> BIDIRECTION4 R
# BIDIR ADV 1 L Glossy

# Y1 > +00

# Y1 > +00

# Y1 * +00
Press the Up or Down button to select numbers.

# Y1 * +00
Repeat the procedure above for other colors, and also adjust #BIDIR ADV 1R.
Press the Left and Down buttons to switch to #BIDIR ADV 1R.
To complete adjustment, press the ONLINE button.
- 45 -
11 Final Confirmation
When all the adjustment finishes, print TEST PRINTS ALL and confirm that no problem is found.
Then print and check the user's data.
1. Print TEST PRINTS ALL.
^ INK MEDIA REG V

< MEDIA M.ADV >
^ PRINTER SETUP V
< ADJUST HEATER >
# TEST PRINTS
> CHECK NOZZLE
# TEST PRINTS
* CHECK NOZZLE
# TEST PRINTS
* TEST PRINTS ALL
# TEST PRINTS
* OK?
# TEST PRINTS
* EXECUTING
If any adjustment is inappropriate, return to the procedure to adjust it again.
2. Print the user's data.
Ask the user to print the user's data and check that everything is OK.
- 46 -
Memo
- 47 -

IP-7900 - IP-7700 Seiko Colorpainter Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

IP-7900 - IP-7700 Seiko Colorpainter Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

OKI Data Infotech Corporation CONFIDENTIAL

U00117682700 January 2010

Copyright 2015 OKI Data Infotech Corporation.

Chapter 1 Overview of Maintenance Work Procedure

Chapter 2 Periodic Maintenance

Chapter 3 Operations and Functions of Maintenance Mode Menu

Chapter 4 Troubleshooting (General)

Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Engine and USB Controller Sections)

5.4 Warning Messages ........................................................................... 5-26

5.5.30 System Error 203X: Life-limited Part Replacement ........................................ 5-67

Chapter 6 Parts Replacement (Disassembly/Reassembly)

6.3.16 COVER(HV104)YRL ...................................................................................... 6-38

6.7.4 SENSOR(THICKNESS)MAINTENANCE ASSY and

6.12.2 IP-7900: REAR PG(104)-ASSY / IP-7700: REAR PG(74)-ASSY ................ 6-205

7.11.2 Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 7-35

Chapter 8 Performance Description

8.6 Head driving principle ....................................................................... 8-15

Appendix 1 IP-7900 Wiring Diagram ............................................................. A-2

Appendix 2 IP-7700 Wiring Diagram ........................................................... A-24

Appendix 3 Power Supply Schematic Diagram ........................................... A-38

Chapter 1 Overview of Maintenance Work

1.1 Overview of Maintenance Work Procedure

Check and clean parts. Conduct troubleshooting

1.2 Required Tools

Table 1-1 Required Tool List (1/2)

Name Q'ty Remarks

Table 1-2 Required Tool List (2/2)

Name Q'ty Remarks

1.3 External View of Device and Name of Each Part

1.3.1 Device and Name of Each Part (IP-7900-00/01)

(9) (8) (10)

(1) Operation panel (9) Caster

Figure 1.1 Printer Front View (IP-7900-00/01)

(17) (18) (19) (20) (21)

(17) USB connector (23) Take-up reel switch

Figure 1.2 Printer Rear View (IP-7900-00/01)

1.3.2 Device and Name of Each Part (IP-7900-02/03/20/21/22/23)

(1) Operation panel (9) Caster

Figure 1.3 Printer Front View (IP-7900-02/03/20/21/22/23)

(17) (18) (19) (20) (21)

(17) USB connector (22) Subcartridge cover

Figure 1.4 Printer Rear View (IP-7900-02/0320/21/22/23)

1.3.3 Device and Name of Each Part (IP-7700-00/01)

(1) Operation panel (8) Capping cover

Figure 1.5 Printer Front View (IP-7700-00/01)

(18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24)

(15) Pressure control knob (20) USB connector

Figure 1.6 Printer Rear View (IP-7700-00/01)

1.3.4 Device and Name of Each Part (IP-7700-02/03/20/21)

(1) Operation panel (9) Wiping cover

Figure 1.7 Printer Front View (IP-7700-02/03-02/03/20/21)

(20) (17) (18) (16)

(16) Printer power inlet (22) Media advance/rewind switch

Figure 1.8 Printer Rear View (IP-7700-02/03-02/03/20/21)

1.4 Maintenance Space

Vertical: 2200 (unit: mm)

Figure 1.9 Maintenance Space

Chapter 2 Periodic Maintenance

2.1 Daily Maintenance

2.3 After Todays Operation

2.4 Engine Firmware Variation

The engine firmware must match the Printers model.

Printers model Proper firmware version Description